Autodesk Auto CAD LT 2012 Command Reference Ref Enu V2

User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD LT - 2012 - Command Reference Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1804

DownloadAutodesk Auto CAD LT - 2012 Command Reference Command-ref Enu V2
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
AutoCAD LT 2012

Command Reference

February 2011

©

2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner,
Backdraft, Beast, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion,
Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit,
DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel,
GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, Illuminate Labs AB (design/logo), ImageModeler,
iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LiquidLight, LiquidLight (design/logo), Lustre, MatchMover,
Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow Plastics Insight, Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Moondust, MotionBuilder,
Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), MPX, MPX (design/logo), Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Opticore,
Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto,
Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer, Reveal, Revit, RiverCAD, Robot, Showcase, Show Me, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StormNET, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, U-Vis,
ViewCube, Visual, Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, WaterNetworks, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 McInnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1

3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Tuning Dialog Box .
Performance Tuner Log . . . . . .
-3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.3
.3
.5
.6
.6

A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ADCNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ADDSELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ANNORESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ANNOUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

iii

ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box . . . .
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box . . .
Archive - Set Password Dialog Box . .
-ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- A R R AY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAYCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAYEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab .
ARRAYPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAYPOLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAYRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . .
-ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . .
-ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . .
-ATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTIPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOCOMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOPUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Publish Options Dialog Box . . .

Chapter 3

B

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 30
. 31
. 35
. 38
. 39
. 40
. 43
. 44
. 47
. 48
. 51
. 53
. 57
. 60
. 62
. 63
. 66
. 67
. 67
. 71
. 74
. 75
. 76
. 77
. 81
. 81
. 83
. 84
. 85
. 86
. 87
. 88
. 89

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

BACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
BACTIONBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
BACTIONSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
BACTIONTOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
BASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
BATTORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

iv | Contents

Attribute Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BAUTHORPALETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
BCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
BCONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BCYCLEORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Edit Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
-BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
BESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Block Editor Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
BGRIPSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
BLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
BLOOKUPTABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Property Lookup Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
-BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
-BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
BPARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
B S AV E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 4
BSAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Save Block As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
BTABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Block Properties Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
BTESTBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
BVHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
BVSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
BVSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Visibility States Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
New Visibility State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
-BVSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Contents | v

Chapter 4

C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Understand Syntax of Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Format Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Format Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Use Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Use System Variables in Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Convert Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Use Standard Numeric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Calculate a Vector from Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Calculate the Length of a Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Obtain a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Obtain the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Convert Points Between UCS and WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Calculate a Point on a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rotate a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Obtain an Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Calculate a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Obtain a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Obtain an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Calculate a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Use Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CHSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
CLASSICIMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
CLASSICLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CLASSICXREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CLEANSCREENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CLEANSCREENOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
-COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
COMMANDLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
COMMANDLINEHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CONSTRAINTBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Constraint Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
CONTENTEXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

vi | Contents

CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYTOLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy To Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
-COPYTOLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize User Interface Editor . . . . . .
Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Image Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Find and Replace Dialog Box - CUI . . . .
CUIEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUIIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUILOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box .
CUIUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 229
. 230
. 231
. 232
. 234
. 236
. 237
. 238
. 238
. 239
. 240
. 240
. 241
. 242
. 252
. 253
. 255
. 256
. 257
. 258
. 258
. 260
. 260
. 261
. 263

D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
DATALINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Excel Data Link Dialog Box . . . .
DATALINKUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . .
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
DDVPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . .
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box . . . .
DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 265
. 266
. 267
. 270
. 271
. 272
. 273
. 273
. 274
. 275
. 276
. 276
. 278
. 278
. 279
. 279
. 281
. 282
. 284

Contents | vii

-DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNBIND (-DGNBIND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNEXPORT Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNIMPORT Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNMAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Mapping Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection Dimension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMJOGGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMJOGLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMROTATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes .

viii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 285
. 287
. 287
. 289
. 290
. 294
. 297
. 298
. 299
. 303
. 305
. 308
. 309
. 310
. 311
. 312
. 314
. 319
. 320
. 322
. 325
. 328
. 330
. 332
. 334
. 335
. 337
. 338
. 339
. 341
. 342
. 344
. 344
. 346
. 347
. 351
. 353
. 354
. 356
. 358
. 358
. 360
. 361
. 362
. 365
. 366

Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
-DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
DLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
DOWNLOADMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
DRAWINGRECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Drawing Recovery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
DSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
DWFADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
DWFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Attach DWF Underlay Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Substitute DWF Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
DWF Underlay Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
-DWFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
DWFCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
DWFFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
DWFLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
DWGCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
DWG Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Conversion Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
New Conversion Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Modify Conversion Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
DWGPROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Drawing Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Chapter 6

E Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . . . . .
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Transmittal Dialog Box . . . . .
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box . . . . .
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 459
. 460
. 464
. 466
. 469
. 470
. 471
. 473
. 474

Contents | ix

Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
-ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORTDWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save as DWF Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export to DWF/PDF Options Palette . . . . . . . . .
Page Setup Override Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precision Presets Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export to DWF/PDF Ribbon Panel . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORTDWFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save as DWFx Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORTLAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Layout to Model Space Drawing Dialog Box .
EXPORTPDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save as PDF Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORTSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPORTTOAUTOCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNALREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External References Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 479
. 479
. 480
. 482
. 483
. 484
. 485
. 486
. 488
. 489
. 491
. 492
. 493
. 494
. 495
. 496
. 497
. 498
. 498
. 500
. 504
. 504
. 512

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 513
. 514
. 517
. 518
. 521
. 522
. 524
. 525

G Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
GEOGRAPHICLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . .
Location Already Exists Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box .
Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Location Picker Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
GETENV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GETLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Link Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GOTOURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

F Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box . .
FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND .

Chapter 8

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 529
. 530
. 530
. 531
. 532
. 535
. 536
. 536
. 537
. 538

GRADIENT . .
GRAPHSCR . .
GRID . . . . .
GROUP . . . .
-GROUP
GROUPEDIT .

Chapter 9

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 539
. 539
. 540
. 541
. 542
. 543

H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box . . . . .
Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab .
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . . . .
-HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Hatch Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab . .
-HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . . . . . . . .
HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHTOBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDEPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box . . . .
HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Select Place in Document Dialog Box . .
-HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 545
. 546
. 558
. 563
. 565
. 572
. 573
. 573
. 578
. 581
. 582
. 582
. 583
. 584
. 584
. 586
. 586
. 587
. 587
. 590
. 591
. 594
. 595
. 595
. 597

I Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGESEXPORT . . . . . . . . . .
IGESEXPORT Conversion
IGESIMPORT . . . . . . . . . .
IGESIMPORT Conversion
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-IMAGE . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGEADJUST . . . . . . . . .
Image Adjust Dialog Box .
-IMAGEADJUST . . . . .

. . . .
. . . .
Table .
. . . .
Table .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 599
. 600
. 600
. 603
. 603
. 606
. 607
. 609
. 610
. 611

Contents | xi

IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Image Dialog Box . . .
Image Ribbon Contextual tab .
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
-INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERTOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . .
INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . .
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 612
. 613
. 615
. 616
. 618
. 619
. 620
. 621
. 624
. 626
. 627
. 628
. 629
. 630

J Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
JOIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Chapter 12

L Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
LAYCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
LAYDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Delete Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
-LAYDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Layer Properties Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Lineweight Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Layer Transparency Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Customize Layer Columns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
-LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
LAYERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
LAYERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Layer States Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
New Layer State to Save Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Edit Layer State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 673
Select Layer States Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
LAYFRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
LAYISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

xii | Contents

LAYLCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Change to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
-LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
LAYMCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
LAYMRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Merge Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Merge to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
-LAYMRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
LAYOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
LAYON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
LAYTHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
LAYVPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
LAYWALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
LayerWalk Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
LEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
LENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Linetype Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
-LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
-LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Chapter 13

M Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
MANAGEUPLOADS . . . . . . . . .
Manage Uploads Dialog Box . .
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markup Set Manager . . . . . .
MARKUPCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . .
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Property Settings Dialog Box .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 717
. 718
. 719
. 719
. 725
. 725
. 729
. 730
. 731

Contents | xiii

MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
MEASUREGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
MLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
MLEADEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
MLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Multileader Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
MSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
MTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
In-Place Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Text Formatting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Paragraph Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Columns Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Column Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Background Mask Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Stack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
-MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Symbols and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Chapter 14

N Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
NAVBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3Dconnexion Settings Dialog Box .
NAVSWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Drawing Dialog Box .
Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . .
Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . .
NEW Command Prompt . . . . . .
NEWSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiv | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 799
. 800
. 801
. 801
. 803
. 804
. 807
. 809
. 811
. 812

Chapter 15

O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Scales to Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OLE Text Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLINEDRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . .
Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Log In to Buzzsaw Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create or Edit a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Dialog Box .
Select a Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPENDWFMARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPENONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPENSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Field Update Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Effect Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Contextual Tab State Options Dialog Box . . . .
Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Transparency Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
InfoCenter Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Scale List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERKILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Duplicate Objects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 813
. 814
. 815
. 816
. 817
. 819
. 819
. 821
. 822
. 823
. 823
. 824
. 825
. 826
. 826
. 831
. 831
. 832
. 833
. 834
. 836
. 838
. 839
. 839
. 840
. 841
. 841
. 874
. 875
. 877
. 878
. 879
. 881
. 883
. 884
. 885
. 887
. 888
. 889
. 890
. 891
. 892
. 893
. 895
. 896

Contents | xv

-OVERKILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Chapter 16

P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page
Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters Manager - Drawing Editor . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters Manager - Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . .
-PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTEASHYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTEORIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDFADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-PDFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attach PDF Underlay Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDF Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab . . . . . . . . . . .
PDFCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDFLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PKFSTGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box . . .
Plot Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . . . .

xvi | Contents

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 901
. 902
. 904
. 905

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 912
. 913
. 914
. 915
. 916
. 917
. 917
. 918
. 921
. 924
. 925
. 925
. 926
. 926
. 927
. 928
. 929
. 930
. 931
. 932
. 933
. 934
. 936
. 937
. 939
. 939
. 941
. 941
. 948
. 950
. 952
. 954
. 961
. 961
. 971
. 972
. 972
. 973

-PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
-PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
-PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 1007
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
General Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Cell Border Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Add Distance or Angle Value Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
-PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Publish Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Publish Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
Publish Block Template Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Block Template Options Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . . 1031
DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Publish Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
-PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
PUBLISHTOWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Publish to Web Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
Purge Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
-PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

Chapter 17

Q Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
QCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Contents | xvii

QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
QKUNGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
Quick Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
QUICKCALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
QuickCalc Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Variable Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Category Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
QUICKCUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
QUICKPROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
QVDRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
QVDRAWINGCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
QVLAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
QVLAYOUTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063

Chapter 18

R Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
RECOVERALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Edit Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Reference Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
-REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
-RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
RESETBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
REVDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087

xviii | Contents

REVERSE . . . .
RIBBON . . . . .
RIBBONCLOSE .
ROTATE . . . . .
RSCRIPT . . . . .

Chapter 19

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

. 1087
. 1088
. 1088
. 1089
. 1090

S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Template Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
SAVEAS Command Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Add Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Edit Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
-SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
SCALETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Security Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
SEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
SELECTSIMILAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Select Similar Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
SETBYLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
SETENV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
SHADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
SHARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
Share Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
SHAREWITHSEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
Share with Autodesk Seek Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
SHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Sheet Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Subset Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Publish Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
New Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Rename & Renumber Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Import Layouts as Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

Contents | xix

Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Sheet Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
New Sheet Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Sheet Selections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
View Category Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
List of Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Select Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
SHEETSETHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
SHOWPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
Dictionaries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Manage Custom Dictionaries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
-STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
SYSWINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197

Chapter 20

T Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Insert Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Table Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
Manage Cell Content Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
-TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211

xx | Contents

TABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Create New Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Create New Cell Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Manage Cell Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
Table Cell Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Additional Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
TABLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
TASKBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
Text Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Special Unicode Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Control Codes and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
TEXTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
TEXTTOFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
TIMELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Timeline Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
TINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
Material Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
-TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
TOOLPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
View Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
TPNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
TRAYSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Chapter 21

U Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
UCS Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276

Contents | xxi

Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
ULAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Underlay Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
UNGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
UNISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
-UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
UPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Upload Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
UPLOADFILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Choose Files to Upload Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

Chapter 22

V Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
New View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
-VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
VIEWGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
VIEWPLOTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Plot and Publish Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Plot and Publish Status Bar Icon Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . 1310
VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
-VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
VSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
VTOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
View Transitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Chapter 23

W Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
Write Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
-WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332

xxii | Contents

WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
WMFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
WMFOPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
WMF In Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
WMFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
WSSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Save Workspace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
WSSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Workspace Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

Chapter 24

X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Attach External Reference Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
External Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Xbind Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
-XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
XOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
Open Reference Files Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Bind Xrefs/DGN Underlays Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
-XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Chapter 25

Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367

Chapter 26

Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . .
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) .
FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . .
MTP (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . .
TRACKING (Command Modifier) . . . . . .
Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . .
Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1369
. 1370
. 1370
. 1371
. 1371
. 1372
. 1373

System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375

Contents | xxiii

Chapter 27

3D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
3DSELECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377

Chapter 28

A System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
ADCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
ANNOALLVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
ANNOAUTOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
ANNOTATIVEDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
APBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
APSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
ARRAYEDITSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
ARRAYTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
ATTDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
ATTIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
ATTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
ATTMULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
ATTREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
AUDITCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
AUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
AUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
AUTOCOMPLETEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
AUTODWFPUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
AUTOMATICPUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
AUTOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394

Chapter 29

B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
BACKGROUNDPLOT . . . . .
BACTIONBARMODE . . . . .
BACTIONCOLOR . . . . . . .
BCONSTATUSMODE . . . . .
BDEPENDENCYHIGHLIGHT .
BGRIPOBJCOLOR . . . . . . .
BGRIPOBJSIZE . . . . . . . .
BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKEDITLOCK . . . . . .
BLOCKEDITOR . . . . . . . .
BLOCKTESTWINDOW . . . .

xxiv | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1395
. 1396
. 1396
. 1397
. 1397
. 1398
. 1398
. 1399
. 1399
. 1400
. 1400

BPARAMETERCOLOR . .
BPARAMETERFONT . . .
BPARAMETERSIZE . . .
BPTEXTHORIZONTAL .
BTMARKDISPLAY . . . .
BVMODE . . . . . . . .

Chapter 30

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1401
. 1401
. 1402
. 1402
. 1403
. 1403

C System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
CALCINPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
CANNOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
CANNOSCALEVALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
CBARTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
CDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
CECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
CELTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
CELTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
CELWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
CENTERMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
CETRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
CHAMFERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
CHAMFERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
CHAMFERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
CHAMFERD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
CHAMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
CIRCLERAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
CLASSICKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
CLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
CLEANSCREENSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
CLISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
CLIPBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
CMDACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
CMDDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
CMDNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
CMLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
CONSTRAINTBARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
CONSTRAINTRELAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
COPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
CPLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
CROSSINGAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
CTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
CTABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424

Contents | xxv

CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425

Chapter 31

D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
DATALINKNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
DBMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
DCTCUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
DCTMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
DEFLPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
DEFPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
DELOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
DGNFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
DGNIMPORTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
DGNIMPORTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
DGNMAPPINGPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
DGNOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
DIASTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
DIGITIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
DIMADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
DIMALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
DIMALTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
DIMALTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
DIMALTRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
DIMALTTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
DIMALTTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
DIMALTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
DIMALTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
DIMANNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
DIMAPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
DIMARCSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
DIMASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
DIMASZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
DIMATFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
DIMAUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
DIMAZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
DIMBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
DIMBLK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
DIMBLK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
DIMCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
DIMCLRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
DIMCLRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
DIMCLRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
DIMCONSTRAINTICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
DIMDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453

xxvi | Contents

DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
DIMEXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DIMEXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DIMFRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DIMFXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
DIMFXLON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
DIMGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
DIMJOGANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
DIMJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
DIMLDRBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
DIMLFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
DIMLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
DIMLTEX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
DIMLTEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
DIMLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
DIMLUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
DIMLWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
DIMLWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
DIMPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
DIMRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
DIMSAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
DIMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
DIMSD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
DIMSD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
DIMSE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
DIMSE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
DIMSOXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
DIMTAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
DIMTDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
DIMTFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
DIMTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
DIMTFILLCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
DIMTIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
DIMTIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
DIMTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
DIMTMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
DIMTOFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
DIMTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
DIMTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
DIMTOLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
DIMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
DIMTSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
DIMTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476

Contents | xxvii

DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . .
DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMTXTDIRECTION . . . .
DIMTZIN . . . . . . . . . .
DIMUPT . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMZIN . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPSILH . . . . . . . . . .
DISTANCE . . . . . . . . .
DONUTID . . . . . . . . . .
DONUTOD . . . . . . . . .
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . .
DRAGP1 . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAWORDERCTL . . . . .
DRSTATE . . . . . . . . . .
DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . .
DWFFRAME . . . . . . . . .
DWFOSNAP . . . . . . . . .
DWGCHECK . . . . . . . .
DWGCODEPAGE . . . . . .
DWGNAME . . . . . . . . .
DWGPREFIX . . . . . . . .
DWGTITLED . . . . . . . .
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE .
DYNDIGRIP . . . . . . . . .
DYNDIVIS . . . . . . . . . .
DYNINFOTIPS . . . . . . .
DYNMODE . . . . . . . . .
DYNPICOORDS . . . . . . .
DYNPIFORMAT . . . . . . .
DYNPIVIS . . . . . . . . . .
DYNPROMPT . . . . . . . .
DYNTOOLTIPS . . . . . . .

Chapter 32

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1477
. 1477
. 1478
. 1478
. 1479
. 1479
. 1480
. 1481
. 1481
. 1482
. 1482
. 1483
. 1483
. 1484
. 1485
. 1485
. 1486
. 1486
. 1487
. 1488
. 1488
. 1489
. 1489
. 1489
. 1490
. 1491
. 1491
. 1492
. 1493
. 1493
. 1494
. 1495
. 1495

E System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
EDGEMODE . . . . . . .
ELEVATION . . . . . . . .
ERHIGHLIGHT . . . . . .
ERSTATE . . . . . . . . . .
EXEDIR . . . . . . . . . .
EXPERT . . . . . . . . . .
EXPLMODE . . . . . . . .
EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT .
EXPORTMODELSPACE . .
EXPORTPAPERSPACE . . .
EXPORTPAGESETUP . . .

xxviii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1497
. 1498
. 1498
. 1499
. 1499
. 1500
. 1501
. 1501
. 1502
. 1502
. 1503

EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504

Chapter 33

F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
FACETRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
FIELDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
FILLETRAD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
FRAMESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
FULLPLOTPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513

Chapter 34

G System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
GEOLATLONGFORMAT . .
GEOMARKERVISIBILITY . .
GFANG . . . . . . . . . . .
GFCLR1 . . . . . . . . . . .
GFCLR2 . . . . . . . . . . .
GFCLRLUM . . . . . . . . .
GFCLRSTATE . . . . . . . .
GFNAME . . . . . . . . . .
GFSHIFT . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBALOPACITY . . . . . .
GRIDDISPLAY . . . . . . . .
GRIDMAJOR . . . . . . . .
GRIDMODE . . . . . . . . .
GRIDSTYLE . . . . . . . . .
GRIDUNIT . . . . . . . . .
GRIPBLOCK . . . . . . . . .
GRIPCOLOR . . . . . . . .
GRIPCONTOUR . . . . . . .
GRIPDYNCOLOR . . . . . .
GRIPHOT . . . . . . . . . .
GRIPHOVER . . . . . . . .
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL .
GRIPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . .
GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . .
GRIPTIPS . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1515
. 1516
. 1516
. 1517
. 1517
. 1518
. 1518
. 1519
. 1519
. 1520
. 1521
. 1521
. 1522
. 1522
. 1523
. 1523
. 1524
. 1524
. 1525
. 1525
. 1525
. 1526
. 1527
. 1527
. 1528
. 1528

Contents | xxix

GROUPDISPLAYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529

Chapter 35

H System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
HALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . .
HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . .
HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . .
HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . .
HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . .
HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . .
HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . .
HPBOUNDRETAIN . . . . . . .
HPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPDLGMODE . . . . . . . . . .
HPDOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . .
HPDRAWORDER . . . . . . . .
HPGAPTOL . . . . . . . . . . .
HPINHERIT . . . . . . . . . . .
HPISLANDDETECTION . . . . .
HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE .
HPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPMAXAREAS . . . . . . . . .
HPMAXLINES . . . . . . . . . .
HPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPOBJWARNING . . . . . . . .
HPORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . .
HPORIGINMODE . . . . . . . .
HPQUICKPREVIEW . . . . . . .
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT . . .
HPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPSEPARATE . . . . . . . . . .
HPSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . .
HYPERLINKBASE . . . . . . . .

Chapter 36

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1531
. 1531
. 1532
. 1532
. 1533
. 1533
. 1534
. 1534
. 1535
. 1535
. 1536
. 1536
. 1537
. 1538
. 1538
. 1539
. 1540
. 1540
. 1541
. 1541
. 1542
. 1542
. 1543
. 1543
. 1544
. 1544
. 1544
. 1545
. 1546
. 1546
. 1547
. 1547
. 1548
. 1548

I System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
IMAGEFRAME . . . . .
IMAGEHLT . . . . . . .
INDEXCTL . . . . . . .
INETLOCATION . . . .
INPUTHISTORYMODE .
INSBASE . . . . . . . . .

xxx | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1549
. 1550
. 1550
. 1551
. 1551
. 1552

INSNAME . . . . . . . . .
INSUNITS . . . . . . . . .
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . .
INSUNITSDEFTARGET . .
INTELLIGENTUPDATE . .
INTERSECTIONCOLOR . .
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY .
ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . .
ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . .
ISOLINES . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 37

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1552
. 1553
. 1554
. 1556
. 1557
. 1557
. 1558
. 1559
. 1559
. 1560

L System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT . . .
LASTANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
LASTPOINT . . . . . . . . . .
LATITUDE . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYEREVAL . . . . . . . . . .
LAYEREVALCTL . . . . . . . .
LAYERFILTERALERT . . . . .
LAYERMANAGERSTATE . . .
LAYERNOTIFY . . . . . . . .
LAYLOCKFADECTL . . . . . .
LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT .
LIMCHECK . . . . . . . . . .
LIMMAX . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMMIN . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCALROOTPREFIX . . . . .
LOCKUI . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEMODE . . . . . . . .
LOGFILENAME . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEPATH . . . . . . . .
LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . .
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . .
LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . .
LWDEFAULT . . . . . . . . .
LWDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . .
LWUNITS . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1561
. 1561
. 1562
. 1562
. 1563
. 1564
. 1564
. 1565
. 1566
. 1567
. 1568
. 1568
. 1569
. 1569
. 1570
. 1570
. 1571
. 1571
. 1572
. 1572
. 1573
. 1573
. 1574
. 1574
. 1575
. 1575
. 1576

M System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
MAXACTVP . .
MAXSORT . . .
MAXTOUCHES
MBUTTONPAN

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 1577
. 1577
. 1578
. 1578

Contents | xxxi

MEASUREINIT . . . . . .
MEASUREMENT . . . . .
MENUBAR . . . . . . . .
MENUECHO . . . . . . .
MIRRHATCH . . . . . . .
MIRRTEXT . . . . . . . .
MLEADERSCALE . . . . .
MODEMACRO . . . . . .
MSLTSCALE . . . . . . . .
MSMSTATE . . . . . . . .
MSOLESCALE . . . . . . .
MTEXTCOLUMN . . . . .
MTEXTED . . . . . . . . .
MTEXTFIXED . . . . . . .
MTEXTTOOLBAR . . . . .
MTJIGSTRING . . . . . .
MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX .

Chapter 39

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1579
. 1579
. 1580
. 1580
. 1581
. 1581
. 1582
. 1583
. 1583
. 1584
. 1584
. 1585
. 1585
. 1586
. 1586
. 1587
. 1587

N System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
NAVBARDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589

Chapter 40

O System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
OBJECTISOLATIONMODE .
OBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . .
OBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . .
OFFSETDIST . . . . . . . . .
OFFSETGAPTYPE . . . . . .
OLEFRAME . . . . . . . . .
OLEHIDE . . . . . . . . . .
OLEQUALITY . . . . . . . .
OLESTARTUP . . . . . . . .
OPENPARTIAL . . . . . . .
OPMSTATE . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOMODE . . . . . . .
OSMODE . . . . . . . . . .
OSNAPCOORD . . . . . . .
OSNAPNODELEGACY . . .
OSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 41

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1591
. 1592
. 1592
. 1594
. 1594
. 1595
. 1595
. 1596
. 1597
. 1597
. 1598
. 1598
. 1599
. 1600
. 1601
. 1601

P System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
PALETTEOPAQUE .
PAPERUPDATE . .
PDFFRAME . . . .
PDFOSNAP . . . .

xxxii | Contents

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 1603
. 1604
. 1605
. 1605

PDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
PDSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
PEDITACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
PELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
PERIMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
PICKADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
PICKAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
PICKBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
PICKDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
PICKFIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
PICKSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
PLINECONVERTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
PLINEGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
PLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
PLINEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
PLOTOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
PLOTROTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
POINTCLOUDDENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
POLARADDANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
POLARANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
POLARDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
POLARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
POLYSIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
PREVIEWEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
PREVIEWFACEEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
PREVIEWFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
PROJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
PROPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
PROXYGRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
PROXYNOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
PROXYSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
PROXYWEBSEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
PSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
PSTYLEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
PSTYLEPOLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
PUBLISHALLSHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
PUBLISHCOLLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
PUBLISHHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
PUCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630

Chapter 42

Q System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
QCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631

Contents | xxxiii

QPLOCATION . .
QPMODE . . . . .
QTEXTMODE . . .
QVDRAWINGPIN .
QVLAYOUTPIN . .

Chapter 43

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

. 1631
. 1632
. 1633
. 1633
. 1634

R System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . .
RASTERPERCENT . . . . . .
RASTERPREVIEW . . . . . .
RASTERTHRESHOLD . . . .
RECOVERAUTO . . . . . .
RECOVERYMODE . . . . .
REFEDITNAME . . . . . . .
REGENMODE . . . . . . . .
REMEMBERFOLDERS . . . .
REPORTERROR . . . . . . .
RIBBONBGLOAD . . . . . .
RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT .
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM .
RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT .
RIBBONICONRESIZE . . . .
RIBBONSELECTMODE . . .
RIBBONSTATE . . . . . . .
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX . .
ROLLOVEROPACITY . . . .
ROLLOVERTIPS . . . . . . .
RTDISPLAY . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 44

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1635
. 1635
. 1636
. 1636
. 1637
. 1637
. 1638
. 1638
. 1639
. 1640
. 1640
. 1641
. 1642
. 1642
. 1643
. 1643
. 1644
. 1644
. 1645
. 1646
. 1646

S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
SAVEFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
SAVENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
SAVETIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
SCREENSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
SELECTIONAREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
SELECTIONAREAOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
SELECTIONCYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
SELECTIONPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
SELECTSIMILARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
SETBYLAYERMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
SHADEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
SHADEDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655

xxxiv | Contents

SHORTCUTMENU . . . . . . . . . . .
SHORTCUTMENUDURATION . . . . .
SHOWLAYERUSAGE . . . . . . . . . .
SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS .
SIGWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKETCHINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKTOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPISOPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SORTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLDEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINESEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLKNOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLMETHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLPERIODIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSMAUTOOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSMPOLLTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSMSHEETSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . .
SSMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATUSBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 45

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1655
. 1656
. 1657
. 1657
. 1658
. 1659
. 1659
. 1660
. 1660
. 1660
. 1661
. 1661
. 1662
. 1662
. 1663
. 1663
. 1664
. 1665
. 1665
. 1666
. 1666
. 1667
. 1667
. 1668
. 1668
. 1669
. 1669
. 1670
. 1671
. 1671
. 1672
. 1673

T System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
TABLEINDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
TABLETOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
TABMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676
TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
TBSHOWSHORTCUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
TDCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
TDINDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
TDUCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
TDUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
TDUSRTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
TDUUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680
TEMPOVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680

Contents | xxxv

TEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT .
TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . .
THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . .
TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . .
TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . .
TOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . .
TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY . .
TPSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACEWID . . . . . . . . . .
TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . .
TRAYICONS . . . . . . . . . .
TRAYNOTIFY . . . . . . . . .
TRAYTIMEOUT . . . . . . . .
TREEDEPTH . . . . . . . . . .
TREEMAX . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIMMODE . . . . . . . . . .
TSPACEFAC . . . . . . . . . .
TSPACETYPE . . . . . . . . .
TSTACKALIGN . . . . . . . .
TSTACKSIZE . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 46

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1681
. 1681
. 1682
. 1682
. 1683
. 1683
. 1684
. 1684
. 1684
. 1689
. 1689
. 1690
. 1690
. 1691
. 1691
. 1692
. 1692
. 1693
. 1693
. 1694
. 1694
. 1695
. 1696
. 1696
. 1697
. 1697
. 1698

U System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
UCSAXISANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700
UCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700
UCSFOLLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
UCSNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
UCSORG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
UCSORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
UCSSELECTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
UCSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
UCSXDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705
UCSYDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705
UNDOCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
UNDOMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
UNITMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
UOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
UPDATETHUMBNAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708

xxxvi | Contents

USERI1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
USERNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
USERR1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710

Chapter 47

V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
VIEWMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
VPROTATEASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
VSMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
VSMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
VTDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
VTENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719

Chapter 48

W System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
WHIPARC . . . . . . . .
WINDOWAREACOLOR .
WMFBKGND . . . . . .
WMFFOREGND . . . . .
WORKSPACELABEL . . .
WORLDUCS . . . . . .
WORLDVIEW . . . . . .
WSAUTOSAVE . . . . .
WSCURRENT . . . . . .

Chapter 49

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1721
. 1721
. 1722
. 1723
. 1723
. 1724
. 1724
. 1725
. 1725

X System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
XCLIPFRAME . . .
XDWGFADECTL .
XEDIT . . . . . . .
XFADECTL . . . .
XLOADCTL . . . .
XLOADPATH . . .
XREFCTL . . . . .
XREFNOTIFY . . .
XREFTYPE . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1727
. 1728
. 1728
. 1729
. 1729
. 1730
. 1731
. 1731
. 1732

Contents | xxxvii

Chapter 50

Z System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
ZOOMFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
ZOOMWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733

Chapter 51

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . .
Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box .
Search Folders Dialog Box . . . . . .
SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 1735
. 1735
. 1737
. 1738

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741

xxxviii | Contents

Commands

You can start a command by using one of the following methods:
■

Click the command name on a ribbon, menu, toolbar, status bar, tool palette, or shortcut
menu.

■

Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press Enter or
Spacebar.

The acadlt.pgp file lists the command aliases.
To access the acadlt.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Program Parameters
(acadlt.pgp).
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description is a command
access section that lists the specific ways you can start that command.

1

2

3D Commands

1

3DCONFIG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Performance Tuning

Sets hardware acceleration on or off and provides a method to check for driver
updates

Summary
Displays the Performance Tuning dialog box on page 3.
If you enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Performance Tuning Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Performance Tuning

Sets hardware acceleration on or off and provides a method to check for driver
updates

3

Summary
This dialog box can also be accessed from the Performance Settings button
on the System tab of the Options dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Hardware and Performance Tuning
Specifies hardware settings and performance tuning. The performance tuner
reads your system and decides whether to use software or hardware acceleration
for features that support both. Features that work with your system are turned
on, and features that cannot work with your system are turned off. A log file
displays the results.
Enable hardware acceleration for better performance
When checked, hardware acceleration is enabled.
View Tune Log
Displays the Performance Tuner log on page 5.
Check for Updates
Checks for updated versions of the graphics card and driver database that is
used for performance tuning.

4 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Remind Me When a New Driver Is Available
Specifies that a notification bubble is displayed when a new driver is available.

Performance Tuner Log
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control Performance

Lists the features that have been disabled, if any.

Summary
Information includes the system configuration, 3D graphics device, driver,
and if any features have been disabled. If your 3D device shows as certified,
Autodesk tested AutoCAD LT with this specific hardware.

Performance Tuner Log | 5

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Save Log As
Displays a standard file selection dialog box.

-3DCONFIG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Performance Tuning

Controls Hardware Acceleration from the command line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter option:[acceLeration on page 6/eXit] :

Acceleration
Specifies whether to use software or hardware acceleration.
Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration. The hardware graphics card
performs most of the drawing tasks to increase performance.
Software Specifies software acceleration. The software graphics system performs
all of the drawing tasks in 3D.

3DPOLY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Polylines

Creates a 3D polyline.

6 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 3D Polyline.
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline

Summary
A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a
single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include
arc segments.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified
new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command.

Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous
point.

3DPOLY | 7

Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then
ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two
lines.

8 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

A Commands

2

ABOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Start a Drawing

Displays information about AutoCAD LT.

Access Methods
Menu: Help ➤ About
Command entry: 'about for transparent use

Summary
Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product
information includes the version number and service pack, serial number, license
type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save
the product information as a text file.

9

ADCCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of DesignCenter

Closes DesignCenter.

Summary
™

Closes the DesignCenter window.

ADCENTER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of DesignCenter

Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ DesignCenter
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter

Summary
The DesignCenter is displayed.

10 | Chapter 2 A Commands

DesignCenter Window
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Understand the DesignCenter Window

Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes
blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs).

Summary
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and
access options.
When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab, the following two
panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content:
■

Content area (right pane) on page 12

DesignCenter Window | 11

■

Tree view (left pane) on page 14
NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You
can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Content Area (DesignCenter) Displays the content of the "container" currently
selected in the tree view. A container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file,
or web address (URL) containing information accessible by DesignCenter.
Depending on the container selected in tree view, the content area typically
displays the following:
■

Folders containing drawings or other files

■

Drawings

■

Named objects contained in drawings (named objects include blocks, xrefs,
layouts, layers, dimension styles, table styles, multileader styles, and text
styles)

■

Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns

■

Web-based content

■

Custom content developed by third-party applications

From the content area, you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach
external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by
right-clicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag
or right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension
styles, and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to
tool palettes.
NOTE You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area.
Load Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Use
Load to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web, and then
to select content to load in the content area.
Back Returns to the most recent location in the history list.
Forward Returns to the next later location in the history list.

12 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current
container.
Stop (DC Online tab) Stops the current transfer.
Reload (DC Online tab) Reloads the current page.
Search Displays the Search dialog box, where you can specify search criteria
to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within drawings.
Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The
Favorites folder contains shortcuts to items you access often. You can add items
to Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item
in the tree view, and then clicking Add to Favorites. To delete an item from
Favorites, use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then
use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu.
NOTE The DesignCenter folder is automatically added to Favorites. This folder
contains drawings with discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in drawings.
Home Returns DesignCenter to your home folder. On installation, the home
folder is set to ...\Sample\DesignCenter. Change the home folder using the
shortcut menu in the tree view.
Tree View Toggle Displays and hides the tree view. Hide the tree view if you
need more space in your drawing area. When the tree view is hidden, you can
use the content area to navigate to containers and to load content.
The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History
list in the tree view.
Preview Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below
the content area. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item,
the Preview area is empty.
Description Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a
pane below the content area. If a preview image is also displayed, the
description is displayed below it. If there is no description saved with the
selected item, the Description area is empty.

Views
Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the content
area. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button
repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. The default view varies for
the type of content currently loaded in the content area.
Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon format.

DesignCenter Window | 13

Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format.
List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list.
Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded content. You
can sort the items by name, size, type, and other properties, depending on
the type of content that is loaded in the content area.
Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only) Refreshes the display in the content area to
reflect any changes you have made. Right-click the content area background
and click Refresh on the shortcut menu.
Autodesk Seek Design Content Opens a web browser and displays the
Autodesk Seek (SEEK on page 1106) home page. Product design information
available on Autodesk Seek depends on what content providers, both corporate
partners and individual contributors, publish to Autodesk Seek
(SHAREWITHSEEK on page 1118). Such content could include 3D models, 2D
drawings, specifications, brochures, or descriptions of products or components.

Tree View (DesignCenter)
Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network
drives, a list of open drawings, and a history of the last locations you accessed.
Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area.
NOTE In the sample\designcenter folder are drawings containing discipline-specific
blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol library
drawings.
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view
options.
Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and
network drives, including My Computer and Network Neighborhood.
You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file name, directory
location, or network path in the DesignCenter tree view. See ADCNAVIGATE
on page 18.
Open Drawings Displays all drawings open in the current work session,
including drawings that are minimized.
History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently in
DesignCenter. With the history displayed, right-click a file to display
information about the file or to delete the file from the History list.
DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page. When you establish
a web connection, two panes are viewed on the Welcome page. The left side
displays folders containing symbol libraries, manufacturer sites, and additional

14 | Chapter 2 A Commands

content libraries. When a symbol is selected, it is displayed on the right side
and can be downloaded into your drawing.
NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can
enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility.

Search Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of DesignCenter

Searches for content such as drawings, hatch patterns, and blocks.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Look For
Specifies the type of content to search for. The content type you specify
determines which tabs are displayed in the Search dialog box and the search
fields it provides. The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed only
when the Drawings option is selected in Look For.
In

Search Dialog Box | 15

Specifies a search path name. To enter multiple paths, separate them with
semicolons. Use Browse to select a path from a tree view list.
Browse
Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can
specify the drives and folders to search.
Search Subfolders
Includes subfolders in the search path.
Search Now
Starts the search based on criteria you specify.
Stop
Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results
panel.
New Search
Clears the Search For the Word(s) box and places the cursor in the box.
Search Results Panel
Displays the results of the search in resizable columns at the bottom of the
window. Double-click an item to load it into DesignCenter.

Search Tabs (Search Dialog Box)
Display search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look For
list. The name of the tab reflects the content type. You can use wild-card
characters to extend or limit your search patterns.
Search for the Word(s)
Specifies the text string to look for in the field you specify. Use the asterisk
and question mark wild-card characters to broaden your search.
■

* (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search
string.

■

? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches
ABC, 3BC, and so on.

This option is available on the Drawings tab.
In the Field(s)

16 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Specifies the property fields to search. For drawings, all fields other than File
Name are derived from the information entered in the Drawing Properties
dialog box (DWGPROPS on page 451).
This option is available on the Drawings tab.
Search for the Name
Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or other content type
that you want to find.
This option is available on all tabs except Drawings.

Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box)
Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period.
All Files Finds all the files that match the criteria you specify on other tabs,
regardless of creation date or date modified. This is the default setting.
Find All Files Created or Modified Finds files created or modified during a
specific time period. The search locates files that match the criteria you specify
on this and other tabs.
Between
Searches for files created or modified between the dates you specify.
During the Previous Month(s)
Searches for files created or modified within the number of months you specify.
During the Previous Day(s)
Searches for files created or modified within the number of days you specify.

Advanced Tab (Search Dialog Box)
Finds content within drawings; this tab is available only when you select
Drawings in Look For.
Containing
Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to search for. For example,
you can search for text contained within a block attribute, such as a
manufacturer's catalog number.
Containing Text
Specifies the text you want to search for.
Size Is

Search Dialog Box | 17

Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. Select At Least or At Most, and
enter a value in KB.

ADCNAVIGATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Access Content with DesignCenter

Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path.

Summary
The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the
DesignCenter Folders tab.
ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target
domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter pathname :
At the prompt, you can enter a path in any of the following formats:
■

Folder path: c:\project files\electrical

■

Folder path and a file name: c:\project files\electrical\circuit2.dwg

■

UNC (universal naming convention) network path: \\server1\campus_project

DesignCenter is displayed, with the Folder tab active, and the path or drawing
file that you specified is loaded.

18 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ADDSELECTED
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects

Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a
selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Draw
Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and click Add Selected.

Summary
Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties on page 1017 of
an object. For example, creating an object based on a selected circle adopts
the general properties of the circle, such as its color and layer, but prompts
you for the new circle’s center point and radius.
With the ADDSELECTED command, you can create a new object with the
same object type as a selected object. Certain objects have special properties
that are supported in addition to its general properties, as shown in the
following table.
Object type

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

Gradient

Gradient name, Color 1, Color 2, Gradient Angle,
Centered

Text, MText, Attribute
Definition

Text Style, Height

Dimensions (Linear,
Aligned, Radial, Diamet-

Dim Style, Dim Scale

ADDSELECTED | 19

Object type

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

ric, Angular, Arc Length,
and Ordinate)
Tolerance

Dim Style

Leader

Dim Style, Dim Scale

Multileader

Multileader Style, Overall Scale

Table

Table Style

Hatch

Pattern, Scale, Rotation

Block Reference, External
Reference

Name

Underlays (DWF, DGN,
Image, and PDF)

Name

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select object: Use an object selection method
The prompts vary by object type.

ADJUST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the
Background

Adjusts the fade, contrast and monochrome settings of the selected underlay
(DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN), or image.

20 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust

Summary
With the ADJUST command, you can control several display settings for
selected images and underlays (DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays). To
confirm the settings, use the Properties palette.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
The list of prompts depends on whether you select one or more images, or
one or more underlays.

Images
Fade Controls the fade effect in the image. Values range from 0 through 100.
The greater the value, the lighter that the image appears. This setting works
indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast value blends the image
into the background when fade is set to a higher value.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect in the image.
Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the stronger the
contrast.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly, the contrast in the image.
Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the brighter the image
and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast.

Underlays
Fade Controls the fade effect in the underlay. Values range from 0 through
100. The greater the value, the lighter that the linework in the underlay
appears. This setting works indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast
value blends the underlay into the background when fade is set to a higher
value.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect in the underlay.
Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the stronger the
contrast.

ADJUST | 21

Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all areas while maintaining
the luminance. When turned on, the underlay appears in shades of gray
starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more. If
the background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are
inverted, with the darkest areas displaying as white, and the lightest areas
displaying as black.

ALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Align Objects

Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

Summary
Either one, two, or three pairs of source points and definition points can be
specified to move, rotate, or tilt the selected objects, aligning them with points
on another object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter
ALIGN Using One Pair of Points When you select only one source point and
destination point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source
point (1) to the destination point (2).

22 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points When you select two point pairs, you can
move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other
objects.

The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the
alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).
After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object.
The distance between the first and second destination points (2, 4) is used as
the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only
when you are aligning objects using two point pairs.
NOTE If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment
on nonperpendicular working planes, you get unpredictable results.
ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points When you select three point pairs, you
can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects.

The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point
(2).
The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination
object (2 and 4).

ALIGN | 23

The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the
destination object (4 and 6).

ANNORESET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add and Modify Scale Representations

Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected
annotative objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Sync Scale Positions
Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale
Positions
Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click and choose
Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions.

Summary
The location of each scale representation of an annotative object can be
adjusted using grips. For each selected annotative object, all alternate scale
representations are returned to the location of the object’s current scale
representation.

24 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ANNOUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Annotative Styles

Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their
styles.

Summary
When a non-annotative text object is updated to an annotative text style, the
object becomes annotative and supports the current annotation scale. If the
text style has a fixed Paper Height, the object is set to that height. If the text
style’s Paper Height is set to 0, the size of the text does not change. The Paper
Height value is inferred by dividing the model height by the current annotation
scale.
If an annotative object is updated to a non-annotative style, the object becomes
non-annotative and any alternate scale representations are removed.

APERTURE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Object Snaps

Controls the size of the object snap target box.

Access Methods
Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)

Summary
Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target
box. The APBOX on page 1383 system variable controls whether the object snap
target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE

ANNOUPDATE | 25

controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger
the target box.
You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.

APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at
the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the
PICKBOX on page 1611 system variable.

ARC
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Arcs

Creates an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ 3-Point
Menu: Draw ➤ Arc
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
To create an arc, you can specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point,
radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start pointof arc or [Center]: Specify a point, enter c, or press ENTER to
start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline

26 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc.
NOTE If you press ENTER without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last
drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint
of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline.
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]:

Second Point
Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first
point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second
point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc counterclockwise from
the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from
the center point through the third point (3).

The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the
illustration.
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center
point (2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise
arc is drawn.
Specify included angle: Specify an angle

ARC | 27

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of
a straight line between the start point and endpoint.
If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from
the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord: Specify a length

End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:
Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an
endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3)
through the second point specified (2).

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint
(2), with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is
drawn.
Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the
pointing device counterclockwise

Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc,
major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point

28 | Chapter 2 A Commands

(1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start
point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:

Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the
endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn.
Specify radius of arc:

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to an
endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (1)
through a specified point (3).

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center
point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise
arc is drawn.
Specify included angle:

ARC | 29

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of
a straight line between the start point and endpoint.
If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from
the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord:

Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline
Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press
ENTER at the first prompt.

Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)

ARCHIVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

Packages the current sheet set files for archive.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu

30 | Chapter 2 A Commands

➤ Publish ➤ Archive

Summary
The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -archive at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

Packages the current sheet set files for archive.

Summary
The Sheets tab lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet
order and according to subset organization. The Files Tree tab lists the files to
be included in the package in a hierarchical tree format. The Files Table tab
displays the files to be included in the package in a table format.
All files to be included in the archive package are indicated by a check mark
next to the file name. To remove a file from the archive package, select the
check box. Right-click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu, from
which you can clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files.
NOTE Make sure that the files to be archived are not currently open in any
application.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Sheets Tab
Lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and
according to subset organization. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set
Manager. Archive can be selected from the shortcut menu displayed when
the top-level sheet set node is right-clicked, or archive can be entered at the
Command prompt.

Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box | 31

Files Tree Tab
Lists the files to be included in the archive package in a hierarchical tree
format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related
xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package
or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not
included in the archive package.
Included
Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package.

32 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Files Table Tab
Displays the files to be included in the archive package in a table format. By
default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot
styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or remove
existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the
archive package.
■

Included on page 32

Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box | 33

Add a File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an
additional file to include in the archive package. This button is available on
both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab.

Enter Notes to Be Included with This Archive
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to the archive package.
The notes are included in the archive report. You can specify a template of
default notes to be included with all your archive packages by creating an
ASCII text file called archive.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified
by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab in the Options dialog
box.

View Report
Displays report information that is included with the archive package. Includes
any archive notes that you entered. If you have created a text file of default
notes, the notes are also included in the report.
Save As Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in
which to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included
with all archive packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can
save an additional copy of a report file for reference purposes.

Modify Archive Setup
Displays the Modify Archive Setup dialog box, in which you can specify options
for the archive package.

34 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Archive Type and Location
Specifies the type and location of archive package created.
Archive Package Type
Specifies the type of archive package created.
Archive Package Type

Description

Folder

Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder.

Self-Extracting Executable

Creates an archive package of files as a
compressed, self-extracting executable file.
Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the archive package and restores the files.

Zip

Creates an archive package of files as a
compressed ZIP file. To restore the files,
you need a decompression utility such as
the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.

File Format
Specifies the file format to which all drawings included in the archive package
will be converted. You can select a drawing file format from the drop-down
list.
Archive File Folder

Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box | 35

Specifies the location in which the archive package is created. Lists the last
nine locations in which archive packages were created. To specify a new
location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want.
If this field is left blank, the archive file is created in the folder containing the
sheet set data (DST) file.
Archive File Name
Specifies the method for naming the archive package. Displays the default file
name for the archive package. This option is not available if the archive
package type is set to Folder.
Archive File Name Type Description
Prompt for a File Name

Displays a standard file selection dialog box
where you can enter the name of the
archive package.

Overwrite if Necessary

Uses a logical default file name. If the file
name already exists, the existing file is
automatically overwritten.

Increment File Name if Ne-

Uses a logical default file name. If the file

cessary

name already exists, a number is added to
the end. This number is incremented each
time a new archive package is saved.

Path Options
Provides options for the archive.
Use Organized Folder Structure
Duplicates the folder structure for the files being transmitted. The root folder
is the top-level folder within a hierarchical folder tree.
The following considerations apply:
■

Relative paths remain unchanged. Relative paths outside the source root
folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and are placed
in the root folder.

■

Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths.
Absolute paths retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and
are placed in the root folder.

36 | Chapter 2 A Commands

■

Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and
are moved to the root folder or to a folder within the root folder tree.

■

A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.

■

A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary.

■

A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if
necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root
folder.

This option is not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet
location.
Source Root Folder
Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files,
such as xrefs. This option determines the source root folder for the Use
Organized Folder Structure option.
The source root folder also contains the sheet set data (DST) file when a sheet
set is archived.
Place All Files in One Folder
All files are installed to a single, specified target folder when the archive
package is created.
Keep Files and Folders As Is
Preserves the folder structure of all files in the archive package. This option is
not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet location.

Actions
Specifies the actions applicable to the archive package.
Set Default Plotter to 'None'
Changes the printer/plotter setting in the archive package to None.
Prompt for Password
Opens the Archive—Set Password dialog box, where you can specify a password
for your archive package.
Purge Drawings
Does a complete purge of all the drawings in the archive.

Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box | 37

NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications
when the drawings have been removed.

Include Options
Specifies the various options available with the archive package.
Include Fonts
Includes any associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the archive package.
Include Files from Data Links
Adds external files referenced by a data link to the transmittal package.
Include Textures from Materials
Includes textures with materials that are attached to objects or faces.
Include Photometric Web Files
Includes photometric web files that are associated with web lights in the
drawing.
Include Unloaded File References
Includes all unloaded external file references. The unloaded file references are
listed in the Files Tree and Files Table and report under their appropriate
category.
Include Sheet Set Data and Files
Includes the sheet set data (DST) file, label block drawing files, callout block
drawing files, and drawing template (DWT) files with the archive package.

Archive - Set Password Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

38 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Password for Compressed Archive Package
Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package. When
others attempt to open the archive package, they must provide this password
to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive
packages.

Password Confirmation
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password
field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.

-ARCHIVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Sheet Set name or [?] : Enter a predefined sheet set name, enter ? to display
a list of sheet sets, or press ENTER

Sheet Set Name
Specifies a sheet set to use for the archive package. This option is available
only when a sheet set is open.
Create Archive Package Creates the archive package from the specified sheet
set.
Report Only Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location
in which to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included
with all archive packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can
save an additional copy of a report file for reference purposes.
Password You are only prompted for a password if you selected Prompt for
Password in the archive setup.

-ARCHIVE | 39

AREA
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.

Summary
Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA,
MEASUREGEOM on page 736, and MASSPROP on page 725. Alternatively, use
BOUNDARY on page 151 to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST
on page 710 or the Properties palette on page 1015 to find the area.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first corner point on page 40 or [Object on page 41/Add Area on page
41/Subtract Area on page 42] : Select an option
The area and perimeter of the specified object displays at the Command prompt
and in the tooltip.

Specify Corner Points
Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified points. All points must
lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system
(UCS).
A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed.
Once the second point is specified, a line segment and a polygon with green
fill are displayed.
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to
complete the definition of the perimeter. The area to be calculated is
highlighted in green.
If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that
line length is added.

40 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.
Select object:
If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that
line length is ignored.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter
calculations.

The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length)
calculations.

Add Area
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you
continue to define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate
individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects and the total area
of all defined areas and objects.

AREA | 41

You can also select to specify the points. A rubberband line from the first
specified point to the cursor is displayed

Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in
green. Press ENTER. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the
total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode
was turned on.
If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that
line length is added.

Subtract Area
Similar to the Add Area option, but subtracts areas and perimeters. You can
use the Subtract Area option to subtract a specified area from a total area.
You can also specify the area to be subtracted with points. A rubberband line
from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed.

The specified area to be subracted is highlighted in red.
The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the
tooltip.

42 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ARRAY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Array Objects

Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.
Toolbar: Modify
Menu: Modify ➤ Array.

Summary
You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or
path array.

The DELOBJ on page 1433 system variable controls whether the source objects
of the array are deleted or retained after the array is created.
If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter array type [Rectangular on page 44/PAth on page 44/POlar on page 44]
: Enter an option or press Enter

ARRAY | 43

Rectangular (ARRAYRECT on page 60) Distributes object copies into any
combination of rows, columns, and levels.
Path (ARRAYPATH on page 53) Evenly distributes object copies along a path
or a portion of a path.
Polar (ARRAYPOLAR on page 57) Evenly distributes object copies in a circular
pattern around a center point or axis of rotation.

-ARRAY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Array Objects

Maintains legacy command line behavior for creating nonassociative, 2D
rectangular or polar arrays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] : Enter an option or press
ENTER

Rectangular
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.

Enter the number of rows (---) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice
versa.

44 | Chapter 2 A Commands

The selected object, or cornerstone element, is assumed to be in the lower-left
corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the
corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between
rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite
corners of a rectangle.
Specify the distance between columns (|||):
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between
columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the
current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are
orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of
the SNAP on page 1158 command changes the angle and creates a rotated array.
The SNAPANG on page 1660 system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take
a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array
elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. You can change
the maximum number of array elements by setting the MaxArray system
registry variable using the SETENV command.

Polar
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center
point.

Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new
base point
Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point.

-ARRAY | 45

Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that
will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the
objects are arrayed.
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER
If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle
to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the
number of items), you must specify both.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if
you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press ENTER,
the following prompt is displayed:
Angle between items: Specify an angle
If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed
ENTER, ARRAY prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the
direction of the array:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise
rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference
point on the last object selected. The reference point used is the center point
of a circle or arc, the insertion base point of a block, the start point of text,
and one endpoint of a line.
Rotate arrayed objects? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER
In a polar array, the reference point of the last object in the selection set is
used for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing
selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing an object
from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be the last object
selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and replicate it.

46 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ARRAYCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Array Objects

Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array
editing state.

Access Methods

Panel

Ribbon:  ➤ Edit Array contextual panel

Summary
The Soure option of ARRAYEDIT on page 48 activates an editing state in which
you can edit the source objects of a selected array item. While the editing state
is active, an Edit Array contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon. Save or
discard changes to exit the editing state.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Save changes to array [Yes on page 47/No on page 48] : Enter an option

Save Changes

Button

 ➤ Edit Array contextual panel ➤ Save Changes
Saves all changes made to the source object or to a replacement item of the
array.

ARRAYCLOSE | 47

Discard Changes

Button

 ➤ Edit Array contextual panel ➤ Discard Changes
Discards any changes made; the source object or replacement item in the array
is returned to its original state.

ARRAYEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Associative Arrays

Edits associative array objects and their source objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Array
Toolbar: Modify II

Summary
Modify associative arrays by editing the array properties, editing source objects,
or replacing items with other objects.
When you edit source objects, an editing state is activated. Save or discard
changes (ARRAYCLOSE on page 47) to exit the editing state.
When you select and edit a single array object, the Array Editor ribbon
contextual tab on page 51 is displayed. The array properties available on the
Array Editor ribbon contextual tab depend on the type of the selected array.

48 | Chapter 2 A Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select array: Use an object selection method
The array type determines the remainig prompts.
For rectangular arrays:
Enter an option [Source on page 49/REPlace on page 49/Base point on page
50/Rows on page 50/Columns on page 50/Levels on page 50/RESet on page
51/eXit on page 51] :
For path arrays:
Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Method on page 50/Base point/Items on
page 50/Rows/Levels/Align items on page 51/Z direction on page
51/RESet/eXit] :
For polar arrays:
Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Base point/Items/Angle between on page
51/Fill angle on page 51/Rows/Levels/ROTate items on page 51/RESet/eXit]
:

Source
Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or
replacement source objects) for a selected item.
All changes (including the creation of new objects) are instantly applied to
all items that reference the same source objects.
While the editing state is active, an Edit Array contextual tab is displayed on
the ribbon and automatic saving is disabled. Save or discard changes
(ARRAYCLOSE on page 47) to exit the editing state.
When the source objects are modified, the changes are dynamically reflected
on the array block.

Replace
Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the
original source objects.
Replacement Objects Selects the new source objects.
Base Point Specifies a base point for the replacement objects.

ARRAYEDIT | 49

Item in Array Selects the item whose source objects are to be replaced, and
continues to prompt for additional items.
■

Source objects. Replaces the original set of source objects in the array,
which updates all items that have not been previously replaced.

Base Point
Redefines the base point of the array.
Path arrays are repositioned relative to the new base point.

Rows
Specifies the number and spacing of rows, and the incremental elevation
between them.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last rows.

Columns (Rectangular Arrays)
Specifies the number and spacing of columns.
Expression on page 50
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels.
Expression on page 50
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Method (Path Arrays)
Controls how to distribute items when the path or number of items is edited.
■

Divide. Redistributes items to divide evenly along the length of the path.

■

Measure. Maintains current spacing when the path is edited, or when the
number of items is edited through grips or the Properties palette. When
the number of items is edited using ARRAYEDIT, you are prompted to
redefine the distribution method.

Items (Path and Polar Arrays)
Specifies the number of items in the array.
For path arrays whose Method property is set to Measure, you are prompted
to redefine the distribution method. The same prompts are available from
ARRAYPATH on page 53.

50 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Align Items (Path Arrays)
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item (ARRAYPATH,
Orientation option).

Z Direction (Path Arrays)
Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to
naturally bank the items along a 3D path.

Angle Between (Polar Arrays)
Specifies the angle between items.
Expression on page 50

Fill Angle (Polar Arrays)
Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array.
Expression on page 50

Rotate Items (Polar Arrays)
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.

Reset
Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

Exit
Exits the command.

Array Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Associative Arrays

Edits associative array objects and their source objects.

Access Methods

Button

Array Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 51

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Array
Toolbar: Modify II

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Columns Panel (Rectangular Arrays)
Column Count Specifies the number of columns.
Column Spacing Specifies the spacing of columns.
Total Column Distance Specifies the total distance between the first and last
columns.

Items Panel (Path and Polar Arrays)
Item Count Specifies the number of items.
Item Spacing Specifies the spacing of items.
Total Item Distance Specifies the total distance between the first and last
items.

Rows Panel
Row Count Specifies the number of rows.
Row Spacing Specifies the spacing of rows.
Total Row Distance Specifies the total distance between the first and last
rows.
Incremental Elevation Specifies the incremental elevation between rows.

Levels Panel
Level Count Specifies the number of levels.
Level Spacing Specifies the spacing of levels.
Total Level Distance Specifies the total distance between the first and last
levels.

Properties Panel
Base Point Redefines the base point of the array.
Path arrays are repositioned relative to the new base point.
Measure (Path Arrays) Maintains current item spacing when the path is
edited, or when the number of items is edited through grips, or the Properties
palette.

52 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Divide (Path Arrays) Redistributes items to divide evenly along the length
of the path.
Align Items (Path Arrays) Controls the whether to maintain the starting
orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the starting
orientation.
Z Direction (Path Arrays) Controls whether to maintain the original Z
direction of the items or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path.
Rotate Items (Polar Arrays) Controls whether items are rotated as they are
arrayed.

Options Panel
Edit Source Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects
(or replacement source objects) for a selected item.
Replace Item Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items
referencing the original source objects.
Reset Array Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

ARRAYPATH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Path Arrays

Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array dropdown ➤ Path Array
Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Path Array
Toolbar: Modify

ARRAYPATH | 53

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Path option in ARRAY on page 43.

The path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Select path curve on page 54: Use an object selection method
Enter number of items on page 54 along path or [Orientation on page
54/Expression on page 55] : Specify the number of items or enter
an option
Specify base point on page 55 or [Key point on page 55] :
Specify a base point or enter an option
Specify direction to align with path or [2Points/Normal] : Press Enter
or select and option
Specify the distance between items on page 55 along path or [Divide on page
56/Total on page 56/Expression on page 55] :
Specify a distance or enter an option
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative on page 56/Base point/Items on page
56/Rows on page 56/Levels on page 56/Align items on page 56/Z direction
on page 57/eXit on page 57]: Press Enter or select an option

Path Curve
Specifies the object to use for the path of the array. Select a line, polyline, 3D
polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse.

Number of Items
Specifies the number of items in the array.
Orientation Controls whether the selected objects are reoriented (rotated)
relative to the starting direction of the path before being moved to the start
point of the path.
■

2 Points. Specifies two points to define the direction to be aligned with
the starting direction of the path.

54 | Chapter 2 A Commands

■

Normal. Objects are aligned to be normal to the starting direction of the
path.

NOTE The Align Items on page 56 option controls the whether to maintain the
starting orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the
starting orientation.

Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint point (or key point)
on the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects
of the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Distance Between Items
Specifies the distance between items.

ARRAYPATH | 55

Divide Divides items evenly along the entire length of the path.
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last items.
Expression on page 55

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

Items
Edits the number of items in the array.
If the Method property is set to Measure, you are prompted to redefine the
distribution method (Distance Between Items on page 55, Divide on page 56,
and Total on page 56 options).

Rows
Specifies the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression on page 55
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last rows.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels in the array.
Expression on page 55
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Align Items
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the first item’s orientation (Orientation on page 54
option).

56 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Z Direction
Controls whether to maintain the items’ original Z direction or to naturally
bank the items along a 3D path.

Exit
Exits the command.

ARRAYPOLAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Polar Arrays

Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or
axis of rotation.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array dropdown ➤ Polar Array
Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Polar Array
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Polar option in ARRAY on page 43.

ARRAYPOLAR | 57

Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center
point or axis of rotation.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Specify center point on page 58 of array or [Base point on page 58/Axis of
rotation on page 58]: Specify a center point, or enter an option
Enter number of items on page 58 or [Angle between on page 59/Expression
on page 58] : Specify the number of items or enter an option
Specify the angle to fill on page 59 (+=ccw, -=cw) or [Expression]: Enter a fill
angle or enter an option
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative on page 59/Base point/Items/Angle
between/Fill angle/ROWs on page 59/Levels on page 59/ROTate items on page
59/eXit on page 59]: Press Enter or select an option

Center Point
Specifies the point around which to distribute the array items. The axis of
rotation is the Z axis of the current UCS.

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on
the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects of
the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Axis of Rotation
Specifies a custom axis of rotation defined by two specified points.

Items
Specifies the number of items in the array.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.
NOTE When defining the fill angle in an expression, the (+ or -) mathematical
symbol in the resultant value does not affect the direction of the array.

58 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Angle Between
Specifies the angle between items.
Expression on page 58

Fill Angle
Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array.
Expression on page 58

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

Rows
Edits the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression on page 58
Total Sets the total distance between the first and last rows.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels in the array.
Expression on page 58
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Rotate Items
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.

Exit
Exits the command.

ARRAYPOLAR | 59

ARRAYRECT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Rectangular Arrays

Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array dropdown ➤ Rectangular
Array
Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Rectangular Array
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Rectangular option in ARRAY on page 43.
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

60 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Specify opposite corner for number of items on page 61 or [Base point on page
61/Angle on page 61/Count on page 61] : Enter an option or press Enter
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative on page 61/Base point/Rows on page
62/Columns on page 62/Levels on page 62/eXit on page 62] : Press Enter
or select an option

Items
Specifies the number of items in the array. Use the preview grid to specify a
point that reflects the desired configuration.
Count Specifies the row and column values individually.
■

Expression on page 62

Space Items
Specifies the row and column spacing. Use the preview grid to specify a point
that reflects the desired configuration.
Spacing Specifies the row and column spacing individually.
■

Expression on page 62

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on
the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects of
the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Angle
Specifies the angle of rotation for the row axis. The row and column axes
remain orthogonal to each other. For associative arrays, you can later edit the
individual row and column angles.
You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS on
page 1288. The ANGBASE on page 1380 and ANGDIR on page 1381 system variables
affect the angle of arrays.

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

ARRAYRECT | 61

Rows
Edits the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.
Total Sets the total distance between the first and last rows.

Columns
Edits the number and spacing of columns.
Expression on page 62
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels.
Expression on page 62
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Exit
Exits the command.

ATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

■

Attach Raster Image Files

Inserts an external reference, raster image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or
DGN files) in the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

62 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach

Summary
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type to
Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats.

-ATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Inserts an external reference, raster image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or
DGN files) in the current drawing.

Summary
Attach an external reference, image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN)
file from the command line.

List of Prompts
The list of prompts differs depending on whether you are attaching an
underlay, an image, or an external reference.

DWF and DWFx Underlay Prompts
Path to File Enters the location of the DWF or DWFx file including the file
name.
Sheet name Enters a sheet name.
? Enters multiple sheets.
* Lists sheets available in the DWF or DWFx file.
Insertion point Specify the location of the lower, left-hand corner of the
underlay by clicking on screen or entering the X,Y coordinates.
Base Image Size Displays the underlay’s height and width in units

-ATTACH | 63

Scale Factor Resizes the underlay. For example, if the base image size is 36 x
24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48.
Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay.

PDF Underlay Prompts
Path to File Enters the location of the PDF file including the file name.
Page Number Enters a page number.
? Enters multiple pages.
* Lists pages available in the PDF file.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the lower, left-hand corner of the
underlay by clicking on screen or entering the X,Y coordinates.
Base Image Size Displays the underlay’s height and width in units
Scale Factor Resizes the underlay. For example, if the base image size is 36 x
24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48.
Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay.

DGN Underlay Prompts
Path to File Enters the location of the DGN file including the file name.
Name of Model Enters a model name.
? Enters multiple models.
* Lists pages available in the DGN file.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the lower, left-hand corner of the
underlay by clicking on screen or entering the X,Y coordinates.
Base Image Size Displays the underlay’s height and width in units
Scale Factor Resizes the underlay. For example, if the base image size is 36 x
24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48.
Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay.

Image Prompts
Path to File Enters the location of the image file including the file name.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the lower, left-hand corner of the
image by clicking on screen or entering the X,Y coordinates.
Base Image Size Displays the image’s height and width in units

64 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Scale Factor Resizes the image. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24
and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48.
Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay.

External Reference Prompts
Path to File Enters the location of the external reference file including the
file name.
Reference Type Selects whether to attach this file as an underlay or an overlay.
Press Enter to attach the file as an underlay (attachment).
NOTE Unlike attached external references, overlaid external references are not
included when the drawing is attached or overlaid as an external reference to
another drawing.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the lower, left-hand corner of the
external reference by clicking on screen or entering the X,Y coordinates.
Scale Sets the scale factor for the X,Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is
the absolute value of the specified scale factor.
■

Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value

■

Specify insertion point:

■

Specify rotations angle <0>:

X, Y, Z Sets the X, Y, and Z scale factor.
■

Specifies scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value

■

Specifies insertion point:

■

Specifies rotations angle <0>:

Rotate Sets the rotation angle for both the individual blocks and the entire
array.
PScale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of
the block as it is dragged into position.
PX, PY, PZ Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display
of the block as it is dragged into position.
PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Base Image Size Displays the external reference’s height and width in units

-ATTACH | 65

Scale Factor Resizes the external reference. For example, if the base image
size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the external reference will
display at 72 x 48.
Unit Changes the type of units to scale the external reference.

ATTACHURL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing

Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] : Enter a or press ENTER

Area
Creates the URLLAYER layer, draws a polyline on that layer, and attaches a
URL to the polyline.
The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to
URLLAYER. The default color is red. When you move the cursor over the area
in the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a
URL is attached to the area.

Object
Attaches a URL to the selected object.
When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing, the cursor changes
to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.

66 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ATTDEF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes

Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes.
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes

Summary
The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition.
Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on.

Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes

Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text
settings for an attribute.

ATTDEF | 67

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Mode
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the
block in a drawing.
The default values are stored in the AFLAGS on page 1380 system variable.
Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute
definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions.
Invisible
Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert
the block. ATTDISP on page 74 overrides Invisible mode.
Constant
Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify
Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the
block.
Preset
Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a
preset attribute.

68 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Lock Position
Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked,
the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing,
and multiline attributes can be resized.
Multiple Lines
Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this
option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute.
NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be
included in an action's selection set.

Attribute
Sets attribute data.
Tag
Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute
tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are
automatically changed to uppercase.
Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this
attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as
a prompt. If you select Constant in the Mode area, the Prompt option is not
available.
Default
Specifies the default attribute value.
Multiline Editor Button
When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a
text formatting toolbar and ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE on
page 1387 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the
abbreviated version, or the full version.
For more information, see the In-Place Text Editor.
NOTE Several options in the full In-Place Text Editor are grayed out to preserve
compatibility with single-line attributes.

Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or select Specify
On-screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute
in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.

Attribute Definition Dialog Box | 69

Specify On-Screen
Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes. Use the pointing
device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that
it will be associated with.
X
Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.

Text Settings
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
Justification
Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT on page 1229 for a
description of the justification options.
Text Style
Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text
styles are displayed. To load or create a text style, see STYLE on page 1180.
Annotative
Specifies that the attribute is . If the block is annotative, the attribute will
match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn more
about annotative objects.
Text Height
Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to
specify a height with your pointing device. The height is measured from the
origin to the location you specify. If you select a text style that has fixed height
(anything other than 0.0), or if you select Align in the Justification list, the
Height option is not available.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose
Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. The rotation
angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select
Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not available.

70 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Boundary Width
Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute
before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no
restriction on the length of a line of text.
Not available for single-line attributes.

Align Below Previous Attribute Definition
Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you
have not previously created an attribute definition, this option is not available.

-ATTDEF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current attribute modes: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current
Preset=current Lock position=current Annotative =current Multiple line =current
Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock
position/Annotative/Multiple lines] :
Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points
Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is
displayed only if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this
prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt
is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Specify location of multiline attribute: Specify a point (this prompt is displayed
only if you turned on Multiple line mode)
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point or enter an option (this prompt is displayed
only if you turned on Multiple line mode)

Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode
(either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, p, l, a, or m toggles the modes
on or off. Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings.

-ATTDEF | 71

The AFLAGS on page 1380 system variable stores the current mode settings and
can be used to set the default modes.
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the
block. ATTDISP on page 74 overrides Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you
insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing
a preset attribute.
Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference.
When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block
using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be
included in an action's selection set.
Annotative Specifies that the attribute is .
Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines
of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for
the attribute.

Attribute Tag Name
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in
the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation
marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase.

Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this
attribute definition. If you press ENTER, the attribute tag is used as the prompt.
If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed.
NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need
leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash
(\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.

Default Attribute Value
Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when
a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you
turn on Constant mode, the Attribute Value prompt is displayed instead.
When Multiple Line mode is off, -ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as
the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.

72 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER
Specify paper text height : Specify a height, or press ENTER
The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text
style is .
For a description of each option, see TEXT on page 1229.
NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need
leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash
(\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.
When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts
used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT
on page 762.

Attribute Value (Constant Mode)
Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if
you turn on Constant mode.
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. For a description of each
option, see TEXT on page 1229.
When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts
used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT
on page 762.

Location of Multiline Attribute (Multiple Line Mode)
Specifies the first corner of the bounding box for the multiple-line text. This
location is used as the starting point for the attribute.

Opposite Corner (Multiple Line Mode)
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and width of the multiple-line text. The arrow
within the rectangle indicates the direction of the text flow.

-ATTDEF | 73

ATTDISP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Block Attributes

Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel dropdown ➤ Retain Attribute Display
Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Attribute Display
Command entry: 'attdisp for transparent use

Summary

74 | Chapter 2 A Commands

The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings. The current
visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE on page 1388 system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] :
Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are
displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed.
On Makes all attributes visible, overriding the original visibility settings.
Off Makes all attributes invisible, overriding the original visibility settings.

ATTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Changes attribute information in a block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Attribute.
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single

Summary
The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific
block.
If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed to edit
attribute values and properties independent of a block.

ATTEDIT | 75

Edit Attributes Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Changes attribute information in a block.

Summary
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use
-ATTEDIT.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name
Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained
in the block is displayed in this dialog box.
List of Attributes
Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute
values. If the block contains additional attributes, click Previous or Next to
navigate through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers.
Multiple-line attributes display the In-Place Text Editor on page 763 with the
Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE

76 | Chapter 2 A Commands

on page 1387 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either
the abbreviated version, or the full version.
Previous
Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the
selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display
the additional attributes.
Next
Displays the next eight attribute values. If the block contains no additional
attributes, Next is unavailable.

-ATTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Blocks

List of Prompts
If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press Enter to edit attributes
one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally
The following prompts filter the attributes to be changed based on attribute
tag, current value, or object selection.

Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be
visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Attribute values are case sensitive.

-ATTEDIT | 77

The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change
any properties of the attribute you select.
Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] :
Enter the property to change, or press Enter for the next attribute
If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does
not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of
the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value. The X remains
on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.

Value
Changes or replaces an attribute value.
Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press Enter
Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value.
Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not
as wild-card characters.
Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value.
If you press Enter, the attribute value is empty (null).

Position
Changes the text insertion point.

If the attribute is aligned, ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text
baseline.

78 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Height
Changes the text height.

When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the
specified point and the start point of the text.

Angle
Changes the rotation angle.

If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the
specified point and the start point of the text.

Style
Changes the style setting.

Layer
Changes the layer.

Color
Changes the color.
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or
number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer
or byblock.

-ATTEDIT | 79

True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.
If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in
the color book, such as PANTONE® 573.

Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more attributes,
ATTEDIT ends.

No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible
and invisible attributes.
Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with
another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or
all of the attributes.
Yes Edits only visible attributes.
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which
normally are not visible and cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\).
Select the attribute you want to change.
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally,
not as wild-card characters.
No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are
not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the
command.
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which
normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\).
The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute
value are selected.
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally,
not as wild-card characters.

80 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ATTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Attribute Extraction

Summary
The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Attribute Extraction Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file.

ATTEXT | 81

Summary
Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which
you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for
the information.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

File Format
Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Comma Delimited File (CDF)
Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing
that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. Commas
separate the fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose the character
fields.
Space Delimited File (SDF)
Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing
that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. The fields of
each record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character string
delimiters are not appropriate.
DXF Format Extract File (DXX)
Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing
™
only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF format
extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes
the output file from normal DXF files.

Select Objects
Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with
attributes. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found
shows the number of objects you selected.

Number Found
Indicates the number of objects you selected using Select Objects.

Template File
Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file
name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files
using a standard file selection dialog box. The default file extension is .txt. If
you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available.

82 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Output File
Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the
path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to
search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box.
The .txt file name extension is appended for CDF or SDF files and the .dxx file
name extension for DXF files.

-ATTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

List of Prompts
Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf/Objects] :
Enter an option or press Enter
CDF: Comma-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each
block reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of each record.
Single quotation marks enclose the character fields.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute
extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format.
SDF: Space-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each
block reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width;
therefore, field separators or character string delimiters are not used.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute
extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format.
DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing
Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and
end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file
name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format.

-ATTEXT | 83

Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.

ATTIPEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block.

Summary
If you select a single-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page
763 without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Right-click to display
options.

If you select a multiple-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page
763 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting
of the ATTIPE on page 1387 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar
displayed is either the abbreviated version shown, or the full version.
Use the abbreviated version for compatibility with previous AutoCAD LT
releases and editing operations. Use the full version for additional text
formatting options.
NOTE Not all MTEXT formatting options are available for multiline attributes even
with the full In-Place Editor.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select attribute to edit: Select an attribute within a block

84 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ATTSYNC
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified
block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes
Toolbar: Modify II

Summary
You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current
attributes defined for the blocks.
Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes
that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not
change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks.
NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one
command.
Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the
name of the block you want to update.
Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block
whose attributes you want to update.
If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error
message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block.

ATTSYNC | 85

WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the
ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated
with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party
applications.

AUDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu

➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Audit

Summary
For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the
Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects
that belong to the current paper space or model space.
If you set the AUDITCTL on page 1390 system variable to 1, AUDIT creates a
text file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in
the same folder as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt.
If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER on page
1066 to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors.

86 | Chapter 2 A Commands

AUTOCOMPLETE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

The Command Line Window

Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the
Command prompt.

Access Methods
Command entry: Right-click within the Command Window ➤
AutoComplete ➤ option

Summary
Entering a command or system variable at the Command prompt is assisted
with several features that list or complete the commands and system variables
as they are being typed. The AUTOCOMPLETE command controls which of
the features are turned on.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Append Controls whether commands and system variables are automatically
completed as you type.
List Controls whether a list of valid commands and system variables is
displayed as you type.
Icon Controls whether the corresponding icon for a command is displayed
in the list. The same icon is used for all system variables.
System variables Controls whether system variables are also included with
the Append and List features.
Delay Sets a time delay in seconds before the Append and List features take
effect.
On Enables the operation of the AUTOCOMPLETE features that are currently
turned on.

AUTOCOMPLETE | 87

Off Suppresses the operation of AUTOCOMPLETE features without changing
their settings.

AUTOPUBLISH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Publish Options

Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified
location.

Access Methods
Menu: Application menu
➤ Options ➤ Plot and Publish tab
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands
active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Options. Select the Plot and Publish tab.
Command entry: options

Summary
Publishes a drawing to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. The file format (DWF,
DWFx, or PDF) is specified in the Auto Publish dialog box on page 89.
To view information about the published drawings, click the Plotting Details
Report Available icon in the tray on the right side of the status bar. Clicking
this icon opens the Plot and Publish Details dialog box, which provides
information about your completed plot and publish jobs. This information
is also saved to the Plot and Publish log file. The shortcut menu for this icon
also provides an option to view the most recently published DWF, DWFx, or
PDF file.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
AutoPublish DWF Automatically publishes the drawing to a DWF, DWFx, or
PDF file. The file format (DWF, DWFx, or PDF) is specified in the Auto Publish
dialog box on page 89.

88 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Location Specifies a directory where the published drawings are stored. Opens
Select a Folder for Generated Files dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box on page 826).

Auto Publish Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Publish Options

Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified
location.

Summary
Specifies options for publishing drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files when
you save or close a drawing file, or issue the AUTOPUBLISH on page 88
command.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Auto-Publish Options
Specifies where DWF or PDF files are saved when you publish drawing sheets.
Publish on Specifies when the publishing takes place.
■

Save (Publishes when the drawing is saved)

■

Close (Publishes when the drawing is closed)

■

Prompt on Save (Publishes when the drawing is prompted to save)

■

Prompt on Close (Publishes when the drawing is prompted to close)

Location Specifies a directory where exported files are saved when you publish
drawings by selecting the following options in the list:
■

Drawing folder

■

DWF and PDF (sub-folder relative to Drawing folder)

■

Previously selected location

Auto Publish Options Dialog Box | 89

Click the [...] button to specify a new location to save the published drawings.
Include Specifies whether to publish the model, the layouts or both the model
and layouts are saved when you publish drawings.

General DWF/PDF options
Specifies options for creating a single-sheet or multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, and
PDF files.
File Format Specifies whether the DWG should be published as a DWF, DWFx,
or PDF file.
Type Specifies that a single-sheet or a multi-sheet is generated for all the sheets
listed in the Publish dialog box.
Layer Information Specifies whether layer information is included in the
published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.
NOTE Layer information for 3D DWF entries does not get published.
Merge Control Specifies whether overlapping lines overwrite (the top line
hides the bottom line) or merge (the colors of the lines blend together).

DWF Data Options
Lists and allows you to specify the data that you can optionally include in the
published file.
Password Protection Specifies options for protecting DWF, DWFx, or PDF
files with passwords.
Block Information Specifies whether block property and attribute information
is included in the published DWF, DWFx, or PDF files.
NOTE You must set block information to Include in order for block template file
information to be available.
Block Template File Allows you to create a new block template (DXE) file,
edit an existing block template file, or use the settings of a previously created
block template file.
Create opens the Publish Block Template dialog box on page 1030, in which
you can create a new block template.
Edit opens the Select Block Template dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box on page 826), in which you can select an existing block template
to modify.

90 | Chapter 2 A Commands

B Commands

3

BACTION
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Actions

Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.

Summary
This command is available only in the Block Editor on page 127. Actions define
how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or changes when the
custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You
associate actions with parameters.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition with which to associate
the action
You can associate parameters with the following types of actions.

Array
Adds an array action to the current dynamic block definition. An array action
can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the
selection set of objects arrays when the action is triggered in a dynamic block
reference.

91

Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when
modified.
Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is
selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array
action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer.
■

Specify opposite corner.

Enter Distance Between Rows or Specify Unit Cell When an XY parameter
is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array
action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer. To specify
unit cell, enter two values separated by a comma for each of the two points.
Specify Action Location When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0,
determines where the action is placed within the Block Editor.

Lookup
The lookup action displays the Property Lookup Table dialog box on page 142
where you can create a lookup table for the block reference.

Flip
A set of objects is flipped around the reflection line of the flip parameter when
the action is triggered in the block reference.
A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter.
Specify Selection Set Determines the objects that will be mirrored about the
flip parameter reflection line.

Move
Specifies that the selection set of objects moves when the action is triggered
in a dynamic block reference. A move action can be associated with a point,
linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Objects Select Objects on page 92
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 92
Specify Parameter Point When a linear or polar parameter is selected,
determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine
the base point of the action.
When an XY parameter is selected, determines which corner of the parameter
will be associated with the action. The objects selected for the action will be
moved relative to this point.
Multiplier When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0 and the action
is triggered, changes the associated parameter value by the specified distance.

92 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Offset When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0 and the action is
triggered, increases or decreases the angle of the selected parameter by the
specified value.
XY When an XY parameter is selected, specifies whether the distance applied
to the action is the parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the
parameter's base point.

Rotate
Specifies that the selection set of objects rotates when the action is triggered
in a dynamic block reference. A rotate action can only be associated with a
rotation parameter.
Specify Selection Set Determines the objects that will be rotated about the
parameter base point.

Scale
Specifies that the selection set of objects scales relative to the defined base
point when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A scale action
can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Objects Select Objects on page 92
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 92
Base Type Specifies whether the base point for the action is dependent or
independent of the associated parameter’s base point.
Dependent Scales or moves selected objects relative to the base point of the
associated parameter.

Independent Scales or moves selected objects relative to a base point defined
separately from that of the associated parameter.

BACTION | 93

XY When an XY parameter is selected, sets the Scale Type custom property.
■

X. Scales the selected object only along the X-axis of the XY parameter.

■

Y. Scales the selected object only along the Y-axis of the XY parameter.

■

XY. Scales the selected object along both the X- and Y-axes of the XY
parameter.

Stretch
Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action
is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A stretch action can be associated
with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Specify Parameter Point When a linear or polar parameter is selected,
determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine
the base point of the action.
When an XY parameter is selected, determines which corner of the parameter
will be associated with the action. The objects selected for the action will be
stretched relative to this point.
Specify Stretch Frame Creates a box that represents the boundary area for
the action when modified.
■

Specify opposite corner.

■

Specify objects.

CPolygon Creates a polygon that represents the boundary area for the action
when modified.
■

First polygon point.

■

Specify endpoint.

94 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 92
■

Multiplier on page 92

■

Offset on page 93

■

XY on page 93

Select Objects Select Objects on page 92

Polar Stretch
Specifies that the selection set of objects stretches or moves when the action
is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A polar stretch action can only be
associated with a polar parameter.
Specify Parameter Point Determines whether the start or end point of the
parameter is used to determine the base point of the action.
Specify Stretch Frame Specify Stretch Frame on page 94
■

CPolygon on page 94

Specify Objects to Rotate Only Determines the objects in the selection that
will rotate and not stretch.
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 92
■

Multiplier on page 92

■

Offset on page 93

BACTIONBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Actions and Parameters

Displays or hides action bars for a selection set of parameter objects.

Access Methods

BACTIONBAR | 95

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Show
All Actions
Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Hide
All Actions
Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionbar

Summary
You can only use the BACTIONBAR command in the Block Editor on page
127 and when in Action Bar mode (BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 system
variable is set to 1). The BACTIONBAR command controls the display of action
bars for parameter objects in the Block Editor. An action bar is a toolbar-like
element that displays the actions associated with a parameter object.
On the ribbon, you can also show or hide all action bars for all parameter
objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Show on page 96/Hide on page 96/Reset] : Specify
a parameter to show or hide the action bars

Show
Displays the action bars for the selected parameter objects in the Block Editor.

Hide
Hides the action bars for the selected parameter objects in the Block Editor.

Reset
Displays all action bars for the parameter objects in the Block Editor and resets
to the default position relative to the parameters they are associated with.

BACTIONSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic
block definition.

96 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Access Methods
Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionset
Shortcut menu: Select an action in the block definition. Right-click in the
Block Editor drawing area. Click Action Selection Set, and then click an option.

Summary
Re-specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action by creating
a new selection set or by adding to or removing objects from the existing
selection set. You can only use the BACTIONSET command in the Block Editor
on page 127.
NOTE The BACTIONSET command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on
page 1396 system variable is set to 1.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select action: Select an action in the current dynamic block definition

Specify Selection Set
Creates a new selection set for the selected action, or modifies an existing
selection set.
Select objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when
modified.
Remove Removes objects from the original selection set associated with the
selected action.
Specify Stretch Frame Creates a box that represents the boundary area for
the action when modified.
■

Specify opposite corner.

■

Specify objects.

CPolygon Creates a polygon that represents the boundary area for the action
when modified.
■

First polygon point.

■

Specify endpoint.

Specify Objects to Rotate Only Determines the objects in the selection that
will rotate and not stretch.

BACTIONSET | 97

BACTIONTOOL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Actions

Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.

Access Methods

Panel

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel
Command entry: bedit ➤ bactiontool

Summary
Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or
changes when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in
a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. The BACTIONTOOL
command is used in the Block Editor on page 127 either on the ribbon or by
action tools on the Actions tab of the Block Authoring palettes.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select action type [Array/Lookup/Flip/Move/Rotate/Scale/sTretch/Polar stretch]:

Array

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Array

98 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specifies that the selection set of objects arrays when the action is triggered
in a dynamic block reference. An array action can be associated with a linear,
polar, or XY parameter.
Select Parameter Select a parameter to associate with the action.
Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when
modified.
Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is
selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array
action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer.
■

Specify opposite corner.

Enter Distance Between Rows or Specify Unit Cell When an XY parameter
is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array
action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer. To specify
unit cell, enter two values separated by a comma for each of the two points.
Specify Action Location When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0,
determines where the action is placed within the Block Editor.

Lookup

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Lookup
The lookup action displays the Property Lookup Table dialog box where you
can create a lookup table for the block reference.

Flip

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Flip
A set of objects is flipped around the reflection line of the flip parameter when
the action is triggered in the block reference. A flip action can only be
associated with a flip parameter.

BACTIONTOOL | 99

Specify Selection Set Determines the objects that will be mirrored about the
flip parameter reflection line.

Move

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Move
Specifies that the selection set of objects moves when the action is triggered
in a dynamic block reference. A move action can be associated with a point,
linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99
Select Objects Select Objects on page 99
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99
Specify Parameter Point When a linear or polar parameter is selected,
determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine
the base point of the action.
When an XY parameter is selected, determines which corner of the parameter
will be associated with the action. The objects selected for the action will be
moved relative to this point.
Multiplier When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0 and the action
is triggered, changes the associated parameter value by the specified distance.
Offset When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0 and the action is
triggered, increases or decreases the angle of the selected parameter by the
specified value.
XY When an XY parameter is selected, specifies whether the distance applied
to the action is the parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the
parameter's base point.

Rotate

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Rotate

100 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specifies that the selection set of objects rotates when the action is triggered
in a dynamic block reference. A rotate action can only be associated with a
rotation parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99
Select Objects Select Objects on page 99
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99
Base Type Specifies whether the base point for the action is dependent or
independent of the associated parameter’s base point.
Dependent Scales or moves selected objects relative to the base point of the
associated parameter.

Independent Scales or moves selected objects relative to a base point defined
separately from that of the associated parameter.

Scale

Button

BACTIONTOOL | 101

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Scale
Specifies that the selection set of objects scales relative to the defined base
point when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A scale action
can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99
Select Objects Select Objects on page 99
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99
Base Type Base Type on page 101
■

Dependent on page 101

■

Independent on page 101

XY When an XY parameter is selected, sets the Scale Type custom property.
■

X. Scales the selected object only along the X-axis of the XY parameter.

■

Y. Scales the selected object only along the Y-axis of the XY parameter.

■

XY. Scales the selected object along both the X- and Y-axes of the XY
parameter.

Stretch

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Stretch
Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action
is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A stretch action can be associated
with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99
Specify Parameter Point When a linear or polar parameter is selected,
determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine
the base point of the action.
When an XY parameter is selected, determines which corner of the parameter
will be associated with the action. The objects selected for the action will be
stretched relative to this point.

102 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specify Stretch Frame Creates a box that represents the boundary area for
the action when modified.
■

Specify opposite corner.

■

Specify objects.

CPolygon Creates a polygon that represents the boundary area for the action
when modified.
■

First polygon point.

■

Specify endpoint.

Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99
■

Multiplier on page 100

■

Offset on page 100

■

XY on page 100

Select Objects Select Objects on page 99

Polar Stretch

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down
➤ Polar Stretch
Specifies that the selection set of objects stretches or moves when the action
is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A polar stretch action can only be
associated with a polar parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99
Specify Parameter Point Determines whether the start or end point of the
parameter is used to determine the base point of the action.
Specify Stretch Frame Specify Stretch Frame on page 103
■

CPolygon on page 103

Specify Objects to Rotate Only Determines the objects in the selection that
will rotate and not stretch.

BACTIONTOOL | 103

Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99
■

Multiplier on page 100

■

Offset on page 100

BASE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Set Base Point
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base
Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use)

Summary
The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you
insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this
base point is used as the insertion base point.

BASSOCIATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

104 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition.

Summary
Associates an orphaned action with a parameter. You can only use the
BASSOCIATE command in the Block Editor on page 127. An action becomes
orphaned when the parameter with which it is associated is removed from
the block definition.
NOTE The BASSOCIATE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on
page 1396 system variable is set to 1.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select action object: Select an action in the current block definition that is not
associated with a parameter
Select parameter to associate with action: Select a parameter to associate with
the action (if you selected a lookup action, you can select one or more lookup
parameters)
If you selected an action and parameter combination that requires that the
action be associated with a key point on the parameter, prompts are displayed
to select the parameter point to associate with the action.

BATTMAN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Manages the attributes for a selected block definition.

Access Methods

Button

BATTMAN | 105

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block Definition panel ➤ Manage Attributes
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager
Toolbar: Modify II

Summary
The Block Attribute Manager is displayed.
If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message
is displayed.
This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block
definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in
the block references.

Block Attribute Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing.

Summary
You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks,
and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when
inserting a block.

106 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default,
Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed
in the attribute list. For each selected block, a description below the attribute
list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the
current layout.
You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by
choosing Settings.
Double-click an attribute to display the Edit Attribute dialog box, where you
can modify attribute properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Select Block
You can use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area.
When you choose Select Block, the dialog box closes until you select a block
from the drawing or you cancel by pressing ESC.
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you
save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes
before selecting another block.
Block
Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. Select
the block whose attributes you want to modify.
List of Attributes
Displays the properties of each attribute in the selected block.
Blocks Found in Drawing
Reports the total number of instances of the selected block in the current
drawing.
Blocks Found in Current Space
Reports the number of instances of the selected block in the current model
space or layout.
Sync
Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties
currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in
each block.

Block Attribute Manager | 107

Move Up
Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt sequence. The Move Up
button is not available when a constant attribute is selected.
Move Down
Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt sequence. The Move Down
button is not available when a constant attribute is selected.
Edit
Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box, where you can modify attribute properties.
Remove
Removes the selected attribute from the block definition. If Apply Changes
to Existing References is selected in the Settings dialog box before you choose
Remove, the attribute is removed from all instances of the block in the current
drawing. The Remove button is not available for blocks with only one attribute.
Settings
Opens the Block Attribute Settings dialog box, where you can customize how
attribute information is listed in the Block Attribute Manager.
Apply
Applies the changes made and leaves the dialog box open.

Edit Attribute Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.

Summary
The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs:
■

Attribute on page 109

■

Text Options on page 110

108 | Chapter 3 B Commands

■

Properties on page 112

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name
Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited.
Auto Preview Changes
Controls whether or not the drawing area is immediately updated to display
any visible attribute changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is selected,
changes are immediately visible. If Auto Preview Changes is cleared, changes
are not immediately visible.
Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small improvement in performance.
Auto Preview Changes is not available if Apply Changes to Existing References
is not selected.

Attribute Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)
Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned
value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts users to
enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that identifies the
attribute.

Mode
Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears.
Invisible
Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the
attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value.
Constant

Edit Attribute Dialog Box | 109

Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change
this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set
to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you
can assign a value to the attribute.
Verify
Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the
values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block.
If this option is cleared, verification is not performed.
Preset
Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected, sets the attribute to its
default value when the block is inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute's
default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block.
Lock Location Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference.
When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block
using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
Multiple Lines
Indicates whether the attribute was defined as a Multiple Lines attribute and
can contain multiple lines of text.

Data
Data options set the attribute text that is displayed.
Tag
Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute.
Prompt
Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block.
Default
Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block.

Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)
Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the
drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.

110 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Text Style
Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are
assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box.
Justification
Specifies how attribute text is justified.
Height
Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text.
Annotative
Specifies that the attribute is .
Backwards
Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards.
Upside Down
Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down.
Width Factor
Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0
condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle
Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis.

Edit Attribute Dialog Box | 111

Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)
Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype
for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot
style to the attribute using the Properties tab.

Layer
Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype of attribute text.
Color
Specifies the attribute's text color.
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweight of attribute text.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY on page
1575 system variable is off.
Plot Style
Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is
not available.

112 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Display in List
Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute list. Only the selected
properties are displayed in the list. The Tag property is always selected.
Select All
Selects all properties.
Clear All
Clears all properties.
Emphasize Duplicate Tags
Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. If this option is selected, duplicate
attribute tags are displayed in red type in the attribute list. If this option is
cleared, duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list.

Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box | 113

Apply Changes to Existing References
Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances of the block whose
attributes you are modifying. If selected, updates all instances of the block
with the new attribute definitions. If cleared, updates only new instances of
the block with the new attribute definitions.
You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to apply changes
immediately to existing block instances. This temporarily overrides the Apply
Changes to Existing References option.

BATTORDER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Specifies the order of attributes for a block.

Summary
Displays the Attribute Order dialog box, which controls the order in which
attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference.
You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor on page 127.

Attribute Order Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you
insert or edit a block reference.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

114 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Attribute Definitions
Lists the attribute definitions in the current block.
Move Up
Moves the selected attribute definition up in the list.
Move Down
Moves the selected attribute definition down in the list.

BAUTHORPALETTE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Custom Block Authoring Tools

Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring
Palettes

Summary
Displays the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. You can
open the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor.
The Block Authoring Palettes window contains the following tabs:
■

Parameters tab

■

Actions tab

■

Parameter Sets tab

BAUTHORPALETTE | 115

BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Custom Block Authoring Tools

Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.

Summary
You can close the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor.

BCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of the Block Editor

■

Define Blocks

■

Modify Blocks

Closes the Block Editor.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Close panel ➤ Close Block Editor
Shortcut menu: In the Block Editor, right-click in the drawing area. Click
Close Block Editor

116 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
Closes the Block Editor. If you have modified the block definition since it was
last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.

BCONSTRUCTION
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Construction Geometry Within a Block

Converts geometry into construction geometry.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Construction

Summary
The BCONSTRUCTION command is used in the Block Editor on page 127 to
convert geometry into construction geometry. This command also controls
the display of construction geometry and changes construction geometry back
to regular geometry.
Construction geometry is not displayed in the block reference; in the Block
Editor it is displayed with a gray dashed linetype. You cannot modify the
color, linetype, or layer of the construction geometry.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or [Show all on page 118/Hide all on page 118]: Select objects to
convert or revert geometry
Enter an option [Convert/Revert] : Specify an option

BCONSTRUCTION | 117

Convert
Converts the valid selected objects into construction geometry and displays
the number of objects converted. Authoring objects are not converted.

Revert
Changes the selected objects back to regular geometry. The geometry is set to
the current layer.

Show All
Displays all construction geometry.

Hide All
Hides all construction geometry.

BCYCLEORDER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference.

Summary
Displays the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box. The BCYCLEORDER command
is available only in the Block Editor on page 127.

Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Specifies the grip-cycling order for the insertion point of a dynamic block
reference.

118 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
When you insert a dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the Ctrl
key to cycle through the grips that have cycling turned on in the block
definition. The grip you select as you cycle is used as the insertion point for
the block reference.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Grip Cycling List
Lists the grips in the dynamic block definition. A check mark in the cycling
column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip.
Move Up
Moves the selected grip up in the cycling order for the dynamic block reference.
Move Down
Moves the selected grip down in the cycling order for the dynamic block
reference.
Cycling
Turns cycling on or off for the selected grip. A check mark in the cycling
column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip.

Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box | 119

BEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

■

Modify Blocks

■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor
Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area.
Click Block Editor.

Summary
The Edit Block Definition dialog box on page 121 is displayed. Select a block
definition to edit or enter a name for a new block definition to create, then
click OK to open the Block Editor.
If the ribbon is active, the Block Editor ribbon contextual tab on page 122 is
displayed. Otherwise, the Block Editor toolbar is displayed.
When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot
be opened.
The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block
definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic
behavior to blocks.

120 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Edit Block Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

■

Modify Blocks

■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in
the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to
create in the Block Editor.

Summary
When you click OK, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block
Editor is displayed.
■

If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is
displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor.

■

If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is
displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block to create or edit

Edit Block Definition Dialog Box | 121

Specifies the name of the block to edit or create in the Block Editor. If you
select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor.
After you add dynamic elements to the drawing, you can then save it and
insert it as a dynamic block reference in a drawing.
Name List
Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When
you select a block definition from the list, the name is displayed in the Name
box.
When you click OK, this block definition is opened in the Block Editor. When
you select , the current drawing is opened in the Block
Editor.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected block definition. A lightning bolt icon
indicates that the block is a dynamic block.
Description
Displays the description of the selected block definition.

Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Open/Save Panel
Edit Block Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
Save Block Saves the current block definition.
Test Block Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block.
Save Block As Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

122 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Geometric Panel
Auto Constrain Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects
based on orientation of the objects relative to one another.
Coincident (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains two points together or a point
to a curve (or an extension of a curve).
Colinear (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes two or more line segments to lie
along the same line.
Concentric (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to
the same center point.
Fix (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Locks points and curves in position.
Parallel (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each
other.
Perpendicular (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees
to one another.
Horizontal (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel
to the X axis of the current coordinate system.
Vertical (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel
to the Y axis of the current coordinate system.
Tangent (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains two curves to maintain a point
of tangency to each other or their extensions.
Smooth (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains a spline to be contiguous and
maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline.
Symmetric (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes selected objects to become
symmetrically constrained about a selected line.
Equal (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same
radius, or selected lines to the same length.
Show Constraints Displays constraint bars for the selected objects with
geometric constraints applied to them.
Show All Displays all geometric constraints in the drawing.
Hide All Hides all geometric constraints in the current drawing.
Constraint Settings Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint
bars.

Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 123

Dimensional Panel
Linear (BCPARAMETER) Creates a horizontal or vertical constraint parameter
based on the locations of the extension line origins and the location of the
dimension line similar to the DIMLINEAR command.
Horizontal (BCPARAMETER) Creates a horizontal constraint parameter by
picking two constraint points. Valid objects include lines and polyline
segments.
Vertical (BCPARAMETER) Creates a vertical constraint parameter by picking
two constraint points. Valid objects include lines and polyline segments.
Aligned (BCPARAMETER) Creates an aligned constraint parameter using one
of the following ways.
■

Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the
distance between a point and the closest point on a line.

■

Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned
constraint controls the distance between the two lines.

Radius (BCPARAMETER) Creates a radial constraint parameter for a circle,
arc, or polyline arc segment.
Diameter (BCPARAMETER) Creates a diameter constraint parameter for a
circle, arc, or polyline arc segment.
Angular (BCPARAMETER) Creates an angular constraint parameter by picking
two lines or polyline segments or an arc. It is similar to an angular dimension.
Convert (BCPARAMETER) Converts the dimensional constraints to constraint
parameters.
Block Table Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block.
Constraint Settings Sets preferences in behavior when displaying dimensional
constraints.

Manage Panel
Delete Constraints Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from
a selection set of objects.
Construction Geometry Converts geometry into construction geometry.
Block Constraint Status Turns the constraint display status on and off and
controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level.

124 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Parameters Manager Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all
dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables
in the current drawing.
Authoring Palettes Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block
Editor.
Block Editor Settings Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box.

Action Parameters Panel
Point (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines custom X and Y properties for the
block reference.
Linear (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines the distance between two key
points in the block definition.
Polar (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines a distance and angle for two key
points in the block definition.
XY (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines an X and Y distance from the base
point of a block definition.
Rotation (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines an angle for the block reference.
Flip (BPARAMETER on page 154) Mirrors objects or the entire block reference
about a reflection line.
Alignment (BPARAMETER on page 154) Rotates the block reference about a
point to align with other objects in the drawing.
Visibility (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines objects that will either display
or not display within the block definition.
Lookup (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines user parameters that are
determined by a lookup table.
Basepoint (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines a changeable base point for
the dynamic block reference in relation to the geometry in the block.
Move (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects
moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A move
action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Stretch (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects
will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
A stretch action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.

Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 125

Polar Stretch (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set
of objects stretches or moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block
reference. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter.
Scale (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects
scales relative to the defined base point when the action is triggered in a
dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear,
polar, or XY parameter.
Rotate (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects
scales relative to the defined base point when the action is triggered in a
dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear,
polar, or XY parameter.
Flip (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) A set of objects is flipped around the
reflection line of the flip parameter when the action is triggered in the block
reference. A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter.
Array (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects
arrays when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. An array
action can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Lookup (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) A set of objects is flipped around the
reflection line of the flip parameter when the action is triggered in the block
reference. A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter.
Attribute Definition Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
Show All Actions (BACTIONBAR on page 95) Displays all action bars for
the parameter objects in the Block Editor.
Hide All Actions (BACTIONBAR on page 95) Hides all action bars for the
parameter objects in the Block Editor.

Visibility Panel
Visibility States Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.
Visibility Mode (BVMODE) Controls how objects that are made invisible for
the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor.
Make Visible (BVSHOW) Makes objects visible in the current visibility state
or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition.
Make Invisible (BVHIDE) Makes objects invisible in the current visibility
state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition.
Block Visibility States Specifies the current visibility state displayed in the
Block Editor.

126 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Close Panel
Close Block Editor Closes the Block Editor.

Block Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

■

Modify Blocks

■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and
edit geometry as you would in the drawing area.

Summary
You use the Block Editor to define the objects and behavior for a block
definition.
In the Block Editor, you add parameters and actions, which define custom
properties and dynamic behavior.
The following commands are used for editing blocks and are available only
in the Block Editor:
■

BACTION

■

BACTIONBAR on page 95

■

BACTIONSET

■

BACTIONTOOL

■

BASSOCIATE

■

BATTORDER

■

BAUTHORPALETTE

■

BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE

■

BCLOSE

Block Editor | 127

■

BCYCLEORDER

■

BCONSTRUCTION on page 117

■

BGRIPSET

■

BLOOKUPTABLE

■

BPARAMETER

■

BSAVE

■

BSAVEAS

■

BTABLE on page 166

■

BTESTBLOCK on page 170

■

BVHIDE

■

BVSHOW

■

BVSTATE

When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot
be opened.
The Block Editor also provides a Block Editor toolbar and Block Authoring
palettes that contain tools for creating dynamic blocks. The Block Authoring
Palettes window contains the following tabs:
■

Parameters tab on page 129

■

Actions tab on page 131

■

Parameter Sets tab on page 132

Block Editor Toolbar
Provides tools for working in the Block Editor, creating dynamic blocks, and
working with visibility states.
The Block Editor toolbar is displayed when the ribbon is not active. It is also
displayed only when you enter the Block Editor with the ribbon closed.

Edit or Create Block Definition Displays the Edit Block Definition dialog
box.

128 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Save Block Definition Saves the current block definition.
Save Block As Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Name Displays the name of the current block definition.
Test Block (BTESTBLOCK on page 170) Displays a window within the Block
Editor to test a dynamic block.
Display / Hide Constraints Bar (CONSTRAINTBAR on page 224) Displays
or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block
definition.
Action (BACTION) Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
Define Attribute (Attribute Definition Dialog Box) Creates an attribute
definition for storing data in a block.
Authoring Palettes (BAUTHORPALETTE on page 115) Opens the Block
Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
Parameters Manager (PARAMETERS on page 917) Opens the Parameters
Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference
parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
Close Block Editor (BCLOSE on page 116) Closes the Block Editor.
Visibility Mode (BVMODE) Controls how objects that are made invisible for
the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor.
Make Visible (BVSHOW) Makes objects visible in the current visibility state
or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition.
Make Invisible (BVHIDE) Makes objects invisible in the current visibility
state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition.
Manage Visibility States (Visibility States Dialog Box on page 173) Creates,
sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.
Visibility State Specifies the current visibility state displayed in the Block
Editor.

Parameters Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window)
Provides tools for adding parameters to a dynamic block definition in the
Block Editor. Parameters specify positions, distances, and angles for geometry
in the block reference. When you add a parameter to a dynamic block
definition, it defines one or more custom properties for the block.

Block Editor | 129

Point Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a point parameter to the dynamic
block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference.
A point parameter defines an X and Y location in the drawing. In the Block
Editor, a point parameter looks similar to an ordinate dimension.
Linear Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a linear parameter to the dynamic
block definition and defines a custom distance property for the block reference.
A linear parameter shows the distance between two anchor points. A linear
parameter constrains grip movement along a preset angle. In the Block Editor,
a linear parameter looks similar to an aligned dimension.
Polar Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a polar parameter to the dynamic
block definition and defines custom distance and angle properties for the
block reference. A polar parameter shows the distance between two anchor
points and displays an angle value. You can use both grips and the Properties
palette to change both the distance value and the angle. In the Block Editor,
a polar parameter looks similar to an aligned dimension.
XY Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block
definition and defines custom horizontal and vertical distance properties for
the block reference. An XY parameter shows the X and Y distances from the
base point of the parameter. In the Block Editor, an XY parameter displays as
a pair of dimensions (horizontal and vertical). These dimensions share a
common base point.
Rotation Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a rotation parameter to the
dynamic block definition and defines a custom angle property for the block
reference. A rotation parameter defines an angle. In the Block Editor, a rotation
parameter displays as a circle.
Alignment Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds an alignment parameter to the
dynamic block definition. An alignment parameter defines an X and Y location
and an angle. An alignment parameter always applies to the entire block and
needs no action associated with it. An alignment parameter allows the block
reference to automatically rotate around a point to align with other objects
in the drawing. An alignment parameter affects the angle property of the block
reference. In the Block Editor, an alignment parameter looks like an alignment
line.
Flip Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a flip parameter to the dynamic block
definition and defines a custom flip property for the block reference. A flip
parameter flips objects. In the Block Editor, a flip parameter displays as a
reflection line. Objects can be flipped about this reflection line. A flip parameter
displays a value that shows if the block reference has been flipped or not.

130 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Visibility Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a visibility parameter to the
dynamic block definition and defines a custom visibility property for the block
reference. With visibility parameter, you can create visibility states and control
the visibility of objects in the block. A visibility parameter always applies to
the entire block and needs no action associated with it. In a drawing, you
click the grip to display a list of visibility states available for the block reference.
In the Block Editor, a visibility parameter displays as text with an associated
grip.
Lookup Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a lookup parameter to the dynamic
block definition and defines custom lookup properties for the block reference.
A lookup parameter defines a custom property that you can specify or set to
evaluate to a value from a list or table you define. It can be associated with a
single lookup grip. In the block reference, you click the grip to display a list
of available values. In the Block Editor, a lookup parameter displays as text.
Base Point Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a base point parameter to the
dynamic block definition. A base point parameter defines a base point for the
dynamic block reference relative to the geometry in the block. A base point
parameter cannot be associated with any actions, but can belong to an action's
selection set. In the Block Editor, a base point parameter displays as a circle
with crosshairs

Actions Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window)
Provides tools for adding actions to a dynamic block definition in the Block
Editor. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference move
or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated
in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters.
Move Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a move action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a point, linear, polar, or XY
parameter. A move action is similar to the MOVE command. In a dynamic
block reference, a move action causes objects to move a specified distance and
angle.
Scale Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a scale action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
A scale action is similar to the SCALE command. In a dynamic block reference,
a scale action causes its selection set to scale when the associated parameter
is edited by moving grips or by using the Properties palette.
Stretch Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a stretch action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a point, linear, polar, or XY
parameter. A stretch action causes objects to move and stretch a specified
distance in a specified location.

Block Editor | 131

Polar Stretch Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a polar stretch action to the
dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a polar parameter.
A polar stretch action rotates, moves, and stretches objects a specified angle
and distance when the key point on the associated polar parameter is changed
through a grip or the Properties palette
Rotate Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a rotate action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a rotation parameter. A rotate
action is similar to the ROTATE command. In a dynamic block reference, a
rotate action causes its associated objects to rotate when the associated
parameter is edited through a grip or the Properties palette.
Flip Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a flip action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a flip parameter. With a flip
action you can flip a dynamic block reference about a specified axis called a
reflection line.
Array Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds an array action to the dynamic block
definition when you associate the action with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
An array action causes its associated objects to copy and array in a rectangular
pattern when the associated parameter is edited through a grip or the Properties
palette.
Lookup Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a lookup action to the dynamic block
definition. When you add a lookup action to a dynamic block definition and
associate it with a lookup parameter, it creates a lookup table. You can use a
lookup table to assign custom properties and values to a dynamic block.

Parameter Sets Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window)
Provides tools for adding a parameter and at least one action at the same time
to a dynamic block definition in the Block Editor. When you add a parameter
set to a dynamic block, the actions are automatically associated with the
parameter. After you add a parameter set to a dynamic block, you double-click
the yellow alert icon (or use the BACTIONSET command) and follow the
Command prompts to associate the action with a selection set of geometry.
Point Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the point
parameter.
Linear Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the endpoint
of the linear parameter.
Linear Stretch Automatically adds a stretch action associated with the linear
parameter.

132 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Linear Array Automatically adds an array action associated with the linear
parameter.
Linear Move Pair Automatically adds a two move action, one associated with
the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter.
Linear Stretch Pair Automatically adds two stretch actions, one associated
with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear
parameter.
Polar Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the polar
parameter.
Polar Stretch Automatically adds a stretch action associated with the polar
parameter.
Polar Array Automatically adds an array action associated with the polar
parameter.
Polar Move Pair Automatically adds two move actions, one associated with
the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar parameter.
Polar Stretch Pair Automatically adds two stretch actions, one associated
with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar
parameter.
XY Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the endpoint of
the XY parameter.
XY Move Pair Automatically adds two move actions, one associated with the
base point and one associated with the endpoint of the XY parameter.
XY Move Box Set Automatically adds four move actions, one associated with
each key point on the XY parameter.
XY Stretch Box Set Automatically adds four stretch actions, one associated
with each key point on the XY parameter.
XY Array Box Set Automatically adds an array action associated with the XY
parameter.
Rotation Set Automatically adds a rotation action associated with the rotation
parameter.
Flip Set Automatically adds a flip action associated with the flip parameter.
Visibility Set Adds a visibility parameter to the dynamic block definition and
allows visibility states to be defined. No action is necessary with the visibility
parameter.

Block Editor | 133

Lookup Set Automatically adds a lookup action associated with the lookup
parameter.

-BEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

■

Modify Blocks

■

Modify Dynamic Block Definitions

Summary
If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt,
the selected block is opened in the Block Editor on page 127. If nothing is
selected, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed
Enter block name on page 134 or [? on page 134]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Specifies the name of a block saved in the current drawing to open in the
Block Editor or specifies the name of a new block to create.

?—List Previously Defined Blocks
Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press Enter

BESETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks

134 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box.

Access Methods
Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Dialog Box
Launcher
Command entry: besettings

Summary
The Block Editor Settings dialog box on page 135 is displayed.

Block Editor Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks

Block Editor Settings Dialog Box | 135

Summary
Controls the environment settings of the Block Editor.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Authoring Objects
Controls the color of parameter and grip objects and specifies the orientation
of the parameter text.
Parameter Color
Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor.
(BPARAMETERCOLOR on page 1401 system variable)
Grip Color
Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor.
(BGRIPOBJCOLOR on page 1398 system variable)
Parameter Text Alignment
Forces the text displayed for action parametes and constraint parameters in
the Block Editor to be horizontal.
(BPTEXTHORIZONTAL on page 1402 system variable)

Parameter Font
Sets the font for the authoring objects.
Font Name
Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor.
(BPARAMETERFONT on page 1401 system variable)
Font Style
Specifies font character formatting for the authoring objects, such as italic,
bold, or regular.

Parameter and Grip Size
Controls the size of the parameter and grip objects.
Parameter Size
Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the
screen display.
(BPARAMETERSIZE on page 1402 system variable)
Grip Size

136 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen
display.
(BGRIPOBJSIZE on page 1398 system variable)

Constraint Status
Specifies the color overrides for objects in the Block Editor to show constraint
status.
Unconstrained
Sets the color of the unconstrained objects.
Partially Constrained
Sets the color of the partially constrained objects.
Fully Constrained
Sets the color of the fully constrained objects.
Improperly Constrained
Sets the color of the over-constrained objects.

Highlight Dependent Objects During Selection
Automatically highlights all objects that are dependent on the currently
selected authoring objects. Use this option when you need to confirm or
change dependent objects.

Display Tickmarks for Parameters With Value Sets
Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block
references.
(BTMARKDISPLAY on page 1403 system variable)

Display Action Bars
Indicates whether the action bars or the legacy action objects are displayed
in the Block Editor.
(BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 system variable)

Reset Values
Resets the Block Editor settings to default values.

Block Editor Settings Dialog Box | 137

BGRIPSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks

Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a parameter in the block definition. Right-click in
the Block Editor drawing area. Click Grip Display, and then click an option.

Summary
Specifies the number of grips displayed for a parameter. Also resets the position
of grips for a parameter to their default location. You can only use the
BGRIPSET command in the Block Editor on page 127.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select parameter: Select a parameter in the current dynamic block definition
Enter number of grip objects for parameter or reset position
[0/1/2/4/Reposition]: Enter the number of grips to display for the parameter (the
number of grips available will vary depending on the type of parameter you selected)
or enter reposition to reposition the existing grips in the block definition to their
default locations

BHATCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill.

138 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. If you enter bhatch,
the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546is displayed. If you enter -bhatch
or -hatch, Command prompts are displayed.

BLEND
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Splines

Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Blend
Menu: Modify ➤ Blend Curves

Summary
Select each object near an endpoint. The shape of the resulting spline depends
on the specified continuity. The lengths of the selected objects remain
unchanged.

Valid objects include lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, open polylines, and
open splines.

BLEND | 139

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object or [CONtinuity]: Select a line or open curve near the end where
the spline should start
Select second object: Select another line or open curve near the end where the spline
should end

Continuity
Specify one of two types of blends.
Tangent Creates a degree 3 spline with tangency (G1) continuity to the selected
objects at their endpoints.
Smooth Creates a degree 5 spline with curvature (G2) continuity to the selected
objects at their endpoints.
If you use the Smooth option, do not switch the display from control vertices
to fit points. This action changes the spline to degree 3, which will change
shape of the spline.

BLIPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Customize Object Selection

Controls the display of marker blips.
Obsolete
Marker blips have been removed from the product.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use

Summary
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears
where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.

140 | Chapter 3 B Commands

To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other
commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing.

BLOCKICON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Blocks

Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter.

Access Methods

Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons

Summary
Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release.
You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-card characters.
For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all two-character blocks
ending with 2 should be updated.
After you enter the block names, a message is displayed describing the process
as it proceeds. Press ESC at any time to stop.

BLOCKICON | 141

BLOOKUPTABLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Lookup Actions

Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.

Summary
When a lookup action is applied to a lookup parameter on page 160, the
Property Lookup Table dialog box is automatically displayed.
If a table is already defined for the lookup action, then that table is displayed
in the dialog box.
NOTE The BLOOKUPTABLE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE
on page 1396 system variable is set to 1.

Property Lookup Table Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Lookup Actions

Creates and modifies a lookup table for custom properties within the dynamic
block definition.

142 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
The lookup table assigns custom property values to the dynamic block
reference. If Reverse Lookup is selected for a lookup property, the block
reference displays a lookup grip with a list of properties that change the display
of the dynamic block reference.
The lookup table also allows the values of lookup parameters to be controlled
by the values of other parameters (input properties).

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Action Name
Displays the associated lookup action name, which you can edit in the
Properties palette.
Add Properties
Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 144.
Audit
Checks the data to ensure that each row is unique.
Input Properties
Displays the parameters you select in the Add Parameter Properties dialog box
on page 144 as columns. When a parameter value matches the input property
column, the corresponding lookup property is assigned to the block reference.

Property Lookup Table Dialog Box | 143

Lookup Properties
Displays the custom value assigned to the input properties. Click the bottom
of a lookup column to make the lookup property read-only or to allow reverse
lookup. Allow Reverse Lookup enables a drop-down list associated with the
lookup grip that changes the block reference to match the input property
values in the table.

Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Lookup Actions

Adds parameter properties to a lookup table.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Parameter Properties
Displays a list of parameters not yet added to the lookup table. Select a
parameter and click OK to add it to the lookup table.

Property Type
Specifies the type of property to add to the lookup table.
Add Input Properties
Displays the available custom properties in parameters you’ve already added
to the block definition.
Add Lookup Properties
Displays the available lookup property parameters that can be added to the
lookup table.

144 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block Definition panel ➤ Create Block
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
The Block Definition dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion
point, and giving it a name.

Block Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

Defines and names a block.

BLOCK | 145

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the
operating system or the program for other purposes.
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.

Preview
If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.

Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
Specify On-Screen
Prompts you to specify the base point when the dialog box is closed.
Pick Insertion Base Point
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base
point in the current drawing.
X
Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value.

146 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Z
Specifies the Z coordinate value.

Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or
delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create
the block.
Specify On-Screen
Prompts you to specify the objects when the dialog box is closed.
Select Objects
Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects
for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to return to the
dialog box.
Quick Select
Displays the Quick Select dialog box, which defines a selection set.
Retain
Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create
the block.
Convert to Block
Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you
create the block.
Delete
Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Objects Selected
Displays the number of selected objects.

Behavior
Specifies the behavior of the block.
Annotative
Specifies that the block is .
Match Block Orientation to Layout

Block Definition Dialog Box | 147

Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports
matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the
Annotative option is cleared.
Scale Uniformly
Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being
non-uniformly scaled.
Allow Exploding
Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded.

Settings
Specifies settings for the block.
Block Unit
Specifies the insertion units for the block reference.
Hyperlink
Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, which you can use to associate a
hyperlink with the block definition.

Description
Specifies the text description of the block.

Open in Block Editor
Opens the current block definition in the Block Editor on page 127 when you
click OK.

-BLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define Blocks

If you enter -block at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

148 | Chapter 3 B Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the
operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable
EXTNAMES is set to 1.
If you enter the name of an existing block, you are prompted as follows:
Redefine Block Reference By redefining a block, you automatically update
all references to that block. Attributes attached to existing block references
remain unchanged in the drawing. However, new insertions of the block do
not prompt for attributes unless the attribute definitions are included in the
new block definition.
Specify Insertion Base Point The point specified as the base point is used
for subsequent insertions of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of
the block or its lower-left corner. The base point is also the point about which
you can rotate the block during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented
according to the UCS in effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts
the block at a specific elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current
elevation.

■

Annotative:
Enter a to create an block.
If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative.

Match Orientation to Layout in Paper Space Viewports If you enter yes,
the block’s orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation
of the layout.
Select Objects If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to
select the objects.
The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base
point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the
drawing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command
immediately after BLOCK.

-BLOCK | 149

The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system,
which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block.
When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned
parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation
in space by setting the UCS first.

?—List Previously Defined Blocks
Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter Blocks to List In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with
the notation Xref: resolved.
In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated with
the notation xdep: XREFNAME, where xrefname is the name of an externally
referenced drawing. The following terms are used in the list:
■

User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list.

■

External References: Number of xrefs in the list.

■

Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list.

■

Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the drawing.

BMPOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format.

150 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects
what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing
appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to
No.
NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), Command prompts are
displayed.

BOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary
Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary

Summary
The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a
separate region or polyline.

BOUNDARY | 151

Boundary Creation Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating
a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.

Island Detection
Controls whether boundary detects internal closed boundaries, called islands.

152 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Object Type
Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates the boundary
as a region or a polyline object.

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when defining a boundary from
a specified point.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current
viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set.
New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. boundary
includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline
when it constructs the new boundary set.
For more information about the options in this dialog box, see HATCH.

-BOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a

Internal Point
Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area.
Specify a point inside the area.

Advanced Options
Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option
or press Enter to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when it creates a
boundary from a specified point. For information about defining a boundary
set at the Command prompt, see the HATCH Command prompt option.

-BOUNDARY | 153

Island Detection Specifies whether boundary uses objects within the outermost
boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island
detection at the Command prompt, see the HATCH Command prompt option.
Object Type Specifies the type of object that boundary creates.
■

Region

■

Polyline

BPARAMETER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks

Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.

Access Methods

Panel

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel

Summary
You can use the bparameter command only in the Block Editor on page 127.
A parameter defines custom properties for the block reference. After you add
a parameter, you must associate an action with the parameter to make the
block dynamic.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter parameter type [Alignment/Base on page
155/pOint/Linear/Polar/XY/Rotation/Flip/“Visibility”/looKup] : Enter a
parameter type

154 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Alignment

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Alignment
Rotates the block reference about a point to align with other objects in the
drawing.
Specify Base Point of Alignment Specifies the grip about which the block
reference will rotate to align with another object in the drawing.
Name Sets the Name custom property for this parameter.
Specify Alignment Direction Determines the angle of alignment for the
block reference.
Type Determines whether the block reference will align tangent or
perpendicular to objects in the drawing.

Base

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Basepoint
Defines a changeable base point for the dynamic block reference in relation
to the geometry in the block.
Specify Parameter Location Determines the default location of the basepoint
for the block definition. This will be the location of the basepoint grip in the
block reference.

Point

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Point
Defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference.

BPARAMETER | 155

Specify Parameter Location Determines the X and Y location of the point
parameter in the block definition. This will be the location of the point grip
in the block reference.
Name Name on page 155
Label Defines a custom descriptive label for the location of the parameter.
Chain Determines whether the parameter is included in the selection set of
an action that is associated with a different parameter.
■

Yes. A change to an action associated with this parameter will also trigger
other actions associated with this parameter, just as if you had edited the
parameter through a grip or custom property.

■

No. Associated actions are not triggered.

Description Defines an extended description of the Label on page 156 custom
property. When the block reference is inserted, this description is displayed
at the bottom of the Properties palette.
Palette Specifies whether the Label custom property is displayed in the
Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing.

Linear

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Linear
Defines the distance between two key points in the block definition.
Specify Start Point/Endpoint Specifies the key points for the parameter in
the block definition.
Name Name on page 155
Label Label on page 156
Chain Chain on page 156
Description Description on page 156

156 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Base Specifies the Base Location property for the parameter.
■

Startpoint. The start point of the parameter remains fixed when the
endpoint of the parameter is edited in the block reference.

■

Midpoint. The midpoint of the parameter remains fixed, and the start
point and endpoint of the parameter move simultaneously equal distances
from the midpoint.

Palette Palette on page 156
Value Set Limits the available values for the parameter to the values specified
in the set.
■

List. Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference.

■

Increment. Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values
for the parameter in the block reference.

Specify Label Location Specifies the location of the parameter label on page
156 in the block definition.
Enter Number of Grips Determines the number of grips that will display in
the block reference.
■

0. No grips will be displayed in the block reference. Rather, the selected
geometry can be edited in the Properties palette or a lookup table on page
142.

■

1. A grip will be displayed at just the endpoint of the parameter.

■

2. A grip will be displayed at both the start point and endpoint of the
parameter.

Polar

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Polar
Defines a distance and angle for two key points in the block definition.
Specify Base Point Determines the point in the block definition relative to
which the grip will be placed.
Name Name on page 155

BPARAMETER | 157

Label Label on page 156
Chain Chain on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156
Value Set Value Set on page 157
Specify Endpoint Determines the distance and angle from the base point.
The distance and angle are custom properties in the Properties palette.
Specify Label Location Specify Label Location on page 157
Enter Number of Grips Enter Number of Grips on page 157

XY

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ XY
Defines an X and Y distance from the base point of a block definition.
Specify Base Point Determines the maximum X distance for the parameter.
Name Name on page 155
Label Label on page 156
Chain Chain on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156
Value Set Value Set on page 157
Specify Endpoint Determines the maximum Y distance for the parameter.
Specify Number of Grips Determines the number of grips that will display
in the block reference.
■

0. on page 157

■

1. A grip will be displayed at the endpoint of the Y distance.

■

2. A grip will be displayed at both endpoints.

158 | Chapter 3 B Commands

■

4. Grips will be displayed at all four corners of the parameter.

Rotation

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Rotation
Defines an angle for the block reference.
Specify Base Point Determines the point about which the selected block
geometry will be rotated.
Name Name on page 155
Label Label on page 156
Chain Chain on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156
Value Set Value Set on page 157
Specify Radius of Parameter Determines the distance between the base point
of the parameter and the grip.
Specify Default Rotation Angle Determines the location of the grip in the
block reference.
Base Angle Specifies a base angle other than 0 for the parameter grip.

Flip

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Flip
Mirrors objects or the entire block reference about a reflection line.
Specify Base Point Determines the first point for the line of reflection. The
parameter grip will be displayed at this point.

BPARAMETER | 159

Name Name on page 155
Label Label on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156
Specify Endpoint of Reflection Line Determines the endpoint of the
reflection line.
Specify Label Location Specify Label Location on page 157

Visibility

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Visibility
Defines objects that will either display or not display within the block
definition.
Specify Parameter Location Determines a location for the parameter grip.
The parameter can be placed anywhere within the block definition.
Name Name on page 155
Label Label on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156

Lookup

Button

Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters
drop-down ➤ Lookup
Defines user parameters that are determined by a lookup table.
Specify Parameter Location Specify Parameter Location on page 160
Name Name on page 155

160 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Label Label on page 156
Description Description on page 156
Palette Palette on page 156

BREAK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Break and Join Objects

Breaks the selected object between two points.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break at Point
Menu: Modify ➤ Break
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it
into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically
projected on to the object. break is often used to create space for a block or
text.

BREAK | 161

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on
an object
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If
you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects
the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next
prompt, you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the
first point.
Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or
enter f
Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object.
First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you
specify.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:

The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify.
If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is
selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the
second point beyond the end to be removed.

162 | Chapter 3 B Commands

To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for
both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the
second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object
types can be split into two objects or have one end removed.
The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle
starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.

You can also break selected objects at a single point with the Break at Point
tool.
Valid objects include lines, open polylines, and arcs. Closed objects such as
circles cannot be broken at a single point.

BROWSER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Get Started with Internet Access

Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry.

BROWSER | 163

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Web

Summary
Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to
the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web
locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.

BSAVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves the current block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block

Summary
Saves changes to the current block definition.
You can only use the BSAVE command in the Block Editor on page 127.

164 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BSAVEAS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As

Summary
Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 165.
You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 127.

Save Block As Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name

BSAVEAS | 165

Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block
definition.
Block List
Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected block definition.
Description
Displays the description saved with the block definition.
Save Block Definition to Drawing File
Saves the block definition as a drawing file. Selecting a pre-existing drawing
file overwrites the saved file. By default, the block name specified is taken as
the drawing file name.

BTABLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks

Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table

Summary
You can only use the btable command in the Block Editor on page 127. The
Block Properties Table dialog box on page 167 is displayed after you specify a
location point. The location point determines where the grip and table icon

166 | Chapter 3 B Commands

are located in the block definition. The grip location determines where the
grip appears in the block reference and displays a context menu based on the
contents of the block properties table. The type of properties that can be
included in the block properties table include legacy parameters, parameter
constraints, user parameters, and attributes. The legacy action parameters that
are added to the lookup tables cannot be added to the Block Properties Table.
Each row in the table defines a different variation of the block reference, and
can be accessed by the lookup grip.
If a block table is already created in the block editor, entering the btable
command directly displays the Block Properties Table dialog box (see
BLOOKUPTABLE on page 142 command).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify parameter location or [Palette]: Specify a location point

Palette
Specifies whether the block table item is displayed in the Properties palette
for the block reference.

Block Properties Table Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks

Defines the variations for a set of user-defined properties in the block definition
through a grid control.

Block Properties Table Dialog Box | 167

Summary
You can press Shift+Enter to add a new line for a multiline attribute value in
the grid in the Block Properties Table dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Add Properties
Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 169 where you can
add parameters already defined in the Block Properties Table.
Audit
Checks the Block Properties Table for errors.
Grid Control Displays the name of parameters added to the table. You can
also modify the properties of the table.
Block Properties Must Match A Row In The Table
Specifies whether the properties added to the grid control can be modified
individually for a block reference.
Default Value When Properties Do Not Match Table
Displays the default values when other properties are changed without
matching a row.

168 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks

Adds parameter properties to the block properties table.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Parameter Properties
Displays a list of dimensional constraint parameters, user parameters, legacy
parameters, and attribute definitions.
Name
Displays the names of parameters available to add to the block properties
table.
Type
Identifies the type of the parameter.

Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box | 169

BTESTBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Test Blocks Within the Block Editor

Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Test Block

Summary
You can only use the btestblock command in the Block Editor on page 127.
With the Test Block window you can test a dynamic block without closing
the Block Editor. You can select the block reference and test the grips or display
the Properties palette and test the behavior when changing the properties.
You can also insert additional copies of the block to test the inserting behavior.
You can make changes and test the block without saving the changes to the
block definition.
In the Test Block window, all AutoCAD commands operate the same way
except the BEDIT on page 120, SAVE on page 1091, SAVEAS on page 1091, and
QSAVE on page 1050 commands. The bedit command is not available in Test
Block window. The save, saveas, and qsave commands remove the Test Block
status from the window and the Test Block window becomes an open drawing.
A Close Test Block Window contextual panel is added to the ribbon when you
are in the Test Block mode.
In the Block Editor, the BCLOSE on page 116, BTESTBLOCK on page 170, and
CLOSE on page 214 commands automatically close the Test Block window and
discard the temporary file. The btestblock command closes the current Test
Block window and opens a new window with the current definition.

170 | Chapter 3 B Commands

NOTE Please ensure that there are entities present in the block being tested before
running the btestblock command.

BVHIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in
a dynamic block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Invisible
Shortcut menu: Select objects to hide for visibility states. Right-click in the
Block Editor drawing area. Click Object Visibility ➤ Hide for Current State
or click Object Visibility ➤ Hide for All States

Summary
Makes objects invisible for the current visibility state. You can only use the
bvhide command in the Block Editor on page 127.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to hide: Select objects to hide for the current visibility state or all
visibility states
Hide for current state or all visibility states [Current/All] : Enter
current to hide the selected objects for the current visibility state or enter all to hide
the selected objects for all visibility states in the block definition

BVHIDE | 171

BVSHOW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a
dynamic block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Visible
Shortcut menu: Select objects to make visible for visibility states. Right-click
in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Object Visibility ➤ Show for Current
State or click Object Visibility ➤ Show for All States

Summary
Allows you to make objects visible for visibility states. You can only use the
bvshow command in the Block Editor on page 127.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed
Select objects to make visible: Select objects to make visible for the current visibility
state or all visibility states
Make visible for current state or all visibility states [Current/All] :
Enter current to make the selected objects visible for the current visibility state or enter
all to make the selected objects visible for all visibility states in the block definition

172 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BVSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States

Summary
Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 173. You can only use the
BVSTATE command in the Block Editor on page 127 after a visibility parameter
has been added to the block definition.

Visibility States Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Creates or modifies visibility states.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Visibility States

BVSTATE | 173

Lists the available visibility states for the current dynamic block definition.
The order of this list is reflected in the dynamic block reference when the grip
is clicked to display the list of visibility states. The state at the top of the list
is the default state for the block reference.
Set Current
Sets the selected visibility state as the current state to display in the Block
Editor. Does not change the default visibility state that is displayed when the
block is inserted in a drawing, nor does it change the displayed visibility state
for block references already inserted and edited in the drawing.
New
Displays the New Visibility State dialog box. on page 174
Rename
Renames the selected visibility state.
Delete
Deletes the selected visibility state.
Move Up
Moves the selected visibility state up in the list.
Move Down
Moves the selected visibility state down in the list.

New Visibility State Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Creates a new visibility state.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Visibility State Name

174 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specifies the name for the new visibility state.
Visibility Options for New States
Displays options for the new visibility state.
Hide All Existing Objects in New State
Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new
visibility state.
Show All Existing Objects in New State
Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new
visibility state.
Leave Visibility of Existing Objects Unchanged in New State
Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the
same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based.

-BVSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block

Access Methods
Command entry: bedit ➤ -bvstate

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current visibility state: 
Enter an option [New on page 175/Set on page 176/Delete on page 176] :
Enter an option or press Enter

New
Creates a new visibility state.
Hide All
Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new
visibility state.

-BVSTATE | 175

Show All
Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new
visibility state.
Current Visibility
Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the
same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based.

Set
Specifies the visibility state to set as current.

Delete
Deletes a visibility state.

176 | Chapter 3 B Commands

C Commands

4

CAL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'cal for transparent use

Summary
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or
integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the
object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS.
You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that
expects points, vectors, or numbers.

177

Understand Syntax of Expressions
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of
precedence:
■

Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set

■

Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division
second, and addition and subtraction last

■

Operators of equal precedence from left to right

Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with
the operators in the following table.
Numeric operators
Operator

Operation

()

Groups expressions

^

Indicates exponentiation

*,/

Multiplies, divides

+, -

Adds, subtracts

The following are examples of numeric expressions:
3
3 + 0.6
(5.8^2) + PI

178 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions
combined with the operators in the following table.
Vector operators
Operator

Operation

()

Groups expressions

&

Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector)
[a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) - (c*y) , (c*x) - (a*z) , (a*y) - (b*x) ]

*

Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number)
[a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz

*, /

Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number
a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z]

+,-

Adds, subtracts vectors (points)
[a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]

The following are examples of vector expressions:
A+[1,2,3] provides the point located [1,2,3] units relative to point A.
The expression
[2<45<45] + [2<45<0] - [1.02, 3.5, 2]
adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are expressed
in spherical coordinates.

Format Feet and Inches
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Enter feet and inches using the following format:
feet'-inches" or feet' inches" or feet'inches"

Format Feet and Inches | 179

You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or
nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch
formatted values:
■

5' or 60”

■

5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9”

■

5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2”

■

5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2”

■

5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2”

To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is
optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2.
WARNING With imperial units, CAL interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit
separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at
least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9” from
5', enter 5' -9” rather than 5'-9”.

Format Angles
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the
following format:
d'”
You must enter 0d when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree (minutes
and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero.
Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number
followed by g to enter angles in grads.
The following examples show ways of entering angles:
5d10'20"
0d10'20"

180 | Chapter 4 C Commands

124.6r
14g
Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.

Use Points and Vectors
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a
location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space.
Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions,
such as nor and vec, return a vector.

Formatting Points and Vectors
A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]):
[r1,r2,r3]
The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and
so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and
vectors are displayed as lines with arrows.
CAL supports points expressed in all formats.
Point formats
Coordinate system

Point format

Polar

[dist> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen)
Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc
Specify second point of displacement or :
Specify a point or press Enter
The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point calculations.
Examples of vector and point calculations
Expression

Meaning

vec(a,b)

Determines vector translation from point a to point b.

vec1(a,b)

Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.

L*vec1(a,b)

Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a
to point b.

a+v

Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a
through vector v.

a+[5<20]

Determines point b located 5 units away from point a at an
angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar coordinates.

Calculate a Vector from Two Points | 185

Calculate the Length of a Vector
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The abs function calculates the length of a vector.
abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number.
In spherical coordinates (dist> Expression: cen+[0,1]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal
>> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen)
The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the
first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first
point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle
to the center of the second selected circle.

Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. The program
prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate
snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies
entering coordinates relative to other objects.

Obtain the Last-Specified Point | 187

When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For
example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes
set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable.
CAL Snap modes
Abbreviation

Snap mode

END

ENDPOINT

INS

INSERT

INT

INTERSECTION

MID

MIDPOINT

CEN

CENTER

NEA

NEAREST

NOD

NODE

QUA

QUADRANT

PER

PERPENDICULAR

TAN

TANGENT

The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL
expression:
(cen+end)/2
CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint
between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object.
Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for
an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of
the selected object:
mid+[,1]
The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid
of a triangle defined by three endpoints:
(end+end+end)/3

188 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Convert Points Between UCS and WCS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current
UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS.
w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS.
u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS.
You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS:
w2u([0,0,0])

Filtering the X, Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector
The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or vector.
Point-filter functions
Function

Description

xyof(p1)

X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0

xzof(p1)

X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0

yzof(p1)

Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0

xof(p1)

X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0

yof(p1)

Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0

zof(p1)

Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0

rxof(p1)

X component of a point

ryof(p1)

Y component of a point

rzof(p1)

Z component of a point

Convert Points Between UCS and WCS | 189

The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in
spherical coordinates:
zof([2<45<45])
The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are
taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b:
xyof(a)+zof(b)

Calculate a Point on a Line
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the
location of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or
parametrically by a t parameter.
pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and
p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1.
plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2.
The parameter t defines the parametric location of the point on the line.
The following are examples of the parameter t:
If t=0 the point is p1
If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2
If t=1 the point is p2

Rotate a Point About an Axis
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

190 | Chapter 4 C Commands

The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point.
rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing
through the point origin, as shown in the following example:

rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis
passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example.
The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.

Obtain an Intersection Point
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points.
ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2)
and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional.

Obtain an Intersection Point | 191

ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2)
and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).

Calculate a Distance
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is
the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).
dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line
passing through points p1 and p2.
dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined
by three points (p1,p2,p3).
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is
the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).

The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two
selected objects:
dist(cen,cen)/2
The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane
you define by selecting three endpoints:

192 | Chapter 4 C Commands

dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)

Obtain a Radius
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The rad function determines the radius of a selected object.
rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an
arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE command. The radius of
the new circle is two-thirds of the radius of the selected polyline arc segment:
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: cen
of Select the circle
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal
>> Expression: 2/3*rad
>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle

Obtain an Angle
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured
counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional
case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. The vector v is
considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.

Obtain a Radius | 193

ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1,p2),
oriented from p1 to p2. The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY
plane of the current UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2).
The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2).
The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the
orientation of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect
to the axis going from apex to p.
The following examples show how angles are measured.

You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the
ang function, as shown in the following example:
Command: cal
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end)
Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.

194 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Calculate a Normal Vector
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to
a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal,
not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain
another point.
nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle,
arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the
object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v. Both
vectors are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The
orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left of the original
vector v.
nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2. The line is
oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points
to the left from the original line (p1,p2).
nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by
the three points p1, p2, and p3. The orientation of the normal vector is such
that the given points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal.
The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:

Calculate a Normal Vector | 195

The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected
object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the
object by the parallel projection.
Command: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current
Specify a view point or [Rotate] : 'cal
>> Expression: nor
>> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:

Use Shortcut Functions
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

196 | Chapter 4 C Commands

The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that
combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode.
Shortcut functions
Function

Shortcut for

Description

dee

dist(end,end)

Distance between two endpoints

ille

ill(end,end,end,end)

Intersection of two lines defined by four
endpoints

mee

(end+end)/2

Midpoint between two endpoints

nee

nor(end,end)

Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to
two endpoints

pldee (d)

pld(d,end,end)

Point at a distance along a line determined
by two endpoints (see pld)

pltee (t)

plt(t,end,end)

Point at a parametric location on a line determined by two endpoints (see plt)

vee

vec(end,end)

Vector from two endpoints

vee1

vec1(end,end)

Unit vector from two endpoints

CHAMFER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Chamfers

Bevels the edges of objects.

CHAMFER | 197

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer and Fillet drop-down
➤ Chamfer
Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you
select the objects.

You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current
Select first line on page 198 or [Undo on page 199/Polyline on page 199/Distance
on page 199/Angle on page 199/Trim on page 200/mEthod on page 200/Multiple
on page 200]: Use an object selection method or enter an option

First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer.
If you select lines or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the
chamfer line. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override
the current chamfer distances with a value of 0.
If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent
or separated by no more than one segment. If they're separated by another
polyline segment, CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the chamfer.
Enter Surface Selection Option
Edge

198 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Loop

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline.
Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the
chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.

Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
If you set both distances to zero, CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so
they end at the same point.

Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an
angle for the second line.

CHAMFER | 199

Trim
Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line
endpoints.
NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE
to 0.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting
lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect,
CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0,
the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.

Method
Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to
create the chamfer.

Multiple
Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects.

Expression
Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Control
Geometry with the Parameters Manager for a list of operators and functions
allowed.

CHANGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes the properties of existing objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed
Select objects:
Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point, or press Enter to enter
new values

Specify Objects
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you
get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest

200 | Chapter 4 C Commands

way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only
objects other than lines in a selection set.
Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the
current user coordinate system (UCS).

Change Point or Values
Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you
select.
Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change
point to the new point, unless Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, the
selected lines are modified so that they become parallel to either the X or the
Y axis; their endpoints are not moved to the specified coordinate.

Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one circle, the
prompt is repeated for the next circle.

Text Changes text location and other properties.
Specify New Text Insertion Point Relocates the text.
Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute
that is not part of a block.
Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block.
Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block
in its original location.

CHANGE | 201

Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects.
NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change
prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.
Color Changes the color of the selected objects.
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
■

True Color. Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. The
integer values range from 0 to 255 seperated by commas.

■

Color Book. Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.

Elev Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.
You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same
Z value.

Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acadlt.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.

Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values
are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the
closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.

202 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object
has no effect.

Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90.
Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached.
Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects.

CHPROP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes the properties of an object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects:
Enter property to change [Color on page 203/LAyer on page 204/LType on page
204/ltScale on page 204/LWeight on page 204/Thickness on page 204/TRansparency
on page 204/Material on page 204/Annotative on page 204]:
NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, varies is displayed as the current value.

Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.

CHPROP | 203

True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.

Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.

Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acadlt.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.

Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are
predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the
closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.

Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object
has no effect.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90.

Material
Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached.

Annotative
Changes the property of the selected objects.

204 | Chapter 4 C Commands

CHSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Move Objects

Moves objects between model space and paper space.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space
Menu: Modify ➤ Change Space

Summary
The moved object is scaled appropriately in the new space.
When transferring objects to paper space, the SOURCE viewport that you click
determines the paper space location of the transferred objects. When
transferring objects to model space, the TARGET viewport that you click
determines the model space location of the transferred objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects:
Set the SOURCE viewport active and press Enter to continue:
Returns prompts similar to the following:
N object(s) changed from MODEL space to PAPER space.
Objects were scaled by a factor of n to maintain visual appearance.

CHSPACE | 205

CIRCLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Circles

Creates a circle.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius
Menu: Draw ➤ Circle ➤ Center, Radius
Toolbar: Draw

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify center point on page 206 for circle or [3P on page 207/2P on page 207/Ttr
(tan tan radius) on page 208]: Specify a point or enter an option

Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point.
For example:

206 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second
point.
For example:

3P (Three Points)
Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
For example:

Tan, Tan, Tan
Creates a circle tangent to three objects.
For example:

2P (Two Points)
Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
For example:

CIRCLE | 207

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)
Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program
draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.
For example:

CLASSICIMAGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Manage Raster Images

Manages referenced image files in the current drawing.

Summary
The legacy Image Manager is displayed. The IMAGE command now displays
the External References palette.

208 | Chapter 4 C Commands

NOTE This command will be removed in future releases.

CLASSICLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager.

Summary
The legacy Layer Properties Manager is displayed. The LAYER command
displays the current Layer Properties Manager.
NOTE This command will be removed in future releases.

CLASSICXREF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Manages referenced drawing files in the current drawing.

Summary
The legacy Xref Manager is displayed. The EXTERNALREFERENCES on page
504 command displays the current External References palette.
NOTE This command will be removed in future releases.

CLASSICLAYER | 209

CLEANSCREENON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Toolbars

Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command
window.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen
Command entry: Ctrl+0
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen

Summary
The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the
bottom of the drawing, the status bars, and the command line. Use
CLEANSCREENOFF to restore the display of interface items that were hidden
by CLEANSCREENON.

CLEANSCREENOFF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Toolbars

Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen
Command entry: Ctrl+0
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen

210 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Use
CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of most AutoCAD user interface
elements.

CLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Clip Underlays

Crops a selected external reference, image, viewport, or underlay (DWF, DWFx,
PDF, or DGN) to a specified boundary.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip

Summary
The clipping boundary determines a portion of an image, underlay, viewport,
or external reference to hide. The visibility of the clipping boundary is
controlled by the FRAME on page 1512 system variable.

List of Prompts
The list of prompts varies depending on whether you are clipping an underlay,
image, external reference, or viewport.

Underlay and Image Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
On Turns on clipping and displays the underlay clipped to the previously
defined boundary.
Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire PDF underlay and frame.

CLIP | 211

If you clip the underlay again while clipping is off, clipping automatically
turns on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping
is off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original
underlay.
New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or
generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for an underlay when the
old boundary is deleted.
Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline
can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect
itself.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points
that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify
for opposite corners.
Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.

External Reference Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish
selecting objects
Enter clipping option [ON on page 1351/OFF on page 1351/Clipdepth on page
1351/Delete on page 1351/generate Polyline on page 1352/New boundary on page
1352] : Select an option or press Enter
On Displays the clipped portion of the external reference or block in the
current drawing.
Off Displays all of the geometry of the external reference or block in the
current drawing, ignoring the clipping boundary.
Clipdepth Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects
outside the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not
displayed. Regardless of the current UCS, the clip depth is applied parallel to
the clipping boundary.
■

Front Clip Point. Creates a clipping plane passing through and
perpendicular to the clipping boundary.

212 | Chapter 4 C Commands

■

Distance. Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel
to the clipping boundary.

■

Remove. Removes both the front and back clipping planes.

Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To
temporarily turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases
the clipping boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE on page 469 command
cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries.
Generate Polyline Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping
boundary. The polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and
color settings. Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping
boundary using PEDIT on page 939 and then redefine the clipping boundary
with the new polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary,
use the Off option.
New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or
generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected XREF underlay
when the old boundary is deleted.
■

Select Polyline. Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The
polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot
intersect itself.

■

Polygonal. Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more
points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.

■

Rectangular. Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you
specify for opposite corners.

■

Invert Clip. Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.

Viewport Prompts
NOTE You cannot clip a viewport in model space. You must be in paper space.
Clipping Object Select the viewport to clip.
Polygonal Draws a clipping boundary. You can draw line segments or arc
segments by specifying points.
The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options
match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command.

CLIP | 213

Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is
available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a
viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is
deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied.

CLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Closes the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: Application menu
Menu: File ➤ Close

➤ Close ➤ Current Drawing

Summary
The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last
saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made
no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a
read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.

CLOSEALL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Closes all currently open drawings.

214 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Application menu
Menu: Window ➤ Close All

➤ Close ➤ All Drawings

Summary
All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved
drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.

COLOR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

Sets the color for new objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color
Menu: Format ➤ Color
Command entry: 'color for transparent use

Summary
The Select Color dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

COLOR | 215

Select Color Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

Defines the color of objects.

Summary
You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors,
and Color Book colors.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.
■

Index Color

■

True Color

■

Color Books

Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.

216 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD
Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red,
green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or
enter the color number or name in the Color box.
The large palette displays colors 10 through 249.
The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as
well as numbers.
The third palette displays colors 250 through 255; these colors are shades of
gray.
Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color.
Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color.
Bylayer
Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which
you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is
displayed in the Old and New color swatches.
Byblock
Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on
your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert

Select Color Dialog Box | 217

the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block
inherit the current Color setting.
Color
Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the most
recently selected color.
Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.

True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

Specifies color settings using true colors.

218 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue,
Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue
(RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true
color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent
on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

HSL Color Model
Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors.
Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the
values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors.
Hue (H)
Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light
within the visible spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify
a value in the Hue box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid hue
values are from 0 to 360 degrees.
Saturation (S)
Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more
pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color
saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box.
Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0
to 100%.
Luminance (L)
Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color
slider or specify a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values are
from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color black, 100% represents
white, and 50% represents the optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this
value also affects the RGB value.
Color Spectrum Specifies the hue and purity of a color. To specify a hue,
move the crosshairs from side to side over the color spectrum. To specify color
saturation, move the crosshairs from top to bottom over the color spectrum.
Color Slider Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance,
adjust the bar on the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.

Select Color Dialog Box | 219

RGB Color Model
Specifies the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options available on
the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is
specified.
Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The
values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green,
and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated
to create a wide range of colors.
Red (R)
Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or
specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will
be reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Green (G)
Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar
or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it
will be reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Blue (B)
Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or
specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will
be reflected in the HSL color mode values.

Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made
to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the
following format: 000,000,000.

True Color Stored as RGB
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.

Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.

New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.

220 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

Specifies colors using third-party color books or user-defined color books.

Summary
Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the
selected color book.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Color Book
Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors.
The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book
Locations specified in the Options dialog box, Files tab.
Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names
on each page. Color books containing up to ten colors per page are supported.
If a color book is not paginated, the colors are organized into pages containing

Select Color Dialog Box | 221

seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color
slider or use the up and down arrows to browse.
RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Color
Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific
color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing
Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color
number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest
number match is displayed.
Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.

-COLOR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set the Current Color

If you enter -color at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Enter default object color [Truecolor on page 223/COlorbook on page 223]
: Enter a color, enter t, enter co, or press Enter
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or
number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names
for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by
entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red.
You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, all new objects
are drawn in the default color (white or black, depending on your background
color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block in a
drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR.

222 | Chapter 4 C Commands

WARNING If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make
up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results.
If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on
which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about
assigning a color to a layer.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three
integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed.
If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in
the color book.

COMMANDLINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window

Displays the Command Line window.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line
Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line

Summary
Displays the command line when it has been hidden.

COMMANDLINE | 223

You can display commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts
in a dockable and resizable window called the Command Line.

COMMANDLINEHIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window

Hides the Command Line window.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line
Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line

Summary
Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still
enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.

CONSTRAINTBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Verify Geometric Constraints

Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.

224 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show/Hide
Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraints Bars ➤ Select Objects
Toolbar: Parametric

Summary
The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows:
■

Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related
geometry.

■

Placing the cursor over a constrained object (while constraint bars are
displayed) highlights the constraint icons associated with the selected
object.

The CONSTRAINTBARMODE system variable or the CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
command controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars,
when constraint bar are displayed.
On the ribbon, you can also show or hide all constraint bars for all constrained
geometries.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select objects with constraint bars
Enter an option [Show on page 225/Hide on page 225/Reset on page 226]
:Enter the appropriate value to show or hide constraint bars in the drawing.

Show
Displays constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints
applied to them.

Hide
Hides constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints applied
to them.

CONSTRAINTBAR | 225

Reset
Displays constraint bars for all objects with geometric constraints applied to
them and resets them to their default locations relative to their associated
parameters.

CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Constraints

Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher
Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraint Settings
Toolbar: Parametric

Summary
The Constraint Settings dialog box is displayed.

Constraint Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Constraints

226 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Allows you to control the geometric constraints and dimensional constraints
settings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following:
■

Geometric Tab

■

Dimensional Tab

Geometric Tab
Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars.
Constraint Bar Display Settings Controls the display of constraint bars or
constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
For example, you can hide the display of constraint bars for Horizontal and
Vertical constraints.
Select All Selects the geometric constraint types.
Clear All Clears the selected geometric constraint types.
Only Display Constraint Bars for Object in the Current Plane Displays
constraint bars for geometrically constrained objects only on the current plane.

Constraint Settings Dialog Box | 227

Sets the transparency level of constraint bars in a drawing.

Dimensional Tab
Sets preferences in behavior when displaying dimensional constraints.
Dimensional Constraint Format Sets the display of the dimensional name
format and lock icon.
Dimension Name Format Specifies the format for the text displayed when
dimensional constraints are applied.
Set the name format to display: Name, Value, or Name and Expression.
For example: Width=Length/2
Show Lock Icon for Annotational Constraints Displays a lock icon against
an object that has an annotational constraint applied (DIMCONSTRAINTICON
on page 1452 system variable).
Show Hidden Dynamic Constraints for Selected Objects Displays dynamic
constraints that have been set to hide when selected.

+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Constraints

Controls the tab that is displayed by default when the Constraint Settings
dialog box is invoked.
Tab Index

Tab Displayed

0

Geometric tab

1

Dimensional tab

228 | Chapter 4 C Commands

CONTENTEXPLORER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Understand the Content Explorer Window

■

DesignCenter

■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings

Finds and inserts content such as drawing files, blocks, and styles.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Plug-ins tab ➤ Content Panel ➤ Explore

Summary
With Content Explorer you can index design content for quick access, catalog
the objects in each file, and search for content in local folders, network folders,
and the Autodesk Seek Library.

CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Understand the Content Explorer Window

CONTENTEXPLORER | 229

Closes the Content Explorer window.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Plug-ins tab ➤ Content Panel ➤ Explore

CONVERT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications

Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD LT 95 or
earlier.

Sumary
Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release
is opened in AutoCAD LT 97 or later. Information about the rotation of a
hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since
creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recommended
that you use the Select option so that you can check your results.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default,
the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated
automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in
the old format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an
older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.

230 | Chapter 4 C Commands

NOTE Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old
format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing
commands make no distinction between the two formats.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] : Enter h for hatches,
p for polylines, or a for both
Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing.
Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing.
All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing.

CONVERTCTB
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch the Type of Plot Style Table

Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table
(STB).

Summary
Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), where
you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to convert.
The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new location
or name for the converted plot style table file.
CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named
plot style table, which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot
styles. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by
CONVERTCTB. The default location for the new named plot style table file is
in the Plot Styles folder. The default name for the new named plot style table
file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name.
CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique
plot properties, one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned
the same plot properties, and a default named plot style called NORMAL.

CONVERTCTB | 231

For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the
same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the
named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which
assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the
color-dependent plot style table. However, suppose that all the colors in a
color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two
colors, BLUE and GREEN. If these colors each have unique plot properties,
CONVERTCTB creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table:
NORMAL, the default plot style; STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties
of GREEN; STYLE 2, which assumes the plot properties of BLUE; and STYLE
3, which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors.
CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic
names such as STYLE 1, STYLE 2. You can modify these generic plot style
names in the Plot Style Table Editor. Click the Edit button on the Plot Device
tab in the Page Setup dialog box. If you want to rename the plot styles, you
must do so before applying them to drawing layouts.

CONVERTPSTYLES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch the Type of Plot Style Table

Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles.

Summary
A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both.
CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent
plot styles to named plot styles, or from named plot styles to color-dependent
plot styles, depending on which plot style method the drawing is currently
using.
When you convert a drawing, CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE
system variable to the appropriate setting (0 = named, 1= color-dependent).
For example, a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot properties
to objects and layers by color. In other words, all objects with the same color
have the same plot properties. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing to
use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent of

232 | Chapter 4 C Commands

color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have
different plot properties.

Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to Named Plot
Styles
A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before
converting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables
assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB.
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed,
where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the converted
drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was
converted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file. Normally
you should select the named plot style table that was converted from the
color-dependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space
and to all layouts. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from
the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their
color-dependent plot style had.
■

Drawing objects that had the same color-dependent plot style as their layer
are assigned the named plot style BYLAYER.

■

Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was different
from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same properties
that their color-dependent plot style had.

After a drawing is converted to named plot styles, you can change the named
plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model
space or layouts. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects.

Converting Drawings from Named to Color-Dependent Plot
Styles
A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and
named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached.
After a drawing is converted to color-dependent plot styles, you can assign a
color-dependent plot style table. Plot styles will be applied by color.

CONVERTPSTYLES | 233

COPY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Copy Objects

Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy
Menu: Modify ➤ Copy
Toolbar: Modify
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing
area. Click Copy Selection.

Summary

234 | Chapter 4 C Commands

With the COPYMODE on page 1422 system variable, you can control whether
multiple copies are created automatically.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish
Specify base point or [Displacement/mOde/Multiple] : Specify
a base point or enter an option
Specify second point or [Array] : Specify a
second point or enter an option

Displacement
Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates.
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far from the
original the copied objects are to be placed and in what direction.
If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is
interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3
for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied
2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current
location.

Mode
Controls whether the command repeats automatically (COPYMODE system
variable).
Single Creates a single copy of selected objects and ends the command.
Multiple Overrides the Single mode setting. The COPY command is set to
repeat automatically for the duration of the command.

Array
Arranges a specified number of copies in a linear array.
Number of Items to Array Specifies the number of items in the array,
including the original selection set.

COPY | 235

Second Point Determines a distance and direction for the array relative to
the base point. By default, the first copy in the array is positioned at the
specified displacement. The remaining copies are positioned in a linear array
beyond that point using the same incremental displacement.
Fit Positions the final copy in the array at the specified displacement. The
other copies are fit in a linear array between the original selection set and the
final copy.

Fit
Redefines the array to use the specified displacement as the location of the
last copy rather than the first copy, fitting the other copies between the original
selection set and the final copy.

COPYBASE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard along with a specified base point.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Edit ➤ Copy with Base Point
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy with Base Point.

Summary
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard.
■

Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location
in the same document or to another document.

236 | Chapter 4 C Commands

■

When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to
the specified base point.

COPYCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Copy Clip
Menu: Edit ➤ Copy
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy.
Command entry: Ctrl+C

Summary
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the
contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing.
NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, the selected objects are copied to the
Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the selected
text is copied to the Clipboard.
When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available
formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format
that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste
to transfer objects between drawings.

COPYCLIP | 237

COPYHIST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window

Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard.

Summary
The text is copied to the Clipboard.

COPYLINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit OLE Objects in Drawings

Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Link

Summary
You can copy the current view to the Clipboard and then paste the contents
of the Clipboard into another document as a linked OLE object.

238 | Chapter 4 C Commands

COPYTOLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Copies one or more objects to another layer.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layers ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
Creates duplicates of selected objects on a layer that you specify. You can also
specify a different location for the duplicated objects.
If you enter -copytolayer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to copy:
Select object on destination layer or [Name] : Select an object or enter
n

Select Object on Destination Layer
Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed.
Specify Base Point Specifies the base point of the copied objects.
Displacement Enters coordinate values that specify a relative distance and
direction.

COPYTOLAYER | 239

Name
Enter or select Name to display the Copy to Layer dialog box on page 240.
■

Specify Base Point on page 239

■

Displacement on page 239

Copy To Layer Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Destination Layer
Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can
also enter a name to create a new layer. The new layer inherits the properties
(on/off, freeze/thaw, locked/unlocked, etc.) of the current layer.

-COPYTOLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to copy:
Specify the destination layer name or [?/= (select object)] <0>: Select an object
on the destination layer, enter ?, or enter =

240 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Specify the Destination Layer Name
Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can
also enter a name to create a new layer. The new layer inherits the properties
(on/off, freeze/thaw, locked/unlocked, etc.) of the current layer

? (List Layers)
Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: *

= (Select Object)
Selects a destination layer by selecting an object on that layer.

CUI
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Understand User Interface Customization

Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface

Summary
User interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels,
shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts are all managed from this dialog box.
The Customize User Interface Editor is displayed.
NOTE The XML-based CUIx file replaces the CUI file used in AutoCAD 2006
through AutoCAD LT 2009, and both the legacy menu (MNS) and legacy menu
template (MNU) files used in releases prior to AutoCAD 2006.

CUI | 241

For information about customizing the different user interface elements found
in the Customize User Interface dialog box, see User Interface Customization
in the Customization Guide.

Customize User Interface Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Understand User Interface Customization

Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars,
menus, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts.

List of Tabs
■

Customize

■

Transfer

For more information, see User Interface Customization in the Customization
Guide.

Customize Tab (Customize User Interface Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Basics of Customization Files

Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars,
menus, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts.

242 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
Provides an interface for customizing workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon
panels, shortcut menus, and other user interface elements.
NOTE When the Customize User Interface Editor is displayed using the Customize
Commands option from the Tool Palettes window or the Customize option from
the Quick Access toolbar or a toolbar, the Customizations In pane is collapsed and
the Command List pane is expanded.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Customizations In Pane
Displays a tree structure of user interface elements that can be customized,
such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, partial CUIx files, and so
on.
List box Displays a list of CUIx files that are loaded and an Open option.

Customize User Interface Editor | 243

Available Customizations In toolbar Contains Load Partial Customization
File and Save All Current Customization Files buttons.
Load Partial Customization File Loads a CUIx file that you can add to the
acadlt.cuix file.
Save All Current Customization Files Saves changes to all loaded CUIx files.
Image Manager Displays the Image Manager on page 253, in which you can
import, export, and delete images stored in a loaded CUIx file.
Tree View Displays the current customization file in a structured view so you
can add and modify the user interface elements.

Dynamic Display Pane
Displays content specific to the user interface element you select in the tree
view in the left pane.
Information Describes selected user interface elements that do not have
properties (such as the Toolbars node, Menus node, and Shortcut Menus node).
Properties Displays the properties of user interface elements or items selected
in the tree view. Elements or items that display properties include specific
menus, menu commands, toolbars, and toolbar buttons.
Button Image Displays the images that can be assigned to a command. You
can create new and edit existing images with the Button Editor on page 252.
Shortcuts Displays a list of shortcut key names and temporary override names,
their corresponding shortcut key combinations, keyboard shortcut type
(shortcut key or temporary override), and the source CUIx file name.
Toolbar Preview Displays a preview of the selected toolbar.
Panel Preview Displays a preview of the selected ribbon panel.
Quick Properties Displays a list of object types and associated properties. You
can specify which object types and properties are enabled to use with the
Quick Properties panel and rollover tooltips.

Command List Pane
Displays a list of commands that are loaded in the program.
Categories Displays filters for the command list, including All Commands,
 Commands, User Defined, Toolbar Control Elements, or Ribbon
Control Elements. You can also filter the list to display commands within a
specific CUIx file.

244 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Find Command or Text Searches the current CUIx for a selected command
or matching text string. Displays the Find and Replace dialog box.
Create a New Command Creates a new command. You can add or change
properties and create or edit a button.

Properties Pane
Displays user interface properties that you can view, edit, or delete.
General Displays the name and description of a command or user interface
element.
■

Name - Displays the name of the user interface element. The name you
enter is the label or tooltip name displayed in the program.

■

Description - Displays the description for the user interface element. The
description you enter is displayed in the status bar or in a tooltip.

Properties for Ribbon Tabs and Panels:
■

Display Text - Displays the name of the ribbon tab or panel.

Properties for Ribbon Tabs:
■

Contextual Display Type - Specifies whether the ribbon tab replaces all
ribbon tabs on the ribbon or is merged with the ribbon tabs already
displayed on the ribbon. (Full or Merged)

Display Determines which user interface elements are displayed after start up
or when a workspace is set current.
■

Start On - Specifies if the Model tab or last used layout is set current.
(Model, Layout, or Do Not Change)

■

Menu Bar - Specifies the display of the menu bar. (Off or On)

■

Status Bar - Specifies the display of the application and drawing status
bars. (Application Only, All Off, All On, or Drawing Status Bar Only)

■

Model/Layout Tabs - Specifies the display of the Model and layout tabs
along the bottom of the drawing window. (Off, On, or Do Not Change)

■

Scroll Bars - Specifies the display of the scroll bars in the drawing window.
(Off, On, or Do Not Change)

Customize User Interface Editor | 245

Partial File Behavior Controls how ribbon tabs are displayed when in a CUIx
file that is being loaded as a partial customization file.
■

Default Display - Specifies whether the ribbon tab is displayed on the ribbon
when in a CUIx file that is loaded as a partial customization file. (Do Not
Add to Workspaces or Add to Workspaces)

■

Workspace Behavior - Specifies how the ribbon tab is merged or added to
the ribbon when this CUIx file is loaded as a partial customization file.
(Add Tab Only, Merge Tab Only, or Merge or Add Tab)

Appearance Controls the appearance of toolbars, ribbon panels, commands
on a ribbon panel, and ribbon tabs.
Properties for Ribbon Panels:
■

Resize Style - Specifies the resize style for a ribbon panel when the ribbon
is reduced in size. (Collapse as Needed, Never Collapse, or Collapse Last)

Properties for Ribbon Panels on Fold Panels and Sub-Panel:
■

Top Justify - Specifies the vertical justification for contents within
sub-panels, or for fold panels of different heights.

■

Resize - Specifies whether the panel can be resized.

■

Resize Priority - Specifies the resizing priority of panels. When the ribbon
is compressed, panels with lower values resize first. When a ribbon is
expanded, panels with higher values resize first.

Properties for a Command on Ribbon Panels:
■

Button Style - Specifies the orientation, size, and label display of the
command. (Large With Text (Vertical), Large With Text (Horizontal),
SmallWithText, SmallWithoutText, or LargeWithoutText)

■

Group Name - Specifies the group name for the command when grouping
is enabled for a drop-down.

Properties for Drop-downs on Quick Access Toolbars and Ribbon Panels:
■

Behavior - Specifies if the button executes a command or displays a list of
commands. (Drop Down Menu with Recent, Drop Down Menu, Split with
Recent, Split, or Split with Recent (Static))

246 | Chapter 4 C Commands

■

SplitButtonListStyle - Specifies how the commands on the drop-down will
be displayed. (Icon, IconText, or Descriptive)

■

Button Style - Specifies the orientation, size, and label display of the button
for the drop-down. (Large With Text (Vertical), Large With Text
(Horizontal), SmallWithText, SmallWithoutText, or LargeWithoutText)

■

Grouping - Specifies whether commands under a drop-down are grouped
together using their assigned group names. (Yes or No)

Properties for Toolbars:
■

Default Display - Specifies whether the toolbar is displayed when in a CUIx
file that is loaded as a partial customization file. (Do Not Add to Workspaces
or Add to Workspaces)

■

Orientation - Specifies the location of the toolbar. (Floating, Top, Bottom,
Left, or Right)

■

Default X Location - Specifies the X location of the toolbar when floating.

■

Default Y Location - Specifies the Y location of the toolbar when floating.

■

Rows - Specifies the number of rows the items on the toolbar are displayed
in when the toolbar is floating.

Properties for a Separator on Ribbon Panels:
■

Separator Style - Specifies the style for the separator. (Line or Spacer)

Access Controls the key combination assigned to a shortcut key.
■

Key(s) - Specifies the key combination assigned to a shortcut key.

■

KeyTip - Specifies the keytip character to access a command or control
from the ribbon.

Properties for Drop-downs on Quick Access Toolbars Ribbon Panels:
■

ToolTip Title - Specifies the alternate title for the tooltip of a drop-down
when its Behavior property is set to Drop Down Menu.

Resize Style
■

Hide Text - Specifies that the text is never removed.

■

Wrap - Specifies that the content does not wrap inside the panel.

Customize User Interface Editor | 247

■

Shrink - Specifies the width of Row Panel never decreases below the default
size.

Properties for Ribbon Fold Panels:
■

Default Size - Specifies the size of the panel contents in a floating panel.

■

Minimum Size - Specifies the smallest size each control in the panel
collapses.

■

Maximum Size - Specifies the largest size each control in the panel expands.

IMPORTANT Maximum Size must be greater than or equal to the Default Size,
and Default Size must be greater than or equal to Minimum Size.
Size Controls the size of a tablet menu.
■

Rows - Specifies the number of rows for a tablet menu.

■

Columns - Specifies the number of columns for a tablet menu.

Slide Specifies the slide library and slide to use for a command in an image
menu.
■

Slide library - Specifies the slide library for the slide used for the command
in an image menu.

■

Slide label - Specifies the slide to use for the command in an image menu.

Shortcut Controls the key combination and macros assigned to a temporary
override key.
■

Key(s) - Specifies the key combination for the temporary override.
Click the [..] button to display the Shortcut Keys dialog box. Click in the
Press New Shortcut Key text box and assign the desired key combination.

■

Macro 1 (Key Down) - Displays the macro to execute when the key
combination is pressed.

■

Macro 2 (Key Up) - Displays the macro to execute when the key
combination is released.

Command Displays the properties assigned to a command.
■

Name - Displays the name of the command. The name you enter is the
label or tooltip name displayed in the program.

248 | Chapter 4 C Commands

■

Description - Displays the description for the command. The description
you enter is displayed in the status bar or in a tooltip.

■

Extended Help File - Displays the file name and ID from the extended help
file that should be displayed when the cursor continues to hover over a
toolbar, panel button, or menu item for a specified period of time.
Click the [..] button to display the Select Extended Help File dialog box.
Select a XAML file that contains tooltip definitions and then select the
tooltip content to display from the Select Help ID dialog box.

■

Command Display Name - Displays the command line text string that is
shown in the command tooltip.

■

Macro - Displays the macro assigned to a selected command. You can
create a macro or edit an existing macro.
Click the [..] button to display the Long String Editor dialog box and the
full contents of the macro.

■

Tags - Displays the user-defined keywords that are associated with a
command. Tags can be used to search for commands in the menu browser.
Click the [..] button to display the Tag Editor dialog box. Click the Tags
text box to add, modify or remove tags. Each tag must be separated by a
comma and the total number of characters for all the tags and separators
cannot be more than 256 characters.

Advanced Displays the aliases and element IDs that you can define for each
user interface element.
■

Aliases - Specifies a unique value for a user interface element that is used
to programmatically reference the user interface element.
Click the [..] button to display the Aliases dialog box. Click in the text box
and edit the list of assigned aliases.

■

Object Name - Specifies the object type associated with a double click
action.

■

Element ID - Displays the tag that uniquely identifies a command or user
interface element.

Images Determines which images are assigned to a command when displayed
on a user interface element.
■

Small Image - Specifies the small image file to use when a command is
added to a toolbar, menu, or ribbon panel.

■

Large Image - Specifies the large image file to use when a command is
added to a toolbar or ribbon panel.

Customize User Interface Editor | 249

Quick Properties Pane
Displays a list of object types and the properties associated to the selected
object type.
Edit Object Type List Controls which object types are used with the Quick
Properties panel or rollover tooltips. Displays the Edit Object Type List dialog
box.
Object Type List Displays a list of the object types you can use with Quick
Properties panel or rollover tooltips.
General Displays the general properties that are available for all object types
in the Properties list.
Properties List Displays the properties for the selected object type or the
general properties available for all object types.
Reset Overrides Overrides the selected general properties for all object types.

Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Transfer and Migrate Customization

Transfers user interface elements to or from a main or partial customization
(CUIx) file, where your interface element data is stored.

250 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
You open a CUIx, CUI, MNS, or MNU file to import or export user interface
data. When you open CUI, MNU, or MNS files, they are not converted
automatically to a CUIx file format until you save the new file that is created.
The original CUI, MNU, or MNS file is not modified.

List of Options
Customizations In panes When you enter cuiimport at the Command prompt,
the main CUIx file is displayed (acadlt.cuix by default) in the right pane. You
open a CUIx or legacy customization file in the left pane to transfer data.
When you enter cuiexport at the Command prompt, the main CUIx file is
displayed in the left pane. You open another CUIx or legacy customization
file in the right pane to transfer data.

Customize User Interface Editor | 251

Button Editor Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Custom Images for Commands

Modifies or creates custom images used for commands.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color Palette
Sets the current color used by the editing tools.
Standard Color Swatches Color swatches used to set of the standard 16 colors
current.
More Opens the Select Color dialog box.

Editing Tools
Provides tools for editing a custom image.
Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color.
Line Creates lines using the current color. Click and drag to set the start point
and draw the line. Release to complete the line.
Circle Creates circles using the current color. Click to set the center and drag
to set the radius. Release to complete the circle.

252 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Erase Sets pixels to white. Click and drag over colored pixels to change them
to white.

Editing Area
Provides a close-up view of the image for editing.

Preview
Displays a preview of the image currently being edited. The preview displayed
shows the actual size of the image.

Clear
Clears the editing area.

Undo
Undoes the last editing action.

Grid
Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.

Save
Displays the Save Image dialog box, which allows you to save the customized
image to the working customization file.

Import
Imports an externally stored image for editing. Images are stored in the working
customization file as bitmap (BMP) files.

Export
Exports the customized image to an external local or network storage location.
NOTE When exporting an image, the Create File dialog box defaults to the folder
defined under Custom Icon Location of the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Images that are located in this folder can be migrated with the Migrate Custom
Settings dialog box.

Image Manager Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Manage, Import, and Export Custom Images

Manages the images that are in the selected customization file.

Image Manager Dialog Box | 253

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Loaded Customization Files List Lists the customization files that are
currently loaded.
Custom Images List Lists the images that are stored in the customization file
selected from the Loaded Customization Files list.
Import Imports an externally stored image into the selected customization
file from the Loaded Customization Files list.
Export Exports the selected custom images from the Custom Images list to
an external local or network storage location.
Delete Permanently deletes the selected image from the Custom Images list
and the customization file.
Preview Displays a preview of the selected image in the Custom Images list.

254 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Find and Replace Dialog Box - CUI
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Find and Replace Commands and Text in a CUIx File

Finds a search string in a command or command property in either the
Command List pane or the Available Customizations in  pane, or
replaces a search string with a new search string

Summary
Locates and replaces commands or command properties (command names,
descriptions, or macros). Use the Find tab to locate a specified text string, and
the Replace tab to locate and replace a specified text string.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Common
Find What Displays the search string you want to locate. If you select a
command in the Command List pane, this box displays that string. You can
also enter a string. Any previous strings entered in this box are stored in the
drop-down list.
Ignore Case Locates all commands or command properties regardless of their
case (for example, the program would search for both LINE and line).

Find and Replace Dialog Box - CUI | 255

Restrict Search To Limits the search to the CUIx file you select from the
drop-down list. By default, the main CUIx file (acadlt.cuix by default) is
searched.
Find Next Locates the next instance of the search string in the Name,
Description, or Macros box in the Properties pane. If you search in the
Command List pane, only commands in the list are located. If you search in
the tree view in the Customizations In pane, the search starts in the tree view
and continues to the commands in the Command List pane.

Find Tab
Find Selected Command When a command is selected in the Command List
pane, locates the next interface element in the tree view that references the
selected command.

Replace Tab
Replace With Displays the string that will replace the string you searched for.
Replace Replaces a single instance of the search string. In the Customize User
Interface dialog box, the location of the search string is displayed in the
Command List pane, tree view, and Properties pane.
Replace All Replaces all instances where the search string is found. You cannot
undo this operation.

CUIEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Transfer and Migrate Customization

Exports customized settings from the main CUIx file to an enterprise or partial
CUIx file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Export

256 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Export Customizations

Summary
Customization information can be transferred between the main and partial
CUIx files.
Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) opened by
default. The main CUIx file (acadlt.cuix) is open in the left pane. You can drag
items from one CUIx file to the other. Click Apply to save the changes and
view the updated CUIx file.

CUIIMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Transfer and Migrate Customization

Imports customized settings from an enterprise or partial CUIx file to the main
CUIx file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Import
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Import Customizations

Summary
Customization information can be transferred between the main and partial
CUIx files.
Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) opened by
default. You can drag items from one CUIx file to the other. Click Apply to
save the changes and view the updated CUIx file.

CUIIMPORT | 257

CUILOAD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Manage Customization Files

Loads a CUIx file.

Summary
Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box, where you can locate and
load a CUIx file to customize or transfer user interface settings.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUILOAD displays the following Command
prompt.
Enter name of customization file to load: Enter a file name
NOTE The Legacy Menu (MNS), Legacy Menu Template (MNU), and
Customization (CUI) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one
file type, the XML-based CUIx file.

Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Manage Customization Files

Controls the display of customization groups and interface elements.

258 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Loaded Customization Groups
Lists the currently loaded customization files.
File Name
Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You can either enter the file
name or choose Browse to display the Select Customization File dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box).
Unload
Unloads the customization group selected in the Customization Groups list.
Load
Loads the file specified under File Name.
Browse
Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
in which you can select a menu file to load.

Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box | 259

CUIUNLOAD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Manage Customization Files

Unloads a CUIx file.

Summary
Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box, which has the same
options as CUILOAD. The only difference between the two commands is in
the Command prompts.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUIUNLOAD displays the following Command
prompt.
NOTE The Legacy Menu (MNS), Legacy Menu Template (MNU), and
Customization (CUI) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one
file type, the XML-based CUIx file.

CUSTOMIZE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize Tool Palettes

Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes

260 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes
Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and click Customize Palettes.

Summary
The Customize dialog box is displayed.

Customize Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize Tool Palettes

Creates, modifies, and organizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. Imports
and exports tool palette files.

Summary
The Tool Palettes window displays only the tool palettes for the current group
or displays all tool palettes if no group is current.
In the Customize dialog box, right-click to display shortcut menus. Click and
drag items to move them.

Customize Dialog Box | 261

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Palettes Lists all available tool palettes.
Right-click a tool palette to display a shortcut menu with the following options:
■

Rename. Changes the name of an existing tool palette.

■

New Palette. Creates a new empty tool palette.

■

Delete. Removes the tool palette from AutoCAD LT and the associated file
on disk.
NOTE A tool palette cannot be recovered after it is deleted. Export the tool
palette to an XTP file before deleting it if you want to access it later.

■

Export. Saves the tool palette to an XTP file.

■

Import. Merges the tool palette from an XTP file with the other tool palettes
in AutoCAD LT.

Palette Groups Displays a tree view of your tool palette groups and the tool
palettes contained in each.
Right-click a tool palette group to display a shortcut menu with the following
options:
■

New Group. Creates a new tool palette group.

■

Rename. Changes the name of an existing tool palette group.

■

Delete. Removes the tool palette group from AutoCAD LT and the current
user profile.
NOTE A tool palette group cannot be recovered after it is deleted. Export the
tool palette group to an XPG file before deleting it if you want to access it later.

■

Set Current. Sets a tool palette group current in the Tool Palettes window.

■

Export. Saves the tool palette group to an XPG file.

■

Export All. Saves all tool palette groups to an XPG file.

■

Import. Merges the tool palette groups from an XPG file with the other tool
palette groups in AutoCAD LT.

262 | Chapter 4 C Commands

NOTE Import all tool palettes (XTP files) before importing tool palette groups
(XPG files).

Right-click a tool palette to display a shortcut menu with the following options:
■

New Group. Creates a new tool palette group.

■

Remove. Deletes the reference to the tool palette from the tool palette group
only; the tool palette is not removed from AutoCAD LT and the tool palette
file on disk is not deleted.

Current Palette Group
Displays the name of the tool palette group that is current in the Tool Palettes
window.

CUTCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Cut
Menu: Edit ➤ Cut
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Cut.
Command entry: Ctrl+X

CUTCLIP | 263

Summary
CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the
drawing.
You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as
an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP does
not create OLE link information.
When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you
can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another
application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between
drawings.

264 | Chapter 4 C Commands

D Commands

5

DATALINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link a Table to External Data

Displays the Data Link dialog box.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Data Link
Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager

Summary
A table can be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSX, or CSV) file. You
can link to an entire spreadsheet, individual row, column, cell, or cell range in
Excel.
The Data Link Manager on page 266 is displayed.

265

Data Link Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link a Table to External Data

Creates, edits, and manages data links.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Data Link Tree View
Displays links contained within the drawing. Also gives options for creating
new data links.
Excel Links
Lists the Microsoft Excel data links within the drawing. If the icon displays a
linked chain, then the data link is valid. If the icon displays a broken chain,
then the data link is broken.

266 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Create a New Excel Data Link Launches a dialog box where you enter the
name for a new data link. Once a name has been created, the New Excel Data
Link dialog box on page 267 is displayed.

Details
Lists information for the data link selected in the tree view above.

Preview
Displays a preview of the linked data as it would appear in the drawing table.
When a data link is not currently selected then no preview is displayed.

New Excel Data Link Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link a Table to External Data

Links data from a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel to a table within your
drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

File
Specifies the file and file path from which to create a data link.

New Excel Data Link Dialog Box | 267

Choose an Excel File
Allows you to choose an established Microsoft XLS, XLSX, or CSV file to link
to your drawing. At the bottom of this drop-down list, you can select a new
XLS, XLSX, or CSV file from which to create a data link.
Click the [...] button to browse for another Microsoft Excel file on your
computer.
Path Type Determines the path that will be used to find the file specified
above. There are three path options: full path, relative path, and no path.
■

Full Path. Uses the full path of the file specified above, including the root
directory and all subdirectories that contain the linked Microsoft Excel
file.

■

Relative Path. Uses the file path relative to the current drawing file to
reference the linked Microsoft Excel file. To use a relative path, the linked
file must be saved.

■

No Path. Uses only the filename of the linked Microsoft Excel file for
referencing.

Link Options
Specifies the data in your Excel file to link to your drawing.
Select the Excel Sheet to Link to
Displays the names of all sheets within the specified XLS, XLSX, or CSV file.
The link options specified below are applied to the sheet you choose here.
Link Entire Sheet
Links the entire specified sheet within your Excel file to a table in your drawing.
Link to a Named Range
Links a named range of cells already contained within your Excel file to a table
in your drawing.
Clicking the arrow displays the available named ranges found in the linked
spreadsheet.
Link to Range
Specifies a range of cells in your Excel file to link to a table in your drawing.
In the text box, enter the range of cells you want linked to your drawing. Valid
ranges include
■

Rectangular regions (for example, A1:D10)

268 | Chapter 5 D Commands

■

Entire columns (for example, A:A)

■

Sets of columns (for example, A:D)

Click the button to the right of the text box to preview the linked range.

Preview Window
Displays a preview of your table using the options you have applied.

More Options
Displays more options. This button becomes available when you use an existing
Excel file or browse for a new one.

Cell Contents
Options in this box will determine how data is imported into your drawing
from your external source.
Keep Data Formats and Formulas
Imports data with formulas and supported data formats attached.
Keep Data Formats, Solve Formulas in Excel
Imports data formats. Data is calculated from formulas in Excel.
Convert Data Formats to Text, Solve Formulas in Excel
Imports Microsoft Excel data as text with data calculated from formulas in
Excel (supported data formats not attached).
Allow Writing to Source File
Specifies that the DATALINKUPDATE on page 270 command can be used to
upload any changes made to linked data in your drawing to the original
external spreadsheet.

Cell Formatting
Use Excel Formatting
Specifies that any formatting specified in the original XLS, XLSX, or CSV file
will be brought into your drawing. When this option is not selected, the table
style on page 1201 formatting specified in the Insert Table dialog box on page
1200 is applied.
Keep Table Updated to Excel Formatting
If the option above is selected, updates any changed formatting when the
DATALINKUPDATE on page 270 command is used.

New Excel Data Link Dialog Box | 269

Start With Excel Formatting, Do Not Update
Imports the formatting specified in the original XLS, XLSX, or CSV file into
your drawing, but any changes made to the formatting are not included when
the DATALINKUPDATE on page 270 command is used.

DATALINKUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link a Table to External Data

Updates data to or from an established external data link.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Download from Source
Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Update Data Links

Summary
Updates changes to linked data between a table in a drawing and an external
data file.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an option [Update data link/Write data link] :

Update Data Link
Updates the linked data in a table in your drawing with data that has been
changed in the external source file.
Select Objects Updates selected tables containing data links with data that
has been changed in the external source file.

270 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Data Link Specifies the name of a data link to update with data that has been
changed in the external source file.
Entering [?] lists the data links in the current drawing.
All Data Links Updates all data links in all tables in the drawing with data
that has been changed in the external source file.

Write Data Link
Updates the linked data in an external file with data that has been changed
in a table in your drawing.
A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells. If you
hover your cursor over the data link, information about the data link is
displayed.
Select Objects Uploads data that has been changed from the original linked
content to the source file.

DCDISPLAY
Quick Reference
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Show/Hide
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dynamic Dimensions ➤ Select Objects
Toolbar: Parametric

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select objects to display or hide the dimensional constraints
Enter an option [Show on page 272/Hide on page 272] : Enter the
appropriate value to show or hide dynamic constraints for the selection set of objects

DCDISPLAY | 271

Show
Displays the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.

Hide
Hides the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.

DDEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text

Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit
Toolbar: Text
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and
click Edit.
Pointing device: Double-click a text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an annotation object or [Undo]:
Object Selection Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text
you select:
■

When the TEXTED system variable is set to 0 or 2, text created using TEXT
on page 1229 displays the In-Place Text Editor without the Text Formatting
toolbar and the ruler. Right-click to display options on page 1234.

■

Text created using MTEXT on page 762 displays the In-Place Text Editor.

272 | Chapter 5 D Commands

■

Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit
Attribute Definition dialog box.

■

Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press Enter to end the command.
Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can
use this option immediately after editing.

Edit Text Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text

Edits a single-line text object.

Summary
When the TEXTED system variable is set to 1, modifies text created with TEXT
on page 1229. Enter the new text and click OK.

Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text

Edits an attribute text object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Tag

Edit Text Dialog Box | 273

Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The
tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately
displayed in the tag field.
Prompt
Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block
containing this attribute definition.
Default
Specifies the default attribute value.

DDPTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Reference Points

Specifies the display style and size of point objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel dropdown ➤ Point Style
Menu: Format ➤ Point Style
Command entry: 'ddptype for transparent use

Summary
The Point Style dialog box is displayed.

274 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Point Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Reference Points

Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an
icon.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Point Display Images
Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in
the PDMODE on page 1606 system variable.

Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen
or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE system
variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the
screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out.
Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you
specify under Point Size. Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom
in or out.

Point Style Dialog Box | 275

DDVPOINT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the 3D Projection Style

Sets the 3D viewing direction.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets

Summary
The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed.

Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the 3D Projection Style

Defines 3D view settings.

276 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Set Viewing Angles
Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system
(WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS).

Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS.
Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS.

From
Specifies viewing angles.
X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis.
XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane.
You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm
indicates the new angle. The gray arm indicates the current angle. Specify an
angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the
bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that

Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box | 277

region. If you select the inner arc or an area inside it, the angle is not rounded
off, and the result may be a fractional number.

Set to Plan View
Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the
selected coordinate system.

DELAY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Run Slide Shows from Scripts

Provides a timed pause within a script.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'delay for transparent use

Summary
Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays
the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest
delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.

DELCONSTRAINT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied

Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.

278 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Delete Constraints
Menu: Parametric ➤ Delete Constraints
Toolbar: Parametric

Summary
The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line.
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects.

DETACHURL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Removes hyperlinks in a drawing.

Summary
Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the
polyline is deleted. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer.

DGNADJUST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the
Background

DETACHURL | 279

Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DGN underlay.

Access Methods
Ribbon: DGN Underlay contextual tab ➤ Adjust panel

Summary
You can change the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome for
a single or multiple DGN underlays. To confirm the settings on a selected
DGN underlay, use the Properties palette.
NOTE You can also use the ADJUST on page 20 command to change the fade,
contrast, and monochrome settings for DGN underlays as well as DWF, DWFx and
PDF underlays or the fade, contrast and brightness for images.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select DGN underlay: Select one or more DGN underlays
Enter DGN underlay option [Fade/Contrast/Monochrome] :
Enter fade value (0-100): Enter a value
Enter contrast value (0-100): Enter a value
Monochrome? [Yes/No]: Enter yes or no and then press Enter

Fade
Controls the fade effect of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 100.
The greater the value, the more transparent the underlay appears against the
background. The lesser the value, the less transparent and closer to opaque
the underlay appears. A value of 0 makes the underlay appear fully opaque.

Contrast
Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the underlay. Values
range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced
to its primary or secondary color.

Monochrome
Controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance.
When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at
black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more. If the
background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are
inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest
linework displaying in black.

280 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGNATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach
Menu: Insert ➤ DGN Underlay
Toolbar: Insert

Summary
When you attach a DGN file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to
the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the
current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Once you select a DGN file, the Attach DGN Underlay dialog box
is displayed. After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the underlay
through the DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab on page 284.
NOTE DGNATTACH is not limited to files with .dgn extensions. It supports all
DGN files, even those that do not have a .dgn extension.
If you enter -dgnattach at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
NOTE When a DGN file is attached as an underlay, its levels structure (layers) are
combined into a single layer. The DGN underlay is placed on the current layer.
To hide the DGN attachment, freeze the layer on which it was attached.

DGNATTACH | 281

Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Names, locates, and defines the insertion point, scale, and rotation when
attaching DGN underlays.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the DGN file you have selected to attach.

Browse
Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on
page 826).

Select a design model from the DGN file
Displays all of the design models that are found in the DGN file. If the DGN
file only contains a single design model, that model is listed.
If the DGN file contains multiple design models, only a single model can be
selected for attachment. The first model in the list is selected by default.

Conversion Units
Matches the DWF files’s drawing units to the master units and sub-units
specified in the DGN file. For example, if the DGN file has master units set to
meters, and sub-units set to millimeters, and you want the DWG to be set to
millimeters, select sub-units in the Attach DGN Underlay dialog box.
Master Units Matches the DWG drawing units to the master units set in the
DGN file.
Sub Units Matches the DWG drawing units to the sub- units set in the DGN
file.

Path Type
Selects the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the DGN file, or No Path,
the name of the DGN file (the DGN file must be located in the same folder as
the current drawing file).

282 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected DGN file. Specify On-Screen is
the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0.
Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing
device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and
Z.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected DGN underlay.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and
the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the
true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Specify On-screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the
pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale
factor. The default scale factor is 1.
Scale Factor Field Enters a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor
is 1.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DGN underlay.
Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you
exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a
rotation angle value at the Command prompt.
Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the
dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.

Show Details
Displays the DGN file path.
Found In Displays the path where the DGN file is located.
Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the DGN
file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box | 283

DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Underlays

Change DGN underlay display, clip, layer, and osnap options.

Summary
When you select a DGN underlay in a drawing, the DGN Underlay Contextual
tab is displayed on the ribbon.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Adjust Panel
Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay. The
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary secondary color.
Fade Controls the appearance of the linework. The greater the value, the
lighter the linework in the underlay appears.
Display in Monochrome Displays the underlay in black and white.

Clipping Panel
Create Clipping Boundary (DGNCLIP on page 287) Crops the display of a
selected DGN underlay to a specified boundary.
Create Clipping Boundary (DGNCLIP on page 287) Deletes the clipping
boundary.

Options Panel
Show Underlay Hides or displays the underlay.
Enable Snap Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in
the DGN underlay.

284 | Chapter 5 D Commands

External References (EXTERNALREFERENCES on page 504) Opens the
External References palette.

DGN Layers Panel
Edit Layers (ULAYERS on page 1281) Controls the display of layers in a DWF,
DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay.

-DGNATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Attach a DGN underlay from the command line.

Summary
When you attach a DGN file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to
the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the
current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
NOTE DGNATTACH is not limited to files with *.dgn extensions. It supports all
DGN files, even those that do not have a .dgn extension.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
TIP You can drag a DGN file onto the drawing window to start the DGNATTACH
command.
Path to DGN File to Attach Enters the full path name to the DGN underlay
file. The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits,
spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this
program.
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select DGN File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify
both the DGN file and path as follows:
path name\filename.dgn

-DGNATTACH | 285

or
“path name\filename.dgn”
If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program adds
the extension and searches for the file.
Enter Name of Model or ? Enter a model name. For a list of models, enter?.
Enter Model(s) to list <*> Lists the design models available in the DGN file
in a separate text window.
Conversion Units Matches the DWF file’s drawing units to the master units
and sub-units specified in the DGN file. For example, if the DGN file has
master units set to meters, and sub-units set to millimeters, and you want the
DWG to be set to millimeters, select sub-units in the Attach DGN Underlay
dialog box.
■

Master Units - Matches the DWG drawing units to the master units set in
the DGN file.

■

Sub Units - Matches the DWG drawing units to the sub- units set in the
DGN file.

Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected DGN file. Enter
the X, Y, and Z coordinates at the command prompt, or click onscreen.
Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected DGN underlay and the
scale factor units. You can enter a scale factor at the command prompt or click
onscreen with the mouse.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and
the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the
true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DGN underlay by entering
an angle value at the command prompt or by clicking onscreen.

286 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGNBIND (-DGNBIND)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Binds DGN underlays to the current drawing.

Summary
Converts a specified DGN reference into a block, making it a permanent part
of the drawing. The DGN-dependent named objects (such as layer names) of
the former DGN reference are added to your drawing. In each DGN-dependent
named object, the vertical bar (|) is replaced with three new characters: a
number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($). The number is increased if
the same name already exists in the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Enter DGN underlay name(s) to bind: Enter one or more DGN underlay names

DGNCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Clip External References and Blocks

Crops the display of a selected DGN underlay to a specified boundary.

Access Methods

Button

DGNBIND (-DGNBIND) | 287

Ribbon: DGN Underlay contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create
Clipping Boundary
Shortcut menu: Select a DGN underlay to clip, right-click in the drawing
area, and click DGN Clip

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of a DGN underlay outside the
boundary that is hidden. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled
by the DGNFRAME on page 1433 system variable.
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the DGN underlay.
TIP Use the generic CLIP on page 211 command to clip images, external references,
viewports, and underlays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the DGN underlay clipped to the previously
defined boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire DGN underlay.
If you reclip the DGN underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is
automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary
even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and displays the entire DGN underlay.

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal
clipping boundary from a polyline.
Specify clipping boundary or select invert option: [Select
polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular/Invert clip] :
Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline
can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect
itself.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points
that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.

288 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify
for opposite corners.
Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected DGN underlay
when the old boundary is deleted.

DGNEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export MicroStation DGN Files

Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu

➤ Export ➤ DGN File

Summary
The Export DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Once you specify a DGN file name, the Export DGN Settings dialog
box is displayed. You can export a V8 or V7 file using DGNEXPORT.
If you enter -dgnexport at the Command prompt, options are displayed on
page 297.
See the DGNEXPORT Conversion Table on page 294 specific details about the
scope of exporting DWG objects and other data to DGN files.

DGNEXPORT | 289

WARNING Some programs that work with DGN files do not support extended
characters that the Windows operating system considers valid for file names. Thus,
it is recommended that you do not use accented or Asian characters in file names
when using DGNEXPORT.

Export DGN Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export MicroStation DGN Files

Controls how objects are processed when exporting them to a DGN file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

External DWG References
Controls how xrefs are processed.
Translate All DWG References to DGN Files

290 | Chapter 5 D Commands

All referenced DWG files, including nested DWG references, are converted
into DGN files. The resulting DGN files use the same file name as the DWG
files, but use a .dgn file extension.
With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite
DGN reference files
■

Prompt to Overwrite

■

Overwrite without Prompting

■

Do Not Overwrite

Bind All DWG References into One DGN file
The parent DWG file and all referenced DWG files are combined into a single
DGN file. The referenced DWG files are converted to cells as part of the primary
DGN file.
Ignore DWG References
Referenced DWG files are not included in the resulting DGN file.

External DGN References
Controls whether DGN underlays in the DWG file are exported as DGN
references of the resulting DGN file.
Export DGN Underlays as DGN References
When checked, any DGN underlays are exported as DGN references along
with the base drawing. When cleared, DGN underlays are not exported.
NOTE Do not export drawings that include V8 DGN underlays to a V7 DGN format
file. The V8 DGN references cannot display in a V7 DGN file because the V8 DGN
file format is not a valid design file for the resulting V7 DGN file.

Specify Seed File
A seed file for a DGN file is similar to a drawing template (DWT) file that
contains default settings and attributes, such as working units. Selecting the
appropriate DGN seed file (imperial, metric, or user-defined), and conversion
units is critical to the translation from DWG to DGN. In addition, the seed
file contains settings that are not present in a DWG file, and therefore inherited
in the exported DGN.
These settings include working units and resolution as well as whether the
file is 2D or 3D.

Export DGN Settings Dialog Box | 291

Conversion Units
Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The DGN seed file
contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units.
One DWG unit is converted to either one master unit or one sub-unit.
Master Units
Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one master unit of the
specified DGN seed file.
Sub Units
Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one sub-unit of the
specified DGN seed file.
NOTE The master units and the sub-units of the selected DGN seed file are
displayed next to the buttons for reference.
Filename drop-down list
Specify the name of the DGN seed file. Several sample seed files are provided
upon installation.
Browse button Displays the Select Seed File dialog box (a Standard File
Selection Dialog Boxes on page 826), in which you can select the DGN seed
file.
See the DGNEXPORT Conversion Table on page 294 specific details about the
scope of exporting DWG objects and other data to DGN files.

Sample DGN Seed Files
The following table lists the default DGN seed files and their settings. You
may need to edit these settings or obtain the appropriate seed file to suit your
conversion requirements.
DGN Seed File Name

Master Unit
(label)

Sub Unit (label)

Resolution

V7-Imperial-Arch01Seed2D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

12”/1’ and 8000
POS

V7-Imperial-Arch01Seed3D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

12”/1’ and 8000
POS

V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed2D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

12”/1’ and 1000
POS

292 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGN Seed File Name

Master Unit
(label)

Sub Unit (label)

Resolution

V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed3D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

12”/1’ and 1000
POS

V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed2D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Tenths (tn)

10tn/1’ and 100
POS

V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed3D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Tenths (tn)

10tn/1’ and 100
POS

V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed2D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Tenths (tn)

10tn/1’ and 1000
POS

V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed3D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Tenths (tn)

10tn/1’ and 1000
POS

V7-Metric-Seed2D.dgn

Meters (m)

Millimeters (mm)

1000mm/1m and 1
POS

V7-Metric-Seed3D.dgn

Meters (m)

Millimeters (mm)

1000mm/1m and 1
POS

V8-Imperial-Seed2D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

304800 per foot

V8-Imperial-Seed3D.dgn

Feet (‘)

Inches (“)

304800 per foot

V8-Metric-Seed2D.dgn

Meters (m)

Millimeters (mm)

1000mm per millimeter

V8-Metric-Seed3D.dgn

Meters (m)

Millimeters (mm)

1000mm per millimeter

Translate DWG Properties to DGN Properties
Selects and manages the mapping setup used on the current DGN export.
Select Mapping Setup
Displays the currently defined mapping setups.
Standard is the default mapping setup which extracts data from the drawing
being exported and applies an automatic mapping to DGN layers, linetypes,
lineweights, and colors, as shown in the mapping preview.

Export DGN Settings Dialog Box | 293

Setup Description
Displays the description of the selected mapping setup.
Mapping Setups
Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 311 where new mapping
setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified,
or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 310).
Mapping Preview for Setup
Lists all properties of both the exported DWG file in the DWG column and
the selected mapping setup in the DGN column.
NOTE The reference properties are not listed in the preview, but any properties
that apply to those references that are shown in the mapping preview are applied
to the references as well.

DGNEXPORT Conversion Table
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export MicroStation DGN Files

The following table lists the DGN objects and features that are supported for
export, and notes on the scope of the translation.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table
AutoCAD LT

MicroStation

Notes

Geometric Objects

Geometric Elements

The following DWG objects are translated into
DGN elements: line, xline, ray, polyline, arc,
circle, spline (NURBS), ellipse, elliptical arc,
point, donut, mline, hatch (including gradient
fills), and wipeout. Variable width polylines
maintain only their starting width when
translated into SmartLines.

Layers

Levels

Invalid DWG characters in layer names are
converted to spaces.

294 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DWG to DGN Conversion Table
AutoCAD LT

MicroStation

Notes

Colors

Colors

Colors are matched as closely as possible.
Colors set with the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) are translated directly to the DGN color
index. If TrueColor is used and a direct match
of RGB values is available in the DGN color
index, the colors are also mapped directly. If
a TrueColor match is not available, an RGB
value is added to the DGN color index.

Linetypes

Line Styles

Custom linetypes are unsupported and could
produce unexpected results.

Blocks

Cells

Blocks are exported as shared cells. Dynamic
blocks are also exported as cells and lose their
dynamic behavior. Invisible, Constant, Verify,
and Preset attributes are all converted into
tags.

Single-line Text
Objects, Multiline
Text Objects,
Text Styles

Text, Text Nodes,
Text Styles

The visual integrity of multiline text is maintained. However, if exported multiline text
objects are edited in MicroStation, the
formatting is lost.
TrueType and SHX fonts in AutoCAD are exported to MicroStation V7 as Engineering.
This can result in many visual differences.

Tables

Tables

Table objects are exported as cell elements
composed of lines and text.

Fields

Fields

In general, fields are translated as static text.
The exceptions are fields that behave
identically in both products. This includes the
Date fields CreateDate, SaveDate, and PlotDate, and the Document property fields Author, Filename, and Filesize.
NOTE Use the MicroStation Key-in utility to
update text containing fields (field update
all).

DGNEXPORT Conversion Table | 295

DWG to DGN Conversion Table
AutoCAD LT

MicroStation

Notes

Dimensions, Dimension Styles

Dimensions, Dimension Styles

The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativity is maintained whenever possible, and the
correct dimension values are always maintained.

Raster Images

Raster Images

These image file types are supported: .bmp,
.cal, .tif, .png, .tga, .jpg, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pcx.
All other image file types are discarded.

DWG References

DGN References

Depending on the export option specified,
all referenced DWG files, including nested
DWG references, are either converted into
DGN files, combined into a single DGN file
as cells, or discarded.
NOTE MicroStation V7 does not support
nested references to references that are
merged into the host file.

DWG Model

DGN Design Model

The model in a DWG file is converted into a
DGN file.

DWG Layout

DGN Sheet Model

When exporting to V8, any initialized layouts
are converted into sheet models in the DGN
file.
V7 only supports one model. For V7, several
DGN files can be exported: one for the model
and the other DGN files for any initialized
layouts in the DWG file. The layout names get
appended to the exported DGN file  - Layout1.dgn.

AEC Objects

296 | Chapter 5 D Commands

AEC objects are not supported. Use the EXPORTTOAUTOCAD on page 498 command to
convert AEC objects to base ACAD objects
before exporting to DGN.

-DGNEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export MicroStation DGN Files

If you enter -dgnexport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter DGN file format on page 297 [V7/V8] : Specify whether the file is DGN
V7 or V8
Enter filename on page 297 for DGN export : Specify
path and filename of DGN file
Specify conversion units on page 297 [Master/Sub] : Specify m or s, or
press Enter
Specify mapping setup on page 298 or [?] : Specify mapping setup or
? to specify filter of mapping setup
Specify seed file on page 298 or [?] : Specify path and
filename of seed file
TIP Create a script using -DGNEXPORT to batch process exporting drawings to
DGN files.
File Format Specifies the file format of the DGN file being exported.
Filename The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters,
digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or
this program.
To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify
both the DGN file and path as follows:
path\filename
or
“path\filename”
Specify the path and file name of DGN file.
Units Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file.

-DGNEXPORT | 297

Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model.
? After specifying a filter, a list of available export mapping setups that match
the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.
Seed File Specify a seed file that matches the existing behavior of other
commands with filters.
? Enter * to display a list of available seed files in the AutoCAD Text Window.

DGNIMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Imports the data from a DGN file into a new DWG file or the current DWG
file, depending on the DGNIMPORTMODE system variable.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu

➤ Open ➤ DGN

Summary
The Import DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Once you select a DGN file, the Import DGN Settings dialog box is
displayed.
If you enter -dgnimport at the Command prompt, options are displayed on
page 308.
See the DGNIMPORT Conversion Table on page 303 for specific details about
the scope of importing MicroStation objects and other data.
See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table on page 305 for specific details about
unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects.

298 | Chapter 5 D Commands

NOTE The type of plot style drawing (Color-dependent or Named) is based on
the value of PSTYLEPOLICY on page 1627.

Import DGN Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Specifies the import settings for a DGN file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Import into Current Drawing
Inserts the contents of the DGN file into the current DWG file.
Prefix Dependent Definitions Adds the DGN file and model name as a prefix
to the incoming object’s name. If the prefixed name results in a new name
conflict, then an incremental number is appended to the name.

Import DGN Settings Dialog Box | 299

Ignore Duplicate Names Ignores any duplicate named objects, such as layer
names or dimension styles, in the DGN file and gives precedence to the existing
definition for duplicates.
You can also control the default settings using the DGNIMPORTMODE system
variable.
NOTE For the correct display of linetypes, the MicroStation RSC (resource file)
that is referenced by the DGN file must be available on your computer in a valid
AutoCAD Support File Search Path when you import or attach the DGN file. If the
resource file is not found, you will get an error message. You can define a search
path location in the OPTIONS command, Files tab. You can add a path to the
AutoCAD Support File Search Path node. You can also copy the RSC file to an
existing Support File Search Path.
Select a Design Model from the DGN file
The DGN design model that you select is imported into the model space of
your current DWG file.
V8 DGN files might contain multiple design and sheet models. A DGN design
model is equivalent to model space, and a DGN sheet model is equivalent to
paper space. Because a DWG file can have only one model space, you need
to select the design model in the DGN file that you want to import.
If a design model is selected and is referenced into a sheet model, then the
sheet model is also converted as one or more layouts in the DWG file. Only
the sheet models that reference the primary design model are imported. These
sheet models are translated to paper space layouts, and will include layout
viewports that display each reference to the primary design model.

External DGN References
Controls how DGN references are handled in a DWG environment.
Any DGN files are supported as references. These file types include, but not
limited to, these extensions: .dgn, .dwg,.cel,.s,.h, .cgm,.rdl,.d files. However, DXF
files are not supported and are ignored.
Translate References to Blocks or Xrefs
Converts DGN references to blocks when importing into a current drawing
and to xrefs when importing into a new drawing.
All referenced DGN design models, including nested references, are converted
into blocks or attached as xrefs in model space.
The relationship of nested references is maintained. Nested references within
a DGN design model that reference the primary file are called circular

300 | Chapter 5 D Commands

references. AutoCAD resolves these circular references by creating a block and
insering it into the original primary DGN file.
Design model references to sheet models, and sheet model references to other
sheet models are not supported and are ignored. Unique names for references
are generated by appending the model name to the design file name separated
with a dash (-). If necessary, the resulting block names are truncated and one
or more of the last characters might be replaced with numerals to make the
file name unique.
With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite
external reference files:
■

Prompt to Overwrite

■

Overwrite without Prompting

■

Do Not Overwrite

NOTE If the folder that contains the DGN file is read-only, then any DWG xrefs
will be created in the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista
and Windows 7) folder.
NOTE If you are importing a DGN file that uses custom line styles and those line
styles are defined in an external .rsc file, then the .rsc file needs to be included in
the AutoCAD support path.
Ignore All External References
Referenced DGN and DWG files that are external to the specified DGN file are
not included in the resulting DWG file.
If the DGN file has self references or references to other design models
contained within the DGN file, these references are included.
Attach as DGN Underlay
All DGN external references in the DGN file are imported as DGN underlays
in the resulting DWG file. Referenced DWG files remain xrefs when imported.
NOTE New DWG files are created in this process. These new DWGs are not
automatically deleted.

Conversion Units
Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The imported DGN
file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units.
The selected working units (master units or sub-units) are converted
one-for-one into DWG units.

Import DGN Settings Dialog Box | 301

Master Units
Specifies that one master unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG
drawing unit.
Sub Units
Specifies that one sub-unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG
drawing unit.
NOTE The master units and the sub-units of the selected DGN file are displayed
next to the buttons for reference.

Explode Text Node to Text Elements
Text node elements in a DGN file are multiple lines of text stored as one element,
and are similar to MTEXT objects. Check this option to maintain text which
follows a path.
When cleared, multiple lines of text are maintained as a single multiline text
object.
When checked, multiple lines of text are separated into individual text objects.
Select this option to maintain visual fidelity when you import a DGN file that
includes text created along a curved path. The first character determines the
location and rotation of the text object.

Translate DGN Properties to DWG Properties
Selects and manages the mapping setup used on the current DGN import.
Select Mapping Setup
Displays the currently defined mapping setups.
Standard is the default mapping setup which extracts data from the drawing
being exported and applies an automatic mapping to DGN layers, linetypes,
lineweights, and colors, as shown in the mapping preview.
Setup Description
Displays the description of the selected mapping setup.
Mapping Setups
Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 311 where new mapping
setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified,
or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 310).
Mapping Preview for Setup: Standard

302 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Lists all properties of both the imported DGN file in the DGN column and
the selected mapping setup in the DWG column.
NOTE External reference files properties are not listed in a mapping preview.
See the DGNIMPORT Conversion Table on page 303 for specific details about
the scope of importing MicroStation objects and other data.
See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table on page 305 for specific details about
unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects.

DGNIMPORT Conversion Table
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

The following table lists the DGN objects and features that are supported for
import, and notes on the scope of the translation.
DGN to DWG Conversion Table
MicroStation

AutoCAD LT

Notes

Geometric Elements

Geometric Objects

The following DGN elements are translated
into DWG objects: line, SmartLine, LineString,
multiline, shape, complex chain, complex
shape, arc, ellipse, curve, B-spline curve, and
pattern. Pattern elements are limited to simple
pattern styles. Bitonal gradient properties are
also supported.

Levels

Layers

DGN levels are mapped automatically into
the equivalent DWG layers. Invalid DGN
characters in level names are converted to
spaces.

Colors

Colors

All colors are translated using RGB values
either to the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) or
TrueColor index as appropriate.

DGNIMPORT Conversion Table | 303

DGN to DWG Conversion Table
MicroStation

AutoCAD LT

Notes

Line Styles

Linetypes

For the correct display of linetypes, the MicroStation .rsc (resource file) that is referenced
by the DGN file must be available on your
computer in a valid AutoCAD Support File
search path when you import or attach the
DGN file.
Dynamically scaled line styles (Standard DGN
Line Styles 1-7) are converted into fixed-scale
linetypes. The resulting linetypes take into
account the current zoom factor in a view in
the DGN file when they are imported or attached as a DGN file into AutoCAD.
NOTE To import standard V7 line styles correctly, you must “Fit View” and “Save Settings” in MicroStation first.

Cells

Blocks

Cells are converted into blocks. Tags that are
associated with cells are converted into constant-mode block attributes.

Text Elements,
Text Styles

Single-line Text
Objects, Multiline
Text Objects,
Text Styles

Missing SHX text fonts are converted into the
AutoCAD LT text font specified in the FONTALT system variable. The aclt.fmp file can be
used to map SHX text fonts to DGN text
fonts.
TrueType fonts and SHX fonts in AutoCAD
are exported to MicroStation V7 as Engineering. This can result in many visual differences.

Tables

Tables

Cells that represent tables in DGN are imported as blocks.

Dimensions, Dimension Styles

Dimensions, Dimension Styles

The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativity is maintained whenever possible, and the
correct dimension values are always maintained.

304 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGN to DWG Conversion Table
MicroStation

AutoCAD LT

Notes

Fields

Fields

In general, fields are translated as static text.
The exceptions are fields that behave
identically in both products. This includes the
Date fields CreateDate, SaveDate, and PlotDate, and the Document property fields Author, Filename, and Filesize.
Fields are converted to text when “Explode
Text Nodes to Text Elements” is checked in
the Import DGN Settings dialog box.

Raster Images

Raster Images

These image file types: .bmp, .cal, .tif, .png,
.tga, .jpg, .pcx, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pct are supported. All other image file types are not.

DGN References

DWG References

.dwg and .dgn file types are supported. Other
non-DGN file types such as .cel, .h, .s, .d, .rdl,
and .cgm are also supported.

DGN Design Model

DWG Model

The selected design model in a DGN file is
converted into a DWG file.

DGN Sheet Model

DWG Layout

Only the sheet models that reference the
primary design model are imported. DGN
sheet models are translated as layouts in a
DWG file.

DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table | 305

The following table lists the linear units used in the resulting DWG file as
determined by the master units, sub-units, and unit precision of the DGN file
being imported.
DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table
DGN Master
Units

DGN Sub
Units

DGN Precision

DWG Units Notes

Feet

Inches

Decimal

Engineering

Feet

Inches

Fractional

Architectural

Inches

Inches

Decimal

Engineering

Inches

Inches

Fractional

Architectural

Inches

Any Other
Unit

Decimal

Engineering

Master Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog
box.

Inches

Any Other
Unit

Decimal

Decimal

Sub Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog
box.

Inches

Any Other
Unit

Fractional

Architectural

Master Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box

Inches

Any Other
Unit

Fractional

Fractional

Sub Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box

306 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table
DGN Master
Units

DGN Sub
Units

DGN Precision

DWG Units Notes

Inches

Any Other
Unit

Decimal

Decimal

Any Other Unit

Any Other
Unit

Fractional

Fractional

For import of a V7 file, Master unit label will be read and will use the following
table to set the Master units based on the unit translation table. The Resolution
value will be used to set the Sub units.
NOTE Unknown labels will be treated as “meters” and “decimeters.”
V7 DGN Unit Translation Table
DGN Label

Name

DGN Label

Name

km

kilometers

mi

miles

m

meters

yd

yard

dc

decimeters

ft

feet

cm

centimeters

in

inches

mm

millimeters

tn

1/10 feet

um

microns

ti

1/10 inches

ui

micro inches

‘

feet

“

inches

‘

feet

DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table | 307

-DGNIMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

If you enter -dgnimport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter filename on page 308 for DGN Import: Specify path and filename of DGN
file
Enter name of model or [? on page 308] : Enter the name of the design
model in the DGN file, enter ? to list all design models, or press Enter
Specify conversion units on page 309 [Master/Sub] : Specify m or s, or
press Enter
Specify mapping setup on page 309 or [?] : Specify mapping setup or
? to specify filter command
TIP Create a script using -DGNIMPORT to batch process importing of DGN files.

Filename
The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits,
spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this
program.
To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify
both the DGN file and path as follows:
path\filename.dgn
or
“path\filename.dgn”
If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program adds
the extension and search for the file.

? - List of Design Models
Lists all design models contained in the DGN file.

308 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Units
Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file.

Mapping Setups
Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model.
? After specifying a filter, a list of available import mapping setups that match
the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.

DGNLAYERS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay

Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay.

Access Methods

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Underlay Layers
Shortcut menu: Select a DGN underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose DGN Layers.

Summary
After selecting the DGN underlay, the Underlay Layers dialog box on page
1282 is displayed.
NOTE The ULAYERS on page 1281 command allows you to manage the layers of
all underlays in the current document: DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN.

DGNLAYERS | 309

DGNMAPPING
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Allows users to create and edit user-defined DGN mapping setups.

Summary
The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 311 is displayed. It can also be
accessed from the Import DGN Settings and Export DGN Settings dialog boxes.
The import/export process translates basic DGN/DWG data into the
corresponding DWG/DGN data. The Standard (default) mapping translation
is used to map DGN levels, linestyles, lineweights, and colors to equivalent
DWG layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors.
The DGNMAPPING command allows you to create, modify, rename, or delete
mapping translations based on your company’s CAD standards such as:
■

Change DGN level names to appropriate DWG layer names

■

Remap unsupported DGN linestyles to DWG linetypes

■

Remap lineweights and adjust color mapping

Therefore, you can streamline the import/export process while minimizing
the need for more extensive editing.
The list of translation mapping setups is sorted by mapping type, based on
where it was accessed from. The Standard mapping setup is always on the top
of the list. This mapping setup is the default translation based on the file being
imported or exported. It is not editable.

310 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Creates new mapping setups, renames mapping setups, modifies mapping
setups, and deletes mapping setups.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Current User
Displays the user’s login name.
Name
Lists all mapping setups. If the setup name is too long to be completely
displayed, an ellipsis (...) is shown at the end.
Type Specifies the mapping setup type: import or export.
Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup.
New
Displays the New Mapping Setup dialog box on page 312, in which you can
define a new mapping setup.

DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box | 311

Rename
Starts in-place editing of the currently selected mapping setup (direct editing
in the list).
NOTE The Rename button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is
selected.
Modify
Displays the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 314, in which
you can modify the currently selected mapping setup.
NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected mapping setup. After deletion, the mapping
setup directly below the one deleted is selected. If there is none below, the
one directly above it is selected.
NOTE The Delete button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.

New Mapping Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Names the new mapping setup, sets the mapping setup on which to start the
new one, and indicates the mapping types to which you want the new style
to apply.

312 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current User
Displays the user’s login name.

New DGN Mapping Setup Name
Specifies the new mapping setup name.

Based On
Sets a mapping setup to use as a basis for the new one. For the new mapping
setup, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start
with.

Mapping Type
Specifies what type of mapping setup to create.
Import
Specifies an import mapping type.
Export
Specifies an export mapping type.

Continue button
Opens the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 314. Depending
on the mapping type selected (Import or Export), the appropriate import/export
dialog box is displayed.

New Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 313

Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export MicroStation DGN Files

■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

Sets the properties for the selected mapping setup.

Summary
When you choose Continue in the New Mapping Setup dialog box, the Modify
DGN Mapping Setup dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for
the new mapping setup in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays
the properties of the mapping setup that you selected.

314 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box includes the following tabs:
■

Layer on page 315

■

Linetype on page 315

■

Lineweight on page 316

■

Color on page 317

Layer
The corresponding cells are automatically filled with the default mapping.
The properties are added depending on which of the following mapping setups
you are currently working on. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand
column), the default system mapping is used. You can only make changes to
the right-hand column of the Layer tab. The left-hand column is not editable.
Use the Add Properties buttons to add layers/levels to the current mapping
setup.
New mapping setup: If you have accessed the Modify DGN Mapping Setup
dialog box by creating a new mapping setup from the Import/Export DGN
Settings dialog boxes, the rows are populated with all defined levels in the
imported DGN file or all defined layers in the current drawing file.
Existing mapping setup: If you are editing an existing mapping setup (even
if you are editing a setup other than Standard from the Import (or Export)
DGN Settings dialog box), the properties listed in the mapping table are not
derived from the imported DGN file or the exported drawing file.

Linetype
You can map linetypes and linestyles by editing the right-hand column of the
Linetype tab. Select a cell in the right-hand column, and click the drop-down
list to select a linetype or linestyle that the property in the left-hand column
should be mapped to. Linetypes can be loaded for use in the mapping setup
by selecting Other from the drop-down list. The left-hand column is not
editable. Use the Add Properties buttons to add linetypes/linestyles to the
current mapping setup.
Export mapping setup: If you have accessed the Modify DGN Mapping Setups
dialog box by creating a new setup from the Export DGN Settings dialog box,
the DWG column includes all defined linetypes in the current drawing file.
Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default
system mapping.

Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 315

You can directly type DGN linestyle names in the cells in the right column.
If unknown linestyle names are added to the right column of the mapping
table, they are ignored and default to Continuous.
Import mapping setup: If you are in the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog
box by creating a new setup from the Import DGN Settings dialog box, the
DGN column includes all defined DGN linestyles in the imported DGN file,
as well as the DGN seed file used when the DGN file was created.
When remapping linetypes in the DWG column, only linetypes from the
acad.lin and acadiso.lin files are supported (depending on Units or
Measurement type of file). Linetypes stored in custom LIN files are not
supported.

Lineweight
A predefined set of lineweights is displayed which provides the best match
between lineweights used in DGN and DWG files. You can copy and paste
single or multiple lineweights using the right-click menu in the right-hand
column. You can only make changes on the right-hand column of the
Lineweight tab. The left-hand column is not editable.

316 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Color
You can map color values between DGN to DWG files. By default the Color
tab is blank and the default color mapping is used. Color translations between
DGN color values is done to the closest AutoCAD color values and AutoCAD
color values are mapped to the closest DGN color values. The Color tab is the
only tab that allows editing in both columns. Values in the left-hand column
must be unique. To remap colors, right-click either column and select Add
Color from the right-click menu.

Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 317

DGN column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu allows you to
add a valid DGN color value to the cell. Valid colors include 0-255, ByLevel
and ByCell. The DWG column is automatically populated with the equivalent
RGB value. You can modify a DGN color by double-clicking the cell and typing
a different value.
DWG column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu brings up the
Select Color dialog box on page 319. You can add ACI colors, true colors or
color from a Color Book. The DGN column is automatically populated with
the DGN equivalent color value. You can modify a DWG color by clicking
the cell and selecting an option from the drop-down list. The drop-down list
displays the standard color list as well as a list of colors previously added to
the DWG column and the Select Color option.
NOTE The AutoCAD Color Index Values are used to populate the DGN Column
on DGNEXPORT only because Microstation users can use their own color table
values which map differently. (On DGNIMPORT, you can read the DGN color
index value directly from the file).

Add Properties from DGN File
Opens the Add Properties from DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). The level and linestyle properties from the chosen DGN file are

318 | Chapter 5 D Commands

added to the DGN columns in the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box
table.
In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes MicroStation DGN (*.dgn) and
All DGN Files (*.*) to recognize DGN files that have other extensions.
NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs
when adding properties from files.

Add Properties from Drawing File
Opens the Add Properties from Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). The layer and linetype properties from the chosen
DWT/DWG/DWS files are added to the DWG columns in the Modify DGN
Mapping Setups dialog box table.
In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes the following:
■

Drawing template (*.dwt)

■

Drawing (*.dwg)

■

Standards (*.dws)

Setup Description
Specifies a mapping setup description. You can also edit the description for
an existing mapping setup.
NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs
when adding properties from files.

Select Color Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import MicroStation DGN Files

The Select Color dialog box is displayed when you click Select Color from the
color drop-down list.

Select Color Dialog Box | 319

Summary
■

Index Color on page 216

■

True Color on page 218

■

Color Books on page 221

DIM and DIM1
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Dimensioning

Accesses Dimensioning mode commands.

Summary
The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you
can use a special set of dimensioning commands on page 320. (DIM and DIM1
are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.)
Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning
command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately
return to the Command prompt. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or exit,
or press Esc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command

Dimensioning Mode Commands
The following commands are available at the DIM prompt.
Dimensioning mode commands
Command

Description

EXIT

Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt.
You can also press Esc to exit Dimensioning mode.

REDRAW

Redraws the current viewport.

320 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Dimensioning mode commands
Command

Description

STYLE

Changes the current text style.

UNDO or U

Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any
new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning
mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.

The following table shows which AutoCAD LT commands are equivalent to
the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these
Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD LT command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents
Dimensioning mode
command

Equivalent
command

ALIGNED

DIMALIGNED

ANGULAR

DIMANGULAR

BASELINE

DIMBASELINE

CENTER

DIMCENTER

CONTINUE

DIMCONTINUE

DIAMETER

DIMDIAMETER

HOMETEXT

DIMEDIT Home

HORIZONTAL

DIMLINEAR Horizontal

LEADER

LEADER

JOG

DIMJOGGED

NEWTEXT

DIMEDIT New

OBLIQUE

DIMEDIT Oblique

ORDINATE

DIMORDINATE

DIM and DIM1 | 321

Dimensioning mode command equivalents
Dimensioning mode
command

Equivalent
command

OVERRIDE

DIMOVERRIDE

RADIUS

DIMRADIUS

RESTORE

-DIMSTYLE Restore

ROTATED

DIMLINEAR Rotated

SAVE

-DIMSTYLE Save

STATUS

-DIMSTYLE Status

TEDIT

DIMTEDIT

TROTATE

DIMEDIT Rotate

UPDATE

-DIMSTYLE Apply

VARIABLES

-DIMSTYLE Variables

VERTICAL

DIMLINEAR Vertical

DIMALIGNED
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Aligned Dimensions

Creates an aligned linear dimension.

322 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Aligned
Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned
Toolbar: Dimension

Summary
Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the
extension lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first extension line origin or :
Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location on page 332 or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point,
enter an option, or press Enter to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point or press Enter
to select an object to dimension
After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension,
the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or
[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option

First Extension Line Origin
Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify
the origin point of the first.

Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the
direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the
dimension is drawn.

348 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Mtext
Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension
text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters
or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see “Select and Modify Objects”.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.

Text
Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMLINEAR | 349

Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension
line.
■

Mtext on page 349

■

Text on page 349

■

Angle on page 349

Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 348
■

Mtext on page 349

■

Text on page 349

■

Angle on page 349

Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.

350 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc
segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly
scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins
of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by
the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of
the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE.
This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable.

If you select a circle, the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the
extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north
or south quadrant point, a horizontal dimension is drawn. When the point
used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point, a vertical
dimension is drawn.

DIMORDINATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Ordinate Dimensions

Creates ordinate dimensions.

DIMORDINATE | 351

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Ordinate
Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate
Toolbar: Dimension

Summary
Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an
origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These
dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the
features from the datum.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point
or enter an option
Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature
location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate
dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension
measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate.
Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader
line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you
can specify the endpoint.

Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader
line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where
you can specify the endpoint.

352 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the
dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter
special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on
page 1235.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see “Select and Modify Objects”.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMOVERRIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Override a Dimension Style

Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions.

Access Methods

Button

DIMOVERRIDE | 353

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Override
Menu: Dimension ➤ Override

Summary
Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions,
or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the
settings defined by their dimension style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name
of a dimension variable, or enter c
Dimension Variable Name to Override Overrides the value of the
dimensioning system variable you specify.
Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions.
The dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style.

DIMRADIUS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Radial Dimensions

Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Radius
Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius
Toolbar: Dimension

354 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text
with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting
radius dimension easily.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select arc or circle:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and
the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc
resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD LT automatically
draws an arc extension line.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the
dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter
special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on
page 1235.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see “Select and Modify Objects”.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMRADIUS | 355

DIMREASSOCIATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Dimension Associativity

Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Reassociate
Menu: Dimension ➤ Reassociate Dimensions

Summary
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association
points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed.
A marker is displayed for each association point prompt.
■

If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a
geometric object, the marker appears as an X

■

if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a
box.

NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select dimensions to reassociate...
Select objects or [Disassociated]: Select the dimension objects to reassociate or press
D to select all disassociated dimensions.

356 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Press Esc to terminate the command without losing the changes that were
already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed
dimensions.
The prompts for the different types of dimensions are:
Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an
object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to
the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or
press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an
object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to
the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or
press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Three Point) Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] :
Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to
skip to the next prompt
Specify first angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press Enter
to skip to the next prompt
Specify second angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press
Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Two Line) Select first line : Select a line, or press Enter to skip
to the next prompt
Select second line : Select another line, or press Enter to skip to the next
dimension object, if any
Diameter Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to
skip to the next dimension object, if any
Leader Specify leader association point : Specify an object snap location,
or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Ordinate Specify feature location : Specify an object snap location, or press
Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Radius Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip
to the next dimension object, if any
NOTE DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension.
Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.

DIMREASSOCIATE | 357

DIMREGEN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Associative Dimensions

Updates the locations of all associative dimensions.

Summary
The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated.
Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in the
following cases:
■

After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model
space active; update associative dimensions created in paper space.

■

After opening a drawing containing external references that are
dimensioned in the current drawing; update associative dimensions if the
associated external reference geometry has been modified.

NOTE After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version,
the association between dimensions and objects or points may need to be updated.
You can use the DIMREASSOCIATE on page 356 command to reassociate modified
dimensions with the objects or points that they dimension.

DIMROTATED
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Linear Dimensions

Creates a rotated linear dimension.

358 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify angle of dimension line <0>: Specify an angle or press Enter to accept the
default value
Specify first extension line origin or : Select one or more objects and press Enter, or press
Enter to select all displayed objects
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or
[Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/Undo]: Select objects to extend, or hold down SHIFT
and select an object to trim, or enter an option

Boundary Object Selection
Uses the selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to
extend an object.

Object to Extend
Specifies the objects to extend. Press Enter to end the command.

Shift-Select to Trim
Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending
them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending.

Fence
Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series
of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points.
The selection fence does not form a closed loop.

Crossing
Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
NOTE Some crossing selections of objects to be extended are ambiguous. EXTEND
resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a
clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered.

Project
Specifies the projection method used when extending objects.

EXTEND | 501

None Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the boundary
edge in 3D space are extended.

UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate
system (UCS). Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D
space are extended.

View Specifies projection along the current view direction.

502 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Edge
Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.

Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another
object or its implied edge in 3D space.

No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object
that actually intersects it in 3D space.

Undo
Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.

EXTEND | 503

EXTERNALREFERENCES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Opens the External References palette.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤
Menu: Insert ➤ External References
Toolbar: Reference

➤ External References

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the External References palette
if the palette is inactive. If the External References palette is active but hidden,
executing EXTERNALREFERENCES will open the palette. If you click anywhere
outside of the External References palette, the palette returns to its auto-hidden
state.
NOTE The FILEDIA system variable is ignored when attaching files from the External
References palette.

External References Palette
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

504 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Manage external references attached to the current drawing.

Summary
The External References palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced
files, such as DWG files (xrefs), DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlays, and
raster images.
Only DWG, DWF, DWFx, PDF, and raster image files can be opened directly
from the External References palette.
The External References palette contains several buttons, and is split into two
panes. The upper pane, called the File References Pane, can display file
references in a list or in a tree structure. Shortcut menus and function keys
provide options for working with the files. The lower pane, called the Details
/ Preview Pane, can display properties for the selected file references or it can
display a thumbnail preview of the selected file reference.
NOTE When using the External References palette, it is recommended that you
turn on the Auto-hide feature or anchor the palette. The palette will then hide
automatically when you move the cursor away from the palette.

External References Palette Buttons
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Use the buttons at the top of the External References palette to choose the
types of files to attach to the drawing and to refresh the status of file references
that you already have attached.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Attach (file type) Button
The Attach button displays a list of file types that you can attach. The following
options are displayed:
■

Attach DWG. Starts the XATTACH command.

External References Palette | 505

■

Attach Image. Starts the IMAGEATTACH command.

■

Attach DWF. Starts the DWFATTACH command.

■

Attach DGN. Starts the DGNATTACH command

■

Attach PDF. Starts the PDFATTACH command

Refresh/Reload All References Button
The following options are available:
Refresh Synchronizes the status data of referenced drawing files with the data
in memory.
Reload All References Updates all file references to ensure that the most
current version is used. Updating also occurs when you first open a drawing
that contains file references.

File References List View / Tree View Pane
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

The upper File References pane displays a list of all file references in the current
drawing. You can display these file references in a list or in a tree structure.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

506 | Chapter 6 E Commands

List View
The listed information includes the reference name, status, file size, file type,
creation date and saved path.
Reference Name The reference name column always displays the current
drawing as the first entry, followed by additional attached files that are listed
in the order they were attached.
Status The status of the referenced file:
■

Loaded - The referenced file is currently attached to the drawing.

■

Unloaded - The referenced file is marked to be unloaded from the drawing.

■

Not Found - The referenced file is no longer exists in the valid search paths.

■

Unresolved - The referenced file cannot be read.

■

Orphaned - The referenced file is attached to another file that has an
Unresolved status.

■

Unreferenced - The referenced file is removed by either the delete or erase
tool instead of detach.

Size The size of the attached file reference.
Type The file type of the referenced file. Drawing (Xref) files display as
attachments or overlays, raster images show their file format; and DWF, DWFx,
DGN, and PDF underlays are listed as their respective file types.
Date The date when the referenced file was created or last saved.
Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the
referenced file is attached.

Tree View
The top level of the tree view always shows the current drawing. Referenced
files appear at the next level. Referenced files that contain their own nested
file references can be opened to show deeper levels. When making selections
in tree view, only one file reference can be selected at a time.

External References Palette | 507

File References Pane Shortcut Menus and Function Keys
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

When working in the File References pane, there are several shortcut menus
that can be displayed when you right-click on file references or empty areas
of the pane. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are
presented under certain conditions.

No Reference Selected
When no file references are selected, the shortcut menu presents the following
functions:
Menu Item

Description

Reload All References

Reloads all referenced files. (Unavailable if no file references
are attached)

Select All

Selects all file references, excluding the current drawing.
This item is not displayed in tree view.

Attach DWG

Starts the XATTACH command.

Attach Image

Starts the IMAGEATTACH command.

Attach DWF

Starts the DWFATTACH command.

508 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Menu Item

Description

Attach DGN

Starts the DGNATTACH command.

Attach PDF

Starts the PDFATTACH command.

Bind DGN

Starts the -DGNBIND on page 287command.

Tooltip Style

Modifies the tooltip that appears when you hover over an
item in the list view of the palette.

Preview/Details Pane

Turns the display of the Preview/Details pane off and on.

Close

Closes the External References palette.

Reference Selected
When you select a file reference, the shortcut menu presents the following
functions:
Menu Item

Description

Reference Status

Open

Opens the selected reference file in
the original application in which it was
created (specified by the operating
system).

Available only for file references with a Loaded status
- Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Attach

Allows you to change settings such as
scale, insertion point, and path type.
You can also attach a different page
from the attached PDF file, a different
sheet from an attached DWF file, or a
different model name from an attached DGN file.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Unload

Unloads the selected file references.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Reload

Reloads the selected file references.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Detach

Detaches the selected file references.

Available for all file references except data link.

External References Palette | 509

Menu Item

Description

Reference Status

Bind

Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box.
Only available for referenced DWG
files. This is not available for images
and underlays.

Available only for file references with a Loaded status
- Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Details / Preview Pane
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

The lower data pane of the External References palette can be set to display
file reference properties or a preview image of the selected file reference.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Details Pane
When displaying the Details mode, properties for the selected file reference
are reported. Each file reference has a core set of properties and some file
references, like referenced images, display properties specific to the file type.
The core set of details include the reference name, status, file size, file type,
creation date, saved path and found at path. Some of the properties can be
edited.
Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property can be edited
only if single file references are selected. The reference name shows *Varies* if
multiple file references are selected. This property is editable for all the file
references.

510 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Status Shows whether the file reference is loaded, unloaded or not found.
This property cannot be edited.
Size Shows the file size of the selected file reference. The size is not displayed
for file references that are unloaded or not found. This property cannot be
edited.
Type Indicates whether the file reference is an attachment or overlay, the
type of image file, a DWF/DWFx underlay, DGN underlay, or PDF underlay.
This property cannot be edited.
However, if the file reference is a DWG xref, the Attach or Overlay property
can be toggled.
Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not
displayed if the file reference is unloaded or not found. This property cannot
be edited.
Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not
necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited.
Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This
is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same
as the saved path. Clicking the […] button displays the Select Image File dialog
box where you can select a different path or file name. You can also type
directly into the path field. These changes are stored to the Saved Path property
if the new path is valid.
File Version File Version property defined by the Vault client. This property
is only displayed when you are logged into the Vault.

Specific Image Properties
If you select a referenced image, additional properties are displayed. None of
the added image properties can be edited.
Color System Displays the color system.
Color Depth The amount of information that is stored in each pixel of a raster
image. Higher color depth values produce smoother degrees of shading.
Pixel Width The width of the raster image measured in pixels.
Pixel Height The height of the raster image measured in pixels.
Resolution The width and height resolution in dots per inch (dpi).
Default Size (in AutoCAD units) The width and height of the raster image
measured in AutoCAD units.

External References Palette | 511

Preview Pane
The preview image is displayed only when a single file reference is selected
from the File References pane. There are no other controls for this data pane.
When no reference file is selected, the preview pane displays a solid grey field.
If there is no preview available, the text “Preview not available” is displayed
in the center of the pane.

Messaging Field
Below the Details / Preview pane is a messaging field that supplies information
about certain selected file references. When you select one or more nested
references, information is displayed regarding the file references. Messages
also appear if you decide the change the name of a file reference.

EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Closes the External References palette.

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the External References
palette when currently displayed, either in an auto-hidden state or open state.

512 | Chapter 6 E Commands

F Commands

7

FIELD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text

Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field
Menu: Insert ➤ Field
Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing text in an in-place text editor, and
click Insert Field.

Summary
Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances. The FIELDEVAL
system variable and the UPDATEFIELD command determine how fields are
updated.

513

The Field dialog box is displayed.

Field Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Fields in Text

Inserts a field in the drawing.

Summary
The options available change based on the selected field category and field
name.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

514 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for
example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects).
Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name
to display the options available for that field.
Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string
(----) if the field value is invalid.
The label for this item changes with the field name. For example, when
Filename is selected in the Field Names list, the label is Filename and the value
is the name of the current drawing file. The label is Property for object fields.
Exception: when a date field is selected, the selected date format is displayed;
for example, M/d/yyyy.
Format List Lists options for display of the value of the field. For example,
date fields can display the name of the day or not, and text strings can be
uppercase, lowercase, first capital, or title case. The value displayed in the
Fields dialog box reflects the format that you select.
Field Expression Displays the expression that underlies the field. The field
expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed by
reading this area.

Options for Sheet Set and Sheet View Fields
Sheet Set Specifies the name of the sheet set.
Sheet Navigation Tree Displays a tree view of sheets or sheet views from the
Sheet Set Manager, from which you can select an item for the field.
Property Displays the properties available as fields for the item selected in
the tree.
Associate Hyperlink Adds a hyperlink to the field when it is created. You
can use Ctrl + click to jump to the sheet or view. This option is not available
for the ViewportScale field.
NOTE If you recreate the field, because the sheet is already in a sheet set, you
should use a sheet set property field, not a placeholder field.
Sheet set fields (fields that were selected from the sheet set category) behave
differently than other types of fields. By default, other types of fields update
automatically when you save the drawing or when you use REGEN. In contrast,
sheet set fields store the last values that were used, and they display these
stored values if the information referenced by the sheet set field is not
accessible. To update the value in a sheet set field, use UPDATEFIELD
command.

Field Dialog Box | 515

NOTE If the information referenced by sheet set field is not accessible, the value
for the field will be displayed as “####.”

Options for BlockPlaceholder Fields
BlockPlaceholder fields are only available for insertion in the Attribute
Definition dialog box when the Block Editor is open.
Block Name Displays the name of the current block definition.
Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the selected
format.
Block Reference Properties Displays a list of block reference properties for
the current block definition.

Options for SheetSetPlaceholder Fields
Placeholder Type Displays a list of available placeholder fields.
Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the selected
format.
For example, with SheetSet Placeholder selected in the Field Names list,
SheetTitle selected in the Placeholder Type list, and Uppercase selected in the
Format list, Temporary Value displays SHEETTITLE. When the drawing is
placed in a sheet set, this field displays the title of the sheet.

Options for Fields in the Objects Field Category
Named Object Type/Object Type When NamedObject is selected in Field
Names, lists the types of named objects in the drawing. When Object is
selected, displays the type of object selected. Use the Select Object button to
temporarily close the dialog box and select an object in the drawing.
Property/Name When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the
names of all the objects in the drawing of the selected type. When Object is
selected in Field Names, lists the properties of the selected object that are
available as fields. When a block with attributes is selected, the attribute names
are displayed in the list of properties.

Formula
When Formula is selected in Field Names, provides a place for creating a
formula to insert in text or in a table cell.
Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the
Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is
appended to the formula.

516 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box
temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the
formula.
Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select
Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC on page 1574 system
variable.
Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box.
Evaluate Updates the value in Preview when you have manually changed the
text in Formula.
Display Value for Block Reference Specifies that the object property fields
in a block reference evaluate the properties of nested objects relative to the
block reference's size and orientation within the drawing, not within the block
definition.

FILL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text

Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enter on or off, or press Enter
On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be visible, its extrusion
direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction, and hidden lines
must not be suppressed.

FILL | 517

Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted.
Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated.
The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting.

FILLET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Fillets

Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
Menu: Modify ➤ Fillet

518 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Toolbar: Modify

Summary
In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines.
The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead,
enter a radius of zero.

You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines,
and xlines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current
Select first object or [Undo/Polyline/Radius/Trim/Multiple]: Use an object
selection method or enter an option

First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet.

Select second object or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method
or hold down Shift and select an object to create a sharp corner
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the
fillet arc. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the
current fillet radius with a value of 0.
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces
it with the fillet.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. Select the objects close
to where you want the endpoints of the fillet.

FILLET | 519

FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.

Loop
Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two
possible loops. After selecting a loop edge, you are prompted to Accept the
current selection, or choose the Next loop.

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet.

520 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach
the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet
arc.

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET
commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.

Trim
Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.

FILTER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a
selection set.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'filter for transparent use

Summary
The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed.

FILTER | 521

Object Selection Filters Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Filter Property List
Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The
current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.

Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter.
Object Types and Logical Operators Lists object types that you can filter and
logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the filter expressions.

522 | Chapter 7 F Commands

If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and balance them correctly
in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the
operation.
Logical operators
Starting operator

Encloses

Ending operator

Begin AND

One or more operands

End AND

Begin OR

One or more operands

End OR

Begin XOR

Two operands

End XOR

Begin NOT

One operand

End NOT

For example, the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius
greater than or equal to 1.0:
Object =Circle
**Begin NOT
Circle Radius >= 1.00
**End NOT
X, Y, Z Parameters Define additional filter parameters depending on the
object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can enter the X, Y, and Z
coordinate values that you want to filter.
In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators such as < (less than) or
> (greater than). For example, the following filter selects all circles with center
points greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or equal to 1:
Object = Circle
Circle Center X >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000
Circle Radius >= 1.0000
Select Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified type in the
drawing. Select the items to filter. For example, if you select the object type
Color, Select displays a list of colors to choose for the filter.
Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list. Filter
properties that you add to the unnamed filter remain available during the
current work session unless you manually delete them.
Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter property list with
the one displayed in Select Filter.

Object Selection Filters Dialog Box | 523

Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.

Edit Item
Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. The
edited filter replaces the selected filter property.

Delete
Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.

Clear List
Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.

Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filters.
Current Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it current. The named
filter and its list of properties are loaded from the default file, filter.nfl.
Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties. The filter is saved in the filter.nfl
file. Names can contain up to 18 characters.
Delete Current Filter List Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default
filter file.

Apply
Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create
a selection set. The current filter is used on the objects you select.

FIND
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Find and Replace Text

Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.

Access Methods

Button

524 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text
Menu: Edit ➤ Find
Toolbar: Text Formatting
Shortcut menu: With no commands active, right-click in the drawing area
and click Find.

Summary
The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Find and Replace Text

Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope
and results of the search.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND | 525

Find What
Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any
wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from
the list.
For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the
User’s Guide.
Replace With
Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a
string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list.
Find Where
Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the
currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects
is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default
value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog
box and create or modify the selection set.
Select Objects Button
Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your
drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
When you select objects, Find Where displays Selected Objects by default.
List Results
Lists results in a table displaying the location (model or paper space), object
type, and text. The resulting table can be sorted by column.
Advanced Find Options
Displays options to define the type of objects and words that you want to
find.
Replace
Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With.
Replace All
Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find What and replaces it with
the text in Replace With.
The Find Where setting controls whether to find and replace text in the entire
drawing or text in the currently selected object or objects.
Zoom to Highlighted Result

526 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Zooms to the selected object in the list. You can also zoom to a result when
you double-click the selected object.
Create Selection Set (Highlighted)
Creates a selection set from the objects that contain the text highlighted on
the list of results. The selected objects must all be located either in model
space or in a single layout.
Create Selection Set (All)
Creates a selection set from all the objects that contain the text on the list of
results. The objects must all be located either in model space or in a single
layout.
Find
Finds the text that you enter in Find What. If you have not entered text in
Find What, this option is not available. Found text is zoomed to or displayed
in the List Results table. Once you find the first instance of the text, the Find
option becomes Find Next, which you can use to find the next instance.

Search Options
Defines the type of objects and words to be found.
Match Case
Includes the case of the text in Find What as part of the search criteria.
Find Whole Words Only
Finds only whole words that match the text in Find What. For example, if
you select Find Whole Words Only and search for “Front Door,” FIND does
not locate the text string “Front Doormat.”
Use Wildcards
Allows the use of wild-card characters in searches.
For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the
User’s Guide.
Search XRefs
Includes text in externally referenced files in search results.
Search Blocks
Includes text in blocks in search results.
Ignore Hidden Items

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND | 527

Ignores hidden items in search results. Hidden items include text on layers
that are frozen or turned off, text in block attributes created in invisible mode,
and text in visibility states within dynamic blocks.
Match Diacritics
Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results.
Match Half or Full Width Forms
Matches half- and full-width characters in search results.

Text Types
Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default,
all options are selected.
Block Attribute Value
Includes block attribute text values in search results.
Dimension or Leader Text
Includes dimension and leader object text in search results.
Single-Line or Multiline Text
Includes text objects such as single-line and multiline text in search results.
Table Text
Includes text found in AutoCAD LT table cells in search results.
Hyperlink Description
Includes text found in hyperlink descriptions in search results.
Hyperlink
Includes hyperlink URLs in search results.

528 | Chapter 7 F Commands

8

G Commands

GEOGRAPHICLOCATION
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location

Summary
Define Geographic Location Dialog Box on
page 530

Appears only if a geographic location does
not exist, and the drawing does not contain a foreign coordinate system.

Location Already Exists Dialog Box on page
530

Appears if a geographic location exists, and
the drawing does not contain a foreign
coordinate system.

529

Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog
Box on page 531

Appears if an alternate coordinate system
is found.

Define Geographic Location Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

Defines a geographic location.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Import a .kml or a .kmz File Displays the Import a .kml or .kmz file dialog
box.
Import the Current Location from Google Earth Retrieves location
information from a specific location in Google Earth.
NOTE Google Earth should be installed and open with the location selected.
Enter the Location Values Displays the Geographic Location Dialog Box,
where you can enter the location information manually.
See also:
■

Geographic Location Dialog Box

Location Already Exists Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

530 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Enables you to edit, redefine, or remove an existing location.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Edit Current Geographic Location Displays the Geographic Location Dialog
Box on page 532, where you can edit the existing location information.
Redefine Geographic Location Displays the Define Geographic Location
Dialog Box on page 530, where you can redefine the geographic location.
Remove Geographic Location Displays a confirmation dialog box before
removing the geographic location.

Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

Provides an option to convert the alternate coordinate system to the LL84
coordinate system used by AutoCAD.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Leave existing coordinate system Does not convert the alternate coordinate
system to the LL84 coordinate system.
Convert to AutoCAD’s coordinate system Converts the alternate coordinate
system to AutoCAD’s LL84 coordinate system.

Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box | 531

Geographic Location Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

Sets the latitude, longitude, and north direction of a geographic location in
a drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Latitude and Longitude
Displays or sets latitude, longitude, and direction in decimal values.
Decimal Lat / Long

532 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Sets the format of the latitude and longitude representation in the drawing.
Use Map Displays the Location Picker Dialog Box on page 535.
Specifies a location by using the pointing device.
The latitude and longitude values are updated when you select a location.
If you enter latitude and longitude values, then the map displays the updated
location.
Latitude
Sets the latitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a
location on the map.
The valid range is -90 and +90 as a floating point number.
(LATITUDE on page 1562 system variable).
North/South
Controls whether a positive value is north of the equator or a positive value
is south of the equator.
Longitude
Displays the longitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select
a location on the map.
The valid range is -180 to +180 as a floating point number.
(LONGITUDE on page 1573 system variable).
East/West
Controls whether a positive value is west of the Prime Meridian or a positive
value is east of the Prime Meridian.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone. Time zones are estimated by reference to the location.
You can set the time zone directly.
TIMEZONE on page 1684 (system variable).

Coordinates and Elevation
Sets the values for the World Coordinate System (WCS), X,Y,Z, and the
elevation.
X
Sets the X component of the world coordinate system for the geographic
location.

Geographic Location Dialog Box | 533

Y
Sets the Y component of the world coordinate system for the geographic
location.
Z
Sets the Z component of the world coordinate system for the geographic
location.
Pick Point
Specifies the X, Y, and Z values of the Geographic Location marker based on
the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Elevation
Sets the relative height along the specified up-direction defined for a geographic
location.

North Direction
By default, north is the positive Y direction in the World Coordinate System
(WCS).
Angle
Specifies the angle from 0 for the north direction
Pick Point
Specifies the north angle based on the direction vector specified. A rubber
band line appears denoting the north direction.
Interactive North Direction Preview
Specifies the north angle. The range is 0-359.9.

Up Direction
By default, the up direction is the positive Z-axis (0,0,+1). The Up direction
and the north direction are always constrained such that they are perpendicular
to each other.
Up Direction
Sets the up direction.
Pick Point
Specifies the up direction (from the current WCS coordinate) based on the
direction vector specified.
Enabled only if the up direction is set to Custom.

534 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Location Picker Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing

Sets the latitude and longitude of the selected location.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Map
Specifies a location on the map.
Region
Specifies a region of the world.
Nearest City
Specifies a city in the selected region.
Time Zone
Time zones are estimated by reference to the location. You can set the time
zone directly (TIMEZONE on page 1684 system variable).
Nearest Big City
Uses the latitude and longitude values for the nearest big city that you select.
See also:
■

Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 532

Location Picker Dialog Box | 535

GETENV
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Shows values of specified system registry variables.

Summary
The values of system registry variables can be displayed with GETENV. Use
GETENV to view the registry settings of the MaxArray and MaxHatch registry
variables.
GETENV is case sensitive, so MaxArray and MaxHatch must be entered exactly
as shown. For example, to display the current value for MaxHatch, enter

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter variable name: Enter the variable name
Command: getenv
Enter variable name: MaxHatch
10000

GETLINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Generates a URL to the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing.

536 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Get Link
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Get Link

Summary
The Get Link dialog box on page 537 is displayed.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

Get Link Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Generates a URL to the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing.

Summary
A public URL is provided to the online copy of the current drawing. Clicking
the generated link opens the drawing in a new AutoCAD WS Editor in a

Get Link Dialog Box | 537

browser. You can control whether recipients can edit the drawing online or
download a local copy. Use this link to allow recipients without AutoCAD WS
accounts to view or edit the drawing online.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Share Link Generates a link to an online copy of the current drawing.
Distribute this link to recipients so they may access the online file.
Copy Copies the link to the clipboard.
Permissions Defines the access permissions for each recipient.
■

Edit. Allows recipients to edit any object in the shared drawing. When this
option is cleared, recipients can mark up and add to the drawing, but they
cannot change existing objects.

■

Download. Allows recipients to download a copy of the drawing.

GOTOURL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page

Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object.

Summary
Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or web page (URL)
that is associated with the hyperlink opens.

538 | Chapter 8 G Commands

GRADIENT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Gradient
Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 558 is
displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page
546 is displayed.
A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors.

GRAPHSCR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window

Switches from the text window to the drawing area.

GRADIENT | 539

Access Methods
Command entry: 'graphscr for transparent use

Summary
GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the
text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.

GRID
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Major/aDaptive/Limits/Follow/Aspect]
: Specify a value or enter an option
Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value
sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval.
On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off Turns off the grid.
Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP
command.
Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid
lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed when SHADEMODE is set
to Hidden. (GRIDMAJOR system variable)

540 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Adaptive Controls the density of grid lines when zoomed in or out.
■

Adaptive Behavior. Limits the density of grid lines or dots when zoomed
out. This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY system variable.

■

Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing. If turned on, generates additional,
more closely spaced grid lines or dots when zoomed in. The frequency of
these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines.

Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command.
Follow Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS.
This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY system variable.
Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions, which can have
different values.
Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval
rather than the drawing units.
The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric.

GROUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Group Objects

Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group
Menu: Tools ➤ Group
Toolbar: Group
If you enter -group at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

GROUP | 541

-GROUP
Related procedures:
■

Group Objects

Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter a group option [?—List Groups on page 542/Order on page 542/Add on
page 542/Remove on page 542/Explode on page 542/REName on page
542/Selectable on page 542/Create on page 543] : Enter an option or press
Enter

?—List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.

Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the
horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Position Number
Reverse Order

Add
Adds objects to a group.

Remove
Removes objects from a group.
If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.

Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects.

Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.

Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.

542 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Create
Creates a group.
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers,
and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not
spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.

GROUPEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Group Objects

Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected
group.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group Edit
Toolbar: Group

Summary
For existing groups, add or remove objects; or rename a group.
The following prompts are displayed.
Select group or [Name]:
In the drawing area, select a group or enter the name of a group. If a selected
object is not included in a group, you are prompted again.

List of Options
When a group is selected, the following options are displayed.
Enter an option [Add objects on page 544/Remove objects on page 544/REName
on page 544]:

GROUPEDIT | 543

Add Objects Select objects to add to the current group.
Remove Objects Select grouped objects to remove from the current group.
Rename Name or rename the current group.

544 | Chapter 8 G Commands

H Commands

9

HATCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch
Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 558 is
displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page
546 is displayed.
If you enter -hatch at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 565.

545

NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the
maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited.
This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change
the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES on page 1543 system
variable.
Choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch.
■

Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects.

■

Select objects that enclose an area.

■

Specify boundary points using the -HATCH Draw option.

■

Drag a hatch pattern into an enclosed area from a tool palette or
DesignCenter.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the boundaries, pattern, or fill properties, and other parameters for
hatches and fills.

List of Options
■

Hatch tab on page 551

■

Gradient tab on page 553

■

More Options section on page 555

■

Add: Pick Points on page 547

546 | Chapter 9 H Commands

■

Add: Select Objects on page 547

■

Remove Boundaries on page 548

■

Recreate Boundary on page 549

■

View Selections on page 549

■

Select Boundary Objects on page 549

■

Options on page 549

■

Inherit Properties on page 550

■

Preview on page 550

Add: Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.
Pick Internal Point While specifying internal points, you can right-click in
the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several
options.

If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost
boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option
depends on which island detection method is specified.
NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects
to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be
removed with REDRAW on page 1070 or REGEN on page 1079.

Add: Select Objects
Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 547

Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select
the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according
to the current island detection style.

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or fill.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added
previously.
Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition.

548 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it.

View Selections
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings.
This option is available only when a boundary has been defined.

Select Boundary Objects
Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch
object. Use the displayed grips to modify the hatch boundaries.
NOTE This option is available only in the Hatch Edit dialog box on page 573and
replaces the View Selections option.
When you select an associative hatch, a single, circular grip called the control
grip is displayed. No boundary grips are displayed because the boundaries of
an associative hatch can be modified only by changing its associated boundary
objects. Use the Select Boundary Objects option to select and grip-edit the
boundary objects.
To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries
of the hatch object itself. Thus, when you select a nonassociative hatch, both
the control grip and the boundary grips are displayed.

Options
Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options.
Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling
annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.
(HPANNOTATIVE on page 1534 system variable)

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 549

Associative
Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative
is updated when you modify its boundary objects. (HPASSOC system variable)
Create Separate Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created
when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE system
variable)
Draw Order
Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all
other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in
front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable)
Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer.
Select Use Current to use the current layer. (HPLAYER on page 1542 system
variable)
Transparency
Sets the transparency leve for new hatch or fills, overriding the current object
transparency. Select Use Current to use the current object transparency setting.
(HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1548 system variable)

Inherit Properties
Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of a
selected hatch object.
After selecting the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit,
right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to
switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options.
The HPINHERIT system variable controls whether the hatch origin of the
resulting hatch is determined by HPORIGIN or by the source object.

Preview
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings.
Click in the drawing area or press Esc to return to the dialog box. Right-click
or press Enter to accept the hatch or fill.

More Options
Expands the Hatch and Gradient dialog box to display more options on page
555.

550 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Type and Pattern
Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color.
Type
Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern.
Predefined patterns are stored in the aclt.pat or acltiso.pat files supplied with
the program.
User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A
custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you
have added to the search path.
Pattern
Displays a selection of ANSI, ISO, and other industry-standard hatch patterns.
Select SOLID to create solid fill. The Pattern option is available only when
Type is set to Predefined. (HPNAME system variable)
[ ] Button
Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 563, in which you can
preview images for all predefined patterns.
Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. (HPCOLOR on page 1537 system variable)
Background Color

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 551

Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn
off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1535 system
variable)
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the
Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 563.
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The most recently used custom patterns
appear at the top of the list. The Custom Pattern option is available only when
Type is set to Custom. (HPNAME system variable)
[ ] Button
Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 563, in which you can
preview images for all custom patterns.

Angle and Scale
Specifies an angle and scale for the selected hatch pattern.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. (HPANG system variable)
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. This option is available
only when Type is set to Predefined or Custom. (HPSCALE system variable)
Double
For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines at 90 degrees to the
original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only when Type
is set to User Defined. (HPDOUBLE system variable)
Relative to Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. This allows you to display
hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your named layout. This option
is available only from a named layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available
only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE system variable)
ISO Pen Width

552 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option
is available only when Type is set to Predefined and Pattern is set to one of
the available ISO patterns.

Hatch Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin
Uses the hatch origin point stored in the HPORIGIN on page 1544 system
variable.
Specified Origin
Assigns a new hatch origin using the following options.
Click to Set New Origin
Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents
Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the boundary for
the hatch object. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and
its center. (HPORIGINMODE system variable)
Store as Default Origin
Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.

Gradient Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 553

Color
Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or
two-color blend.
One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified
tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade
(the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE on page 1518 system variable)
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. (GFCLRSTATE
on page 1518 system variable)
Color Swatches
Specifies the colors for the gradient fill (either one color or two colors). Click
the Browse button [ ] to display the Select Color dialog box, where you can
select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book color.
(GFCLR1 on page 1517 and GFCLR2 on page 1517 system variables)
Shade and Tint Slider
Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
(GFCLRLUM on page 1518 system variable)

Gradient Patterns
Displays fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep,
spherical, and parabolic.

Orientation
Specifies the angle of the gradient and whether it is symmetrical.
Centered
Specifies a symmetrical gradient configuration. If this option is not selected,
the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light
source to the left of the object. (GFSHIFT on page 1519 system variable)
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch
patterns. (GFANG on page 1516 system variable)

554 | Chapter 9 H Commands

More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Controls the operation of islands and boundaries.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Islands
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost
boundary.
Island Detection
Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
(HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE on page 1541 system variable)
Normal
Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is
encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the
island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable)

Outer (Recommended)
Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills
only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected.
(HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable)

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 555

Ignore
Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.
(HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable)

The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select
objects to define your boundaries.

Boundary Retention
Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch.
Retain Boundaries
Creates an object that encloses each hatch object. (HPBOUNDRETAIN on page
1536 system variable)
Object Type
Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object
can be either a polyline or a region object. This option is available only when
Retain Boundaries is selected. (HPBOUND on page 1536 system variable)
For more information about regions, see “Create and Combine Areas
(Regions)”.

556 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified
point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects
to define a boundary.
By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary,
HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the
boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries
without having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining
the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because HATCH
examines fewer objects.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from all objects within the extents
of the current viewport.
Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects selected with the New
option.
New
Specifies a limited set of objects for evaluation by the pick point when creating
the hatch.

Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as
a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose
the area with no gaps.
Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of
gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary. Any
gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored, and the
boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)

Inherit Options
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when you create a hatch with
the Inherit Properties option. (HPINHERIT on page 1540 system variable)
Use Current Origin Uses the current hatch origin setting.
Use Source Hatch Origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 557

Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for
hatch and fills.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Boundaries Panel
Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed
area around the specified point.
While specifying internal points, you can right-click in the drawing area at
any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options.

Select Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed
area.
When you use the Select Objects option, HATCH does not automatically detect
interior objects. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to
hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.

558 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or fill.
Remove Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were
previously added .
Recreate Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and
optionally associates the hatch object with it.
Display Boundary Objects Selects the objects that form the boundaries of
the selected associative hatch object. Use the displayed grips to modify the
hatch boundaries.
NOTE This option is available only when editing a hatch.
When you select an associative hatch, a single, circular grip called the control
grip is displayed. No boundary grips are displayed because the boundaries of
an associative hatch can be modified only by changing its associated boundary
objects. Use the Select Boundary Objects option to select and grip-edit the
boundary objects.

Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab | 559

To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries
of the hatch object itself. Thus, when you select a nonassociative hatch, both
the control grip and the boundary grips are displayed.

Retain Boundary Objects
Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch.
Don’t Retain Boundaries Does not create a separate object that encloses the
hatch object. (HPBOUNDRETAIN on page 1536 system variable)
Retain Boundaries - Polyline Creates a polyline that encloses the hatch
object. (HPBOUND on page 1536 system variable)
Retain Boundaries - Region Creates a region object that encloses the hatch
object. (HPBOUND on page 1536 system variable)
For more information about regions, see “Create and Combine Areas
(Regions)”.
Select New Boundary Set Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary
set, for evaluation by the pick point when creating the hatch.

Specify Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary.
Use Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from all objects within the
extents of the current viewport.
Use Boundary Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected
with Select New Boundary Set.

Pattern Panel
Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns.

Properties Panel
Hatch Type Specifies whether to create a solid fill, a gradient fill, a predefined
hatch pattern, or a user-defined hatch pattern.
Predefined patterns are stored in the aclt.pat or acltiso.pat files supplied with
the program.
User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A
custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you
have added to the search path.
Hatch Color or Gradient Color 1 Overrides the current color for solid fills
and hatch patterns, or specifies the first of two gradient colors. (HPCOLOR
on page 1537 or GFCLR1 on page 1517 system variables)
Background Color or Gradient Color 2 Specifies the color for hatch pattern
backgrounds, or the second gradient color. When Hatch Type is set to Solid,

560 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Gradient Color 2 is not available. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1535 or
GFCLR2 on page 1517 system variables)
Transparency Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding
the current object transparency. Select Use Current to use the current object
transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1548 system variable)
Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch or fill relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. Valid values are from 0 to 359. (HPANG system variable)
Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom hatch pattern. This option
is available only when Hatch Type is set to Pattern. (HPSCALE system variable)
Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option
is available only when Hatch Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE system
variable)
Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade
(the seledted color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill
of one color. This option is available only when Hatch Type is set to Gradient.
(GFCLRLUM on page 1518 system variable)
Layer Name Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the
current layer. Select Use Current to use the current layer. (HPLAYER on page
1542 system variable)
Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units.
This allows you to display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your
layout. This option is available only from a layout.
Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines at 90 degrees to
the original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only when
Hatch Type is set to User Defined. (HPDOUBLE on page 1538 system variable)
ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen
width. This option is available only when an ISO pattern has been specified.

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Set Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Bottom Left Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-left corner of the rectangular
extents of the hatch boundary.
Bottom Right Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-right corner of the
rectangular extents of the hatch boundary.

Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab | 561

Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents
of the hatch boundary.
Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular
extents of the hatch boundary.
Center Sets the hatch origin at the center of the rectangular extents of the
hatch boundary.
Use Current Origin Sets the hatch origin to the defaoult location stored in
the HPORIGIN on page 1544 system variable.
Store as Default Origin Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN system variable.

Options
Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options.
Associative
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process
of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the
paper. (HPANNOTATIVE on page 1534 system variable)
Match Properties
Use Current Origin Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch object,
except the hatch origin.
Use Source Hatch Origin Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch
object, including the hatch origin.
Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when
objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the
objects must enclose the area with no gaps.
Move the slicer or enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the
maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch
boundary. Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored,
and the boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)
Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple
hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
(HPSEPARATE system variable)
Islands
Normal Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until
another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION on
page 1541 system variable)

562 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Outer Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This
option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands
unaffected. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable)
Ignore Island Detection Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills
through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable)
No Island Detection Turns off island detection.
Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or
fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch
boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system
variable)

Close Panel
Close Hatch Creation Exits HATCH and closes the contextual tab.
You can also press Enter or Esc to exit HATCH.

Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns.

Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box | 563

Summary
Organizes patterns on four tabs, with images arranged alphabetically on each
tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the program.
ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the program.
Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with
the program.
Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the Support
File Search Path of the program.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the selected custom pattern.

564 | Chapter 9 H Commands

-HATCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a
hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify internal point or [Properties/Select objects/draW boundary/remove
Boundaries/Advanced/DRaw order/Origin/ANnotative/hatch COlor on page
571/LAyer on page 571/Transparency on page 571]: Specify a point or enter an option

Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.
Pick Internal Point While specifying internal points, you can right-click in
the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several
options.

If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost
boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option
depends on which island detection method is specified.
NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects
to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be
removed with REDRAW on page 1070 or REGEN on page 1079.

-HATCH | 565

Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.
Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the
acadlt.pat or acadltiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file.
Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the
pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead
of a hatch object.
?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the
acadlt.pat file.
Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH prompt, where you
can define a boundary.
User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an optional
hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with
individual lines instead of a hatch object.
Double Hatch Area Specifies a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees
to the original lines.

Select Objects
Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.
Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select
the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according
to the current island detection style.

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

566 | Chapter 9 H Commands

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or fill.

Draw Boundary
Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill.
The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE.
When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter. You can then create
additional polyline boundaries, or press Enter to twice to apply the hatch.
NOTE To enclose an area completely, use the Close option. Do not make the first
and last points coincident.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously
added.
Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition.
Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.

Advanced
Sets the method used to create the hatch boundary.

Boundary Set
Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary set, for evaluation by the
pick point of the hatch
New Creates a boundary set from the selected objects.
Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current
viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses
everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport.

Retain Boundary
Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.

-HATCH | 567

Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary
objects.
Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method.
Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

568 | Chapter 9 H Commands

-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first
object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch
boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use
the Normal style.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.

Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This

-HATCH | 569

option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the
internal structure blank.

Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters
an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another
island within the island.

Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are
modified.
A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC system variable.
Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the
HPASSOC system variable.

Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as
a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose
the area with no gaps.
Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify in the gap tolerance
are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether the command creates a single hatch object or multiple hatch
objects when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

Draw Order
Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind
all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or
in front of the hatch boundary.

570 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE on page 1544 system
variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5.
Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular
extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents
and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN on page 1544 system variable.

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling
annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR on page 1537 system variable.
When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background
color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
on page 1535 system variable.
To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter “.” or Use
Current. To turn off the background color, enter “.” or none.
Default Object Color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color
name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the
color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI
name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock.
Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as
210,155,95.
Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer.
Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer. (HPLAYER on page 1542 system
variable)

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current
object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object
transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1548 system variable)

-HATCH | 571

HATCHEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Hatches and Fills

Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Hatch
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Hatch
Toolbar: Modify II
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Hatch Edit.

Summary
Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an
existing hatch or fill.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Select hatch object: Use an object selection method
When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Editor contextual tab on page 573 is
displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are
displayed in the command line.

572 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Hatch Edit Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Hatches and Fills

Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an
existing hatch or fill.

Summary
The options in the Hatch Edit dialog box are the same as the options for the
Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546. Certain options are available only
when creating hatches.

Hatch Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an
existing hatch or fill.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Boundaries Panel
Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed
area around the specified point.
While picking internal points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any
time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options.

Hatch Edit Dialog Box | 573

Select Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed
area.
When you use the Select Objects option, interior objects are not detected
automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to
hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.

574 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Remove Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were
added previously.
Recreate Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and
optionally associates the hatch object with it.
Display Boundary Objects
Displays the boundary grip controls for the selected hatch that you can use
to grip-edit both the boundary and the hatch object.
When you select or use the Display Boundary Objects option to select a
non-associative hatch, the hatch boundary grips are displayed.
When you select an associative hatch, it displays only a single grip point of
the hatch. To display the boundary grip controls of the objects associated to
the hatch, use the Display Boundary Objects option. You can only edit an
associative hatch by grip-editing the associated boundary objects.
Don’t Retain Boundaries Do not create a separate object that encloses the
hatch object. This option is available only during hatch creation.
Retain Boundaries - Polyline Creates a polyline that encloses the hatch
object. This option is available only during hatch creation.
Retain Boundaries - Region Creates a region object that encloses the hatch
object. This option is available only during hatch creation.
For more information about regions, see “Create and Combine Areas (Regions)”
in the User's Guide.
Select New Boundary Set Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary
set, for evaluation by the pick point when creating the hatch.
Use Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from all objects within the
extents of the current viewport. This option is available only during hatch
creation.
Use Boundary Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected
with Define Boundary Set. This option is available only during hatch creation.

Pattern Panel
Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns.

Properties Panel
Hatch Type Specifies whether to create a solid fill, a gradient fill, a predefined
hatch pattern, or a user-defined hatch pattern.
Predefined patterns are stored in the aclt.pat or acltiso.pat files supplied with
the product.

Hatch Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 575

User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A
custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you
have added to the search path.
Hatch Color or Gradient Color 1 Specifies the color for solid fills, hatch
patterns, or as the first of two gradient colors.
Background Color or Gradient Color 2 Specifies the color for hatch pattern
backgrounds or as a second gradient color. When Hatch Type is set to Solid,
Gradient Color 2 is not available.
Transparency Sets the level of transparency for new hatch objects, overriding
the default object transparency.
Angle Specifies an angle for Gradient and Pattern hatch objects relative to
the X axis of the current UCS. Set a hatch angle between 0 to 359 degrees using
the slider.
Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom hatch pattern.
Spacing When Hatch Type is set to User Defined, this option specifies the
spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern.
Tint Slider When Hatch Type is set to Gradient, this option specifies the tint
(the selected color mixed with white) of a color to be used for a gradient fill
of one color.
Layer Name Specifies the layer to which hatch objects are added.
Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units.
Using this option, you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is
appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a layout.
Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines at 90 degrees to
the original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only when
Hatch Type is set to User Defined.
ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen
width. This option is available only when an ISO pattern has been specified.

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Set Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Bottom Left Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-left corner of the rectangular
extents of the hatch boundary.

576 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Bottom Right Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-right corner of the
rectangular extents of the hatch boundary.
Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents
of the hatch boundary.
Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular
extents of the hatch boundary.
Center Sets the hatch origin at the center of the rectangular extents of the
hatch boundary.
Use Current Origin Sets the hatch origin to the defaoult location stored in
the HPORIGIN on page 1544 system variable.
Store as Default Origin Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN system variable.

Options
Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options.
Associative Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that
is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects. (HPASSOC
system variable)
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process
of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the
paper. (HPANNOTATIVE system variable)
Match Properties
Use Current Origin Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch object,
except the hatch origin.
Use Source Hatch Origin Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch
object, including the hatch origin.
Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when
objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the
objects must enclose the area with no gaps.
Move the slicer or enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the
maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch
boundary. Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored,
and the boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)
Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple
hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
(HPSEPARATE system variable)

Hatch Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 577

Islands
Normal Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until
another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION
system variable)
Outer Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This
option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands
unaffected. (HPISLANDDETECTION system variable)
Ignore Island Detection Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills
through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION system variable)
No Island Detection Turns off island detection.
Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or
fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch
boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system
variable)

Close Panel
Close Hatch Editor Exits the Hatch Editor and closes the contextual tab.
The ENTER and ESC keys can also be used to exit the Hatch Editor.

-HATCHEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Hatches and Fills

Uses command prompts to modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern,
scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object:
Enter hatch option [DIsassociate/Style/Properties/DRaw order/ADd
boundaries/Remove boundaries/recreate Boundary/ASsociate/separate
Hatches/Origin on page 580/ANnotative/hatch COlor/LAyer/Transparency]
: Enter an option or press Enter

578 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch or fill.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost
boundary.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.
Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This
option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the
internal structure blank.
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters
an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another
island within the island.

Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of
setting pattern and fill properties at the Command prompt, see -HATCH on
page 565.

Draw Order
Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all
other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in
front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable)

Add Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by adding boundaries.
For more information, see Add: Pick Points or Add: Select Objects.

Remove Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by removing boundaries.
For more information, see Remove Boundaries.

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it.
For more information, see Recreate Boundary.

Associate
Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative
is updated when you modify its boundary objects.

-HATCHEDIT | 579

Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that
form an enclosed area around the specified point, and associates the selected
hatch with the boundary objects.
Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an
enclosed area, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created
when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE on page 1544 system
variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5.
Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular
extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents
and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN on page 1544 system variable.

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling
annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR on page 1537 system variable.
When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background
color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
on page 1535 system variable.
To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter “.” or Use
Current. To turn off the background color, enter “.” or none.
Default object color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color
name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the
color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI
name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock.
Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as
210,155,95.

580 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer.
Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer.

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current
object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object
transparency setting.

HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Creates a non-associated polyline around a selected hatch.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Generate
Boundary.

Summary
Creates a new non-associative polyline boundary around the selected hatch.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER.

HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY | 581

HATCHSETBOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Boundary.

Summary
Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object: Select hatch object to be trimmed.
Select objects to be used for the new boundary: Select the new boundary or
geometry and press ENTER.

HATCHSETORIGIN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation for a selected hatch.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Origin.

582 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Summary
Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You
can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin
for multiple hatches at the same time.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object: Select the hatch object.
Select new hatch origin: Click inside the hatch to change the origin point.

HATCHTOBACK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects.

Access Methods
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order ➤ Send Hatches to Back
Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Send Hatches to Back
Toolbar: Draw Order

Summary
Selects all hatches in the drawing, including hatch patterns, solid fills, and
gradient fills, and sets their draw order to be behind all other objects. Hatch
objects on locked layers are also modified.

HATCHTOBACK | 583

HELP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Find the Information You Need

Displays Help.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Help ➤ Help
Toolbar: Standard
Command entry: ? (or 'help for transparent use)

Summary
Pressing F1 while a tooltip or command is active displays Help for that
command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that
dialog box.

HIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Hide Lines in 3D Objects

Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.

Access Methods

Button

584 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ Hide
Menu: View ➤ Hide

Summary
When you use VPOINT or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing, a
wireframe is displayed in the current viewport. All lines are present, including
those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the
screen.
HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles,
text, regions, wide polyline segments, the extruded edges of objects with
nonzero thickness, 2D solids, and (when working with AutoCAD drawings)
3D solids, traces, 3D faces, and polygon meshes.
If they are extruded, circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline segments are
treated as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on
objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects
whose layers have been turned off.
To hide text created with MTEXT or TEXT, the HIDETEXT system variable
must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.

When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system
variable is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as
polylines.
If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with
silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by objects
that have facets.
If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when
producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of
whether they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text
objects are unaffected.

HIDE | 585

HIDEOBJECTS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Objects

Hides selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Hide Objects
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Hide
Objects.

Summary
Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are
visible.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

HIDEPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows

Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.

586 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Access Methods
Command entry: Ctrl+Shift+H

Summary
Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, DesignCenter,
and Properties.

HLSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects

Changes the display properties of hidden lines.

Summary
The Hidden Line Settings dialog box on page 587 is displayed.
Sets the display properties of hidden lines. These settings are visible only when
HIDE is used and SHADEMODE is set to 2D Wireframe.

Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
See also:
■

Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects

Summary
Sets the display properties of hidden lines. These settings are visible only when
HIDE is used and SHADEMODE is set to 2D Wireframe.

HLSETTINGS | 587

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Obscured Lines
Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hidden
line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype.
Linetype
Lists the available linetypes to apply to obscured lines. Unlike regular linetypes,
obscured linetypes are not affected by zoom level. (OBSCUREDLTYPE system
variable)
Color
Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines. (OBSCUREDCOLOR system
variable)

Halo Gap Percentage
Specifies the distance to shorten a haloed line. A haloed line is shortened at
the point where it will be hidden. The distance is specified as a percentage of
1 inch and is not affected by zoom level. (HALOGAP system variable)

Include Text in HIDE Operations
Specifies whether text objects created by TEXT or MTEXT are included during
a HIDE command. (HIDETEXT system variable)

Face Intersections
Specifies the display and color of intersection polylines. An intersection
polyline is displayed at the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces.

588 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Display Intersections
Specifies the display of intersection polylines. (INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system
variable)
Color
Lists the available colors to apply to intersection polylines.
(INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable)

Hide Precision
Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be set to either low
(single) precision or high (double) precision. (HIDEPRECISION system variable)
Low (single)
Sets the hide precision to low (single), which uses less memory.
High (double)
Sets the hide precision to high (double), which produces more precise hides,
but also uses more memory and can affect performance.

Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box | 589

HYPERLINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink
Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink
Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a
hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit
Hyperlink.

Summary
Hyperlinks in a drawing provide jumps to associated files. For example, a
hyperlink can launch a word processing program and open a specified file,
another hyperlink can launch a web browser and display a specified web page.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
One of the following dialog boxes is displayed:
■

Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already
contain hyperlinks) on page 591

■

Edit Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that already contain
hyperlinks) on page 594

590 | Chapter 9 H Commands

After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move
the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the
selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must
be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, options are displayed,
including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink.

Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Attaches a specified hyperlink to a selected object.

Summary
Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Text to Display
Specifies a description for the hyperlink. This is useful when the file name or
URL is not helpful in identifying the contents of the linked file.

Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)
Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page.

Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box | 591

Type the File or Web Page Name
Specifies the file or web page to associate with the hyperlink. The file can be
stored locally, on a network drive, or on an Internet or intranet location.
Recent Files
Displays a list of recently linked files, from which you can select one to link
to.
Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages, from which you
can select one to link to.
Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks, from which you
can select one to link to.
File
Opens the Browse the Web - Select Hyperlink dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can navigate to the file that you want to
associate with the hyperlink.
Web Page
Opens the browser, in which you can navigate to a web page that you want
to associate with the hyperlink.
Target
Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box, in which you can select a
named location in a drawing to link to.
Path

592 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Displays the path to the file associated with the hyperlink. If Use Relative Path
for Hyperlink is selected, only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for
Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are listed.
Use Relative Path for Hyperlink
Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this option, the full path to
the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink. The relative path is set to the
value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable or, if no value is
specified for HYPERLINKBASE, to the current drawing path. If this option is
cleared, the full path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink.
Convert DWG Hyperlinks to DWF
Specifies that the DWG hyperlink will convert to a DWF file hyperlink when
you publish or plot the drawing to a DWF file.

View of This Drawing Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)
Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to.

Select a View of This
Displays an expandable tree view of the named views within the current
drawing, from which you can select one to link to.

E-mail Address Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)
Specifies an email address to link to. When the hyperlink is executed, a new
email is created using the default system email program.

Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box | 593

E-mail Address
Specifies an email address.
Subject
Specifies a subject for the email.
Recently Used E-mail Addresses
Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can select one to use for
the hyperlink.

Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Edits hyperlinks.

Summary
The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the Insert Hyperlink
dialog box, with one additional option.

594 | Chapter 9 H Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Remove Link
Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects.

Select Place in Document Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing.

Summmary
The named location that you select is the initial view that is restored when
the hyperlink is executed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Select an Existing Place in the Document
Provides an expandable tree view of the named locations within the linked
drawing, from which you can select a named location to link to.

-HYPERLINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

The Command prompt version of HYPERLINK inserts hyperlinks to areas or
to selected objects and also removes hyperlinks.

Select Place in Document Dialog Box | 595

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Remove/Insert] : Enter an option or pressENTER

Remove
Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not
exist, you are prompted to create one.
Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing
If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, the hyperlinks that
were found are listed at the Command prompt.
Enter number, hyperlink, or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink,
or enter*to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set
The number of removed hyperlinks is displayed at the Command prompt.

Insert
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] : Select a method for
attaching a hyperlink
Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer called URLLAYER.
If this layer doesn't exist in the current drawing, it is created.
NOTE To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding rectangles in the drawing
area or in your drawing plots, you must freeze the URLLAYER layer. See “Use Layers
to Manage Complexity” in the User's Guide.
First corner: Specify the start point of the rectangle
Other corner: Specify the end point of the rectangle
Enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink.
Enter hyperlink : Enter the full path to a local file or the complete
URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the
current drawing
Enter a named location for the hyperlink, such as a view in a drawing or a
bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location : Enter the named location, or press ENTER to create
the hyperlink without one
Enter description : Enter a description, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink
without one
Object Specifies graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to.
Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing

596 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink.
Enter hyperlink : Enter the full path to a local file or the complete
URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the
current drawing
Enter a named location for the hyperlink, such as a view in a drawing or a
bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location : Enter the named location, or press ENTER to create
the hyperlink without one
Enter description : Enter a descriptive name for the hyperlink, or press ENTER
to create the hyperlink without one

HYPERLINKOPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page

Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu.

Summary
Controls the display of hyperlink cursor, tooltip, and shortcut menu.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Display hyperlink cursor, tooltip, and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] :

HYPERLINKOPTIONS | 597

598

I Commands

10

ID
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations

Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ ID Point.
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point
Toolbar: Inquiry
Command entry: 'id for transparent use

Summary
ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate
of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by
entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.

599

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point
The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command
prompt.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as
that of the selected feature of the object.

IGESEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export IGES files

Saves selected objects in the current drawing to a new IGES (*.igs, *.iges) file.

Summary
Displays the Export File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) to
enable you to name the IGES file and specify the path to it. Thereafter you
must specify what objects to export.
Once processing is complete, a notification bubble is displayed.

IGESEXPORT Conversion Table
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export IGES files

600 | Chapter 10 I Commands

The following table lists the AutoCAD LT entities tabulated against the
corresponding IGES entities they are translated to.
DWG to IGES Conversion Table
AutoCAD LT Entity

IGES Entity
Type

Form

Point

Name
Nothing

Line

110

0

Line

Circle

126

0

Rational B-spline curve

Arc

126

0

Rational B-spline curve

Ellipse

126

0

Rational B-spline curve

Polyline (lightweight)

106

12

Copious data

2d Polyline

106

12

Copious data

3d Polyline

106

12

Copious data

Polyface mesh

Nothing

Polygon mesh

Nothing

SubD mesh

110

0

Line

Trace

110

0

Line

Solid (2D)

110

0

Line

3D Face

Nothing

Dimensions

Nothing

Leader

Nothing

Mleader

Nothing

Text

Nothing

IGESEXPORT Conversion Table | 601

DWG to IGES Conversion Table
AutoCAD LT Entity

IGES Entity
Type

Form

Mtext
Hatch

Nothing
110

Block Reference

Surface

Name

0

Line
Treats the block reference as
though it was exploded and
translates each object within
the block separately.

128/144

3D Solid

Rational B-spline surface,
trimmed surface
Treats the 3D solid as though
it were exploded to surfaces
and translates each surface
separately.

Region

128/144

Rational B-spline surface,
trimmed surface

Body

128/144

Rational B-spline surface,
trimmed surface

Table

Nothing

FCF

Nothing

OLE

Nothing

Image

Nothing

Xref

Nothing

Mline

Nothing

Xline

Nothing

Ray

Nothing

602 | Chapter 10 I Commands

IGESIMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import IGES Files

Imports data from an IGES (*.igs or *.iges) file into the current drawing.

Summary
Displays the Select IGES File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box)
to enable you to locate and select the IGES file to import.
If import takes longer than 5 seconds, the IGES file is processed in the
background and the Import icon is displayed in the status bar. Hence, you
can continue to work on the drawing while the IGES file is processed. You
can check the status of the import process by placing the cursor over the
Import status bar icon and inspecting the tooltip that is displayed.
Once processing is done, a notification bubble is displayed on the Import
icon. Click the link in the notification bubble to insert the imported IGES
data in the current drawing.

IGESIMPORT Conversion Table
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import IGES Files

The following table lists the IGES entities that are supported for import.
IGES to DWG Conversion Table
IGES Entity

AutoCAD LT Entity

Type

Form

Name

100

0

circular arc

Spline

IGESIMPORT | 603

IGES to DWG Conversion Table
IGES Entity

AutoCAD LT Entity

Type

Form

Name

102

0

composite curve

Spline

104

0-3

conic arc, ellipse, parabola,
hyperbola

Spline

106

1

copious data

Spline

106

2

copious data

Spline

106

11

copious data

Spline

106

12

copious data

Spline

106

63

closed area

Spline

108

0

plane

Surface

108

+/- 1

bounded plane

Surface

110

0

line

Spline

112

0

parametric curve

Spline

114

0

parametric surface

Surface

116

0

point

Nothing

118

0-1

ruled surface

Surface

120

0

surface of revolution

Surface

122

0

tabulated cylinder

Surface

123

0

direction

Nothing

124

0

transformation matrix

Nothing

126

0-5

rational B-spline curve

Spline

604 | Chapter 10 I Commands

IGES to DWG Conversion Table
IGES Entity

AutoCAD LT Entity

Type

Form

Name

128

0-9

rational B-spline surface

Surface

130

0

offset curve

Spline

140

0

offset surface

Surface

141

0

boundary entity

Nothing

143

0

boundary suface

Surface (with trimming applied, not associative)

144

0

trimmed surface

Surface (with trimming applied, not associative)

Manifold Solid BRep Object
(MSBO)

Surface (can be converted to
solid with CONVTOSOLID)

plane surface

Applied when processing entity type 186.

192

right circular cylindrical surface

Applied when processing entity type 186.

194

right circular conical surface

Applied when processing entity type 186.

198

toroidal surface

Applied when processing entity type 186.

186

190

0,1

308

0

subfigure definition

Applied when processing entity type 408 (Subfigure)

402

7, 9

associativity instance

Ignored (as though entities
weren't related in a group).

408

0

singular subfigure instance

Individual entities (like an exploded block reference).

IGESIMPORT Conversion Table | 605

IGES to DWG Conversion Table
IGES Entity
Type

Form

AutoCAD LT Entity
Name

502

vertex list

Applied when processing entity type 186.

504

edge list

Applied when processing entity type 186.

508

loop

Applied when processing entity type 186.

510

face

Applied when processing entity type 186.

514

shell

Applied when processing entity type 186.

IMAGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Raster Images

Displays the External References palette.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach
Menu: File ➤ Attach
Menu: Insert ➤ External References
Toolbar: Reference

606 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Shortcut menu: Select an image. Right-click in the drawing area and choose
Image ➤ External References.

Summary
The External References palette is displayed.
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

-IMAGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Raster Images

Attaches a raster image to the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach] : Enter an
option or press Enter

?—List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is
attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. Images are
listed in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system
variable.

Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and erases
all occurrences of the image.

Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular
image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file, rename
the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you can
update image01.png and save it as image02.png.
If you enter an asterisk (*), the following prompt is displayed:
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image

-IMAGE | 607

Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image

Reload
Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display
and plotting.

Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not
displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the
image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached
image remains visible.

Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.
The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image
names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and
any special characters not used by the operating system or this program. If
the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute
Image Name dialog box is displayed. A valid image name is generated from
the file name and an underscore and number are appended to the name.
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, the
following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press Enter
Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press Enter
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed
instead of the dialog box:
Enter image file name to attach : Enter an image name
The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the
default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended
that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows:
imagename=path name\long file name.bmp
or

608 | Chapter 10 I Commands

imagename="path name\long file name.bmp"
If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches
for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing,
and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The
program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of
extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is
found, the message “Image Not Found” is displayed and the prompt is repeated.
To specify a long file name that does not conform to this program's naming
rules, enter the name as follows:
"imagename=filename"
You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the
imagename=filename convention at the Command prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at
the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press Esc after the dialog
box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed.

IMAGEADJUST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade

Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of
images.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust
Toolbar: Reference
Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Image ➤ Adjust.

IMAGEADJUST | 609

Summary
You can change the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade for
attached images. To confirm the settings of a selected image, open the
Properties palette.
NOTE You can also use the ADJUST command to change an image’s brightness,
contrast, and fade settings.
The Image Adjust dialog box is displayed when you enter the IMAGEADJUST
command.
If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Image Adjust Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade

Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast,
and fade settings of the selected image.

Summary
Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change
the image file itself.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

610 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Brightness
Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. The greater
the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when
you increase contrast.
Contrast
Controls the contrast, and indirectlyd the fading effect of the image. The
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary
color.
Fade
Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the
image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the
image completely into the background. Changing the screen background color
causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background color
for fade is white.
Image Preview
Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview image updates
dynamically to reflect changes to the brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
Reset
Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to default settings (50, 50, and
0, respectively).

-IMAGEADJUST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade

Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of
images.

Summary
With the Command prompt version of IMAGEADJUST, you can select more
than one image to adjust.

-IMAGEADJUST | 611

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
If you select a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and
Fade are the current property settings of the image. If you select multiple
images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and
0, respectively.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the image.
The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary
color.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image.
The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become
white when you increase contrast.
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more
the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends
the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background
color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background
color for fade is white.

IMAGEATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Raster Images

Inserts a reference to an image file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach
Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference
Toolbar: Reference

612 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Summary
When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current
drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current
drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image Dialog Box on page
613 is displayed.
After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the underlay through the
Image Ribbon Contextual tab.
TIP Use the generic CLIP command to clip images, external references, viewports,
and underlays.

Attach Image Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Raster Images

Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached
images.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach.

Browse
Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on
page 826).

Preview
Displays the image that you have selected to attach.

Attach Image Dialog Box | 613

Path Type
Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the image file, or No Path,
the name of the image file (the image file must be located in the same folder
as the current drawing file).

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is
the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0.
Specify On-Screen
Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify
On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If
INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and
the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true
width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.
Specify On-Screen
Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify
On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor
is 1.
Scale Factor Field
Enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image.
Specify On-Screen

614 | Chapter 10 I Commands

If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box
to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value
at the Command prompt.
Angle
If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog
box. The default rotation angle is 0.

Show Details
Displays details about the selected image file.

Resolution
Displays the number of horizontal and vertical pixels per the current unit
measurement in AutoCAD LT.

Unit
Displays the current AutoCAD LT unit.

Image Size in Pixels
Displays the width and height of the raster image measured in pixels.

Image Size in Units
Displays the width and height of the raster image measured in AutoCAD LT
units.

Path
Found In Displays the path where the image file is located.
Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the image
file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

Image Ribbon Contextual tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries

Summary
When you select a raster image that is attached to a drawing, the Image
Contextual tab appears on the ribbon.

Image Ribbon Contextual tab | 615

List of Options
The following options are diaplayed.

Adjust Panel
Brightness

Controls the brightness and the contrast of the image. The greater
the value, the brighter the image.

Contrast

Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the image. The
greater the value, the more the image fades.

Fade

Controls the fading of an image. The greater the value, the more
the image blends with the current background color.

Clipping Panel
Create Clipping
Boundary

Deletes the old clipping boundary (if one exists) and creates a new
one.

Remove Clipping

Deletes the clipping boundary.

Options Panel
Show Image

Hides or displays the image.

Transparency

Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible.

External References

Displays the External References Palette.

IMAGECLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Clip Raster Images

Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary.

616 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Image contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping
Boundary.
Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image
Toolbar: Reference
Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip. Right-click in the drawing area and
choose Image ➤ Clip.

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden,
either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary
is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME system variable. The boundary you specify
must be in a plane parallel to the image object.
When you select an image, the ribbon Image contextual tab on page 615
displays options for creating and deleting clipping boundaries.
TIP Use the CLIP command to clip any type of referenced file: images, external
references, viewports, and DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined
boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically
turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when
clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.

IMAGECLIP | 617

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal
clipping boundary from a polyline.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected IMAGE underlay
after the old boundary is deleted.
Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline
can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect
itself.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points
that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify
for opposite corners.
Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.

IMAGEQUALITY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images

Controls the display quality of images.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality
Toolbar: Reference

618 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Summary
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take
longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately
without causing a regeneration of the drawing.
NOTE Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
High Produces a high-quality display of the image.
Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.

IMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import Other File Formats

Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: File ➤ Import
Toolbar: Insert

Summary
You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other
applications into the current drawing. The import process translates data into
the corresponding DWG file data.
The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.

IMPORT | 619

In Files of type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file
name to import. The file is imported into the drawing. The following formats
are available for import:
■

FBX files (*.fbx): Autodesk® FBX files (see FBXIMPORT)

■

Metafile (*.wmf): Microsoft Windows Metafile (see WMFIN on page 1335)

■

MicroStation DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN files (see DGNIMPORT on
page 298)

■

All DGN files (*.*): DGN files with user-specified file extensions such as .sed
for seed files (see DGNIMPORT on page 298)

®

For the WMF file type, selecting Options on the Tools menu in this dialog
box displays the WMF In Options dialog box. You can display this dialog box
directly by using WMFOPTS.
If FILEDIA = 0, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter import file name: Enter path and file name

INSERT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert
Menu: Insert ➤ Block
Toolbar: Insert

620 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Summary
The Insert dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can
be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that
contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block. With
either method, blocks are standardized and accessible to multiple users.
You can insert your own blocks or use the blocks provided in the DesignCenter
or tool palettes.

Select one model
Lists the models found in the *.exp file. Select the model to import and click
OK.

Insert Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.

Insert Dialog Box | 621

Summary
The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS.

Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block.
Browse
Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box)
where you can select a block or drawing file to insert.
Path
Specifies the path to the block.
Locate Using Geographic Data
Inserts drawing using geographic data as the reference.
Specifies if the current and attached drawing contain geographic data. This
option is available only if both drawings have geographic data.
Description Displays the description that was saved with the block.
Preview
Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in
the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic. A

icon indicates that the block is .

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device.
Input Coordinates Allows you to manually enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate
value for the insertion point of the block.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.

622 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X,
Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device.
Input Scale Factor Allows you to manually enter a scale factor for the block.
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Uniform Scale
Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device.
Input Angle Allows you to manually enter an angle of rotation for the block.
Angle
Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.

Block Unit
Displays information about the block units.
Unit
Specifies the INSUNITS value for the inserted block.

Insert Dialog Box | 623

Factor
Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value
of the block and the drawing units.

Explode
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode
is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects
having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the
CONTINUOUS linetype.

-INSERT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Insert Blocks

Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter block name or [?] : Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter
Units:  Conversion: 
Specify insertion point or [Basepoint/Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/Geographic]: Specify
a point or enter an option

Block Name
Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You
can list unnamed groups by selecting Include Unnamed Groups in the “Group
Manager”.
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).

624 | Chapter 10 I Commands

You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name
prompt by following the listed examples.
■

Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk
(*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block
definition is not added to the drawing.

■

Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name,
INSERT searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition
by that name. You can replace an existing block definition with an external
file by entering the following at the Enter Block Name prompt:
block name=file name

■

Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is inserted
in your drawing and you want to change the existing block definition
without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at the Specify
Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name prompt):
block name=
If you enter = after the block name, the following prompt is displayed:
Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] : Enter y, enter n,
or press Enter
If you choose to redefine the block, the existing block definition is replaced
with the new block definition. The drawing is regenerated, and the new
definition is applied to all existing insertions of the block definition. Press
Esc when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a
new block into the drawing.

?—List Block Names
Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.

Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing.
Scale Factor All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied
by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified
angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation.
Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion
point and another point as the corners of a box. The X and Y dimensions of
the box become the X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first corner.
XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
■

X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the block or drawing.

-INSERT | 625

■

Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion
point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z
scale.

Basepoint
Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned
and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is
dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for
the block reference.

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.

X
Sets the X scale factor.

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.

Geographic
Sets the geographic location of the attached file as reference.

INSERTOBJ
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import OLE Objects

Inserts a linked or embedded object.

Access Methods

Button

626 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object
Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object
Toolbar: Insert

Summary
The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.
■

Linked information from another document can be updated when it
changes in the source document.

■

Embedded information from another document is not updated when it
changes in the source document.

Insert Object Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import OLE Objects

Inserts a linked or embedded object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Create New
Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you
can create a new object to insert.
Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding.
To create an object to embed, double-click an application to open it.
On the application's File menu, the Save option is replaced with a new Update
option. Choosing Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it.
Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing.
Double-clicking the icon displays the embedded information.

Create from File
Specifies a file to link or embed.
File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded or linked.

Insert Object Dialog Box | 627

Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
in which you select a file to link or embed.
Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it.
Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing.
Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information.

INTERSECT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Creates a 2D region from selected overlapping regions.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Region ➤ Intersect

Summary
With INTERSECT, you can create a 2D region object from the overlapping
area of two or more existing regions. You can select only regions for use with
INTERSECT.
You can intersect regions only with other regions that are on the same plane.
However, you can perform simultaneous INTERSECT operations by selecting
sets of regions on different planes. Separate, intersected regions are then
produced on each plane.

628 | Chapter 10 I Commands

ISOLATEOBJECTS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Objects

Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.

Access Methods

Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Isolate
Objects.

Summary
Displays selected objects in the current view. All other objects are temporarily
hidden.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

ISOLATEOBJECTS | 629

ISOPLANE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Isometric Grid and Snap

Specifies the current isometric plane.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use

Summary

The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode
is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode
uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric
plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE.
You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing Ctrl+E or F5.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] : Enter an option or press
Enter
Left

Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair.

630 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Top

Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree
and 150-degree axis pair.
Right

Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.

ISOPLANE | 631

632

J Commands

11

JOIN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Break and Join Objects

Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Surface Modeling tab ➤ Curves panel ➤ Join
Menu: Modify ➤ Join
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
Combines a series of finite linear and open curved objects at their common
endpoints to create a single 2D or 3D object. The type of object that results
depends on the types of objects selected, the type of object selected first, and
whether the objects are coplanar.

633

NOTE Construction lines, rays, and closed objects cannot be joined.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select source object or multiple objects to join as once: Select lines, polylines,
3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, or splines.

Source Object
Specifies a single source object to which you can join other objects. Press Enter
after selecting the source object to begin selecting the objects to join. The
following rules apply for each type of source object:
Line Only line objects can be joined to the source line. The line objects must
all be collinear, but can have gaps between them.
Polyline Lines, polylines, and arcs can be joined to the source polyline. All
objects must be contiguous and coplanar. The resulting object is a single
polyline.
3D Polyline Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source 3D
polyline. All the objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The
resulting object is either a single 3D polyline or a single spline, depending on
whether you are joining to a linear or a curved object respectively.
Arc Only arcs can be joined to the source arc. All the arc objects must have
the same radius and center point, but can have gaps between them. The arcs
are joined in a counterclockwise direction starting from the source arc.
The Close option converts the source arc into a circle.
Elliptical Arc Only elliptical arcs can be joined to the source elliptical arc.
The elliptical arcs must be coplanar and have the same major and minor axes,
but can have gaps between them. The elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise
starting from the source elliptical arc.
The Close option converts the source elliptical arc into an ellipse.

634 | Chapter 11 J Commands

Helix Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source helix. All objects
must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single
spline.
Spline Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source spline. All
objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is
a single spline.

Multiple Objects to Join at Once
Joins multiple objects without specifying a source object. The rules and
resulting object types are as follows:
■

A line object results from joining collinear lines. The lines can have gaps
between their endpoints.

■

An arc or circle object results from joining coplanar arcs with the same
center point and radius. The arcs can have gaps between their endpoints.
Lengthening occurs in a counterclockwise direction. A circle object results
if the joined arcs form a complete circle.

■

A spline object results from joining splines or elliptical arcs together, or
to other objects. The objects can be noncoplanar.

■

A polyline object results from joining coplanar lines, arcs, polylines, or 3D
polylines.

■

A 3D polyline results from joining noncoplanar objects other than curved
objects.

JPGOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

JPGOUT | 635

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and
viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter
A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options
are preserved in the file when you use this command. Light glyphs that are
displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property
of the lights is set to No.
NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are
displayed.

JUSTIFYTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text Scale and Justification

Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their
locations.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Justify
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Justify
Toolbar: Text

Summary
The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT
command. The justification point options for single line text are similar to
those for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are
equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.

636 | Chapter 11 J Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text
objects, and attribute objects.
Enter a justification option
[Left/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]:
Specify a location to serve as the new justification point

JUSTIFYTEXT | 637

638

L Commands

12

LAYCUR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Changes the layer property of selected objects to the current layer.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Change to Current Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Change to Current Layer
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
If you find objects that were created on the wrong layer, you can quickly change
them to be on the current layer.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

639

Select objects to be changed to the current layer: Use an object selection method
and press Enter when you are finished
N object(s) changed to layer X (the current layer).

LAYDEL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Deletes all objects on a layer and purges the layer.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Delete
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete

Summary
This command also changes block definitions that use the layer to be deleted.
Objects on that layer are also deleted from all block definitions and the affected
blocks are redefined.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object on layer to delete or [Name]: Select an object or enter n to display
the Delete Layers dialog box
If you enter -laydel at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page
641.
Select Object on Layer to Delete Select an object on the layer you want to
delete.
Name Displays the Delete Layers dialog box on page 641.

640 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Delete Layers Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Displays layers available for deletion.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Layers to Delete Displays a list of layers that you can delete. Press Shift or
Ctrl to select more than one layer. Layers that cannot be deleted include the
current layer, layer 0, locked layers, and xref-dependent layers.

-LAYDEL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object on layer to delete or [Name]: Select an object or enter n.
Select object on layer to delete or [Name/Undo]: Select an object, enter n, or
enter u
Select Object on Layer to Delete Select an object on the layer you want to
delete.
Name Select a layer to delete.

Delete Layers Dialog Box | 641

LAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

■

CLASSICLAYER on page 209

Manages layers and layer properties.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager
Menu: Format ➤ Layer
Toolbar: Layer
Command entry: 'layer for transparent use

Summary
The Layer Properties Manager is displayed.
If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as
color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that

642 | Chapter 12 L Commands

layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example,
if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color
of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red,
regardless of the color assigned to that layer.

Layer Properties Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

■

CLASSICLAYER on page 209

Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties.

Summary
You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property
overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes
in realtime. You do not need to click Ok or Apply to view property changes.
Layer filters control which layers are displayed in the list and can also be used
to make changes to more than one layer at a time.
When switching space (model space to layout space or layout to viewport),
the Layer Properties Manager is updated and displays the current state of the
layer properties and filter selection in the current space.

Layer Properties Manager | 643

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Property Filter
Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you can create a layer
filter based on one or more properties of the layers.
New Group Filter
Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter.
Layer States Manager
Displays the Layer States Manager on page 668, in which you can save the
current property settings for layers in a named layer state and then restore
those settings later.
New Layer
Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. The name is
selected so that you can enter a new layer name immediately. The new layer
inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color,
on or off state, and so on).
The new layer is created below the last currently selected layer.
New Layer Frozen VP In All Viewports
Creates a new layer and freezes it in all existing layout viewports. This button
is accessible from the Model tab or layout tabs.
Delete Layer
Deletes selected layers. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced
layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including
objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers.
NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Set Current
Sets the selected layer as the current layer. Objects that you create are drawn
on the current layer. (CLAYER system variable)
Current Layer
Displays the name of the current layer.

644 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Search for Layer
Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not
saved when you close the Layer Properties Manager.
Status Line
Shows the name of the current filter, the number of layers displayed in the
list view, and the number of layers in the drawing.
Invert Filter
Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property
filter.
Indicate Layers in Use
Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use. In a
drawing with many layers, clear this option to improve performance.
(SHOWLAYERUSAGE system variable)
Refresh
Refreshes the layer usage information by scanning all the entities in the
drawing.
Settings
Displays the Layer Settings dialog box on page 658, in which you can set new
layer notification settings, if layer filter changes are applied to the Layer
toolbar, and change the background color for layer property overrides.
Apply Applies changes that have been made to layers and filters but does not
close the dialog box.
The Layer Properties Manager has the following two panes:
■

Tree view on page 645

■

List view on page 648

Tree View
Displays a hierarchical list of layers and filters in the drawing. The top node,
All, displays all layers in the drawing. Filters are displayed in alphabetical
order. The All Used Layers filter is read-only.
Expand a node to see nested filters. Double-click a property filter to open the
Layer Filter Properties dialog box and view the definition of the filter.

Layer Properties Manager | 645

The Hide/Show Layer Filters button controls the display of the Layer Filters
pane of the Layer Properties Manager. When the Layer Filter pane is collapsed,
the Layer Filter button is displayed adjacent to Layer Filter status text. The
Layer Filter button gives you access to the filters when the full Layer Filter
pane is closed.
If there are xrefs attached to the drawing, an xref node displays the names of
all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref. Layer filters defined
in xref files are not displayed.
If there are layers that contain property overrides, a Viewport Overrides node
is automatically created and displays those layers and the properties that
contain overrides. The Viewport Overrides filter displays only when the Layer
Properties Manager is accessed from a layout tab.
If there are new layers that have been added to the drawing since the layer
list was last evaluated (depending on how the LAYERNOTIFY system variable
is set), an Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically created and displays
new layers that need to be reconciled.

Tree View Shortcut Menu
Provides commands for items selected in the tree view.
Visibility Changes the visibility state of all the layers in the selected filter (or
All or All Used Layers, if selected).
■

On: Objects on the layer are displayed, plotted, and regenerated and hide
other objects when you use HIDE.

■

Off: Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide
other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is not regenerated when
you turn the layer on.

■

Thawed: Objects on the layer are displayed and plotted, and hide other
objects when you use HIDE.

■

Frozen: Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide
other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you
thaw the layer.

Lock Controls whether the objects on the layers in the selected filter can be
modified.
■

Lock: None of the objects on the layer can be modified. You can still apply
object snaps to objects on a locked layer and perform other operations
that do not modify those objects.

■

Unlock: Objects on the layer can be modified.

646 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Viewport In the current layout viewport, controls the VP Freeze setting of
the layers in the selected layer filter. This option is not available for model
space viewports.
■

Freeze: Sets VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport, objects
on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects
when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer.

■

Thaw: Clears VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport,
objects on the layer are displayed and plotted and hide other objects when
you use HIDE. This option does not thaw layers that are set to Off or Frozen
in the drawing.

Isolate Group Turns off all layers not in the selected filter. The layers that are
visible are the layers in the filter.
■

All Viewports: In all viewports in a layout, sets VP Freeze for all layers that
are not in the selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers that are
not in the selected filter.

■

Active Viewport Only: In the current layout viewport, sets VP Freeze for all
layers that are not in the selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers
that are not in the selected filter.

New Properties Filter Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where
you can create a new layer filter based on layer names and settings; for example,
on or off, color, or linetype.
New Group Filter Creates a new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1
and adds it to the tree view. Enter a new name. Select the All filter or any
other layer filter in the tree view to display layers in the list view, and then
drag layers from the list view into the new layer group filter in the tree view.
Convert to Group Filter Converts the selected layer property filter to a layer
group filter. Changing the properties of the layers in a layer group filter has
no effect on the filter.
Rename Renames the selected filter. Enter a new name.
Delete Deletes the selected layer filter. You cannot delete the All, All Used
Layers, or Xref filters. This option deletes the layer filter but not the layers in
the filter.
Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you can
modify the definition of the selected layer property filter. This option is
available only when a layer property filter is selected.

Layer Properties Manager | 647

Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box so that
you can select objects in the drawing. This option is available only when a
layer group filter is selected.
■

Add: Adds the layers of the selected objects to the layer group filter that is
selected in the tree view.

■

Replace: Replaces the layers of the selected layer group filter with the layers
of the objects that are selected in the drawing.

List View
Displays layers and layer filters and their properties and descriptions.
If a layer filter is selected in the tree view, the list view displays only the layers
in that layer filter. The All filter in the tree view displays all layers and layer
filters in the drawing. When a layer property filter is selected and there are
no layers that fit its definition, the list view is empty. To modify a property
of a selected layer or of all layers in a selected filter, click the icon for that
property. When a mixed icon or “Varies” is displayed for a layer filter, the
property is not the same for all layers in the filter.
Status Indicates the type of item: layer filter, layer in use, empty layer, or
current layer.
Name Displays the name of the layer or filter. Press F2 to enter a new name.
On Turns the selected layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible and
available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted, even
if Plot is on.
Freeze Freezes the selected layers in all viewports, including the Model tab.
You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other operations;
improve object selection performance; and reduce regeneration time for
complex drawings.
Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, or regenerated.
Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch
visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off setting to avoid regenerating the
drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout viewport,
or in new layout viewports as they are created.
Lock Locks and unlocks the selected layers. Objects on a locked layer cannot
be modified.
Color Changes the color associated with the selected layers. Clicking the color
name displays the Select Color dialog box.

648 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking
the linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers.
Clicking the lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box.
Transparency Controls the visibility of all objects on the selected layer. When
transparency is applied to individual objects, the objects’ transparency property
overrides the transparency setting of the layer. Clicking the Trasparency value
displays the Layer Transparency dialog box on page 658.
Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected layers. If you
are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system
variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer.
Clicking the plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box.
Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you turn off plotting
for a layer, the objects on that layer are still displayed. Layers that are off or
frozen are not plotted, regardless of the Plot setting.
VP Freeze (available only from a layout tab) Freezes selected layers in the
current layout viewport. You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport
without affecting layer visibility in other viewports.
VP Freeze is an override to the Thaw setting in the drawing. That is, you can
freeze a layer in the current viewport if it's thawed in the drawing, but you
can't thaw a layer in the current viewport if it's frozen or off in the drawing.
A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing.
New VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. For example,
freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of
dimensions on that layer in any newly created layout viewports but does not
affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports. If you later create a
viewport that requires dimensions, you can override the default setting by
changing the current viewport setting.
VP Color (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the color
associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport.
VP Linetype (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the
linetype associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport.
VP Lineweight (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the
lineweight associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport.
VP Transparency (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for
transparency associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport.

Layer Properties Manager | 649

VP Plot Style (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the plot
style associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. Override
settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted when the visual style in the
drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you are working with
color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1),
you cannot set a plot style override.
Description (Optional) Describes the layer or the layer filter.

List View Shortcut Menu
Provides options for modifying the list and modifying selected layers and layer
filters.

Column Label Shortcut Menu
Column Names Lists all columns by name. Columns that are checked indicate
they are displayed. Hidden column names are not checked. VP Freeze, VP
Color, VP Linetype, VP Lineweight, and VP Plot Style are available only when
a layout viewport is active.
Customize Displays the Customize Layer Columns dialog box on page 661,
where you can specify which columns are hidden or displayed.
Maximize All Columns Maximizes all columns to the width of the column
headers and the data content. This option is available on the shortcut menu
that is displayed when you right-click a column heading.
Maximize Column Changes the width of the column to maximize display
of the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is
displayed when you right-click a column heading.
Optimize all columns Changes the width of all columns to maximize display
of the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is
displayed when you right-click a column heading.
Optimize column Changes the width of a column to maximize display of
the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is
displayed when you right-click a column heading.
Freeze column (or Unfreeze column) Freezes (or unfreezes) the column and
any columns to the left. This option is available on the shortcut menu when
you right-click a column heading.
Restore All Columns to Defaults Restores all columns to their default display
and width settings. This option is available on the shortcut menu when you
right-click a column heading.

650 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Layer Shortcut Menu
Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view. Clear this option to hide the tree
view.
Show Filters in Layer List Displays filters at the top of the list view. The filters
are listed in alphabetical order. Clear the check mark to display only layers in
the list view.
Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER system
variable)
New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. You
can edit this layer name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties
of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so
on).
Rename Layer Renames the layer.
Delete Layer Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can
delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and
DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions),
the current layer, and xref-dependent layers.
NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Change Description Adds a description or changes the text in the description
for the selected layer or filter. The description for a filter is added to the filter
and to all layers in the filter.
Remove from Group Filter Removes the selected layers from the group layer
filter that is selected in the tree view.
Reconcile Layer Removes new layers from the Unreconciled New Layers filter.
Available only when one or more unreconciled layers is selected.
Remove Viewport Overrides For Removes a single override property or all
property overrides on selected layers (or all layers) for the current viewport or
all viewports. Different options display in a flyout menu depending on where
the cursor is located when the shortcut menu is accessed. To remove a single
property override, right-click the property override. This option is only
available on the layout tab.
New Layer Frozen in All Viewports Creates a new layer and freezes it in all
existing layout viewports and new viewports.
VP Freeze Layer in All Viewports Freezes the selected layer in all existing
layout viewports and new viewports.

Layer Properties Manager | 651

VP Thaw Layer in All Viewports Thaws the selected layer in all existing
layout viewports and new viewports.
Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view.
Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most
recently selected layer or filter.
Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the
current layer.
Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items
that are currently selected.
Invert Layer Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the
selected layer property filter.
Layer Filters Displays a list of layer filters, including All and All Used Layers.
Click a filter to apply it to the list view.
Save Layer States Displays the dialog box on page 671, in which you save the
layer state and layer property settings of all layers in a drawing.
Restore Layer State Displays the Layer States Manager on page 668, in which
you can select a named layer state to restore settings of all layers in the drawing.
Restores only those layer state and property settings that were selected when
the named layer state was saved.

Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Filters layers based on criteria you select.

Summary
When a layer filter is selected in the tree view of the Layer Properties Manager,
layers that match the filter criteria are displayed in the list view.

652 | Chapter 12 L Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Filter Name
Provides a space to enter a name for the layer properties filter.

Show Example
Displays the examples of layer property filter definitions in “Layer Filter
Examples”.

Filter Definition
Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define
the filter. For example, you can define a filter that displays all layers that are
either red or blue and in use. To include more than one color, linetype, or
lineweight, duplicate the filter on the next line and select a different setting.
Status Click the In Use icon or the Not In Use icon.
Name Use wild-card characters to filter layer names. For example, enter *mech*
to include all layers with the letters mech in the name.
All the wild-card characters are listed in the table in Filter and Sort the List of
Layers in the User's Guide.
On Click the On or the Off icon.
Freeze Click the Freeze or the Thaw icon.
Lock Click the Lock or the Unlock icon.
Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box.
Transparency Click the field to display the Layer Transparency dialog box.
Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box.
Plot Click the Plot icon or the Do Not Plot icon.
VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon.
New VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon.
VP Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog box.
VP Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype dialog box.

Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box | 653

VP Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box.
VP Transparency Click the field to display the Layer Transparency dialog
box.
VP Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box.

Filter Preview
Displays the results of the filter as you define it. The filter preview shows which
layers will be displayed in the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager when
you select this filter.

Layer Filter Examples
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Each example shows a layer filter definition that is set up in the Layer Filter
Properties dialog box.

Example 1
The filter named “[ANNO]” displays layers that meet all of the following
criteria:
■

Are in use

■

Have a name that contains the letters anno

■

Are on

654 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Example 2
The filter named “RYW” displays layers that meet all of the following criteria:
■

Are on

■

Are frozen

■

Are red or yellow or white

Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box | 655

Select Linetype Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Loaded Linetypes
Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing.
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load
selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.

Lineweight Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

656 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Displays the lineweight values available.

Summary
You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot
Style Table Editor. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User's
Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweights to be applied. Available lineweights consist
of fixed values that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a lineweight
to apply it.
Original
Displays the previous lineweight. The default lineweight assigned when a layer
is created is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches or 0.25
mm). (LWDEFAULT system variable)
New
Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer.

Lineweight Dialog Box | 657

Layer Transparency Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Sets the transparency level for the selected layer(s) in the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager
Menu: Format ➤ Layer
Toolbar: Layer
Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)

Summary
Select or enter a transparency level to apply to selected layers in the current
drawing.

Layer Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use New Layer Notification

Displays new layer notification, isolate layer, and dialog settings.

658 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
Click on the Layer Properties Manager on page 643.
Controls when notification occurs for new layers and if layer filters are applied
to the Layers toolbar; also controls the background color of viewport overrides
in the Layer Properties Manager.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

New Layer Notification
Controls the evaluation and notification of new layers based on the
LAYEREVAL settings in the DWG file.

Layer Settings Dialog Box | 659

NOTE There should be no filter (Unreconciled Layer filter) displayed when
LAYEREVALCTL = 0. If one is currently displayed, it will be turned off. You can set
the unreconciled new layers filter active and select the layers in that filter. With
the unreconciled layer selected, you can right-click and click Reconcile Layer.

Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing
Checks for new layers that have been added to the drawing. (LAYEREVAL =
0)
Evaluate New Xref Layers Only
Checks for new layers that have been added to attached xrefs. (LAYEREVAL
= 1)
Evaluate All New Layers
Checks for new layers that have been added to the drawing, including new
layers added to attached xrefs. (LAYEREVAL = 2)

Notify when New Layers Are Present
Turns on new layer notification. (LAYERNOTIFY = 0)
Open
Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use
the OPEN command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 2)
Attach/Reload Xrefs
Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you are
attaching or reloading xrefs. (LAYERNOTIFY = 4)
Restore Layer State
Displays new layer notification when you are restoring layer states.
(LAYERNOTIFY = 8)
Save
Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use
the SAVE command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 16)
Insert
Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use
the INSERT command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 32)
Display Alert for Plot When New Layers are Present

660 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use
the PLOT command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 1)

Isolate Layer Settings
Setting for layers not isolated:
Lock and Fade
Selects Lock and Fade as isolation method.
Off
Sets non-selected layers to Off.
Off
Sets non-selected layers to Off (in paper space).
VP Freeze
Sets non-selected layers to Viewport Freeze (in paper space).

Dialog Settings
Apply Layer Filter to Layer Toolbar
Controls the display of layers in the list of layers on the Layers toolbar and
Layers panel on the ribbon by applying the current layer filter.
Indicate Layers in Use
Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use. In a
drawing with many layers, clear this option to improve performance.
Viewport Override Background Color Displays a list of colors and the Select
Color dialog box where you can select a background color for viewport
overrides.

Customize Layer Columns Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Controls the display and order of columns in the Layer Properties Manager.

Customize Layer Columns Dialog Box | 661

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Check the Columns you want to Display
Lists all columns that display depending on whether the Layer Properties
Manager was accessed from Model space or a layout tab. Checked columns
are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
Move Up
Moves the checked layer to the left in the Layer Properties Manager.
Move Down
Moves the checked layer to the right in the Layer Properties Manager.
Select All
Checks all columns in the list.
Clear All
Unchecks all columns in the list.

662 | Chapter 12 L Commands

-LAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Manages layers and layer properties.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current layer: <"current">
Enter an option
[?/Make/Set/New/Rename/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/TRansparency on
page
664/MATerial/Plot/PStyle/Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte/Description/rEconcile]:
NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.

?—List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states,
color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally
dependent layers.

Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current
layer.
If no layer exists for the name you enter, a new layer with that name is created.
The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by default: color
number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of DEFAULT.
If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on.

Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already
exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on and made current. A
frozen layer cannot be made current.

New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated
by commas.

-LAYER | 663

Rename
Renames an existing layer.

On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.

Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.

Color
Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter a color name or a number
from 1 through 255.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three
integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book, guide, or set to use for
the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed,
such as "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43".
The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To
assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-).

Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
If you enter a valid lineweight, the current lineweight is set to the new value.
If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the
nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to plot an object with a
custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the
Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level associated with a layer. Enter a value from 0
to 90.
After specifying a transparency value, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter name list of layer(s) for transparency specified value% <0>: Enter the names
of the layers to which to apply this transparency level, or press Enter to apply it to the
current layer only

Material
Attaches a material to a layer. The material must be available in the drawing
before it can be assigned to a layer.

664 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is
currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.

Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are
using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY
system variable is set to 1). See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in
the User's Guide.
If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is
displayed:
Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current : Enter the names of the
layers to use this plot style, or press Enter to apply the style to the current layer only

Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration
and plotting.

Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and
plotting.

Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.

Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.

State
Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing.
?—List Named Layer States Lists the named layer state (LAS) files in the
support path for the drawing.
Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under
a specified layer state name. When saving a layer state, you specify which
layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored.
Restore Restores the state and property settings of all layers to previously
saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that were
selected when the layer state was saved.
Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. When the
layer state is restored, the specified settings are used.
Name Changes the name of a saved layer state.
Delete Removes a saved layer state.

-LAYER | 665

Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file, or layers states from
a file (DWG, DWS, DWT) into the current drawing. Additional layers may be
created as a result of importing a layer state file.
Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file.

Description
Sets the description property value of the existing layer.
A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with
an existing description.

Reconcile
Sets the unreconciled property of an unreconciled layer.
? - Name List of Layers Displays a list of all unreconciled layers.

LAYERCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layers

Closes the Layer Properties Manager.

Summary
Closes the Layer Properties Manager if it is open.

LAYERP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.

666 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Previous
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous

Summary
When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using either
the Layer control, Layer Properties Manager, or -LAYER command. Every
change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone by Layer
Previous.

LAYERPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.

Summary
When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When
Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.

LAYERSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layer States

LAYERPMODE | 667

Saves, restores, and manages named layer states.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage
Layer States
Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager
Toolbar: Layers

Summary
The Layer States Manager on page 668 is displayed.
Saves the layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state. Named layer states
can then be restored, edited, imported, and exported for use in other drawings.

Layer States Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layer States

Create or edit layer states.

668 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
Displays a list of saved layer states in the drawing. You can create, rename,
edit, and delete layer states.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Layer States
Lists the named layer states that have been saved in the drawing, the space
in which they were saved (model space, layout, or xref), whether the layer list
is the same as in the drawing, and an optional description.
Don’t List Layer States in Xrefs
Controls whether layer states in xrefs are displayed.
New
Displays the New Layer State to Save dialog box on page 671, where you can
provide a name and a description for the new named layer state.
Save
Saves the selected named layer state.
Edit

Layer States Manager | 669

Displays the Edit Layer State dialog box on page 672, where you can modify a
selected named layer state.
Rename
Allows in-place editing of the layer state name.
Delete
Removes the selected named layer state.
Import
Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can load a previously
exported layer state (LAS) file into the current drawing. Layer states in files
(DWG, DWS, or DWT) can be imported. Additional layers may be created as
a result of importing a layer state file. When a DWG, DWS, or DWT file is
selected, the Select Layer States dialog box on page 674 is displayed where you
can select layer states to import.
Export
Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can save the selected
named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file.
Restore
Restores state and property settings of all layers in a drawing to their previously
saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that you
specify with the check boxes.
Close
Closes the Layer States Manager and saves changes.

Restore Options
Turn Off Layers Not Found in Layer State
When a layer state is restored, turns off new layers for which settings were
not saved so that the drawing looks the same way it did when the named layer
state was saved.
Apply Properties as Viewport Overrides
Applies layer property overrides to the current viewport. This option is available
when the Layer States Manager is accessed when a layout viewport is active.

670 | Chapter 12 L Commands

More Options
Controls the display of additional options in the Layer States Manager dialog
box.

Layer Properties to Restore
Restores the selected layer settings and properties to their previously saved
state.
The Visibility in Current Viewport option is available only for layout viewports,
while the On/Off and Frozen/Thawed options are available only for Model
space viewports.
Select All
Selects all the settings.
Clear All
Removes selection from all the settings.
See also:
■

Layer Properties Manager on page 643

New Layer State to Save Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Layer States

Specifies a name and a description for the layer state defined in the Layer
States Manager.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Layer State Name
Specifies a name for the new layer state to be saved.
Description

New Layer State to Save Dialog Box | 671

(Optional) Provides a description of the layer state that is displayed in the
Layer States Manager.

Edit Layer State Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States

Summary
Modifies the selected layer state. Displays all the layers and their properties
that are saved in the selected layer state except for viewport override properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Layer List Displays a list of layers in the selected layer state and their
properties.
Delete Removes the selected layers from the layer state.
Add

672 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Displays the Select Layers to Add to Layer States dialog box on page 673, in
which you can add layers from the current drawing that are not defined in
the layer state.

Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States

Summary
Displays layers by name and includes descriptions that are not defined in the
selected named layer state.
Multiple layers can be selected. Clicking OK displays the selected layers in the
Edit Layer State dialog box on page 672.

List of Option
The following option is available in this dialog box.
Layer List
Displays layers by name and description.

Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box | 673

Select Layer States Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import and Export Layer States

Displays a list of layer states to be imported from a drawing file into the current
drawing.

List of Option
The following option is available in this dialog box.
Check Layer States to Import
Displays a list of layer states, the space (model tab or layout tab) in which the
layer state was saved, and a description.
The layer state names in the selected file (DWG, DWS, DWT) are compared
to the layer state names in the current drawing. Duplicate layer state names
are not checked by default. When a duplicate layer state name is checked, a
prompt displays if you want to overwrite the existing layer state.

674 | Chapter 12 L Commands

NOTE If the layer state to be imported contains linetypes or plot styles that do
not exist in the current drawing, they are imported from the DWG, DWS or DWT
file.

LAYFRZ
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Freezes the layer of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Freeze
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Freeze
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
Objects on frozen layers are invisible. In large drawings, freezing unneeded
layers speeds up operations involving display and regeneration. In a layout,
you can freeze layers in individual layout viewports.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current
Select an object on a layer to be frozen on page 675 or [Settings/Undo]: Select
an object or enter s or u
Layer  has been frozen.

Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen
Specifies the layer to be frozen.
Layer “” has been frozen.

LAYFRZ | 675

Settings
Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose
persists from session to session.
Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]:
Viewports Displays settings for viewports.
In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] : Enter f to freeze objects
in all viewports or v to freeze an object in the current viewport only
Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions.
■

Block. If a selected object is nested in a block, freezes the layer of that block.
If a selected object is nested in an xref, freezes the layer of the object.

■

Entity. Freezes the layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an
xref or a block.

■

None. If a block or an xref is selected, freezes the layer containing that
block or xref.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.

LAYISO
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Isolate
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate
Toolbar: Layers II

676 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen
in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting.
The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current setting: 
Select objects on the layer(s) to be isolated or [Settings]: Select objects or enter
s

Select Objects on the Layer(s) to be Isolated
After selecting one or more objects, all layers except the layers of the selected
objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked,
depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked
are termed isolated.
NOTE Locked layers are faded by default. You can specify the percent of the fading
from the Lock option in this command. You can later change the value with the
LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.
If you make changes to layers within a session and you want to restore the
layers to the state they were in immediately before you entered the LAYISO
command, use the LAYUNISO command.

Settings
Controls whether layers are turned off, frozen in the current layout viewports,
or locked.
Off Turns off or freezes all layers except the layers of the selected objects.
Vpfreeze In a layout, freezes all but the selected layers in the current layout
viewport only. Other layout viewports in the drawing are unchanged.
If not in a layout, all other layers are turned off instead.
Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports.

Lock and Fade
Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for
locked layers.

LAYISO | 677

LAYLCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Prevent Objects from Being Selected

Locks the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Lock
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being
accidentally modified. You can also fade the objects on a locked layer using
the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.

LAYMCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer.

678 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Match
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
If you enter -laymch at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page
680.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer
Select object on destination layer on page 679 or [Name on page 679]: Select an
object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box
Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer.
Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box on page 679.
If you create an object on the wrong layer, you can change its layer to the one
you want using LAYMCH.

Change to Layer Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Displays a list of layers to choose as the destination layer. You can also create
a new destination layer.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Change to Layer Dialog Box | 679

Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name
by entering a name.
Destination Layer list Displays a list of layers in the drawing.

-LAYMCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to be changed:
Select objects: Select an object to change its layer
After you select the object(s) to change, the following prompt is displayed:
Select object on destination layer on page 680 or [Name on page 680]: Select an
object or enter n to enter a layer name
Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer.
Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box on page 679.
If you create an object on the wrong layer, you can change its layer to the one
you want using LAYMCH.

LAYMCUR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Sets the current layer to that of a selected object.

680 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current
Toolbar: Layers

Summary
You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is
a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layer Properties
Manager.

LAYMRG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from
the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Merge
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge

LAYMRG | 681

Summary
You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them. Objects
on merged layers are moved to the target layer, and the original layers are
purged from the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object on layer to merge on page 682or [Name on page 682]: Select an
object or enter n to select a layer in the Merge Layers dialog box
After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed:
Select object on target layer on page 682or [Name on page 682]: Select an object
or enter n to select a layer in the Merge to Layer dialog box
The layer you selected to merge into the target layer is deleted.
If you enter -laymrg at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page
683.
Select Object on Layer to Merge Select an object on the layer you want to
merge.
Name Displays the Merge Layers dialog box on page 682.
Select Object on Target Layer Select an object on the destination layer.
Name Displays the Merge to Layer dialog box on page 683.

Merge Layers Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

List of Option
The following prompt is displayed in this dialog box.
Merge Layer list Displays a list of layers to merge.

682 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Merge to Layer Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Displays a list of layers onto which the selected layers or objects can be merged.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Target Layer Displays the first layer in an alphabetical list of the layers in the
current drawing.
Target Layer list Displays an alphabetical list of the layers onto which you
can merge the selected layers or objects.

-LAYMRG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Summary
The layer you selected to merge into the target layer is deleted.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object on layer to merge on page 684or [Name on page 684]: Select an
object or enter n to select a layer from a list of layers
After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed:
Select object on target layer on page 684or [Name on page 684]: Select an object
or enter n to select a target layer from a list of layers

Merge to Layer Dialog Box | 683

Select Object on Layer to Merge
Select an object on the destination layer.

Name
Displays a list of layers, where you can select layers to merge.

Select Object on Target Layer
Select an object on the target layer.

Name
Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer.

LAYOFF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Turns off the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Off
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Off
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible. This
command is useful if you need an unobstructed view when working in a
drawing or if you don’t want to plot details such as reference lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current

684 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Select an object on the layer to be turned off or [Settings/Undo]: Select an
object, enter s, or enter u

Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off
Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off.

Settings
Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you
choose persists from session to session.
Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types.
Returns the following prompt:
■

Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport.

■

Off: In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports.

Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can
freeze layers of selected objects.
■

Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested
in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off. If a selected object
is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is turned off.

■

Entity: Turns off layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref
or a block.

■

None: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is
selected, the layer containing that block or xref is turned off.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.

LAYON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Turns on all layers in the drawing.

LAYON | 685

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ On
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Turn All Layers On
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
All layers that were previously turned off are turned back on. Objects created
on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also frozen.

LAYOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space)

Creates and modifies drawing layouts.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ New Layout
Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Layout from Template
Toolbar: Layouts

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set/?] :

686 | Chapter 12 L Commands

NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name.
Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes
the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses.
The new tab is inserted before the copied layout tab.
Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default.
The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the Model
tab, you must select all geometry and use the ERASE command.
New Creates a new layout tab. Up to 255 layouts can be created in a single
drawing.
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long
and are not case sensitive. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the
tab.
Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in a template
(DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA
system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed for
selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select a file, the Insert Layouts
dialog box is displayed, which lists the layouts saved in the selected file. After
you select a layout, the layout and all objects from the specified template or
drawing file are inserted into the current drawing.
Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the default for
the layout to rename.
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long
and are not case sensitive.
NOTE Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab.
Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template(DWT) file without saving any
unreferenced symbol table and block definition information. You can then
use the template to create new layouts in your drawings without having to
eliminate unnecessary information. See “Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings”
in the User's Guide.
The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template.
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box
is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the
layout.
The default layout template directory is specified in the Options dialog box.
Set Makes a layout current.

LAYOUT | 687

?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.

LAYOUTWIZARD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Page Setups

Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Create Layout Wizard

Summary
The Layout wizard is displayed.

Layout Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Page Setups

Summary
The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process
of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from scratch
or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout.
Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select
a paper size from those available. You can select a predefined title block to
apply to your new layout. The Preview area displays a preview image of the
title block you select.

688 | Chapter 12 L Commands

When you've finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you
can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within
the new layout.

LAYTHW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Thaws all layers in the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Thaw
Menu: Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Thaw All Layers

Summary
All layers that were previously frozen are unfrozen. Objects created on those
layers become visible, unless the layers are also turned off or have been frozen
in individual layout viewports. Layers that are frozen in individual layout
viewports must be thawed layer by layer.
NOTE LAYTHW does not thaw layers in a viewport. Use the VPLAYER on page 1313
command to thaw layers in a viewport.

LAYTHW | 689

LAYULK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Prevent Objects from Being Selected

Unlocks the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unlock
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unlock
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is
displayed.
You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without
specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected
and modified.

LAYUNISO
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command.

690 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unisolate
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes
made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained.
LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the
LAYISO command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used are retained
when you enter the LAYUNISO command. If LAYISO was not used, LAYUNISO
does not restore any layers.

LAYVPI
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Freezes selected layers in all layout viewports except the current viewport.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ VP Freeze in All Viewports Except
Current
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ VP Freeze in All Viewports Except Current

LAYVPI | 691

Summary
Isolates the layer of a selected object in the current viewport by freezing the
layer in all but the current viewport. You can choose to isolate all layouts or
only the current layout.
This command automates the process of using VP Freeze in the Layer Properties
Manager. You select an object on each layer to be frozen in other layout
viewports.
NOTE LAYVPI works only when TILEMODE is set to 0 and when two or more paper
space viewports are defined.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Layouts= , Block nesting level=
Select objects on the layer to be isolated in viewport on page 692 or
[Settings/“Undo”]: Select objects or enter an option

Select Objects on the Layer to be Isolated in Viewport
Selects an object whose layer you want to isolate in a viewport.

Settings
Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you
choose persists from session to session.
Layouts Displays layout options for isolating layers.
■

All Layouts: In all layouts, isolates layers of selected objects in all but the
current viewport

■

Current Layout: In the current layout, isolates layers of selected objects in
all but the current viewport. This option persists from session to session.

Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can
freeze layers of selected objects.
■

Block: Isolates the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested
in a block, the layer containing that block is isolated. If a selected object
is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is isolated.

■

Entity: Isolates layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref
or a block.

■

None: Isolates the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is selected,
the layer containing that block or xref is isolated.

692 | Chapter 12 L Commands

LAYWALK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Displays objects on selected layers and hides objects on all other layers.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Walk
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Walk
Toolbar: Layers II

Summary
The LayerWalk dialog box is displayed.
Displays a dialog box with a list of all layers in the drawing. For drawings with
a large number of layers, you can filter the list of layers that are displayed in
the dialog box.Use this command to review the objects on each layer and to
purge unreferenced layers.
By default, the effect is temporary and layers are restored when you close the
dialog box.

LayerWalk Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYWALK | 693

Dynamically displays objects on layers that you select in the Layer list.

Summary
The number of layers in the drawing are displayed in the dialog box title. You
can change the current layer state when you exit, save layer states, and purge
layers that are not referenced.
You can use the Layer Walk dialog box in a paper space viewport to select
layers to turn on and thaw in the layer table and the current viewport. Any
layer that is not selected in the Layer list is frozen in the current viewport.
You can change the display of one viewport without altering the display of
another viewport.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Filter
Turns an active filter on and off. When this check box is selected, the list
displays only those layers that match the active filter. When this check box
is cleared, the full list of layers is displayed. (This option is available only when
there is an active filter.) To turn on an active filter, in the filter list, either
enter a wildcard and press Enter, or select a saved filter.

Layer List
If a filter is active, displays a list of layers defined in that filter. If no filter is
active, displays a list of layers in the drawing. Double-click a layer to set it to
Always Show (an asterisk to the left of the layer is displayed). Right-click in
the layer list to display more options.
In the layer list, you can
■

Click a layer name to display the contents of a layer.

■

Double-click a layer name to turn the Always Show option on or off.

■

Press Ctrl and click layers to select multiple layers.

■

Press Shift and click to select layers in a sequence.

■

Press either Ctrl or Shift and double-click in the layer list to turn the Always
Show option on or off.

■

Click and drag in the layer list to select multiple layers.
For more options in the layer list, right-click to access the Layer List shortcut
menu.

694 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Layer List Shortcut Menu Options
Displays a list of options for the layers selected in the Layer list.
Hold Selection Turns on the Always Show option for selected layers. An
asterisk (*) is displayed to the left of each layer held.
Release Selection Turns off the Always Show option for selected layers.
Release All Turns off the Always Show option for all layers.
Select All Selects and displays all layers.
Clear All Clears all layers.
Invert Selection Clears current layers and selects and displays all other layers.
Select Unreferenced Selects all unreferenced layers. Use with the Purge button
to remove unused layers.
Save Layer State Saves the current selection of layers as a layer state that can
be used by the Layer States Manager.
Inspect Displays the number of layers in the drawing, the number of layers
selected, and the number of objects on the selected layers.
Copy as Filter Displays the name of the selected layer in the Filter text box.
Can be used to create wildcards.
Save Current Filter Saves the current filter so that it is available in the Filter
list for reuse.
Delete Current Filter Removes the current filter from the filter list.

Select Objects
Selects objects and their layers.

Filter List
Filters the layer list. Enter a wildcard and press Enter to display and highlight
only those layers whose names match the wildcard. Right-click to save and
delete filters. The filter list displays saved filters only.
For more information about wild-card characters, see the Wild-Card Characters
section of Filter and Sort the List of Layers.

Purge
When selected layers are not referenced, purges them from the drawing. For
a list of layers that can be purged, right-click anywhere in the Layer list and

LayerWalk Dialog Box | 695

click Select Unreferenced. In the Layer list, the unreferenced layers are
highlighted. You can purge those layers.

Restore on Exit
Returns layers to their previous state when you exit the dialog box. If the
check box is cleared, any changes you made are saved.

LEADER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Leaders

■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER
on page 742 command to create leader objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader start point:
Specify next point:
A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are
displayed.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] : Specify a point,
enter an option, or press Enter

Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
you for points and options.

Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be
single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric
tolerances, or a block.

696 | Chapter 12 L Commands

If you press Enter at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, the
following options are displayed:
Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances
using the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see TOLERANCE).
You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog
boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.

Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with
geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader
line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied
object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook
line depends on the object copied.
The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system
variable) determines where the text and multiline text objects are inserted.
Blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances are attached to the
end of the leader line.
Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. The prompts are the same
as for INSERT on page 620. The block reference is inserted at an offset from the
end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the
block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No hook line is
displayed.

None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line.
Mtext Creates text using the In-Place Text Editor when you specify an insertion
point and a second point for the text boundary.
Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes
in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about adding a prefix or suffix, see “Control
the Display of Dimension Units” in the User's Guide.

LEADER | 697

The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is
displayed. The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned
according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. The
text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from
Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style
dialog box. If the offset specified is negative, the multiline text is enclosed in
a box as a basic dimension.

Format
Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead.

Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the
control points, each of equal unit weight.
Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments.
Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line.
None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point.

Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is
displayed.

LENGTHEN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resize or Reshape Objects

698 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen
Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen

Summary
You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or
angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an
option

Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the
selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate
system (UCS).

Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle
of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value
trims it.

LENGTHEN | 699

Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.

Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.

Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length.

Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from
the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a
specified total angle.

Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint
that is closest to the selection point.
Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc.

700 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object
by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.

LIMITS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named
layout.

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits
Command entry: 'limits for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify lower left corneror [ON/OFF] : Specify a point, enter on or off,
or press Enter
Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits.

LIMITS | 701

On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter
points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that
you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits.
Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next
time you turn on limits checking.

LINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Lines

Creates straight line segments.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line
Menu: Draw ➤ Line
Toolbar: Draw

702 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment
is a line object that can be edited separately.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first point: Specify a point or press Enter to continue from the last drawn
line or arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn
line.

If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting
point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc.

Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment,
which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have
drawn a series of two or more segments.

LINE | 703

Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.

Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you
created them.

LINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Linetypes

Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype
Menu: Format ➤ Linetype

704 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use

Summary
The Linetype Manager is displayed.
If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Linetype Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Linetypes

Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter
linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are
referenced by objects.

Linetype Manager | 705

Invert Filter
Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. Linetypes
that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list.

Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load into
the drawing selected linetypes from the acadlt.lin file and add them to the
linetype list.

Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype
to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a
particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes
the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the
block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE system
variable stores the linetype name.

Delete
Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing. You can delete only unused
linetypes. The BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be
deleted.
NOTE Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a
shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype
definition remains stored in the acadlt.lin or acadltiso.lin file and can be reloaded.

Show Details or Hide Details
Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed.

Current Linetype
Displays the current linetype name.

List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype
Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype
list to display the shortcut menu.
Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it
and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed.
Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes.

706 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in
the Details area.

Details
Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings.
Name
Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited.
Description
Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited.
Use Paper Space Units for Scaling
Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when
working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE system variable)
Global Scale Factor
Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE system variable)
Current Object Scale
Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global
scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor. (CELTSCALE system variable)
ISO Pen Width
Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting
scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Linetypes

Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file.

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box | 707

Summary
The acadlt.lin file contains the standard linetypes.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
File Button
Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different
linetype (LIN) file.
File Name
Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another
LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File
dialog box.
Available Linetypes
Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes
on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.

-LINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Linetypes

708 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]:
?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in
the file are listed.
Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file.
The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box) is displayed. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added.
Descriptive Text Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long. The
description can be a comment or a series of underscores, dots, dashes, and
spaces to show a simple representation of the linetype pattern.
Linetype Pattern Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers separated
by commas. Enter positive values to specify lengths of dashes, and enter
negative values to specify lengths of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.

The “A” in the pattern definition prompt specifies the pattern alignment used
at the ends of individual lines, circles, and arcs. Only A-type alignment is
supported. With A-type alignment, lines and arcs are guaranteed to start and
end with a dash. The A is automatically included in the definition. If you use
a text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the beginning of the
definition.
After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it accessible.
Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The acadlt.lin file
contains the standard linetypes.
The Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is
stored.
Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn subsequently. You
can control the linetype of objects individually or by layer.
The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype. All new objects are drawn
with this linetype, regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you request
is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acadlt.lin file. If

-LINETYPE | 709

the linetype is neither loaded nor in acadlt.lin, the program displays a message
and returns you to the Command prompt.
Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects
inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn.
If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype
until they are grouped into a block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects
inherit the linetype of the block.

LIST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Displays property data for selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ List
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ List
Toolbar: Inquiry

Summary
You can use LIST to display and then copy the properties of selected objects
to a text file.
The text window displays the object type, object layer, and the X,Y,Z position
relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object
is in model space or paper space.
LIST also reports the following information:
■

Color, linetype, lineweight, and transparency information, if these
properties are not set to BYLAYER.

710 | Chapter 12 L Commands

■

The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero.

■

Elevation (Z coordinate information).

■

Extrusion direction (UCS coordinates), if the extrusion direction differs
from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS.

■

Additional information related to the specific object type. For example,
for dimensional constraint objects, LIST displays the constraint type
(annotation or dynamic), reference type (yes or no), name, expression,
and value.

LOGFILEOFF
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window

Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.

Summary
The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 841 command.
Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab on page 850 in
the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab on
page 842 to change the location of the log file.

LOGFILEON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window

LOGFILEOFF | 711

Writes the contents of the command history to a file.

Summary
The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the
program or use the LOGFILEOFF command.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 841 command.
Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab on page 850 in
the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab on
page 842 to change the location of the log file.

LTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control Linetype Scale

Sets the global linetype scale factor.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'ltscale for transparent use

Summary
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing.
Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated.

712 | Chapter 12 L Commands

LWEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight
Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight
Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and
choose Settings.
Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use

Summary
The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Lineweight Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display and
display scale of lineweights, and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers.

LWEIGHT | 713

Summary
For a table of valid lineweights, see “Overview of Lineweights” in the User's
Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of standard
settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value
is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01
inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight value
of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device
and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.

Current Lineweight
Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a
lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK.

Units for Listing
Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can
also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable.
Millimeters (mm)
Specifies lineweight values in millimeters.
Inches (in.)
Specifies lineweight values in inches.

714 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Display Lineweight
Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If this
option is selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space.
You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable.
Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more
than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if performance slows down when
working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This option does not affect
how objects are plotted.

Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight
is 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. (LWDEFAULT system variable)

Adjust Display Scale
Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. On the Model tab,
lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel
width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If you
are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display
scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects
the current display scale.
Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one
pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance
when working in the Model tab, set the lineweight display scale to the
minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.

-LWEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current lineweight: current

-LWEIGHT | 715

Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter
?
The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER,
BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches.
Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values
consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values
are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default. If
you enter a valid lineweight value, the current default lineweight is set to the
new value. If you enter any other value, the default is set to the nearest valid
value.
To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in the list of fixed
lineweight values, you can use plot styles to control plotted lineweights. See
“Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User's Guide. The DEFAULT
value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable and has an initial value of
0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest
lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at a value
of one pixel in model space.
?—List Lineweights Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current
lineweight units.
NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the
drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier
format does not display lineweights.

716 | Chapter 12 L Commands

M Commands

13

MANAGEUPLOADS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Manages the uploading of files stored on the AutoCAD WS server.

Access Methods

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Upload panel ➤ Manage Uploads
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Manage Uploads

Summary
The Manage Uploads dialog box on page 718 is displayed.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an
account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

717

Manage Uploads Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Manages the uploading of files stored on the AutoCAD WS server.

Summary
View the status of your current file uploads and control whether drawings are
automatically uploaded each time the local drawing is saved. Use the check
boxes to resume or stop the uploading process for a specific drawing. To remove
a file from the list, right-click the file and click Remove from This List.
NOTE Removing a file from the list does not remove the file from the server.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Resume All Uploads Uploads the latest version of all drawing files in the list
and enables automatic uploads.
Stop All Uploads Cancels any uploads that are in progress, and disables all
automatic uploads.

718 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MARKUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

View Markups

Opens the Markup Set Manager.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard

Summary
When submitting designs for review, you can publish a drawing as a DWF or
DWFx file. The reviewer can open the file in Autodesk Design Review, mark
it up, and then send the file back to you.
Opens the Markup Set Manager.

Markup Set Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

View Markups

Displays information about loaded markup sets and their status.

MARKUP | 719

Summary
You can show or hide markups and their originating drawing files in your
drawing area. You can change the status of individual markups and add notes
and comments to them.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Markup Set List Control
The Markup Set List control displays the name of the markup set, or, if no
markup sets are open, the Open option.
Names of Open Markup Sets Lists all open markup sets, if any. A check is
displayed next to the current markup set. The current markup set is the open
markup set that is displayed in the Markup Set Manager window.
Recent Displays a list of recently opened markup sets.
Open Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains
markups. When you click Open, the markups in the selected DWF or DWFx
file are loaded into the Markup Set Manager.
NOTE When opening a digitally signed DWFx file, a message box is displayed
that warns you about saving a new version of the file will invalidate the attached
digital signature.

Republish Markup DWF
Provides options for republishing the marked-up DWF or DWFx file. If any
®
sheets were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk Design Review,
those sheets will not be included in the republished DWF or DWFx file.
Republish All Sheets Republishes all sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx
file. Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), in which you can select the previously published DWF or DWFx to
overwrite it, or you can enter a new name for the DWF or DWFx file. When
you click Select, the previously published DWF file is overwritten or a new
DWF or DWFx file is created that contains any changes you made to the
drawing file geometry and the status of the markups.
Republish Markup Sheets Republishes only those sheets in the marked-up
DWF or DWFx file that have associated markups. Opens the Select DWF File
dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select the
previously published DWF or DWFx to overwrite it, or you can enter a new
name for the DWF or DWFx file. When you click Select, the previously
published DWF or DWFx file is overwritten or a new DWF or DWFx file is

720 | Chapter 13 M Commands

created that contains any changes you made to the drawing file geometry and
the status of the markups.

View Redline Geometry
Displays or hides redline markup geometry in the drawing area.

View DWG Geometry
Displays or hides the originating drawing file in the drawing area.

View DWF Geometry
Displays or hides the DWF or DWFx file geometry in the drawing area.

Markups
Displays loaded markup sets. Any sheets that were added to the DWF or DWFx
file in Autodesk Design Review are listed in italics. The icon associated with
each markup represents the status of the markup.
Markup Set Node Indicates the currently loaded markup set.
Drawing Sheet Node Indicates a drawing sheet that has one or more associated
markups.
 Indicates an individual markup that does not yet have an assigned
status. This is the default status for new markups.
Question Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of
Question. When you open and view a markup, you can change the status to
Question if you need additional information about the markup.
For Review Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of For
Review. When you implement a markup, you can change the status to For
Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the changes to the
drawing sheet and the status of the markup.
Done Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of Done.
When a markup has been implemented and reviewed, you can change the
status to Done.

Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Set Node)
Right-clicking a markup set node in the Markups area displays the following
shortcut menu options.
Open Markup DWF Opens the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that
contains markups. When you click Open, the markups in the selected DWF
or DWFx file are loaded into the Markup Set Manager.

Markup Set Manager | 721

NOTE When opening a digitally signed DWFx file, a message box is displayed
that warns you about saving a new version of the file will invalidate the attached
digital signature.
Close Markup DWF Closes the selected marked-up DWF or DWFx and removes
it from the Markup Set Manager.
Save Markup History Changes Saves changes to the status of markups and
added comments to the marked-up DWF or DWFx file.
NOTE Saving a DWFx file that contains a digital signature will invalidate the
attached digital signature.

Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Drawing Sheet Node)
Right-clicking a drawing sheet node in the Markups area displays the following
shortcut menu options.
Open Sheet Opens the originating drawing file for that drawing sheet and
makes that layout the active layout in the drawing area.
Republish All Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog
box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a
DWF or DWFx file.
Republish Markup Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this
dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create
a DWF or DWFx file.
The DWF or DWFx file created contains changes you make to the drawing file
geometry and the status of the markups.

Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Node)
Right-clicking an individual markup node in the Markups area displays the
following shortcut menu options.
Open Markup Opens the originating drawing file for the drawing sheet
associated with the selected markup and makes that layout the active layout
in the drawing area. The associated markup DWF or DWFx file is also opened
as a read-only reference in the drawing area.
Markup Status Displays a shortcut menu that provides a list of status options.
A check mark precedes the currently assigned status for the selected markup.
■

: Indicates that the markup does not yet have an assigned status.
This is the default status for new markups.

■

Question: After you open and view a markup, you can change its status to
Question if you need additional information about the markup.

722 | Chapter 13 M Commands

■

For Review: After you have implemented a markup, you can change the
status to For Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the
changes to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup.

■

Done: After a markup has been implemented and reviewed, you can change
its status to Done.

Restore Initial Markup View If you panned or zoomed the selected markup,
or rotated the view in model space, restores the original view of the selected
markup.
Republish All Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog
box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a
DWF or DWFx file.
Republish Markup Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this
dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create
a DWF or DWFx file.
The DWF or DWFx file created contains changes you make to the drawing file
geometry and the status of the markups.

Show All Sheets/Hide Non-Markup Sheets
Displays all sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx file in the tree view of the
Markup Set Manager, or hides the sheets that do not have associated markups.

Markup Details
Provides information about the currently selected node (markup set, drawing
sheet, or individual markup) in the Markups area.
When an individual markup is selected in the Markups area, Markup Details
displays the status of the markup.
The Markup History area (in the lower portion of the Markup Details area)
provides a noneditable history log of the selected markup in reverse
chronological order. In the Notes area, just below the Markup History area,
you can add notes and comments that are automatically saved with the
markup.
Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup Preview area and
displays a thumbnail image of the selected drawing sheet or markup. You can
click the Details button to change the area back to the Markup Details area.
Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup Details area, which
provides information about the selected node in the Markups area. You can
click the Preview button to change the area back to the Markup Preview area.

Markup Set Manager | 723

Markup Preview
Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing sheet or
markup.
Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup Details area, which
provides information about the selected node in the Markups area. You can
click the Preview button to change the area back to the Markup Preview area.
Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup Preview area and
displays a thumbnail image of the selected drawing sheet or markup. You can
click the Details button to change the area back to the Markup Details area.

Markup Set Manager Settings
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the
title bar.
Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the
dialog box. The dialog box does not dock.
Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or
a corner to make the smaller or larger.
Close Closes the Markup Set Manager.
Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor Markup Set Manager.
If this option is selected, a window can be docked when you drag it over a
docking area at the side of a drawing. A docked window adheres to the side
of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting
this option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available.
Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the Markup Set Manager to an anchor
tab base at the right or left side of the drawing area. An anchored palette
cannot be set to stay open.
Auto-hide Causes a floating palette to roll open and closed as the cursor
moves across it.
Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box.

724 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MARKUPCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Respond to Markups

Closes the Markup Set Manager.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard

Summary
The Markup Set Manager window closes.

MASSPROP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Calculates the mass properties of regions or AutoCAD 3D solids.

Access Methods

Button

MARKUPCLOSE | 725

Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties
Toolbar: Inquiry

Summary
Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region
or mass properties computed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first
selected region are accepted.
MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if
you want to write the mass properties to a text file (.mpr).
The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected objects
are regions, and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the XY plane
of the current user coordinate system (UCS), or 3D solids. For a list of the
parameters that control the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on the
Current UCS.

Regions
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions.
Mass properties for all regions
Mass property Description
Area

The surface area of AutoCAD 3D solids or the enclosed area of regions.

Perimeter

The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The
perimeter of a 3D solid is not calculated.

Bounding box

The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that
are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system,
the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a
rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not coplanar
with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is defined
by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region.

726 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Mass properties for all regions
Mass property Description
Centroid

A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this
coordinate is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the
XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.

If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the additional
properties shown in the following table are displayed.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions
Mass property Description
Moments of inertia

A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid
pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending
or twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is
area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2
The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power.

Products of inertia

Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The
formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

Radii of gyration

Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a 3D solid. The
formula for the radii of gyration is
gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Principal moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid

Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that
have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through
a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is
lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and
that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the
results is somewhere between the high and low values.

MASSPROP | 727

3D Solids
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids.
Mass properties for solids
Mass property Description
Mass

The measure of inertia of a body. Because a density of one is used,
mass and volume have the same value.

Volume

The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses.

Bounding box

The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid.

Centroid

A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. A solid of uniform
density is assumed.

Moments of inertia

The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the
force required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel
rotating about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is
mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2
Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared.

Products of inertia

Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The
formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

Radii of gyration

Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is
gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Principal moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid

Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that
have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through
a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is
lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and
that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the
results is somewhere between the high and low values.

728 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Calculations Based on the Current UCS
The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which
mass properties are calculated.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units
Parameter

Used to calculate

DENSITY

Mass of solids

LENGTH

Volume of solids

LENGTH*LENGTH

Area of regions and surface area of solids

LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH

Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and
perimeter

DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH

Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and
principal moments

MATCHCELL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: With a table selected and a cell selected, right-click and
click Match Cell.

Summary
All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except
for the cell type: text or block.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

MATCHCELL | 729

Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want to copy
Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the source cell,
and right-click or press Enter or Esc to exit

MATCHPROP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Copy Properties Between Objects

Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Match Properties
Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties
Toolbar: Standard
Command entry: painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)

Summary
The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype,
linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified
properties.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to
copy properties to
Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the
properties of the source object.

730 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box, in which you can control
which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default, all
object properties are selected for copying.

Property Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Copy Properties Between Objects

Specifies the properties that are copied from the select source object to the
destination objects.

Summary
Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source
object to the destination objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Basic Properties
Color

Property Settings Dialog Box | 731

Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Layer
Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Linetype
Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and
viewports.
Linetype Scale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text,
points, and viewports.
Lineweight
Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Transparency
Changes the transparency of the of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available for all objects.
Thickness
Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available only for arcs, attributes, circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions,
and text.
Plot Style
Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object.
If you are working in color-dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set
to 1), this option is unavailable. Available for all objects, except those with
the Jitter edge modifier applied.

Special Properties
Dimension
In addition to basic object properties, changes the dimension style and
properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only
for dimension, leader, and tolerance objects.
Polyline

732 | Chapter 13 M Commands

In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype
generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source
polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are
not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable
width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline.
Text
In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and properties of
the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line
and multiline text objects.
Viewport
In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the
destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off,
display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS
icon visibility and location.
The settings for clipping and the freeze/thaw state of the layers are not
transferred to the destination object.
Hatch
In addition to basic object properties, changes the hatch properties (including
its properties) of the destination object to that of the source object. To match
the hatch origin, use Inherit Properties in HATCH or HATCHEDIT. Available
only for hatch objects.
Table
In addition to basic object properties, changes the table style of the destination
object to that of the source object. Available only for table objects.
Multileader
In addition to basic object properties, changes the multileader style and
properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only
for multileader objects.

Property Settings Dialog Box | 733

MEASURE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Measured Intervals on Objects

Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or
perimeter of an object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Measure
Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure

Summary
The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and
their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS.
Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.

The points or blocks are placed in the Previous selection set, so you can select
them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. You can use the
Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. You can
then remove the points by entering erase previous.

734 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object to measure:
Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b
Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the
selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select
the object.
Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one
drawn).
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current
snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of
the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference.

The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a
polyline, with the PDMODE on page 1606 system variable set to 35.

Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object.
Align Block With Object
■

Yes. The block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal
lines are aligned with, and drawn tangent to, the object being measured.

■

No. The block is always inserted with a 0 rotation angle.

MEASURE | 735

After you specify the segment length, the block is inserted at the specified
interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.

MEASUREGEOM
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance
Toolbar: Inquiry, Measurement Tools

Summary
The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as
the following commands:
■

AREA

■

DIST

■

MASSPROP

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Distance/Radius/Angle/ARea/Volume] : Specify
Distance, Radius, Angle, Area, or Volume

736 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Information displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip in the current
units format.

Distance
Measures the distance between specified points. The following display at the
Command prompt and in the tooltip:
■

The current UCS X axis

■

Distance in X direction (Delta X)

■

Distance in Y direction (Delta Y)

Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments
and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move
the cursor and displays in the tooltip.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines display.

Radius
Measures the radius and diameter of a specified arc or circle.

Angle
Measures the angle of a specified arc, circle, line, or vertex.
Arc Measures the angle of an arc.
Circle Measures a specified angle within a circle. The angle updates as you
move the cursor.
Line Measures the angle between two lines.
Vertex Measures the angle of a vertex.

Area
Measures the area and perimeter of an object or defined area.
NOTE MEASUREGEOM cannot calculate the area of a self-intersecting object.
Specify Corner Points Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified
points.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo, Options for Selecting Polylines display.
Add Area Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of area as you define
areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate the
■

Individual areas of defined areas and objects

■

Individual perimeters of defined areas and objects

MEASUREGEOM | 737

■

Total area of all defined areas and objects

■

Total perimeter of all defined areas and objects

Subtract Area Subtracts a specified area from the total area. The total area
and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip.

Volume
Measures the volume of an object or a defined area.
Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area.
You can select 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height
for that object.
If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three
points to define a polygon. All must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of
the UCS. If you do not close the polygon, an area will be calculated as if a line
existed between the first and last points entered.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines display.
Add Volume Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of volume as you
define areas.
Subtract Volume Turns on Subtract mode and subtracts a specified volume
from the total volume.

Options for Selecting Polylines
You can select polylines when using the Distance, Area, and Volume options.
Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the
previous segment of the polyline.
Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering
a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.
■

Endpoint of Arc on page 955

Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
■

Endpoint of Arc on page 955

■

Angle on page 955

738 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment
is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.
Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
■

Endpoint of Arc on page 955

Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment
to one of its edges.
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
■

Endpoint of Arc on page 955

■

Angle on page 955

Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.
■

Endpoint of Arc on page 955

Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the
width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the
center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or
when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the
previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is
drawn tangent to that arc segment.
Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.

MEASUREGEOM | 739

Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.

MESSAGES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Displays messages from your AutoCAD WS account.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Messages
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Messages

Summary
The AutoCAD WS Messages section is displayed, where you can view recent
activities, such as new file uploads, meeting transcripts, and product news
and announcements. You can also view the recent activities of other users
with whom you have shared files.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

740 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MIRROR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Mirror Objects

Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror
Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror
them across a specified line to create the other half.

NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not
changed. Set the MIRRTEXT on page 1581 system variable to 1 if you do want the
text to be reversed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish

MIRROR | 741

Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point
Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point

The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the
selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring
plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS)
containing the mirror line.
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press Enter
Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects.
No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects.

MLEADER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Creates a multileader object.

742 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader
Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader
Toolbar: Multileader

Summary
A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing,
a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block.
Multileaders can be created arrowhead first, leader landing first, or content
first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created
from that specified style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader arrowhead location on page 743 or [leader Landing first/Content
first/Options] :

Leader Arrowhead First
Specifies a location for the arrowhead of the multileader object.

Leader Landing First
Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object.

Content First
Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object.

Options
Specifies options for placing the multileader object.

MLEADER | 743

Leader Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line.
■

Straight.

■

Spline.

■

None.

Leader Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line
■

Yes.

■

No.

If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the
multileader object.
Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be used for the
multileader.
■

Block on page 744

■

Mtext on page 744

■

None on page 744

Block Specifies a block within your drawing to associate with the new
multileader.
■

Enter block name.

Mtext Specifies that multiline text is included with the multileader.
■

Enter the multiline text.

None Specifies no content type.
Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line.
■

Enter the maximum points for leader line.

■

None.

First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line.
■

Enter first angle constraint.

■

None.

744 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line.
■

Enter second angle constraint.

■

None.

MLEADERALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Align
Toolbar: Multileader

Summary
After multileaders have been selected, specify the multileader to which all
others are aligned.

MLEADERALIGN | 745

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select multileader to align to or [Options on page 746]:

Options
Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders.
Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points.
Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader
segments in the selected multileaders are parallel.
Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of
selected multileaders.
Use Current Spacing Uses the current spacing between multileader content.

MLEADERCOLLECT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and
displays the result with a single leader.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Collect
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Collect
Toolbar: Multileader

Summary
After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement.
For example:

746 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify collected multileader location on page 747 or [Vertical on page
747/Horizontal on page 747/Wrap on page 747]
Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the
multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection.
Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns.
Horizontal Places the multileader collection in one or more rows.
Wrap Specifies a width for a wrapped multileader collection.
■

Specify wrap width.

■

Number. Specifies a maximum number of blocks per row in the multileader
collection.

MLEADEREDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object.

MLEADEREDIT | 747

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Add Leader
Toolbar: Multileader
Pointing device: Hover over Landing grip and choose Add Leader; hover
over leader endpoint grip and choose Remove Leader

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader arrowhead location on page 748 or [Remove Leader on page 748]
Add Leader
Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object. The new leader line is added
to the left or right of the selected multileader, depending on the location of
the cursor.

Remove Leader Removes a leader line from a selected multileader object.
For example:

748 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MLEADERSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Creates and modifies multileader styles.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤
Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style
Toolbar: Multileader, Styles

➤ Multileader Style

Summary
The Multileader Style Manager is displayed.

Multileader Style Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Creates and modifies styles that you can use to create multileader objects

MLEADERSTYLE | 749

Summary
Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader
styles.
The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles
specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Multileader Style
Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you
create. The default multileader style is Standard.

Styles
Displays a list of multileader styles. The current style is highlighted.

List
Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader
styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the
multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing.

Preview Of
Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list.

Set Current
Sets the multileader style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new
multileaders are created using this multileader style.

750 | Chapter 13 M Commands

New
Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define
new multileader styles.

Modify
Displays the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can modify
multileader styles.

Delete
Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being
used in the drawing cannot be deleted.

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Modifies an existing multileader style.

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 751

Summary
Controls the general appearance of the multileader.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the style being modified.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.
■

Leader Format Tab on page 752

■

Leader Structure Tab on page 753

■

Content Tab on page 754

Leader Format Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader.

General
Controls the general settings of the arrowheads.
Type
Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline,
or no leader line.
Color
Determines the color of the leader line.
Linetype
Determines the linetype of the leader line.

752 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Lineweight
Determines the lineweight of the leader line.

Arrowhead
Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads.
Symbol
Sets the arrowhead symbol for the multileader.
Size
Displays and sets the size of arrowheads.

Leader Break
Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader.
Break Size
Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the
multileader is selected.

Leader Structure Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the number of leader points, landing size, and scale for the
multilieader.

Constraints
Controls the constraints of the multileader.
Maximum Leader Points
Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line.
First Segment Angle
Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line.
Second Segment Angle

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 753

Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line.

Landing Settings
Controls the landing settings of the multileader.
Automatically Include Landing
Attaches a horizontal landing line to the multileader content.
Set Landing Distance
Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line.

Scale
Controls the scaling of the multileader.
Annotative
Specifies that the multileader is annotative.
Scale Multileaders to Layout
Determines a scaling factor for the multileader based on the scaling in the
model space and paper space viewports.
This option is available when the multileader is not annotative.
Specify Scale
Specifies the scale for the multileader.
This option is available when the multileader is not annotative.

Content Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the type of content attached to the multileader.
Multileader Type
Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block.

754 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MText: Text Options
Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader.
Default Text
Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the
MTEXT In Place Editor.
Text Style
Lists the available text styles.
Text Style Button
Displays the Text Style dialog box where you can create or modify text styles.
Text Angle
Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text.
Text Color
Specifies the color of the multileader text.
Text Height
Specifies the height of the multileader text.
Always Left Justify
Specifies that the multileader text is always left justified.
Frame Text
Frames the multileader text content with a text box.
Control the separation between the text and frame by modifying the Landing
Gap setting.

Mtext: Leader Connection
Controls the leader connection settings of the multileader.
Leaders can be connected horizontally or vertically.

Horizontal Attachment
Horizontal attachment inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content.
A horizontal attachment includes a landing line between the text and the
leader.
Left Attachment

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 755

Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the
text is to the right of the leader.
Right Attachment
Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the
text is to the left of the leader.
Landing Gap
Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text.
Extend Leader to Text
Extends the landing line to end at the edge of the text line where the leader
is attached, not at the edge of the multiline text box.
The length of the multiline text box is determined by the length of the longest
line of text, not the length of the bounding box.

Vertical Attachment
Inserts the leader at the top or bottom of the text content. A vertical
attachment does not include a landing line between the text and the leader.
Top Attachment
Attaches the leader to the top center of the text content. Click the drop-down
to insert an overline between the leader attachment and the text content.
Bottom Attachment
Attaches the leader to the bottom of the text content. Click the drop-down
to insert an underline between the leader attachment and the text content.
Landing Gap
Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text.

Block: Block Options
Controls the properties of block content in a multileader object.
Source block
Specifies the block used for multileader content.
Attachment
Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can
attach the block by specifying the insertion point of the block or the center
point of the block.

756 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Color
Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control
in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color
included in the block is set to ByBlock.
Scale
Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a
1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a
1/2 inch square.

Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Leader Styles

Specifies a name for the new multileader style and specifies the existing
multileader style on which the new multileader style will be based.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Style Name
Names the new multileader style.
Start With
Specifies an existing multileader style whose settings are the default for the
new multileader style.
Annotative
Specifies that the multileader object is .
Continue
Displays the Multileader Style Manager, in which you define the new
multileader style.

Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box | 757

MODEL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Model Space and Paper Space

Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout.

Access Methods
When a viewing a layout, enter model at the command prompt or click the
Model tab below the drawing window.

Summary
On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model
layout automatically sets the TILEMODE on page 1684 system variable to 1, and
you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing.
Once you have completed your drawing, you can choose a named (paper
space) layout to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot.

MOVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Move Objects

Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move

758 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Menu: Modify ➤ Move
Toolbar: Modify
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Move.

Summary
Use coordinates, grid snaps, object snaps, and other tools to move objects
with precision.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects:
Specify base point or [Displacement]:
Specify second point or :
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected
objects are to be moved and in what direction.
If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is
interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3
for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects move 2
units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current
position.
Displacement Enter coordinates to represent a vector
The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction.

MREDO
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands.

MREDO | 759

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Standard

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter number of actions or [All/Last]:
Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions.
All Reverses all previous actions.
Last Reverses only the last action.

MSLIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Slides

Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout.

Summary
The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide file
is a raster image of a viewport.
In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. In
paper space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display, including
all viewports and their contents.
Off-screen portions of the drawing, or layers that are off or frozen, are not
included in the slide.
Use the VSLIDE command to view slides, or the SLIDELIB utility to create a
slide library.

760 | Chapter 13 M Commands

When you view slides of images shaded with the SHADE command in a larger
window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating slides.

MSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Model Space and Paper Space

In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click over a viewport on a named layout.
Double-click outside of a viewport on a named layout to return to paper space.

Summary
Commands operate in either model space or paper space. You use model space
(the Model layout) to do drafting and design work and to create
two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space
(a named layout) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace at the Command prompt to
make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space
in that viewport within the layout.

MTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Multiline Text

Edits multiline text.

MSPACE | 761

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object.

Summary
Displays either the multiline text tab on the ribbon or the In-Place Text Editor
to modify the formatting or content of the selected mtext object.
The In-Place Text Editor is displayed.

MTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates a multiline text object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text
Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext)
object. With the built-in editor, you can format the text appearance, columns,
and boundaries.
After you specify the point for the opposite corner when the ribbon is active,
the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab displays. If the ribbon is not active, the
in-place text editor is displayed.

762 | Chapter 13 M Commands

If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command
prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text editor and displays additional
Command prompts.
See also:
■

Symbols and Special Characters on page 791

In-Place Text Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects.

Summary
You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs,
adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify
columns.

In-Place Text Editor | 763

The In-Place Text Editor includes
■

Text Formatting toolbar on page 768

■

Paragraph dialog box on page 778

■

Column Settings dialog box on page 780

■

Background Mask dialog box on page 781

■

Columns menu on page 779

■

Options menu

When a table cell is selected for editing, the In-Place Text Editor displays
column letters and row numbers.
NOTE Not all options available when creating single-line text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Editor Shortcut Menu
Select All Selects all the text in the text editor.
Cut Copies the selected text and removes it from the text editor to the
clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected text from the text editor to the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the text in the clipboard to the cursor position in the text editor.
Paste Special Pastes the text in the clipboard to the cursor position in the
text editor while removing character, paragraph, or any formatting from the
text in the clipboard. (Not available for single-line text.)
Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box.
Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking
space and open the Character Map dialog box for additional symbols.
Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text retains its
original character formatting and style properties, but you can edit and format
the imported text in the editor. After you select a text file to import, you can
replace either selected text or all text, or append the inserted text to text
selected within the text boundary. The file size for imported text is limited to
32 KB. (Not available for single-line text.)

764 | Chapter 13 M Commands

The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black characters
are inserted and the background color is black, the editor automatically changes
to white or the current color.
NOTE A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet imported into a drawing is truncated at 72
rows unless the spreadsheet was created in Microsoft Office 2002 with Service
Pack 2 installed. The same limitation applies when the drawing that contains the
OLE object is opened on a system with an earlier version of Microsoft Office
installed; the spreadsheet is truncated.
Paragraph Alignment Sets alignment for the multiline text object. You can
choose to align your text to the left, center, or right. You can justify your text,
or align the first and last characters of your text with the margins of your
mtext box, or center each line of text within the margins of your mtext box.
Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect
the justification of the line. (Not available for single-line text.)
Paragraph Displays options for paragraph formatting. See the Paragraph dialog
box on page 778. (Not available for single-line text.)
Bullets and Lists Displays the options for numbering lists. (Not available for
single-line text.)
Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is
indented to align with the first selected paragraph.
■

Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected
text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed.

■

Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items
in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the
sequence continues by using double letters.

■

Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the
items in the list.

■

Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list.

■

Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the
selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also
become part of the new list.

■

Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues
the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected
items below the selected items continue the sequence.

■

Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters
can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used

In-Place Text Editor | 765

as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket
(>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
■

Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and
Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after
the letter, number, or bullet character was created by Tab, not Space.

■

Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied
to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that
meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with
(1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation
after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing Tab, and (4) some
text before the line is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter.
When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text
object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list
is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except
Allow Bullets and Lists.

Columns Displays options for columns. See the Columns menu on page 779.
(Not available for single-line text.)
Find and Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box.
Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase and
Lowercase.
AutoCAPS Converts all new and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does
not affect existing text. To change the case of existing text, select the text and
right-click. Click Change Case.
Character Set Displays a menu of code pages. Select a code page to apply it
to the selected text. (Not available for single-line text.)
Combine Paragraphs Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph
and replaces each paragraph return with a space. (Not available for single-line
text.)
Remove Formatting Removes character formatting for selected characters,
paragraph formatting for a selected paragraph, or all formatting from a selected
paragraph. (Not available for single-line text.)
Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box. (Not available
for table cells and single-line text.)
Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains
stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack

766 | Chapter 13 M Commands

characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text
to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values.
Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional
numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer
text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated
by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the
diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the
diagonal bar are top-left aligned.
Editor Settings Displays a list of options for the text editor. See Editor Settings
on page 767 for more information.

Editor Settings
Provides options for changing the behavior of the text editor and provides
additional editing options. Options are specific to the Editor Settings menu
and are not available elsewhere in the text editor.
NOTE Some options may not be available depending on what you are editing.
Always Display As WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Controls
display of the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it. When unchecked,
text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or
is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you
can easily read and edit it.
When this option is checked, the MTEXTFIXED system variable will be set to
0. Otherwise, MTEXTFIXED will be set to 2.
Show Toolbar Controls display of the Text Formatting toolbar. To restore
display of the toolbar, right-click in the text area of the editor, and click Editor
Settings ➤ Show Toolbar. This option is controlled by the MTEXTTOOLBAR
on page 1586 system variable
Show Options Expands the Text Formatting toolbar to show more options.
Show Rulers Controls the display of the ruler.
Opaque Background When selected, makes the background of the editor
opaque. (Not available for table cells.)
Check Spelling Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is on or off.
Check Spelling Settings Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box,
where you can specify text options that will be checked for spelling errors
within your drawing.

In-Place Text Editor | 767

Dictionaries Displays the Dictionaries dialog box, where you can change the
dictionary that is checked against any found misspelled words.
Text Highlight Color Specifies the highlight color when text is selected.

Text Formatting Toolbar
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Formats the text of the current multiline text object.

Summary
Controls the text style for a multiline text object and character and paragraph
formatting for selected text.
NOTE Text that you paste from other word processing applications such as
Microsoft Word will retain most of its formatting. With the options in Paste Special,
you can strip out paragraph formatting such as paragraph-based alignment or
character formatting from the pasted text.

List of Options
Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The current style is saved
in the TEXTSTYLE on page 1683 system variable.
Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic attributes is overridden
if you apply a new style to an existing multiline text object. Stacking,
underlining, and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new
style is applied.
Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are not applied. If a style
defined with a vertical effect is applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed
horizontally in the In-Place Text Editor.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType
fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD LT compiled shape (SHX) fonts
are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts
and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy
fonts.

768 | Chapter 13 M Commands

A sample drawing (TrueType.dwg) showing each font is provided in the sample
directory.
Annotative Turns Annotative on or off for the current mtext object.
Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes
the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the
text height is the value stored in theTEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline
text object can contain characters of various heights.
Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option
is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.
Italic Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option
is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.
Underline Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text.
Overline Turns overline on and off for new or selected text.
Undo Undoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either
text content or text formatting.
Redo Redoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either
text content or text formatting.
Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains
stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack
characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text
to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values.
Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional
numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer
text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated
by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the
diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the
diagonal bar are top-left aligned.
Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.
You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or
the color of the block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one
of the colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog
box.
Ruler Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end of
the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays height and
column grips when column mode is active.

Text Formatting Toolbar | 769

You can also select tabs from the ruler. Clicking the Tab Selection button
changes tab styles from left, center, right, and decimal. Once you make your
selection, you adjust the corresponding tab in the ruler or in the Paragraph
dialog box.
OK Closes the editor and saves any changes that you made.
Options Displays a list of additional text options. See Text Editor Shortcut
Menu on page 764.
Columns Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column
options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See Columns
menu on page 779.
MText Justification Displays the MText Justification menu with nine
alignment options available.
Paragraph Displays the Paragraph dialog box. See the Paragraph dialog box
on page 778 for a list of the options.
Left, Center, Right, Justified and Distributed Sets the justification and
alignment for the left, center, or right text boundaries of the current or selected
paragraph. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included and affect the
justification of a line.
Line Spacing Displays suggested line spacing options or the Paragraph dialog
box. Line spacing is set in the current or selected paragraph.
NOTE Line spacing is the distance between the bottom of the upper line and the
top of the lower line of text in a multiple line paragraph.
The predefined options are:
■

1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, or 2.5x: Sets the line spacing at .5x increments in multiline
text.

■

More: Displays the Paragraph dialog box, which provides additional options.

■

Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from the selected or
current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to the mtext space setting.

Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box:
■

Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user specifies.
Changing text height will not affect line spacing.

■

Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you specify spacing
according to text height. When text height is not consistent in one line,

770 | Chapter 13 M Commands

the line space will be determined by the largest text height value in that
line.
■

At least: Takes both the user specified arbitrary value and the text height
to determine spacing. If text height is smaller than the arbitrary value the
line space is determined by the user specified value. If the text height is
larger, the line spacing is equal to the text height value.

NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are
supported in releases before AutoCAD LT 2008. See MTEXT Paragraph and
Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases.
Numbering Displays the bullet and numbering menu.
Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is
indented to align with the first selected paragraph.
■

Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected
text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed.

■

Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items
in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the
sequence continues by using double letters.

■

Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the
items in the list.

■

Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list.

■

Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the
selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also
become part of the new list.

■

Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues
the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected
items below the selected items continue the sequence.

■

Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters
can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used
as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket
(>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).

■

Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and
Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after
the letter, number, or bullet character was created by Tab, not Space.

Text Formatting Toolbar | 771

■

Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied
to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that
meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with
(1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation
after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing Tab, and (4) some
text before the line is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter.
When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text
object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list
is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except
Allow Bullets and Lists.

Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert
in the text.
Uppercase Changes the selected text to uppercase.
Lowercase Changes the selected text to lowercase.
Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You
can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page
791.
Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control
code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box,
which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system.
Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box.
When you have selected all the characters that you want to use, click Copy
to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste.
Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Oblique Angle Determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The
angle represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between -85 and
85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants text to the right.
A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left.
Tracking Decreases or increases the space between the selected characters.
The 1.0 setting is normal spacing. Set to more than 1.0 to increase spacing,
and set to less than 1.0 to decrease spacing.
Width Factor Widens or narrows the selected characters. The 1.0 setting
represents the normal width of the letter in this font. You can increase the
width (for example, use a width factor of 2 to double the width) or decrease
the width (for example, use a width factor of 0.5 for half the width).

772 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates or modifies multiline text objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Style Panel
Style

Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text
style is active by default

Annotative

Turns Annotative on or off for the current mtext object.

Text Height

Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes
the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed
height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system
variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various
heights.

Formatting Panel
Bold

Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Italic

Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Underline

Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text.

Overline

Turns overline on and off for new or selected text.

Make Uppercase

Changes the selected text to uppercase.

Make Lowercase

Changes the selected text to lowercase.

Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 773

Font

Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text.
TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD LT compiled
shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the
fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed
in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts.

Color

Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.

Background
Mask

Displays the Background Mask dialog box. (Not available for table
cells.)

Oblique Angle

Determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The angle
represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between 85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants
text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left.

Tracking

Decreases or increases the space between the selected characters.
The 1.0 setting is normal spacing.

Width Factor

Widens or narrows the selected characters. The 1.0 setting represents
the normal width of the letter in this font.

Paragraph Panel
MText Justification

Displays the MText Justification menu with nine alignment options
available. Top Left is the default.

Paragraph

Displays the Paragraph dialog box. See the Paragraph dialog box
for a list of the options.

Line Spacing

Displays suggested line spacing options or the Paragraph dialog
box. Line spacing is set in the current or selected paragraph.

NOTE Line spacing is the distance between the bottom
of the upper line and the top of the lower line of text in a
multiple line paragraph.
The predefined options are:
■

1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, or 2.5x: Sets the line spacing at .5x increments
in multiline text.

■

More: Displays the Paragraph dialog box, which provides additional options.

774 | Chapter 13 M Commands

■

Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from
the selected or current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to
the mtext space setting.

Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box:
■

Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user
specifies. Changing text height will not affect line spacing.

■

Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you
specify spacing according to text height. When text height is
not consistent in one line, the line space will be determined
by the largest text height value in that line.

■

At least: Takes both the user specified arbitrary value and the
text height to determine spacing. If text height is smaller than
the arbitrary value the line space is determined by the user
specified value. If the text height is larger, the line spacing is
equal to the text height value.

NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and
previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph
Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide.
Numbering

Displays the bullet and numbering menu.
Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.)
The list is indented to align with the first selected paragraph.
■

Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets
from selected text that has list formatting applied. Indentation
is not changed.

■

Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods
for the items in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double
letters.

■

Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with
periods for the items in the list.

■

Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items
in the list.

■

Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list
formatting. If the selected items are in the middle of a list,
unselected items below them also become part of the new
list.

Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 775

■

Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above
and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items
continue the sequence.

■

Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and
numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma
(,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square
bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).

■

Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow
Bullets and Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only
when the space after the letter, number, or bullet character
was created by Tab, not Space.

■

Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list
formatting is applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that meets the following criteria
is considered to be a list. The line begins with (1) one or more
letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation
after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing Tab,
and (4) some text before the line is ended by Enter or
Shift+Enter.

When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline
text object is removed and the items are converted to plain text.
Allow Auto-list is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options
are unavailable except Allow Bullets and Lists.
Left, Center, Right,
Justified and Distributed

Sets the justification and alignment for the left, center, or right
text boundaries of the current or selected paragraph. Spaces
entered at the end of a line are included and affect the justification
of a line.

Insert Panel
Symbol

Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You
can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters
on page 791.
Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their
control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character
Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font
available on your system. When you have selected all the characters

776 | Chapter 13 M Commands

that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor,
right-click and click Paste.
Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Insert Field

Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert
in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field
is displayed in the text.

Columns

Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See
Columns menu on page 779.

Spell Check Panel
Spell Check

Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is turned on or off.

Edit Dictionaries

Displays the Dictionaries dialog box on page 1166, where you can
add or remove custom dictionaries for use during spell check.

Tools Panel
Find and Replace

Displays the Find and Replace dialog box.

Import Text

Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text
retains its original character formatting and style properties, but
you can edit and format the imported text in the editor. After you
select a text file to import, you can replace either selected text or
all text, or append the inserted text to text selected within the text
boundary. The file size for imported text is limited to 32 KB.
The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black
characters are inserted and the background color is black, the editor
automatically changes to white or the current color.

NOTE A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet imported into a drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet was created in Microsoft Office 2002 with Service Pack 2 installed.
The same limitation applies when the drawing that contains
the OLE object is opened on a system with an earlier version
of Microsoft Office installed; the spreadsheet is truncated.
AutoCAPS

Converts all new and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does
not affect existing text. To change the case of existing text, select
the text and right-click.

Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 777

Options Panel
Undo

Undoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including
changes to either text content or text formatting.

Redo

Redoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including
changes to either text content or text formatting.

Ruler

Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end
of the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays
height and column grips when column mode is active.
You can also select tabs from the ruler. Clicking the Tab Selection
button changes tab styles from left, center, right, and decimal. Once
you make your selection, you adjust the corresponding tab in the
ruler or in the Paragraph dialog box.

More

Displays a list of additional text options. See Text Editor Shortcut
Menu on page 764.

Close Panel
Close Text Editor

Ends the MTEXT command and closes the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab.

Paragraph Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs.

Summary
Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing,
and paragraph line spacing.
NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are
supported in AutoCAD LT 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and
Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide.

778 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Tab
Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options
include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from
the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler.
Decimal style
Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting
the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with
the drawing even if the locale setting is changed.
Left Indent
Sets the indent value for the first line or hanging indent to the selected or
current paragraphs.
Right Indent
Applies the indent to the entire selected or current paragraph.
Paragraph Alignment
Sets the alignment properties for the current or selected paragraphs.
Paragraph Spacing
Specifies the spacing before or after the current or selected paragraphs. The
distance between two paragraphs is determined by the total of the after
paragraph spacing value of the upper paragraph and the before paragraph
spacing value of the lower paragraph.
Paragraph Line Spacing
Sets the spacing between individual lines in the current or selected paragraphs.

Columns Menu
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Columns Menu | 779

Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns.

Summary
You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns.
You can edit column width and height with grip-editing.
To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending
on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating
and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object.
Dynamic Columns Sets dynamic columns mode to the current mtext object.
Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affects text flow and
text flow causes columns to be added or removed. Auto height or Manual
height options are available.
Static Columns Sets static columns mode to the current mtext object. You
can specify the total width and height of the mtext object, and the number
of columns. All the columns share the same height and are aligned at both
sides.
Insert Column Break Alt+Enter Inserts a manual column break.
Column Settings Displays Column Settings dialog box on page 780.

Column Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Displays options for setting up columns such as the type, number of columns,
height, and width, and gutter size.

780 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Column Type
Displays choices for the type of columns you want to create.
Column Number
Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static
Columns.
Height
Displays mtext height when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is
selected.
Width
Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter
value is five times the default mtext text height.
Also displays the total width value of the mtext object.

Background Mask Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text.

Background Mask Dialog Box | 781

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Use Background Mask
Puts an opaque background behind the text.
NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the
column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred
to as gutters will be unmasked.

Border Offset Factor
Specifies the margin around the text for the opaque background. The value
is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object.
A factor of 1.5 extends the background by 0.5 times the text height.

Fill Color
Specifies the color for the background.
Use Background Drawing Color
Provides a background that is the same color as the background of the drawing.
Color
Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors
in the list or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box.

Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.

782 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from
the MTEXT shortcut menu

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Find What Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find.
Replace With Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace
the text you typed in Find What.
Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What.
Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces
it with the text in Replace With.
Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces
it with the text in Replace With.
Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as
specified in Find What.
The case of all characters in the text string must match the case of the text in
Find What. When this option is cleared, a match is found for specified text
strings regardless of case.
Match Whole Word Only Finds only whole words specified in Find What.
Text that is part of another word is ignored. When this option is cleared, a
match is found for text strings, whether they are single words or parts of other
words.
Use Wildcards Allows the use of wildcard characters in searches.
For more information on wildcard searches, see Find and Replace Text in the
User’s Guide.

Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT | 783

Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results.
Match Half/Full Width Forms (East Asian Languages) Matches half- and
full-width characters in search results.

Stack Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text.

Summary
To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click,
and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options
control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction.
Upper
Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction.
Lower

784 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction.

Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.

Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text: horizontal fraction, diagonal fraction,
tolerance, and decimal.
Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top
of the second number separated by a horizontal line.
Fraction (Diagonal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
the second number separated by a diagonal line.
Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second
number. There is no line between the numbers.
Decimal A variation of the Tolerance style that aligns the decimal point of
both the upper and lower numbers of selected text.

Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All stacked
text in an object uses the same alignment.
Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line.
Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text line.
Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.

Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current
text style (from 25 to 125 percent).

Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to
the current stacked text.

AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric
characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound characters.
To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the text
and choose Stack from the text editor shortcut menu.

Stack Properties Dialog Box | 785

AutoStack Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click
Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box,
click AutoStack.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enable AutoStacking
Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat,
slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a
nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal
fraction.
Remove Leading Blank
Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction.
Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction
Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.
Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction

786 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on.
NOTE Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted
to a diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance
format.
Don't Show This Dialog Again; Always Use These Settings
Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. The current property
settings are used for all stacked text. When this option is cleared, the AutoStack
Properties dialog box is automatically displayed if you type two numbers
separated by a slash, carat, or pound sign followed by a space or nonnumeric
character.

-MTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates a multiline text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first corner.
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line
spacing/Rotation/Style/Width/Columns].

Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows
within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.

Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.
■

Specify Height.

The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not .
■

Specify Paper Text Height.

-MTEXT | 787

The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text
style is annotative.
The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise, it
is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE on page 1683 system variable. Character
height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value
stored in TEXTSIZE on page 1683.

Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in
relation to the text boundary. The current justification is applied to new text.
The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification
setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle. The justification
point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle. Text is center-,
left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Spaces
entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the
justification of the line. Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the
middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and
bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] .
Justify Options
Option

Meaning

TL

Top Left

TC

Top Center

TR

Top Right

ML

Middle Left

MC

Middle Center

MR

Middle Right

BL

Bottom Left

BC

Bottom Center

BR

Bottom Right

The following illustrations show each justification option.

788 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom
of the next line of text.
NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use
a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not
overlap.
At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest
character in the line. When At Least is selected, lines of text with taller
characters have added space between lines.
Distance Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units.
Valid values must be between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).
Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the
multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text
style.

-MTEXT | 789

Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a
spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single
spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double
spacing by entering 2x.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
■

Specify rotation angle.

If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is
determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.
The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of
the text boundary.

Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text.
Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined and saved
using the STYLE command.
?—List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics.
The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of
the text boundary.

Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary.
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as
the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within
each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary.
If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the
multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line
of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing Enter. To end the
command, press Enter at the MTEXT prompt.

Columns
Specifies the column options for an mtext object.
Static Specifies the total column width, the number of columns, the gutter
width (the space between the columns), and the height of columns.

790 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic
columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow
causes columns to be added or removed.
No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object.
The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN system variable.

Symbols and Special Characters
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Multiline Text

You can include special characters and symbols by entering a control code or
a Unicode string.
With the In-Place Text Editor on page 763, you can right-click and click Symbol
on the shortcut menu.
NOTE Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Unicode strings and control codes
Control Codes

Unicode Strings Result

%%d

\U+00B0

Degree symbol (°)

%%p

\U+00B1

Tolerance symbol ( )

%%c

\U+2205
Diameter symbol (

)

To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text
Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string:
Text symbols and Unicode strings
Name
Almost equal

Symbol

Unicode
String
\U+2248

Symbols and Special Characters | 791

Text symbols and Unicode strings
Name

Symbol

Unicode
String

Angle

\U+2220

Boundary line

\U+E100

Centerline

\U+2104

Delta

\U+0394

Electrical phase

\U+0278

Flow line

\U+E101

Identity

\U+2261

Initial length

\U+E200

Monument line

\U+E102

Not equal

\U+2260

Ohm

\U+2126

Omega

\U+03A9

Plate/property line

\U+214A

792 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Text symbols and Unicode strings
Name

Symbol

Unicode
String

Subscript 2

\U+2082

Squared

\U+00B2

Cubed

\U+00B3

These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX
fonts:
■

Simplex*

■

Romans*

■

gdt*

■

amgdt*

■

Isocp

■

Isocp2

■

Isocp3

■

Isoct

■

Isoct2

■

Isoct3

■

Isocpeur (TTF only)*

■

Isocpeur italic (TTF only)

■

Isocteur (TTF only)

■

Isocteur italic (TTF only)

* These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length
dimensions.

Symbols and Special Characters | 793

MULTIPLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Repeats the next command until canceled.

Summary
The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because
MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified
each time.
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes.

MVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

Creates and controls layout viewports.

Summary
In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64
viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space
are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank.
Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify corner of viewportor
[ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/Restore/LAyer/2/3/4].

794 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.

On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in model
space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of
viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more
viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off
to make another one active.

Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed
in an inactive viewport.

Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area.
When the paper background and printable area are turned off, the viewport
fills the display.

Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in named (paper space) layouts are plotted.
As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the
current display.
Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed
regardless of the current display.

Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed
when working in model space.

Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a
viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line
segments.

MVIEW | 795

Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points.
Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport.
For a description of the options for creating arc segments, see the Arc option
in PLINE.
Close Closes the boundary. If you press Enter after specifying at least three
points, the boundary is closed automatically.
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the
previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is
drawn tangent to that arc segment.
Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal
viewport.

Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.
■

Enter Viewport Configuration Name.

■

?

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection
method; the viewports are fit into the selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

Layer
Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer
properties.
■

Reset Viewport Layer Property Overrides Back To Global Properties. Enter
Y to remove all layer property overrides.

■

Select Viewports.

2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal
size.
■

Enter Viewport Arrangement.

796 | Chapter 13 M Commands

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection
method; the viewports are fit into the selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The
other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two
smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the
larger viewport is placed.

■

First Corner on page 797

■

Fit on page 797

4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of
equal size.

MVIEW | 797

■

First Corner on page 797

■

Fit on page 797

798 | Chapter 13 M Commands

N Commands

14

NAVBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Navigation Bar

Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface.

Access Methods
Ribbon: View Tab ➤ Windows Panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤
Navigation Bar
Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Navigation Bar

Summary
Provides access to the ViewCube tool, SteeringWheels, 3Dconnexion, and
product-specific navigation tools. Use these tools to navigate or reorient your
model. You can customize which tools are available on the navigation bar to
fit the way you work.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [ON/OFF] :
On Displays the navigation bar.

799

Off Hides the navigation bar.

3Dconnexion Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views

Controls the settings of 3Dconnexion navigation tools.

Summary
Controls the settings for 3Dconnexion navigation tools which are available
from the navigation bar. Customize the speed and movements of the
3Dconnexion 3D mouse to manipulate the current view. These settings (except
Keep Scene Upright) are in synchronization with the 3Dconnexion Control
Panel settings of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse driver.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Sensitivity
Controls the sensitivity of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse controller cap.
Keep Scene Upright
Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned upside-down
while navigating.
Pan/Zoom
Controls pan and zoom navigation. When this option is disabled, you can
only rotate the model around the X,Y, and Z axes.
Tilt/Spin/Roll
Controls the rotation of the model around the X,Y, and Z axes. When this
option is disabled, you can only pan and zoom.
Restore Defaults
Restores the default settings of the 3Dconnexion Settings dialog box.

800 | Chapter 14 N Commands

NAVSWHEEL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of SteeringWheel

Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from
the cursor.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels
Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ SteeringWheels
Shortcut menu: SteeringWheels

Summary
Selecting a tool on the wheel is different from the selection of a typical
command. Press on a wedge and drag to use the desired navigation tool.
Release the mouse button to return to the wheel and switch navigation tools.
The NAVSWHEEL command displays the 2D Navigation wheel.

NCOPY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Copy Objects

Copies objects that are contained in an xref, block, or DGN underlay.

NAVSWHEEL | 801

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy Nested Objects

Summary
Instead of exploding or binding an xref, block, or DGN underlay to be able
to copy objects nested within them, you can copy the selected objects directly
into the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select nested objects to copy or [Settings]: Use an object selection method and
then press Enter
Specify base point or [Displacement/Multiple] : Specify a base
point or enter an option
Specify second point or [Array] : Specify a
second point or enter an option
Specify second point or [Fit]: Specify a second point or enter an option

Settings
Controls whether named objects that are associated with the selected objects
are added to the drawing.

Insert
Duplicates the selected objects to the current layer without regard to named
objects. This option is similar to the COPY command.

Bind
Includes named objects such as blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes,
and text styles associated with the copied objects into the drawing.

Displacement
Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates.
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far from the
original the copied objects are to be placed and in what direction.
If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is
interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3

802 | Chapter 14 N Commands

for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied
2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current
location.

Multiple
Controls whether multiple copies are created automatically as you specify
additional locations.

Array
Arranges a specified number of copies in a linear array using the first and
second copy as the spacing distance.
Number of Items to Array Specifies the number of sets of the selected objects
in the array, including the original selection set.
Second Point Determines a distance and direction for the array relative to
the base point. By default, the first copy in the array is located at the specified
displacement. The remaining copies are located in a linear array beyond that
point using the same incremental displacement.

Fit
Arranges a specified number of copies in a linear array using the first and last
copy as the total spacing distance.
Second Point Positions the last copy in the array at the specified displacement.
The other copies are fit in a linear array between the first copy and the last
copy.

NEW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Creates a new drawing.

Access Methods

Button

NEW | 803

Menu: File ➤ New

Summary
The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the STARTUP system
variable.
■

1: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box.

■

0: NEW displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).

If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is
displayed. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the
Startup setting.

Create New Drawing Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Summary
Defines the settings for a new drawing. Start from Scratch creates a new drawing
using either imperial or metric default settings. Use a Template creates a new
drawing using the settings defined in a drawing template you select. Use a
Wizard creates a new drawing using the settings you specify in either the
Quick or Advanced wizard. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is not available
from the NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use OPEN.)

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Start from Scratch
Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings
(MEASUREINIT system variable). You can change the measurement system
for a given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system variable. The

804 | Chapter 14 N Commands

Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is
started from scratch.

Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the imperial measurement system.
The default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 12 by 9 inches.
Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The
default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 429 by 297 millimeters.
Tip
Displays a description of the selected measurement setting.

Use a Template
Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store
all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension
styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing
files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the template directory.
Several template drawings are included with this program. You can make
additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file
names to .dwt. See “Use a Drawing Template File” in the User's Guide.

Create New Drawing Dialog Box | 805

Select a Template
Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file location,
which is specified in the Options dialog box. Select a file to use as a starting
point for your new drawing.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the selected file.
Browse
Displays the Select a Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), where you can access template files that are not available in the Select
a Template list.
Template Description
Displays a description of the selected template. If you create your own template,
you can use the Template Options dialog box on page 1092to specify the text
that you want to display here. See the SAVEAS command.

Use a Wizard
Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two wizards:
Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.

806 | Chapter 14 N Commands

Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard, in which you can specify the
units and area for your new drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes
settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.
Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard, in which you can
specify the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area for your new
drawing. The Advanced Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height
and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.
Wizard Description
Displays a description of the selected wizard.

Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Defines the units and area of your drawing.

Quick Setup Wizard | 807

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this
wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the
last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you
specified.

Units
Indicates the format in which you enter and in which the program displays
coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available. Engineering and
Architectural have a specific base unit (inches) assigned to them. You can
select from other measurement styles that can represent any convenient unit
of measurement.
NOTE You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all
measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command. The
default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000).
Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation.
Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches.
Architectural Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional inches.
Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and fractional)
notation.

808 | Chapter 14 N Commands

Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers expressed
in the form of the product of a decimal number between 0 and 10 and a power
of 10).

Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular
area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off
with the LIMITS command.

Advanced Setup Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Units and Unit Formats

Defines the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area of your new
drawing.

Advanced Setup Wizard | 809

Summary
List of Options
The following options are displayed.
The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure,
Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next
to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard
and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using
the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.

Units
Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in which
you enter and in which the program displays coordinates and measurements.
The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats. See
Specify Units and Unit Formats for more information.
The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional
size for displaying linear measurements.

Angle
Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which the program
displays angles.
Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals.
Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds.
Grads Displays angles as grads.
Radians Displays angles as radians.
Surveyor Displays angles in surveyor's units.

Angle Measure
Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter
an angle value, the angle is measured either counter-clockwise or clockwise
from the compass direction that you select on this page. You control the
counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle Direction page.
East Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle.
North Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle.
West Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle.
South Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle.

810 | Chapter 14 N Commands

Other Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or south. Enter a
specific compass angle to treat as the 0 angle.

Angle Direction
Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which the
program displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.

Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular
area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off
with the LIMITS command.

NEW Command Prompt
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Summary
Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box).
If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box, or if
FILEDIA is set to 0, NEW displays the following prompt:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter template file name or [. (for none)] : Enter a name, enter a period
(.), or press ENTER

NEW Command Prompt | 811

NEWSHEETSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create a Sheet Set

Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and
project data.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu
Menu: File ➤ New Sheet Set

➤ New ➤ Sheet Set

Summary
The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through
the process of creating a new sheet set. You can choose to create a new sheet
set from existing drawings, or use an existing sheet set as a template on which
to base your new sheet set.

812 | Chapter 14 N Commands

O Commands

15

OBJECTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Annotation Scale

Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales
Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales
Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
Command entry: 'objectscale for transparent use

Summary
An annotative object can support several annotation scales for views at different
scales. You can add or delete scales from the list of scales assigned to the selected
annotative objects.

813

If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects.
The Annotative Object Scale dialog box on page 814 is displayed.
If you enter -objectscale at the Command prompt, options are displayed on
page 816.

Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Object Scale List
Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object.
List all scales for selected objects
Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the
Object Scale List.
List scales common to all selected objects only

814 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects
are displayed in the Object Scale List.
Add
Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box on page 815.
Delete
Removes the selected scale from the scale list.
NOTE The current scale or scales referenced by objects or views cannot be deleted.

Add Scales to Object Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Adds a new scale to the selected object.

List of Options
The following option is displayed.
Scale List
Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object.
Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key while
selecting the scales.

Add Scales to Object Dialog Box | 815

Use the SCALELISTEDIT on page 1098 command to add custom scales to this
list.

-OBJECTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method
Enter an option [Add on page 816/Delete on page 816/? on page 816] :
Enter a or d or press Enter

Add
Adds an annotation scale to the selected objects.
When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current
annotation scale. However, an annotative object can be updated to support
additional annotation scales for views at different scales.
■

Enter named scale to add.

■

? on page 816

? Displays the list of scales in the scale list.

Delete
Removes a specified current annotation scale from the selected objects.
If an annotative object supports a single scale, that scale cannot be deleted
from the object.
■

Enter named scale to delete.

■

? on page 816

? Displays the union of all scales of the selected objects.

816 | Chapter 15 O Commands

OFFSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Offset an Object

Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset
Menu: Modify ➤ Offset
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you
offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create
drawings containing many parallel lines and curves.

The OFFSET command repeats for convenience. To exit the command, press
Enter.

OFFSET | 817

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Erase source = current Layer = current OFFSETGAPTYPE =
current
Specify Offset Distance on page 818 or [Through on page 818/Erase on page
818/Layer on page 819] : Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter

Offset Distance
Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

Exit Exits the OFFSET command.
Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode, which repeats the offset operation
using the current offset distance.
Undo Reverses the previous offset.

Through
Creates an object passing through a specified point.
NOTE For best results when you offset a polyline with corners, specify the through
point near the midpoint of a line segment, not near a corner.

■

Exit on page 818

■

Multiple on page 818

■

Undo on page 818

Erase
Erases the source object after it is offset.

818 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Layer
Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the
layer of the source object.

OLELINKS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link OLE Objects in Drawings

Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit ➤ OLE Links

Summary
The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the
drawing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog
box is not displayed. To specify a different source application for an embedded
object, right-click the embedded object and click Convert on the shortcut
menu to display the Convert dialog box.
See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User's Guide.

Links Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link OLE Objects in Drawings

Lists and modifies linked files and objects.

OLELINKS | 819

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Links Lists information about linked objects. The information listed depends
on the type of link. To change information for a linked object, select the
object.
Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type of object.
Type Displays the format type.
Update: Automatic Updates the link automatically whenever the source
changes.
Update: Manual Prompts you to update a link when you open the document.
Update Now Updates the selected links.
Open Source Opens the source file and highlights the portion linked to the
AutoCAD LT drawing.
Change Source Displays the Change Source dialog box (a standard file dialog
box), in which you can specify a different source file. If the source is a selection
within a file (instead of the entire file), Item Name displays a string representing
the selection.
Break Link Severs the link between the object and the original file. The object
in your drawing is changed to WMF (Windows metafile format), which is not
affected by future changes to the original file.

820 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Convert Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link OLE Objects in Drawings

Specifies a different source application for an embedded object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click an embedded object and click OLE ➤ Convert.

List of Options
The following options are displayed,
Current Type Displays the type of object you are converting or activating.
Object Type Displays a list of available object types. If you select AutoCAD
LT Entities, text is converted to a multiline text (mtext) object, a spreadsheet
is converted to a table object, and a bitmap file is converted to an image object.
Convert To Converts the embedded object to the type specified under Object
Type.
Activate As Opens the embedded object as the type selected under Object
Type but returns the object to its current type after editing.
Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing.
Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information.

Convert Dialog Box | 821

Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. This option is available
only if you select Display as Icon.
Result Describes the result of the selected options.

Change Icon Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Link OLE Objects in Drawings

Changes the icon that represents an embedded or linked object in a drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Icon
Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object.
Current Specifies the currently selected icon.
Default Specifies the default icon for the source application.
From File Specifies an icon from a file (valid types include EXE, DLL, and
ICO).

Label
Specifies a caption for the icon. The file type is displayed unless you specify
otherwise.

822 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Browse
Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which
you can select an icon from a file.

OLESCALE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit OLE Objects in Drawings

Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: With an OLE object selected, right-click and click Text Size.

Summary
The OLE Text Size dialog box is displayed.
NOTE You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command.

OLE Text Size Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit OLE Objects in Drawings

Maps the point size of one of the fonts in an OLE object to a text height in
the drawing.

OLESCALE | 823

Summary
The OLE object is scaled automatically to accommodate the size of the text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
OLE Font Displays a list of the fonts used in the OLE object.
OLE Point Size Displays a list of the point sizes available for the selected font.
Text Height Sets a text height for the font at the selected point size.
Reset Restores the OLE object to its size when it was inserted in the drawing.

ONLINEDRAWINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Opens AutoCAD WS in a web browser and lists the available online files.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Online Drawings

824 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Online Drawings

Summary
The Drawings section in AutoCAD WS displays your uploaded files and any
files that have been shared with you. Use the Drawings section to manage
your files and folders, and to edit, share, and download files.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

OOPS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Restores erased objects.

Summary
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.

You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands
can erase the selected objects after creating a block.
You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with
the PURGE command.

OOPS | 825

OPEN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Opens an existing drawing file.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu
Menu: File ➤ Open
Toolbar: Standard

➤ Open ➤ Drawing

Summary
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Several commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which you
can navigate through local and network drives and through FTP sites and Web
folders to select files. While each dialog box may vary slightly, following is a
list of the possible options.

826 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Places List
Provides quick access to predefined locations. Reorder the icons in the Places
list by dragging them to a new position. To add a new icon to Places, drag a
folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog
boxes.
History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed from the dialog
box. It is recommended that you periodically remove unwanted shortcuts
from the History list. Select History, then select the unwanted shortcuts in
the Files list and click Delete. To sort the shortcuts by date, click Views ➤
Details, and then click the Modified column in the Files list.
Personal/My Documents Displays the contents of the Personal or My Documents
folder for the current user profile.
Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder for the current user
profile. This folder consists of shortcuts to files or folders that you added to
Favorites using the Tools ➤ Add to Favorites option in the dialog box.
FTP Displays the FTP sites that are available for browsing in the standard file
selection dialog box. To add FTP locations to this list, or to modify an existing
FTP location, click Tools ➤ Add/Modify FTP Locations in the dialog box.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes | 827

Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop.
Buzzsaw Provides access to Buzzsaw projects. Buzzsaw is a secure Internet-based
collaboration and project management service that connects project teams in
different locations. To use Buzzsaw, you must already have a project hosting
account on Buzzsaw or be given access to a subscriber's Buzzsaw site. If you
do not yet have a project hosting account on Buzzsaw, clicking Buzzsaw
displays the Select Template dialog box where you can add a Buzzsaw location
shortcut. Double-clicking Add a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut opens the Log In
To Buzzsaw dialog box where you can register for a free 30-day trial subscription
to the service. Also, the first time you access Buzzsaw, your default web browser
opens with the project hosting page displayed. If you already have a project
hosting account, clicking Buzzsaw shows all of your project sites in the Site
list.

Look In/Save In
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of
the folder path and to navigate up the path tree or to other drives, network
connections, FTP locations, or web folders (either Web Folders or My Network
Places, depending on the version of your operating system). You can create
web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or
Windows Explorer Help for more information about web folders. To control
whether the last used paths in each particular standard file selection dialog
box are stored across sessions, use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable.

Back
Returns to the previous file location.

Up One Level
Navigates one level up in the current path tree.

Search the Web
Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can access and store
files on the Internet.

Delete
Deletes the selected file or folder.

Create New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify.

828 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Views
Controls the appearance of the Files list or Folders list and, for a Files list,
specifies whether to show a preview image when a file is selected.
List Displays a multi-column list.
Details Displays a single-column list with file details.
Thumbnail Displays each file in a thumbnail view.
Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. To save a bitmap with a drawing
file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open and Save
tab in the Options dialog box.

Tools
Provides tools to help with file selection and other actions available in file
selection dialog boxes.
Find Displays the Find dialog box, in which you can search for files using
name, location, and date-modified filters.
Locate
Uses the AutoCAD LT search path to locate the file specified in File Name.
You set the search path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Add/Modify FTP Locations Displays the Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog
box, in which you can specify the FTP sites to make available for browsing.
To browse these sites, select FTP from the Places list.
Add Current Folder to Places Adds an icon for the selected folder to the
Places list, providing quick access to that folder from all standard file selection
dialog boxes. To remove the icon, right-click the icon and choose Remove.
Add to Favorites
Creates a shortcut to the current Look In location, or to the selected file or
folder. The shortcut is placed in the Favorites folder for the current user profile,
which you can access by choosing Favorites in the Places list.
Look in Favorites
Sets the Look In path to your system’s Favorites folder.
Options Provides additional options for certain standard file selection dialog
boxes.
Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password that
are invoked when you save a file.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes | 829

Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type.
Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Details
view.

Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Preview in
the dialog box. To save a bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail
Preview Image option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.

File Name
Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list. If you select multiple
files, File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. You must
use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You can use wild-card
characters to filter files displayed in the Files list.

Files of Type
When you are saving files, Files of Type specifies the format in which the file
is saved.

Select Initial View
Displays the specified model space view when you open the drawing if the
drawing contains more than one named view.

Update Sheet and View Thumbnails Now
Reflects the current setting of the UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable. This
option temporarily overrides that setting. This option does not change the
current setting of UPDATETHUMBNAIL.

Open/Save
Depending on the purpose of the specific file selection dialog box, opens or
saves the selected file or enters the path of the selected folder in the previous
dialog box. Certain file selection dialog boxes may include additional options,
accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button.
Open Read-Only Opens a file in read-only mode. You cannot save changes
to the file using the original file name.

830 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Creates, renames, modifies, and deletes Buzzsaw location shortcuts.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Lists the location of existing Buzzsaw shortcuts.
New Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box.
Rename Renames the shortcuts you select.
Modify Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box, where you can change
settings for the selected shortcut.
Delete Removes the selected shortcut.
Close Closes the selected shortcut location.

Log In to Buzzsaw Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Logs in to the Buzzsaw site in order to browse to a specific location

Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Dialog Box | 831

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Buzzsaw Site Specifies the location of the most recently used Buzzsaw site.
Enter any existing address or site name.
Buzzsaw User Name Specifies the user name you use for the Buzzsaw site you
want to access.
Password Specifies your password for the Buzzsaw site.
Save Login Name and Password Saves your user and login name so that you
don't need to retype it the next time you access the site.
Click here to register for a free trial Registers you for a free trial of the
Buzzsaw site.

Create or Edit a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Sets a shortcut to a Buzzsaw location.

832 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Summary
Provides access to a new Autodesk Buzzsaw location that you specify. You can
open drawings or save drawings at this location. If a sheet set is open, the
Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your current sheet set. The only
Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated with the current sheet set.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Buzzsaw Site Displays the name of the current Buzzsaw site.
Select a Buzzsaw Site Project or Folder Lists the most recently opened projects
and folders in the site.
Browse Displays the Select a Buzzsaw Project or Folder dialog box, which you
can use to find and select a project or folder.
Enter a Name for this Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Specifies the name of the
shortcut.

Select a Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Specifies a Buzzsaw project or folder to save with a Buzzsaw location shortcut.

List of Options
The following option is displayed.
List of Buzzsaw Projects and Folders Specifies Buzzsaw projects or folders
that can be linked to the shortcut.

Select a Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box | 833

Find Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Search Paths and File Locations

Searches for files using name, location, and date modified filters.

Summary
To access the Find dialog box, in a standard file selection dialog box, click
Tools menu ➤ Find.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name & Location Tab
Filters the file search based on file type, file name, and location.
Named
Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the search. When entering
multiple file names, enclose each name in quotation marks.

834 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Use the following wild-card characters to broaden your search:
■

* (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search
string.

■

? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches
ABC, 3BC, and so on.

The type of files to include in the search is determined by Type, so you don't
need to enter a file extension in Named. For example, to find house102.dwg,
enter house* and set Type to Drawing (*.dwg).
Type
Specifies the type of files to include in the search. Available file types are
limited to those supported by the specific standard file selection dialog box.
Look In
Specifies the location to search. Enter a location, choose a location from the
list, or choose Browse to navigate to a location. When entering multiple
locations, enclose each location in quotation marks.
Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location for the search.
Include Subfolders
Searches all subfolders within the Look In location.

Date Modified Tab
Filters the file search based on the file's creation or modified date.
All Files
Searches without a date filter.
Find All Files Created or Modified
Restricts the search to files created or modified within a specified time.
■

Between: Searches for files created or modified between two dates. Enter
the dates or click the arrows to choose dates from a calendar. To navigate
the calendar, use the left and right arrows, or click the month and year.

■

During the Previous N Months: Searches for files created or modified within
a specified number of months.

Find Dialog Box | 835

■

During the Previous N Days: Searches for files created or modified within a
specified number of days.

Find Now
Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs.

Stop
Ends the search.

New Search
Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options.

OK
When one or more files are selected in the search results, closes the Find dialog
box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection dialog
box.

Search Results
Lists all files found by the search. To pass a file to the standard file selection
dialog box, select a file and choose OK. When used with a standard file
selection dialog box that allows multiple file selection, you can pass multiple
files from the Search Results.

Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection dialog
boxes.

836 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Summary
To browse the sites that you add, select FTP from the Places list in the standard
file selection dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name of FTP Site
Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com).

Log On As
Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific
user name.
Anonymous
Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user. If the FTP site does not
allow anonymous logons, select User and enter a valid user name.
User
Logs you on to the FTP site using the specified user name.

Password
Specifies the password to use to log on to the FTP site.

Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box | 837

Add
Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard
file selection dialog box.

Modify
Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name, logon name, and
password.

Remove
Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the
standard file selection dialog box.

FTP Sites
Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file
selection dialog boxes.

URL
Displays the URL for the selected FTP site.

OPEN Command Prompt
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Open a Drawing

Opens an existing drawing file.
WhenFILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays the following Command
prompt.
Enter name of drawing to open:
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box.

838 | Chapter 15 O Commands

OPENDWFMARKUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Respond to Markups

Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Load Markup Set

Summary
Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups to
load into the Markup Set Manager.
NOTE When opening a digitally signed DWFx file, a message box is displayed
that warns you about saving a new version of the file will invalidate the attached
digital signature.

OPENONLINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Opens the AutoCAD WS Editor in a web browser and displays an online copy
of the current drawing for online editing and sharing.

Access Methods

Button

OPENDWFMARKUP | 839

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Open Online
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Open Online
Toolbar: Online

Summary
If the drawing has never been uploaded to AutoCAD WS, or if the latest version
is not available in your online storage, the drawing and any supporting files
are automatically uploaded.
You must save the drawing before you can continue with this command.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

OPENSHEETSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Manage a Sheet Set

Opens a selected sheet set.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: File ➤ Open Sheet Set

Summary
The Open Sheet Set dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.
In this dialog box, you can select a sheet set data (DST) file to load sheet set
information into the Sheet Set Manager.

840 | Chapter 15 O Commands

OPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Customizes the program settings.

Access Methods
Menu: Application menu
➤ Options
Menu: Tools ➤ Options
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected,
right-click in the drawing area. Click Options.
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, and click Options.

Summary
The Options dialog box is displayed.

Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Customizes the program settings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Drawing Icon
Signifies that an option is saved with the drawing, and affects only the current
drawing. An option saved in the registry is not displayed with a drawing file

OPTIONS | 841

icon, and affects all drawings in a work session. Options that are saved in the
registry are saved in the current profile.
Current Drawing
Displays the name of the current drawing above the tabs. (DWGNAME system
variable)

List of Tabs
The Options dialog box includes the following tabs:
■

Files on page 842

■

Display on page 847

■

Open and Save on page 850

■

Plot and Publish on page 854

■

System on page 859

■

User Preferences on page 862

■

Drafting on page 866

■

Selection on page 869

Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Lists the folders in which the program searches for support, driver, menu, and
other files. Also lists optional, user-defined settings such as which dictionary
to use for checking spelling.
Paths are searched in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box.
If the same file exists in different folders, then the first instance found is used.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

842 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can specify a new location for the folder
or file selected in the list.

Support File Search Path
Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts,
customization files, plug-ins, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns
that are not in the current folder.

Device Driver File Search Path
Specifies the search path for device drivers for the video display, pointing
devices, printers, and plotters.
WARNING Do NOT remove DRV path and always add paths as secondary paths.

Customization Files
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main
customization file (acadlt.cuix).
Enterprise Customization File Specifies the location of an enterprise
customization file.
Custom Icon Location Specifies the location for custom icons used in
customization files.

Help and Miscellaneous File Names
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
Help File Specifies the location of the local Help file.
(HELPPREFIX on page 1532 system variable)
Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by
both the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web button on the Web
toolbar.

Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names
Specifies a number of optional settings.
Text Editor Application Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
(MTEXTED system variable)
Main Dictionary Displays the three letter keyword for the current main
spelling dictionary.
(DCTMAIN system variable)

Options Dialog Box | 843

Custom Dictionary File Displays the path and file name of the current custom
spelling dictionary.
(DCTCUST system variable)
Alternate Font File Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified
font file cannot be located.
(FONTALT system variable)
If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed, from which
you can choose an available font.
Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
(FONTMAP system variable)

Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names
Specifies settings related to plotting.
Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the
temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release
14 or earlier. The default name is the drawing name plus the .plt file extension.
The default name used with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing
name-layout name plus the .plt file name extension. Some plotting device drivers,
however, use a different plot file extension.
Print Spool Executable Specifies the application to use for print spooling.
You can enter the executable file name as well as any command line arguments
you want to use. For example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to spool plot
files to myspool.bat and have a unique plot file name automatically generated.
See “Use AutoSpool” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
PostScript Prolog Section Name Present for legacy reasons only. Autodesk
has dropped active support of PostScript and the PSIN, PSOUT, and PSPROLOG
commands.

Printer Support File Path
Specifies search path settings for printer support files. Settings with multiple
paths are searched in the specified order.
Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files.
Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration
files (PC3 files).
Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a .pmp
file extension, or printer description files.

844 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Plot Style Table Search Path Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb
extension, or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and
color-dependent plot style tables).

Automatic Save File Location
Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the
Open and Save tab.
(SAVEFILEPATH system variable)

Color Book Locations
Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors
in the Select Color dialog box. You can define multiple folders for each path
specified. This option is saved with the user profile.

Template Settings
Specifies the drawing template settings.
Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path to locate drawing template
files used by the Start Up wizard and New dialog box.
Sheet Set Template File Location Specifies the path to locate sheet set
template files used by the Create Sheet Set wizard.
Default Template File Name for QNEW Specifies the drawing template file
used by the QNEW command.
Default Template for Sheet Creation and Page Setup Overrides Specifies
the default template file that is used for creating new sheets and to store page
setup overrides that can be applied to Publish operations from the Sheet Set
Manager.

Tool Palettes File Locations
Specifies the path for tool palette support files.

Authoring Palette File Locations
Specifies the path for the Block Authoring Palettes support files. Block
Authoring Palettes are used in the Block Editor and provide tools for creating
dynamic blocks.

Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File
on the Open and Save tab. (LOGFILEPATH system variable)

Action Recorder Settings
Specifies the locations used to store recorded action macros or where additional
action macros are located for playback.

Options Dialog Box | 845

Actions Recording File Location Specifies the path used to store new action
macros.
(ACTRECPATH system variable)
Additional Actions Reading File Locations Specifies the additional paths to
use when locating available action macros for playback.
(ACTPATH system variable)

Plot and Publish Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automatically
Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish tab.

Temporary Drawing File Location
Specifies the location to store temporary files. This program creates temporary
files and then deletes them when you exit the program. If you plan to run the
program from a write-protected folder (for example, if you are working on a
network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your
temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-protected.
Windows has a character limit of 255 for the combined file name and path
length of temporary files. You can modify this limit from the Options dialog
box, Files tab, under Temporary Drawing File Location.

Temporary External Reference File Location
Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files.
(XLOADPATH system variable)

DGN Mapping Setups Location
Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups
are stored. This location must exist and have read/write permissions for DGN
commands to function normally.

Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what
you selected in the List of Folders and Files.

Add
Adds a search path for the selected folder.

Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.

Move Up
Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path.

846 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Move Down
Moves the selected search path below the following search path.

Set Current
Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.

Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Customizes the display.

Options Dialog Box | 847

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Window Elements
Controls display settings specific to the drawing environment.
Color scheme
Controls color settings in a dark or light color for elements such as the status
bar, title bar, ribbon bar, and the application menu frame.
Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window
Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area.
Display Drawing Status Bar
Displays the drawing status bar, which displays several tools for scaling
annotations.
When the drawing status bar is turned on it displays at the bottom of the
drawing area. When the drawing status bar is turned off, the tools found on
the drawing status bar are moved to the application status bar.
Use Large Buttons for Toolbars
Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 32 pixels.
Resize Ribbon Icons to Standard Sizes
Scales the small ribbon icons to 16 x 16 pixels and the large ribbon icons to
32 x 32 pixels when they do not match the standard icon sizes.
(RIBBONICONRESIZE on page 1643 system variable)
Show Tooltips
Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface
elements.
(TOOLTIPS on page 1689 system variable)
Show shortcut keys in Tooltips
Displays shortcut keys in the tooltip (Alt + Key) (Ctrl + Key).
Show extended Tooltips
Controls the display of extended tooltips.
Number of seconds to delay
Sets the delay time between the display of basic tooltips and extended tooltips.

848 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Show rollover Tooltips
Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object.
(ROLLOVERTIPS on page 1646 system variable)
Colors
Displays the Color Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify colors
of elements in the main application window.
Fonts
Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box. Use this dialog box to
specify the font for the command window text.

Layout Elements
Controls options for existing and new layouts. A layout is a paper space
environment in which you can set up drawings for plotting.
Display Layout and Model Tabs
Displays the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area. When
this option is cleared, the tabs are replaced by buttons on the status bar.
Display Printable Area
Displays the printable area in a layout. The printable area is represented by
the area within the dashed line and is determined by the selected output
device.
Display Paper Background
Displays a representation of the specified paper size in a layout. The paper size
and plot scale determine the size of the paper background.
Display Paper Shadow
Displays a shadow around the paper background in layout. This option is not
available if the Display Paper Background option is cleared.
Show Page Setup Manager for New Layouts
Displays the Page Setup Manager the first time you click a layout tab. Use this
dialog box to set options related to paper and plot settings.
Create Viewport in New Layouts
Creates a single viewport automatically when you create a new layout.

Crosshair Size
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.

Options Dialog Box | 849

(CURSORSIZE system variable)

Display Resolution
Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to improve
display quality, the impact on performance is significant.
Arc and Circle Smoothness
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.
(VIEWRES command)
Segments in a Polyline Curve
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline
generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
(SPLINESEGS system variable)

Display Performance
Controls display settings that affect performance.
Apply Solid Fill
Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in.
(FILLMODE system variable)
Show Text Boundary Frame Only
Controls how text is displayed.
(QTEXTMODE system variable)

Fade Control
Controls the fading intensity value of DWG xrefs.
Xref Display
Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects.
(XDWGFADECTL on page 1728 system variable)
This option only affects the display on the screen. It does not affect plotting
or plot preview.

Open and Save Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

850 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Controls options that relate to opening and saving files.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

File Save
Controls settings related to saving a file.
Save As
Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE, SAVEAS,
QSAVE, SHAREWITHSEEK on page 1118 and WBLOCK. The file format selected
for this option becomes the default format for saving drawings.
NOTE AutoCAD LT 2004 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD LT 2004,
AutoCAD LT 2005, and AutoCAD LT 2006 releases. AutoCAD LT 2007 is used by
AutoCAD LT 2007, AutoCAD LT 2008, and AutoCAD LT 2009 releases.
Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects
Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity.
(SAVEFIDELITY on page 1647 system variable)

Options Dialog Box | 851

Annotative objects may have multiple . Annotative objects are decomposed
and scale representations are saved to separate layers, which are named based
on their original layer and appended with a number.
NOTE Enabling Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects only impacts
drawings saved to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD LT 2007 and earlier).
Maintain Drawing Size Compatibility
Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
(LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT on page 1561 system variable)
Thumbnail Preview Settings
Displays the Thumbnail Preview Settings dialog box, which controls whether
thumbnail previews are updated when the drawing is saved.
Incremental Save Percentage
Sets the percentage of potentially wasted space in a drawing file. Full saves
eliminate wasted space. Incremental saves are faster, but they increase the size
of the drawing.
(ISAVEPERCENT system variable)
If you set Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full save. For
optimum performance, set the value to 50. If hard disk space becomes an
issue, set the value to 25. If you set the value to 20 or less, performance of the
SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows significantly.

File Safety Precautions
Assists in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors.
Automatic Save
Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify. You can specify
the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system
variable.SAVEFILE (read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file.
Minutes Between Saves: When Automatic Save is on, specifies how often the
drawing is saved.
(SAVETIME system variable)
Create Backup Copy with Each Save
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
(ISAVEBAK system variable)
For information about using backup files, see Create and Restore Backup Files
in the User's Guide.

852 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Maintain a Log File
Writes the contents of the text window to a log file. (LOGFILEMODE on page
1571 system variable, see also LOGFILEPATH and LOGFILENAME)
File Extension for Temporary Files
Specifies a unique extension for temporary save files. The default extension
is .ac$.
Security Options
Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when
you save a file.
Display Digital Signature Information
Presents digital signature information when a file with a valid digital signature
is opened. (SIGWARN on page 1658 system variable)

File Open
Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files.
Number of Recently Used Files
Controls the number of recently used files that are listed in the File menu for
quick access. Valid values are 0 to 9.
Display Full Path In Title
Displays the full path of the active drawing in the drawing's title bar, or in
the application window title bar if the drawing is maximized.

Application Menu
Number of Recently Used Files
Controls the number of recently used files listed in the application menu’s
Recent Documents quick menu. Valid values are 0 to 50.

External References (Xrefs)
Controls the settings that relate to editing and loading external references.
Demand Load Xrefs
Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the
referenced drawing or a copy.
(XLOADCTL system variable)
■

Disabled: Turns off demand loading.

Options Dialog Box | 853

■

Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves performance. Select the
Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when working with clipped
xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index. When this option is selected,
other users cannot edit the file while it is being referenced.

■

Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of the
referenced drawing. Other users can edit the original drawing.

Retain Changes to Xref Layers
Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
(VISRETAIN system variable)

Plot and Publish Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls options related to plotting and publishing.

854 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Default Plot Settings For New Drawings
Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in
AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000
or later format.
Use As Default Output Device
Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in
AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000
or later format.
The list displays any plotter configuration files (PC3) found in the plotter
configuration search path and any system printers that are configured in the
system.
Use Last Successful Plot Settings
Sets the plotting settings to match those of the last successful plot.

Options Dialog Box | 855

Add or Configure Plotters
Displays the Plotter Manager (a Windows system window). You can add or
configure a plotter with the Plotter Manager.

Plot To File
Specifies the default location for plot to file operations.

Background Processing Options
Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and
publishing.
You can use background plotting to start a job you are plotting or publishing
and immediately return to work on your drawing while your job is plotted or
published as you work. (BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable)
Background plot and publish details are available through the Plot and Publish
status bar icon shortcut menu.
Enable Background Plotting When
Plotting: Specifies that plot jobs are processed in the background. This setting
is also affected by the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable.
Publishing: Specifies that published jobs are processed in the background. This
setting is also affected by the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable.
NOTE When -PLOT, PLOT, -PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are used in a script (SCR file),
the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored, and -PLOT, PLOT,
-PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground.

Plot and Publish Log File
Controls options for saving a plot and publish log file as a comma-separated
value (CSV) file that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program. To view or
change the location of the log file, see the Files tab in the Options dialog box
on page 842.
This log file contains information about plot and publish jobs such as:
■

Job ID

■

Job name

■

Sheet set name

■

Category name

■

Date and time started and completed

■

Sheet name

856 | Chapter 15 O Commands

■

Full file path

■

Selected layout name

■

Page setup name

■

Named page setup path

■

Device name

■

Paper size name

■

Final status

Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log
Specifies that a log file that contains information about all plot and publish
jobs is automatically saved.
Save One Continuous Plot Log
Specifies that a single log file that contains information about all plot and
publish jobs is automatically saved.
Save One Log File Per Plot
Specifies that a separate log file is created for each plot and publish job.

Auto Publish
Specifies whether drawings are published automatically to DWF, DWFx, or
PDF files. You can also control options for automatic publishing.
Automatic Publish
When this options is selected, drawings are published to DWF, DWFx, or PDF
files automatically when you save or close a drawing file. (AUTOMATICPUB
on page 1393, AUTODWFPUBLISH system variables)
Automatic Publish Settings
Displays the Auto Publish Settings palette on page 89 where you can customize
the settings for publishing including when it occurs and the location to store
the published files.

General Plot Options
Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible
Uses the paper size specified in the Page Setup dialog box as long as the selected
output device can plot to this paper size. (PAPERUPDATE system variable =
0)

Options Dialog Box | 857

If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size, the program displays
a warning message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter
configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device
is a system printer.
Use the Plot Device Paper Size
Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or
in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer.
(PAPERUPDATE system variable = 1)
System Printer Spool Alert
Controls whether you are alerted when the plotted drawing is spooled through
a system printer because of an input or output port conflict.
■

Always Alert (And Log Errors): Alerts you and always logs an error when the
plotted drawing spools through a system printer.

■

Alert First Time Only (And Log Errors): Alerts you once and always logs an error
when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.

■

Never Alert (And Log First Error): Never alerts you and logs only the first error
when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.

■

Never Alert (Do Not Log Errors): Never alerts you or logs an error when the
plotted drawing spools through a system printer.

OLE Plot Quality
Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
(OLEQUALITY system variable)
Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects
Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads
when plotting.
(OLESTARTUP system variable)
Hide System Printer
Controls whether Windows system printers are displayed in the Plot and Page
Setup dialog boxes. This option hides standard Windows system printers only.
It does not hide Windows system printers that have been configured using
the Add-a-Plotter wizard.
You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot and Page Setup dialog
boxes by moving a device's PC3 file out of the Plotters folder and its subfolders.

858 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Specify Plot Offset Relative To
Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge
of the paper.
(PLOTOFFSET system variable).
Printable Area
Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the printable area.
Edge of Paper
Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the edge of the paper.

Plot Stamp Settings
Opens the Plot Stamp dialog box.

Plot Style Table Settings
Opens the Plot Style Table Settings dialog box.

System Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls system settings.

Options Dialog Box | 859

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Controls settings that relate to configuration of the graphics display system.
Performance Settings

Current Pointing Device
Controls options that relate to the pointing device.
Current Pointing Device
Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers.
■

Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system pointing device as current.

■

Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab-compatible digitizer as current.

Accept Input From
Specifies whether the program accepts input from both a mouse and a digitizer
or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.

860 | Chapter 15 O Commands

User Name
Changes the user name with the Windows login information.
This name is inserted when you use the time and date stamp (REVDATE) and
is useful if different people work on the same drawing.
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs.

General Options
Hidden Messages Settings
Controls the display of previously hidden messages.
Displays the Hidden Message Settings dialog box on page 889.
Display OLE Text Size Dialog
Displays the OLE Text Size dialog box when OLE objects are inserted into
drawings.
Beep on Error in User Input
Sounds an alarm beep when an invalid entry is detected.
Allow Long Symbol Names
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers)
stored in definition tables.
(EXTNAMES system variable)

Live Enabler Options
Specifies whether the program checks for object enablers.
Using object enablers, you can display and use custom objects in AutoCAD
drawings.
Check Web for Live Enablers
Specifies how the program checks for object enablers.
(PROXYWEBSEARCH system variable)
Maximum Number of Unsuccessful Checks
Specifies the number of times to check for object enablers if unsuccessful.
For more information, see “Work with Custom and Proxy Objects”.

Autodesk Exchange
Controls whether the source for Autodesk Exchange is online or local.
Access Online Content (including Help) When Available

Options Dialog Box | 861

Specifies whether information is accessed from the Autodesk website, or from
locally installed files.
When online, the latest Help information and other online resources are
accessible.
Offline Help Browser
Specifies whether to use Microsoft® Internet Explorer® or your default Web
browser for viewing Help.

InfoCenter
Balloon Notifications
Controls the content, frequency, and duration of balloon notifications in the
upper-right corner of the application window.
Displays the InfoCenter Settings dialog box on page 890.

User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls options that optimize the way you work.

862 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Windows Standard Behavior
Controls keystroke and right-click behavior.
Double-click Editing
Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area.
(DBLCLKEDIT system variable)
Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area
Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are
available in the drawing area.
(SHORTCUTMENU system variable)
If this option is cleared, right-click is interpreted as Enter.
Right-Click Customization

Options Dialog Box | 863

Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog box. This dialog box provides
further definition for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option.
(SHORTCUTMENU system variable)

Insertion Scale
Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing.
Source Content Units
Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
(INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable)
If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted.
Target Drawing Units
Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
(INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable)

Fields
Sets preferences related to fields.
Display Background of Fields
Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
(FIELDDISPLAY system variable)
When this option is cleared, fields are displayed with the same background
as any text.
Field Update Settings
Displays the Field Update Settings dialog box. (FIELDEVAL system variable)

Priority for Coordinate Data Entry
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override
running object snaps.
(OSNAPCOORD system variable)
Running Object Snap
Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times.
(OSNAPCOORD system variable = 0)
Keyboard Entry
Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps at all times.
(OSNAPCOORD system variable = 1)
Keyboard Entry Except Scripts

864 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps, except in scripts.
(OSNAPCOORD system variable = 2)

Associative Dimensioning
Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy-style, nonassociative
dimension objects are created.
Make New Dimensions Associative
Creates associative dimensions, which automatically adjust their locations,
orientations, and measurement values when the geometric objects associated
with them are modified. (DIMASSOC system variable)

Hyperlink
Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks.
Display Hyperlink Cursor, Tooltip, and Shortcut Menu
Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu.
(HYPERLINKOPTIONS on page 597 command)
The shortcut menu provides additional hyperlink options when you select an
object that contains a hyperlink and then right-click in the drawing area.

Undo/Redo
Controls Undo and Redo for Zoom and Pan.
Combine Zoom and Pan Commands
Groups multiple and consecutive zoom and pan commands as a single action
for undo and redo operations.
NOTE Pan and zoom commands that are started from the menu are not combined,
and always remain separate actions.
Combine Layer Property Changes
Groups layer property changes made from the Layer Properties Manager.

Block Editor Settings
Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box on page 135. Use this dialog box
to control the environment settings of the Block Editor.

Lineweight Settings
Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box. Use this dialog box to set
lineweight options, such as display properties and defaults, and also to set the
current lineweight.

Options Dialog Box | 865

Default Scale List
Displays the Default Scale List dialog box to manage the default list of scales
displayed in several dialog boxes associated with layout viewports and plotting.
You can delete all custom scales and restore the default list of scales.

Drafting Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Sets options for several editing features, including AutoSnap and AutoTrack.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

866 | Chapter 15 O Commands

AutoSnap Settings
Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet.
When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press Tab to cycle
through all the snap points available for that object.
Marker
Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The marker is a geometric symbol
that is displayed when the crosshairs move over a snap point. (AUTOSNAP
system variable)
Magnet
Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an automatic movement
of the crosshairs that locks the crosshairs onto the nearest snap point.
(AUTOSNAP system variable)
Display AutoSnap Tooltip
Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The tooltip is a label that
describes which part of the object you are snapping to. (AUTOSNAP system
variable)
Display AutoSnap Aperture Box
Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off.
(APBOX system variable)
The aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap
to an object.
Colors
Displays the Drawing Window Colors dialog box.

AutoSnap Marker Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.

Object Snap Options
Sets running object snap modes.
(OSNAP command)
Ignore Hatch Objects
Specifies options for object snaps. (OSOPTIONS system variable)

Options Dialog Box | 867

AutoTrack Settings
™

Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available
when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS).
Display Polar Tracking Vector
Displays a vector along specified angles when polar tracking is on. With polar
tracking, you can draw lines along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors,
such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees. (TRACKPATH system variable = 2)
Display Full-Screen Tracking Vector
Tracking vectors are lines from which you can draw objects at specific angles
or in specific relationships to other objects. If this option is selected, alignment
vectors are displayed as infinite lines. (TRACKPATH system variable = 1)
Display AutoTrack Tooltip
Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet.
(AUTOSNAP system variable)

Alignment Point Acquisition
Automatic
Displays tracking vectors automatically when the aperture moves over an
object snap.
Shift to Acquire
Displays tracking vectors when you press Shift and move the aperture over
an object snap.

Aperture Size
Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels.
(APERTURE system variable)
When Display AutoSnap Aperture Box is selected (or when APBOX is set to
1), the aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap
to an object. The aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can
be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range
from 1 to 50 pixels.

Drafting Tooltip Appearance
Controls the color, size, and transparency of drafting tooltips.
Settings
Displays the Tooltip Appearance dialog box.

868 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Quick Reference
Sets options for selecting objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pickbox Size
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. (PICKBOX system variable)
The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in editing commands.

Selection Modes
Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.
Noun/Verb Selection

Options Dialog Box | 869

Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you
issue a command. (PICKFIRST system variable)
Many but not all editing and inquiry commands support noun/verb selection.
Use Shift to Add to Selection
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or
add to it. (PICKADD system variable)
To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of
the drawing.
Object Grouping
Selects all objects in a group when you select one object in that group. With
GROUP on page 541 you can create and name a set of objects for selection.
(PICKSTYLE system variable)
Associative Hatch
Determines which objects are selected when you select an associative hatch.
If this option is selected, boundary objects are also selected when you select
an associative hatch. (PICKSTYLE system variable)
Implied Windowing
Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside
an object. (PICKAUTO system variable)
Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects that are entirely
inside the window's boundaries. Drawing from right to left selects objects
within and crossing the window's boundaries.
Allow Press Drag on Object
Controls the window selection method. (PICKAUTO on page 1610 system
variable)
If this option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by clicking two
separate points with the pointing device.
Window Selection Method
Use the dropdown list to change the PICKDRAG on page 1611 system variable
setting.
Object Limit for Properties Palette

870 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Determines the limit of the number of objects that can be changed at one
time with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes. (PROPOBJLIMIT system
variable)

Selection Preview
Highlights objects as the pickbox cursor rolls over them. (PREVIEWEFFECT
system variable)
When a Command Is Active
Displays selection previewing only when a command is active and the Select
Objects prompt is displayed. (SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable)
When No Command Is Active
Displays selection previewing when no commands are active.
(SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable)
Visual Effect Settings
Displays the Visual Effect Settings dialog box.

Grip Size
(GRIPSIZE system variable)

Grips
Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected.
Grip Colors
Displays the Grip Colors dialog box on page 873 where you can specify the
colors for different grip status and elements.
Show Grips
Controls the display of grips on selected objects. Displaying grips in a drawing
significantly affects performance. Clear this option to optimize performance.
(GRIPS system variable)
Show Grips within Blocks
Controls the display of grips in blocks. (GRIPBLOCK system variable)

Options Dialog Box | 871

Show Grip Tips
Displays grip-specific tips when the cursor hovers over a grip on a custom
object that supports grip tips. This option has no effect on standard objects.
(GRIPTIPS system variable)
Show Dynamic Grip Menu
Controls the display of dynamic menu when pausing over a multi-functional
grip. (GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL on page 1526 system variable)
Allow Ctrl-cycling Behavior
Allows the Ctrl-cycling behavior for multi-functional grips.
(GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL on page 1526 system variable)
Show Single Grip on Groups
Displays a single grip for an object group. (GROUPDISPLAYMODE on page
1529 system variable)
Show Bounding Box on Groups
Displays a bounding box around the extents of grouped objects.
(GROUPDISPLAYMODE on page 1529 system variable)
Object Selection Limit for Display of Grips
Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the
specified number of objects. (GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable)
The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default setting is 100.

Ribbon Options
Contextual Tab States Button
The Ribbon Contextual Tab State Options dialog box on page 885 is displayed,
where you can set object selection settings for the display of ribbon contextual
tabs.

872 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Grip Colors Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Sets the color properties of the grip.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Settings
Controls the color settings of the grip.
Unselected Grip Color
Controls the color of unselected grips.
(GRIPCOLOR on page 1524 system variable)

Selected Grip Color
Controls the color of selected grips.
(GRIPHOT on page 1525 system variable)
Hover Grip Color
Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.

Options Dialog Box | 873

(GRIPHOVER on page 1525 system variable)
Grip Contour Color
Controls the color of the grip contour.
(GRIPCONTOUR on page 1524 system variable)

Alternate Font Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Application Fonts

Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be
located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Files tab

Summary
You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT
system variable.
If you do not specify an alternate font, when you open a drawing containing
fonts that cannot be located, a dialog box is displayed in which you specify
a font to use for each missing font.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

874 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Font Name
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all SHX fonts
in the Fonts folder.
Font Style
Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. If the missing
font is a Big Font, this option changes to Big Font and lists all available
Asian-language Big Font files.

Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Sets the display colors of the interface elements for each context in the
application.

Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box | 875

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Display tab

Summary
A context is an operating environment such as model space. An interface element
is an item that is visible in that context such as the crosshairs pointer or the
background color.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Context
A context is an environment such as model space. Interface elements can have
different colors assigned depending on the context. The context you select
displays a list of associated elements. Select a context, an interface element,
and then a color.

Interface Element
Lists the interface elements in a selected context. An interface element is an
item that is visible in a context such as the background color. Select an
interface element, and then a color.

Color
Lists the available color settings to apply to the selected interface element.
You can choose one of the colors in the color list or choose Select Color to
open the Select Color dialog box.
Color tinting applies pure red, blue and green hues using the luminance
(lightness) of the color you specify while increasing the color saturation by
50%.
Tint for X, Y Controls whether X- and Y-axis color tinting is applied to the
following interface elements: crosshairs pointer, Autotrack vectors, and drafting
tooltips.
Restore Current Element
Restores the currently selected interface element to its default color.
Restore Current Context
Restores all interface elements in the currently selected context to their default
colors.
Restore All Contexts

876 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Restores all interface elements back to their default color settings.
Restore Classic Colors
Restores only the interface elements of 2D model space back to the AutoCAD
2008 classic color settings.

Preview
Displays a preview of the drawing based on defined settings.

Command Line Window Font Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Application Fonts

Sets the font displayed in the Command window.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Display tab

Summary
The text font used in the Command window can be changed to suit your
preferences.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Command Line Window Font Dialog Box | 877

Font Lists the system fonts available for selection.
Font Style Lists the styles available to apply to the current font.
Size Lists the font sizes available for the current font.

Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls whether thumbnail previews are updated when the drawing is saved.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Open and Save tab

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Drawing
Save a Thumbnail Preview Image
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
(RASTERPREVIEW system variable)
Use the View when Drawing Last Saved
Uses the last saved view to generate the thumbnail preview for the drawing.
Use the Home View
Uses the Home view saved with the drawing to generate the thumbnail preview
for the drawing.

Home View
Set current View as Home
Defines the current view of the drawing as the Home view.
Reset Home to Default
Restores the default Home view.

878 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Sheets and Views
Generate Sheet, Sheet View and Model View Thumbnails
Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts.
(UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable)
Sheet thumbnails are displayed on the Sheet List tab, sheet view thumbnails
on the View List tab, and model space view thumbnails on the Resource
Drawings tab.
Performance-Accuracy Slider
Specifies when thumbnails are updated and which thumbnails are updated.
(UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable)
Information Panel Displays information about the current position of the
slider.

Named Views
Sets the size for thumbnails created for named views.
Named views
Sets the maximum size of the named views.

Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Specifies settings for plot style tables.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box | 879

Default Plot Style Behavior for New Drawings
Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when
opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
A plot style is a collection of property settings defined in a plot style table and
applied when the drawing is plotted. Changing the default plot style setting
by using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing.
The default plot style setting is Use Color Dependent Plot Styles. The Plot Style
Control on the Properties toolbar is unavailable by default. The Plot Style
Control is available when you select the Use Named Plot Styles option and
open a new drawing. (PSTYLEPOLICY system variable)
Use Color Dependent Plot Styles
Uses color-dependent plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created
in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier. (PSTYLEPOLICY system variable = 1)
Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers from the AutoCAD Color Index
to create a plot style table with a .ctb file extension. Each color is defined by
a name or number ranging from 1 to 255. You can assign each color number
to a different pen on a pen plotter to achieve different property settings in
the plotted drawing. If this option is selected, a plot style is created for each
color setting.
Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles as the default,
you can convert it to Use Named Plot Styles using the CONVERTCTB and
CONVERTPSTYLES commands.
Use Named Plot Styles
Uses named plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier
versions of AutoCAD LT. The plot style is defined in the plot style table
attached to the layout. Named plot style tables are files with the file extension
.stb. ( PSTYLEPOLICY system variable = 0)
Once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default, you can
convert it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles using the CONVERTCTB and
CONVERTPSTYLES commands. However, once you use CONVERTPSTYLES to
convert a drawing from using a named plot style table to a color plot style
table, you cannot use CONVERTPSTYLES to convert it back to using a named
plot style table.

Current Plot Style Table Settings
Specifies the current plot style table settings that are applied to new drawings.
Default Plot Style Table

880 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Specifies the default plot style table to attach to new drawings. A plot style
table is a file with a .ctb or an .stb extension that includes and defines plot
styles.
If you are using color-dependent plot styles, this option lists all color dependent
plot style tables found in the search path as well as the value of None. If you
are using named plot styles, this option lists all named plot styles tables.
Default Plot Style for Layer 0
Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0
when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
(DEFLPLSTYLE system variable)
Default Plot Style for Objects
Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a
drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating
a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
(DEFPLSTYLE system variable)
Add or Edit Plot Style Tables
Displays the Plot Style Manager (a Windows Explorer window), where you
can create or edit plot style tables.

Right-Click Customization Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls whether right-clicking in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu
or has the same effect as pressing Enter.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, User Preferences tab

Right-Click Customization Dialog Box | 881

Summary
If you are accustomed to using the right-click method for Enter while a
command is active, you might prefer to disable Command shortcut menus
from this dialog box. You can also control shortcut menus by using the
SHORTCUTMENU system variable.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click
Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A
longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer
click in milliseconds.

Default Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when no
objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last Command
Disables the Default shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing
area when no objects are selected and no commands are in progress is the
same as pressing Enter, which repeats the last issued command.
Shortcut Menu
Enables the Default shortcut menu.

Edit Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when one
or more objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last Command
Disables the Edit shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing area
when one or more objects are selected and no commands are in progress is
the same as pressing Enter, which repeats the last issued command.
Shortcut Menu
Enables the Edit shortcut menu.

Command Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when a
command is in progress.
Enter

882 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Disables the Command shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing
area when a command is in pro-gress is the same as pressing Enter.
Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled
Enables the Command shortcut menu.
Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present
Enables the Command shortcut menu only when command options are
available at the Command prompt. If no options are available, a right-click is
the same as pressing Enter.

Field Update Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Access Methods
Menu: Options dialog box, User Preferences tab

Summary
Controls how fields are updated. (FIELDEVAL system variable)

List of Options
The following options are displayed
Open
Automatically updates fields when the file is opened.
Save
Automatically updates fields when the file is saved.
Plot
Automatically updates fields when the file is plotted.
eTransmit
Automatically updates fields when the file is sent using ETRANSMIT.

Field Update Settings Dialog Box | 883

Regen
Automatically updates fields when the file is regenerated.

Visual Effect Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the appearance of selection previewing.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Selection Preview Effect
Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.
(PREVIEWEFFECT system variable)
Preview Area
Displays the effect of the current settings.
Face Highlighting Controls the face highlighting setting.
■

Texture Fill. Highlights the face with texture fill effect.

Line Highlighting Controls the line highlighting settings.
■

Dash. Displays dashed lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over an object.
This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if
you clicked. Dashed lines are the default display for selected objects.
(PREVIEWEFFECT system variable = 0)

■

Thicken. Displays thickened lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over an
object. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected
if you clicked. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable = 1)

884 | Chapter 15 O Commands

■

Both. Displays thickened, dashed lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over
an object. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be
selected if you clicked. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable = 2)

Advanced Options
Displays the Advanced Preview Options dialog box.

Selection Area Effect
Controls the appearance of selection areas during selection preview.
Preview Area
Displays the effect of the current settings.
Indicate Selection Area
Controls the display of effects for selection areas.
(SELECTIONAREA system variable)
Window Selection Color
Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection.
(WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable)
Crossing Selection Color
Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection.
(CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable)
Selection Area Opacity
Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing
selection.
(SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system variable)

Ribbon Contextual Tab State Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Sets object selection settings for the display of ribbon contextual tabs

Ribbon Contextual Tab State Options Dialog Box | 885

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab

List of Options
The following options are available in this dialog box.

Contextual Tab Display
Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or
double-click an object.
(RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT on page 1641 system variable)
Do Not Switch To Contextual Tab on Selection
When an object or selection set is single- or double-clicked, focus is not
automatically switched to ribbon contextual tabs. ( RIBBONSELECTMODE on
page 1643 system variable = 0)
Show On Single-click
When an object or selection set is single-clicked, focus is switched to the first
ribbon contextual tab. ( RIBBONSELECTMODE on page 1643 system variable =
1)
Show On Double-click
When an object or selection set is double-clicked, focus is switched to the first
ribbon contextual tab. ( RIBBONSELECTMODE on page 1643 system variable =
2)

Object Selection Options
Retain Pickfirst Selections When Commands Are Invoked From a
Contextual Tab
When checked, the pickfirst selection set remains selected after a command
is started from a ribbon contextual tab. (RIBBONSELECTMODE on page 1643
system variable = 1)
When cleared, the pickfirst selection set does not remain selected after a
command is started from a ribbon contextual tab.
Object Selection Maximum for Contextual Tab Display
Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon
property controls or a contextual tab.
(RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM on page 1642 system variable)

886 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Allows you to turn selection cycling on and off and configure selection cycling
display options.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab

Summary
Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
(PREVIEWFILTER system variable)

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Exclude Objects on Locked Layers
Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
( PREVIEWFILTER system variable)

Exclude
Turns off selection previewing for the selected object types. ( PREVIEWFILTER
system variable)
Xrefs
Excludes objects in xrefs from selection previewing. This option is on by
default. ( PREVIEWFILTER system variable)
Tables
Excludes tables from selection previewing. This option is on by default. (
PREVIEWFILTER system variable)
Groups
Excludes objects in groups from selection previewing. This option is off by
default. ( PREVIEWFILTER system variable)

Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box | 887

Multiline Text
Excludes multiline text objects from selection previewing. This option is off
by default. ( PREVIEWFILTER system variable)
Hatches
Excludes hatch objects from selection previewing. This option is off by default.
( PREVIEWFILTER system variable)

Transparency Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls transparency for dockable windows.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the title bar on the dockable window and click
Transparency.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
How transparent should the palette be? Sets the degree of transparency for
the palette. The palette has maximum transparency when the slider is at Clear.
With the slider at Solid, the palette is opaque.
(PALETTEOPAQUE on page 1603 system variable)
How transparent should the palette be on mouse-over? Sets the degree of
transparency for the palette on mouse-over. The palette has maximum
transparency when the slider is at Clear. When the palette is at Solid, it is
opaque on mouse-over.
(ROLLOVEROPACITY on page 1645 system variable)
NOTE The degree of transparency on mouse-over cannot be more than the degree
of transparency of the palette.

888 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Click to Preview Preview the palette mouse-over transparency value when
the button is held down. The palette returns to the default transparency set
when the button is released.
Apply these settings to all palettes Sets the degree of transparency for the
palette and mouse-over for all palettes.
(APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES on page 1384 system variable)
Disable all window transparency (global) Disables transparency for all
palettes.
(GLOBALOPACITY on page 1520 system variable)

Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Up the Drawing Area

Displays all dialog boxes that you marked to not display again or to always
use a specified option in them.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, System tab

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Search Finds messages by using one or more keywords.
Check messages to show Displays the list of hidden messages.
Message preview Displays the currently checked message.
The tree view displays the dialog information in the form below.
■

Application Name
■

Category
■

Dialog title

Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box | 889

InfoCenter Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange

Provides options for controlling the content and duration of balloon
notifications that display in the upper-right corner of the application window.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, System tab

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enable Balloon Notification for These Sources Controls whether the balloon
notification feature is turned on or off.
Live Update Channel (New Software Updates) Controls whether notices
regarding product software updates are displayed.
Did You Know Messages Controls whether helpful messages and tips are
displayed.

890 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Did You Know messages provide Knowledge Base information and general
instructional messages. Click the text or the Expand icon to view the detailed
information.
Use Balloon Notification Display Time Displays the balloon message for the
number of seconds that you specify below.
Number of Seconds Balloon Notification Displays Specify the length of
time that the balloon displays before automatically closing.
% Transparency of Balloon Notification Controls the display transparency
of the balloons from 0 (opaque) to 80 (nearly transparent).

Default Scale List Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the default list of scales stored in the registry.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Options dialog box, User Preferences tab

Summary
When the scale list in a drawing is reset, the list is restored to the default list
of scales defined in the Default Scale List dialog box.
NOTE To control the list of scales for the current drawing, use the SCALELISTEDIT
on page 1098 command. After you add a new scale to the default scale list in the
registry, you can use the Reset button in the Edit Drawing Scales dialog box to
add the new scale to your drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Scale List
Metric Displays the default list of metric scales.
Imperial Displays the default list of imperial scales.

Default Scale List Dialog Box | 891

If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended
to the name.

Add
Displays the Add Scale dialog box.

Edit
Displays the Edit Scale dialog box.
NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales.

Move Up
Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list up one position.

Move Down
Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list down one position.

Delete
Removes all unreferenced scales from the scale list and leaves the referenced
scale when multiple scales are selected.

Reset
Deletes all scales and restores the default list of scales defined in AutoCAD LT.
You must press Reset separately for imperial scales and for metric scales.
Edit Edits the selected scale in-place in the scale list.
Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited.
Reset Deletes all custom scales and restores the default list of scales defined
in AutoCAD LT.

ORTHO
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)

Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

892 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Ortho
Command entry: F8
Command entry: 'ortho for transparent use

Summary
In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point
specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is
specified.

Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two
points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained
to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS.
Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as
being parallel to the Y axis.
In a 3D view, ORTHO is additionally defined as being parallel to the Z axis of
the UCS, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the
direction along the Z axis.

OSNAP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Object Snaps

Sets running object snap modes.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

OSNAP | 893

Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Osnap
Shortcut menu: Press Shift while right-clicking in the drawing area and
choose Osnap Settings.
Command entry: F3
Command entry: 'osnap for transparent use

Summary
The Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current osnap modes: current
Enter list of object snap modes on page 894: Enter names of object snap modes
separated with commas, or enter none or off

Object Snap Modes
Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters
of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with
commas.
ENDpoint

CENter

TANgent

MIDpoint

NODe

NEArest

INTersection

QUAdrant

PARallel

EXTension

INSertion

APParent Intersection

PERpendicular

For a description of each of these object snap modes, see the Object Snaps tab
of the Drafting Settings dialog box.
QUIck Snaps to the first snap point found. Quick must be used in conjunction
with other object snap modes.
NONe Turns off object snap modes.

894 | Chapter 15 O Commands

OVERKILL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines
partially overlapping or contiguous ones.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects
Menu: Modify ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects
Toolbar: Modify II ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects

Summary
Displays the Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box on page 896.
Removes redundant geometry.
■

Duplicate copies of objects are deleted

■

Arcs drawn over portions of circles are deleted

■

Lines, partially overlapping, drawn at the same angle are combined into
a single line

■

Duplicate line or arc segments overlapping polyline segments are deleted

If you enter -overkill at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

OVERKILL | 895

Delete Duplicate Objects Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Removes duplicate geometry as well as overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines.
Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones.

List of Prompts
Object Comparison Settings
Tolerance Controls the precision with which OVERKILL makes numeric
comparisons. If this value is 0, the two objects being compared must match
before OVERKILL modifies or deletes one of them.

Ignore Object Property:
Use these settings to determine which object properties are ignored during
comparison.
Color Object color is ignored.
Layer Object layers are ignored.

896 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Linetype Object linetypes are ignored.
Linetype Scale Object linetype scale is ignored.
Lineweight Object lineweight is ignored.
Thickness Object thickness is ignored.
Transparency Object transparency is ignored.
Plot style Object plot style is ignored.
Material Object material is ignored.

Options
Use these settings to control how OVERKILL deals with lines, arcs, and
polylines.
Optimize segments within polylines When selected, individual line and
arc segments within selected polylines are examined. Duplicate vertices and
segments are removed.
Also, OVERKILL compares individual polyline segments with completely
separate line and arc segments. If a polyline segment duplicates a line or arc
object, one of them is deleted.
If this option is not selected, polylines are compared as discreet objects and
two sub-options are not selectable.
Ignore polyline segment width Ignores segment width, while optimizing
polyline segments.
Do not break polylines Polyline objects are unchanged.
Combine colinear objects that partially overlap Overlapping objects are
combined into single objects.
Combine colinear objects when aligned end to end Objects that have
common endpoints are combined into single objects.
Maintain associative objects Associative objects are not deleted or modified.

Delete Duplicate Objects Dialog Box | 897

-OVERKILL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines
partially overlapping or contiguous ones.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter an option to change [Ignore on page 898/tOlerance on page 899/optimize
Plines on page 899/combine parTial overlap on page 899/combine Endtoend
on page 899/Associativity on page 899] :

List of Options
Ignore
Ignores one or more of the following properties during object comparison
■

None

■

All

■

Color

■

LAyer

■

Ltype

■

Ltscale

■

LWeight

■

Thickness

■

TRansparency

■

plotStyle

■

Material

898 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Tolerance Defines the value within which OVERKILL makes numeric
comparisons for determining object duplication.
Optimize Polylines Optimize segments within plines [segment wiDth/Break
polyline/Yes/No] :
■

Segment Width: ignore polyline segment width

■

Break Polyline: maintains polylines when optimizing polyline segments

■

Yes: Enabled by default. Honors polylines as discreet objects and deletes
non-polyline objects that overlap polylines.

■

No: Forces OVERKILL to examine polyline segments individually. Polyline
segments may be deleted as duplicates of non-polyline objects.

Combine Partial Overlap Overlapping objects area combined into single
objects.
Combine End to End Objects that have common endpoints are combined
into single objects.
Associativity Associative objects are not deleted or modified.

-OVERKILL | 899

900

P Commands

16

PAGESETUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each
new layout.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup
Menu: Application menu
➤ Print ➤ Page Setup
Menu: File ➤ Page Setup Manager
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model layout or a named (paper space) layout
and click Page Setup Manager.

Summary
The Page Setup Manager is displayed.

901

A page setup is a collection of plot device and other settings that determine
the appearance and format of your final output. These settings are stored in
the drawing file and can be modified and applied to other layouts.

Page Setup Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies the page setup for the current layout.

Summary
You can also create named page setups, modify existing ones, or import page
setups from other drawings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Layout
Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied.

902 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Page Setups
Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates
a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups
from other drawings.
Current Page Setup
Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout.
Page Setup List
Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout.
The list includes the named page setups and layouts that are available in the
drawing. Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are enclosed
in asterisks, with the named page setup in parentheses; for example, *Layout
1 (System Scale-to-fit)*. The current page setup is selected by default. You can
double-click a page setup in this list to set it as the current page setup for the
current layout.
The shortcut menu also provides options for removing and renaming page
setups.
Set Current
Sets the selected page setup as the current page setup for the current layout.
You cannot set the current layout as the current page setup.
New
Displays the New Page Setup dialog box, in which you can enter a name for
the new page setup and specify the page setup to use as a starting point.
Modify
Displays the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can edit the settings for the
selected page setup.

Selected Page Setup Details
Displays information about the selected page setup.
Device Name
Displays the name of the output device specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Plotter
Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Plot Size

Page Setup Manager | 903

Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the
currently selected page setup.
Description
Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup.

Display When Creating a New Layout
Specifies that the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when a new layout tab
is selected or a new layout is created.
You can reset this function by turning on the Show Page Setup Dialog for New
Layouts option on the Display tab of the Options dialog box.

New Page Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies a name for the new page setup, as well as the page setup to use as a
starting point.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

904 | Chapter 16 P Commands

New Page Setup Name
Specifies the name for the new page setup.

Start With
Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup. When
you click OK, the Page Setup dialog box is displayed with the settings of the
selected page setup, which you can modify as necessary.
 Specifies that no page setup is used as a starting point. The default
settings that are displayed in the Page Setup dialog box can be modified.
 Specifies that the default output device specified
in the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab, is set as the printer in the
new page setup.
 Specifies that the new page setup uses the settings specified
in the last plot job.

Page Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies page layout and plotting device settings.

Page Setup Dialog Box | 905

Summary
The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases:
■

When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager

■

When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager

The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can
be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Page Setup
Name Displays the name of the current page setup.
Icon
Indicates that the Page Setup dialog box was opened from a layout.

Printer/Plotter
Specifies a configured plotting device to use when plotting or publishing
layouts.
Name
Lists the available PC3 files or system printers from which you can select to
plot or publish the current layout. An icon in front of the device name
identifies it as a PC3 file or a system printer.
Properties
Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor (PC3 editor), in which you can view
or modify the current plotter configuration, ports, device, and media settings.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter Configuration Editor,
the Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box is displayed.
Plotter
Displays the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup.
Where
Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup.
Description

906 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup. You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor.
Partial Preview
Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper
size and printable area. The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area.

Paper Size
Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device.
If the selected plotter does not support the layout's selected paper size, a
warning is displayed, and you can select the plotter's default paper size or a
custom paper size.
A default paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file
with the Add-a-Plotter wizard. For information about this wizard, see “Set Up
Plotters and Printers” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. The paper size that you
select in the Page Setup dialog box is saved with the layout and overrides the
PC3 file settings.
The actual printable area of the page, which is determined by the selected
plotting device and paper size, is indicated in the layout by a dashed line.
If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the
plot is specified in pixels, not in inches or millimeters.

Plot Area
Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable
area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the
layout.
When plotting from the Model layout, plots the entire drawing area that is
defined by the grid limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view,
this option has the same effect as the Extents option.
Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains
objects. All geometry in the current layout is plotted. The drawing may be
regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting.
Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the current layout.

Page Setup Dialog Box | 907

View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command.
Window
Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify. When you specify the two
corners of the area to plot, the Window button becomes available.
Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners
of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values.

Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower-left corner of the
printable area or to the edge of the paper, depending on the setting made in
the Specify Plot Offset Relative To option (Options dialog box, Plot and Publish
tab). The Plot Offset area of the Page Setup dialog box displays the specified
plot offset option in parentheses.
The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device
and is represented by a dashed line in a layout. When you change to another
output device, the printable area may change.
You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative
value in the X and Y offset boxes. The plotter unit values are in inches or
millimeters on the paper.
Center the Plot
Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the
paper.
X
Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot
Offset Definition option.
Y
Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of the Plot
Offset Definition option.

Plot ScaleScale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units.
NOTE If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, the layout is plotted at 1:1
regardless of the setting specified in Scale.
Fit to Paper
Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom
scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes.

908 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Scale
Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You
can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters)
equal to the number of drawing units.
NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT.
Inch(es) =/mm =/Pixel(s) =
Specifies the number of inches, millimeters, or pixels equal to the specified
number of units.
Inch/mm/pixel
Specifies inches or mm for display of units. The default is based on the paper
size and changes each time a new paper size is selected.
Pixel is available only when a raster output is selected.
Unit
Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches,
millimeters, or pixels.
Scale Lineweights
Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify
the linewidth of output objects and are output with the linewidth size
regardless of the scale.

Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)
Sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style
table.
Name (Unlabeled)
Displays the plot style table that is assigned to the current Model tab or layout
tab and provides a list of the currently available plot style tables.
If you select New, the Add Plot Style Table wizard is displayed, which you can
use to create a new plot style table. The wizard that is displayed is determined
by whether the current drawing is in color-dependent or named mode.
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, in which you can view or modify plot
styles for the currently assigned plot style table.
Display Plot Styles

Page Setup Dialog Box | 909

Controls whether the properties of plot styles assigned to objects are displayed
on the screen.

Shaded Viewport Options
Specifies how shaded viewports are plotted and determines their resolution
levels and dots per inch (dpi).
Shade Plot
Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting for a viewport on a
layout tab, select the viewport and then, on the Tools menu, click Properties.
From the Model tab, you can select from the following options:
■

As Displayed: Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen.

■

Wireframe: Plots objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are
displayed on the screen.

■

Hidden: Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way they
are displayed on the screen.

Quality
Specifies the resolution at which shaded viewports are plotted.
You can select from the following options:
■

Draft: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe.

■

Preview: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the
current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi.

■

Normal: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the
current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi.

■

Presentation: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current
device resolution, to a maximum of 600 dpi.

■

Maximum: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current
device resolution with no maximum.

■

Custom: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the resolution
setting that you specify in the DPI box, up to the current device resolution.

DPI
Specifies the dots per inch for shaded views, up to the maximum resolution
of the current plotting device.

910 | Chapter 16 P Commands

NOTE Shaded viewport plotting of rendered views is not supported.

Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, plot styles, shaded plots, and
the order in which objects are plotted.
Plot Object Lineweights
Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted.
Plot Transparency
Specifies whether object transparency is plotted. This option should only be
used when plotting drawings with transparent objects.
IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default.
To plot transparent objects, check the Plot Transparency option. This setting can
be overridden by the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE on page 1617 system variable.
By default, the system variable honors the setting in the Page Setup and the Plot
dialog boxes.
Plot with Plot Styles
Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are plotted.
Plot Paper Space Last
Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted
before model space geometry.
Hide Paper Space Objects
Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in a paper space
viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab. This setting is
reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.

Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation.
Portrait
Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents
the top of the page.
Landscape
Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents
the top of the page.

Page Setup Dialog Box | 911

Plot Upside-Down
Orients and plots the drawing upside-down.
Icon
Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the
orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper.
NOTE The orientation of plots is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system
variable.

Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by executing
the PREVIEW command.

Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration
(PC3) file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup
Menu: Application menu
➤ Print ➤ Page Setup
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page
Setup Manager.
Command entry: pagesetup

912 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Summary
You can cancel your changes, click OK to overwrite the PC3 file, or specify a
new file name for the modified PC3 file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Save Changes to the Following File Specifies the path of the PC3 file that
you have changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify a new file name.

Import Page Setups Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Displays the page setups in the selected drawing that are available to import.

Summary
List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Source Drawing
Displays the source drawing that contains the listed page setups that are
available to import.

Page Setups
Lists the page setups that are available to import and their location in the
source drawing. Selected page setups are imported into the current drawing
when you click OK.
Name Specifies the name of the page setup available to import.
Location Specifies the location (Model or named layout) of the page setup in
the drawing from which you are importing the page setup.

Details
Displays information about the selected page setup.
Device Name

Import Page Setups Dialog Box | 913

Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Plotter
Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Plot Size
Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page
setup.
Where
Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup.
Description
Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup.

PAN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Pan or Zoom a View

Moves the view planar to the screen.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Pan
Menu: View ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area
and click Pan.

914 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Summary
You can pan the drawing display in real time.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu.
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays command prompts,
and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display.
Position the cursor at the start location and press the mouse button down.
Drag the cursor to the new location. You can also press the mouse scroll wheel
or middle button down and drag the cursor to pan.

Panning in Real Time
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Pan or Zoom a View

As a view is being panned, the cursor updates to let you know when you have
reached the extents of the drawing.

Summary
The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on
the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the
viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same
direction as the cursor.

When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed
on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical extent is
at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or
bottom) or vertical (left or right side).

Panning in Real Time | 915

When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick
button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press
the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
To stop panning at any time, press Enter or Esc.

-PAN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Pan or Zoom a View

Moves the view planar to the screen by specifying a distance and direction
the view should be moveed in.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point
You can specify a single point, indicating the relative displacement of the
drawing with respect to the current location, or (more commonly) you can
specify two points, in which case the displacement is computed from the first
point to the second point.

If you press Enter, the drawing is moved by the amount you specified in the
Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt. For example, if you specify 2,2
at the first prompt and press Enter at the second prompt, the drawing is moved
2 units in the X direction and 2 units in the Y direction. If you specify a point
at the Specify Second Point prompt, the location of the first point is moved
to the location of the second point.

916 | Chapter 16 P Commands

You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or while another ZOOM,
PAN, or VIEW command is in progress.

Pan Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Pan or Zoom a View

Pan and Zoom shortcut menu allows for switching between navigation tools
and cancelling the current navigation tool.
To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN
is active.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Exit Cancels PAN or ZOOM.
Pan Switches to PAN.
Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time.
Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window.
Zoom Original Restores the original view.
Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.

PARAMETERS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Constraints to Geometry

■

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks

Pan Shortcut Menu | 917

Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint
parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager
Menu: Parametric ➤ Parameters Manager
Toolbar: Parametric

Summary
The Parameters Manager palette displays relevant parametric information
based on whether you access it from within the drawing or from within the
Block Editor.
■

Parameters Manager - Drawing Editor on page 918

■

Parameters Manager - Block Editor on page 921

Parameters Manager - Drawing Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks

Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing.

Summary
The Parameters Manager palette displays all associative variables (dimensional
constraint variables and user-defined variables) available in the drawing.
You can edit, rename, and delete associative variables.

918 | Chapter 16 P Commands

The Parameters Manager palette includes a grid control with three columns,
by default. You can also add two columns (Description, Type) using the
shortcut menu.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Column

Description

Name

Displays the variable name

Expression

Displays the real number or the equation
for the expression, for example, d1+d2

Value

Displays the value of the expression

Additional Columns
Type

Displays the dimensional constraint type
or variable value

Description

Displays the comments or notes associated
with the user variable

Edit a Dimensional Variable
You can edit the dimensional variable name and expression. To do so:
■

Double-click the name or expression box.

■

Select the row and press F2. Press the Tab key to edit the contiguous
columns.
You cannot edit the Value column.

When you rename a dimensional variable, all instances of the variable are
updated in the drawing and in the Parameters Manager palette.
TIP Use the shortcut menu for the Name and Expression cells when copying and
pasting values. The Expressions shortcut menu contains commonly used
mathematical functions.
Invalid expressions are displayed in red text.

Parameters Manager - Drawing Editor | 919

Delete a Dimensional Variable
When you delete a dimension variable:
■

The associated dimensional constraint in the drawing is removed.

■

The variables retain the value calculated by the expression as a constant.
This action is for variables referenced by other variables, and ensures that
the geometry does not change.

Filtering the Display of Variables
You can filter the display of variables to do the following:
■

Display All Parameters- Displays all associative variables. No filter is applied.

■

Display Parameters Used in Expressions - Displays all variables that contain
expressions to evaluate a value, and variables contained in expressions.

Sorting a Column
Click a column heading to sort the variables in the table in ascending or
descending order of the column property. When you sort by variable type,
the name column is second in order to be sorted.The sort order is persistent.
The sort order is not affected when you change a name or expression.

Defining a Parameter Group
The Parameters Manager allows you to define parameter groups in the drawing
editor. A parameter group is a collection of named parameters. It contains a
subset of all parameters defined for the current space, but the group can also
be empty.
Click the Filter icon to create a group, which displays a filter tree on the left
vertical panel of the palette where you can show, hide, or expand the group
filters. Drag and drop the parameters from the grid control into a parameter
group.
The Invert Filter check box displays all the parameters which do not belong
in the group.
You can filter the display of variables to do the following:
■

All - Displays all associative variables. No filter is applied.

■

All Used in Expressions - Displays all variables that contain expressions to
evaluate a value, and variables contained in expressions.

■

Custom group filter - Displays all parameters added in the defined
parameter group.

920 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Searching a Parameter
An edit box allows you to search for parameters by name.

Highlighting Dimensional Constraints
When you select a dimensional constraint in the Parameters Manager palette,
the associated object is highlighted in the drawing.
If the parameter is a dynamic constraint that is hidden, the dynamic constraint
will be temporarily displayed and highlighted when you select the cell.
NOTE The object is not selected when highlighted; the highlighting is to visually
identify the dimensionally constrained object.

Parameters Manager - Block Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks

Controls the associative parameters used in the Block Editor.

Summary
In the Block Editor, the Parameters Manager displays a consolidated view of
all parameters and user-defined properties for the block definition.
The Parameters Manager palette includes a grid control with three columns
(Name, Expression, Value) by default. You can add one or more additional
columns (Type, Order, Show, or Description) using the shortcut menu.
Column

Description

Name

Displays the variable name

Expression

Displays the real number or equation, for
example, d1+d2

Value

Displays the value of the expression

Additional Columns

Parameters Manager - Block Editor | 921

Column

Description

Type

Displays the dimensional constraint type
or variable value

Order

Controls the order properties are displayed
in the Properties palette

Show

Displays the parameter as a property of the
block reference

Description

Displays the comments or notes associated
with the user variable

The Type column affects the formatting of the parameter in the Parameters
Manager and Properties palette. It also affects the value of the parameter when
the block is scaled.
Type

Units

Precision

Block Scale Factor

Distance

LUNITS

LUPREC

Scaled by scale factor

Angle

AUNITS

AUPREC

No scale

Real

Decimal

LUPREC

No scale

Area

Decimal

LUPREC

Multiplied by square of
scale

Volume

Decimal

LUPREC

Multiplied by cube of scale

String

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

The Type cell for User parameters displays a drop-down list of the value types.
The parameter can be sorted and can be set to Show or Hide in the Properties
palette. The value of the parameter resets to 1 when you change the type from
String to another type.
Parameters can be renamed; equations and values can be entered or modified.
Changes to a parameter name are immediately updated throughout the table
and in the Block Editor.

922 | Chapter 16 P Commands

The parameters for the block definition are organized in the following
categories:
■

Action Parameters

■

Dimensional Constraint Parameters

■

Reference Parameters

■

User Parameters

■

Attributes

You can only add user parameters to the table. When you delete any item
from the table, the item is automatically deleted from the block definition.

Edit a Dimensional Variable
You can edit the dimensional variable name and expression. To do so:
■

Double-click the name or expression box.

■

Select the row and press F2. Press the Tab key to edit the contiguous
columns.
You cannot edit the Value column.

When you rename a dimensional variable, all instances of the variable are
updated in the drawing and in the Parameters Manager palette.
Invalid expressions are displayed in red text.

Delete a Dimensional Variable
The following are the current behavioral changes in the drawing when you
delete a dimension variable:
■

The associated dimensional constraint in the drawing is removed.

■

The variables retain the value calculated by the expression as a constant.
This action is for variables referenced by other variables, and ensures that
the geometry does not change.

Filtering the Display of Variables
You can filter the display of variables to do the following:
■

Display All Parameters — Displays all associative variables. No filter is
applied.

Parameters Manager - Block Editor | 923

■

Display Parameters Used in Expressions - Displays all variables that contain
expressions to evaluate a value, and variables contained in expressions.

Sorting a Column
The sort order is not affected when you change a cell value.

Searching a Parameter
An edit box in the upper-right corner of the Parameters Manager allows you
to search for parameters by name.

-PARAMETERS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks

Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint
parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter a parameter option [Edit on page 924/Rename on page 924/Delete on page
924/? on page 924]:
NOTE You cannot use the -PARAMETERS command in the Block Editor on page
127.
Edit Edits the expression of the specified user variable.
Rename Renames the user variable.
Delete Removes the user variable from the list.
? — List Parameters Lists available user variables in the drawing.

924 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PARAMETERSCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks

Closes the Parameters Manager palette.

PASTEASHYPERLINK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing

Creates a hyperlink to a file, and associates it with a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Hyperlink
Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Hyperlink

Summary
First, select a document, such as a text, spreadsheet, drawing, or image file,
and copy it to the Clipboard. Then, use this command to associate a hyperlink
to that document with any selected object.

PARAMETERSCLOSE | 925

PASTEBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing as a block.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Block
Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Block
Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area
and click Clipboard ➤ Paste as Block

Summary
The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing as a block at
the specified insertion point. The block is given a random name.

PASTECLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.

926 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste
Menu: Edit ➤ Paste
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area,
and click Clipboard ➤ Paste
Command entry: Ctrl+V

Summary
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text
(mtext) object using the MTEXT defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table
object.
All other objects, except AutoCAD LT objects, are inserted as embedded or
linked (OLE) objects. You can edit these OLE objects by double-clicking them
in the drawing to open the application in which they were created.
When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available
formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format
that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste
to transfer objects between drawings.
NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the
cursor is at the Command prompt, text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current
prompt.

PASTEORIG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

PASTEORIG | 927

Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original
coordinates.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates
Menu: Edit ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates
Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area,
and click Clipboard ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates

Summary
The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the current drawing at
the same coordinates used in the original drawing. This command functions
only when the Clipboard contains AutoCAD LT data from a drawing other
than the current drawing.

PASTESPEC
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the
format of the data.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste Special
Menu: Edit ➤ Paste Special

928 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Summary
The Paste Special dialog box is displayed.

Paste Special Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Sets file formats and linking options for data pasted from the Clipboard.

Summary
You can either embed file data or link file data. Linked data is updated when
you open the drawing.
When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available
formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, you can
choose from the available formats.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Source Displays the name of the document that contains the information
you copied. It may also show the specific section of the document you copied.
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing as an
embedded object.

Paste Special Dialog Box | 929

Paste Link Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. If
the source application supports an OLE or data link, a link is created to the
original file.
As Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the contents of the
Clipboard into the current drawing.
Display as Icon Inserts a picture of the application icon instead of the data.
To view or edit the data, double-click the icon.

PCINWIZARD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Import PCP or PC2 Settings into a Layout

Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into
the Model or current named (paper space) layout.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Wizards ➤ Import Plot Settings

Summary
PCINWIZARD displays the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard. Information
that can be imported from PCP or PC2 files includes plot area, rotation, plot
offset, plot optimization, plot to file, paper size, plot scale, and pen mapping.
The wizard prompts you for the name of the PCP or PC2 configuration file
from which you want to import settings. You can view and modify the plot
settings prior to importing them. The imported settings can be applied to the
Model or named (paper space) layout whichever is current.

930 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PDFADJUST
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the
Background

Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a PDF underlay.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: PDF Underlay contextual tab ➤ Adjust panel

Summary
If you select a single PDF underlay, the default values for Fade, Contrast, and
Monochrome are the current property settings of the selected underlay. If you
select multiple underlays, the default values for Fade, Contrast, and
Monochrome remain as they were set the last time the command was used.
You can also use the ADJUST on page 20 command to change an underlay’s
fade, contrast, and monochrome settings.
To adjust the colors for the background, open the underlay’s Properties Palette.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Fade Controls the fade effect of the underlay. Values range from 0 through
100. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay appears.
Works indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast value blends the
underlay in the background when fade is set to a higher value.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the
underlay. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more
each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Default=75.

PDFADJUST | 931

Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining
the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of
gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more.
If the background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are
inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest
linework displaying in black.

PDFATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Insert a PDF file as an underlay into the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach
Menu: Insert ➤ PDF Underlay
Toolbar: Insert

Summary
When you attach a PDF file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to
the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the
current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Once you select a PDF file, the Attach PDF Underlay dialog box on
page 934 is displayed. After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the
underlay through the PDF Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab on page 936.

932 | Chapter 16 P Commands

-PDFATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Attach a PDF underlay from the command line.

Summary
When you attach a PDF file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to
the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the
current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
TIP You can drag a PDF file onto the drawing window to start the PDFATTACH
command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Path to PDF File to Attach Enters the full path name to the PDF underlay
file.
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select PDF File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify
both the PDF file and path as follows:
path name\filename.dgn
or
“path name\filename.dgn”
If you enter a valid PDF file name without a file extension, the program adds
the extension and searches for the file.
Enter Page Number Enter a page number. For a list of pages, enter ?.
Enter Page(s) to list <*> Lists the pages available in the PDF file in a separate
text window.
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected PDF file.

-PDFATTACH | 933

Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected PDF underlay and the
scale factor units.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and
the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the
true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected PDF underlay.

Attach PDF Underlay Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Attach Files as Underlays

Names, locates, and defines the insertion point, scale, and rotation of attached
PDF underlays.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the PDF file you have selected to attach.

Browse
Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on
page 826).

Select one of more pages from the PDF file
Displays all of the pages that are found in the PDF file. If the PDF file only
contains a single page, that page is listed. You can select multiple pages by
holding Shift or Ctrl and selecting the pages to attach.

Path Type
Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the PDF file, or No Path,
and the name of the PDF file. For the No Path option, the PDF file must be
located in the same folder as the current drawing file.

934 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected PDF file.
Specify On-Screen
Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected PDF underlay.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and
the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the
true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Specify On-screen
Inputs information at the Command prompt or with the pointing device. If
Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor.
Scale Factor Field
Enter a value for the scale factor.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DWF underlay.
Specify on-screen
If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box
to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value
at the Command prompt.
Angle
If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog
box. The default rotation angle is 0.

Attach PDF Underlay Dialog Box | 935

Show Details
Found In Displays the path to the PDF file.
Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the PDF
file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

PDF Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Underlays

Displays options for editing PDF underlays.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Summary
When you select a PDF underlay, the PDF Contextual tab is displayed on the
ribbon.

Adjust Panel
Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay.
Fade Controls the appearance of the linework. The greater the value, the
lighter the linework in the underlay is displayed.
Display in Monochrome Displays the underlay in black and white.

Clipping Panel
Create Clipping Boundary Deletes the old clipping boundary (if one exists)
and create a new one.
Remove Clipping Deletes the clipping boundary.

936 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Options Panel
Show Underlay Hides or displays the underlay.
Enable Snap Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in
the underlay.
External References (EXTERNALREFERENCES on page 504) Opens the
External References palette.

PDF Layers Panel
Edit Layers (ULAYERS on page 1281) Controls the display of layers in a DWF,
DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay.

PDFCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Clip Underlays

Crops the display of a selected PDF underlay to a specified boundary.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: PDF Underlay contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create
Clipping Boundary
Shortcut menu: Select a PDF underlay to clip, right-click and click PDF Clip

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of an image outside the
boundary that is hidden. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled
by the FRAME system variable.
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the PDF underlay.

PDFCLIP | 937

TIP Use the generic CLIP on page 211 command to clip images, external references,
viewports, and underlays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the PDF underlay clipped to the previously
defined boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire PDF underlay and frame.
If you re-clip the PDF underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is
automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary
even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and displays the full original
underlay.

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal
clipping boundary from a polyline.
Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline
can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect
itself.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points
that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify
for opposite corners.
Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected PDF underlay
when the old boundary is deleted.

938 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PDFLAYERS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay

Controls the display of layers in a PDF underlay.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Underlay Layers
Shortcut menu: Select a PDF underlay. Right-click in the drawing area and
click PDF Layers.

Summary
When you select a PDF underlay, the PDF Underlay ribbon contextual tab on
page 936 displays. From the contextual tab, you can click Edit Layers or enter
PDFLAYERS. The Underlay Layers dialog box on page 1282 displays.
The ULAYERS on page 1281 command manages the layers of all underlays in
the current document regardless of type: DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN.

PEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Polylines

Edits polylines.

PDFLAYERS | 939

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Polyline
Toolbar: Modify II
Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Polyline Edit.

Summary
Common uses for PEDIT include joining 2D polylines, converting lines and
arcs into 2D polylines, and converting polylines into curves that approximate
B-splines (spline-fit polylines).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select polyline or [MULTIPLE]: Use an object selection method or enter m
The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polylineor
a 3D polyline.
If the selected object is a line, arc, or a spline, the following prompt is
displayed:
Object selected is not a polyline.
Do you want it to turn into one? : Enter y or n, or press Enter
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that
you can edit. You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline.
Before the selected spline is converted to a polyline, the following prompt is
displayed:
Specify a precision <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter
The precision value determines how accurately the resulting polyline is to fit
to the source spline. Valid value is an integer between 0 and 99.
NOTE A high precision value may cause performance problems.

940 | Chapter 16 P Commands

The PLINECONVERTMODE on page 1613 system variable determines whether
the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT
on page 1607system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the
selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
The conversion in both PEDIT and SPLINEDIT will obey the DELOBJ on page
1433 system variable.

Multiple Selection (PEDIT)
Quick Reference
Enables selection for more than one object.
If the selection set includes lines, arcs, or splines, the following prompt is
displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Convert Lines, Arcs and Splines to polylines [Yes/No]? : Enter y or n or press
Enter
Specify a precision for spline conversion <10>: Enter a new precision value or
press Enter
The entered precision value affects all splines in the selection set. The precision
value is an integer between 0 and 99.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT)
Quick Reference
If you select a 2D polyline, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype
gen/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command

Multiple Selection (PEDIT) | 941

If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option
in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in
the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS.

Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with
the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it using the Close
option.

Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed
unless you open it using the Open option.

Join
Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the
curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their
endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT
prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz
distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints.

Jointype
Sets the method of joining selected polylines.
Extend Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming the segments
to the nearest endpoints.
Add Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the
nearest endpoints.
Both Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if possible.
Otherwise joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between
the nearest endpoints.

Width
Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline.
You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting
and ending widths of a segment.

942 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction.

Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.

Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.

Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one
truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline,
or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break.
■

Next on page 943

■

Previous on page 943

Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify
and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 943

Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.

Move
Moves the marked vertex.

Regen
Regenerates the polyline.

Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of
a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the
FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.

944 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex.
Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select,
replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex
mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X
marker, the segment following that vertex is straightened if it is an arc.
Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Tangent

Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve fitting.

Width
Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately
follows the marked vertex.
You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width.

Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.

Fit
Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair
of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any
tangent direction you specify.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 945

Spline
Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a
curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes
through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed.
The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass
through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part of the
frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. Quadratic and cubic spline-fit
polylines can be generated.

Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit
option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point. Both
of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the SPLINE
command.
If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when the
spline's frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline tapers
smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex. All
intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the frame, if
displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype. Tangent
specifications on control point vertices have no effect on spline-fitting.
When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve's frame is stored
so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a spline-fit
curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve option. This
option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on splines.
Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or
fit curves.
■

MOVE, ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE, and SCALE operate on both the
spline curve and its frame, whether the frame is visible or not.

■

EXTEND changes the frame by adding a new vertex where the initial or
final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry.

■

BREAK and TRIM generate a polyline with only the fit spline, which is
consistent with fit curves, where the curve fitting is permanent.

■

EXPLODE deletes the frame and generates lines and arcs to approximate
the spline-fit polyline.

■

OFFSET generates a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent
with its behavior with fit curves.

946 | Chapter 16 P Commands

■

DIVIDE, MEASURE, and the Object option of AREA and HATCH see only
the fit spline, not the frame.

■

STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched.

The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline
information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation
is complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline.
The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect:
■

The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the
frame of the spline, whether visible or not.

■

The Break option discards the spline.

■

The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options automatically refit the
spline.

■

The Tangent option has no effect on splines.

Object snap uses only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to
snap to the frame control points, use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first.

Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline
vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline
with a command such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve option.

Ltype Gen
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the
polyline. When turned off, this option generates the linetype starting and
ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines with
tapered segments.

Reverse
Reverses the order of vertices of the polyline. Use this option to reverse the
direction of objects that use linetypes with included text. For example,

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 947

depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the
linetype might be displayed upside down.

Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.

3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT)
Quick Reference
If you select a 3D polyline, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Spline curve/Decurve/Reverse/Undo]:
Enter an option or press Enter
If the polyline you select is closed, Open replaces the Close option in the
prompt.

Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with
the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close.

Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed
unless you open it with Open.

Join
Joins an open curve to the 3D polyline. The curve can be on a different plane,
but must be contiguous with the 3D polyline.

Edit Vertex
Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments
that follow it.

Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.

Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.

948 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
■

Previous on page 948

■

Previous on page 943

Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify
and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the polyline is
truncated. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just
one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break mode.

Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.

Move
Moves the marked vertex.

Regen
Regenerates the polyline.

Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex.
Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select,
replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex
mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X
marker, the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc.
Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline
and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET
command with a fillet radius of 0.

Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.

3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 949

Spline Curve
Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points. The SPLFRAME system variable
controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B-spline,
whose curves can be approximated only by line segments. Negative values for
spline segments are ignored.

Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline
vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline
with a command such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve option.

Reverse
Reverses the order of vertices of the polyline. Use this option to reverse the
direction of objects that use linetypes with included text. For example,
depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the
linetype might be displayed upside down.

Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.

PKFSTGROUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Group Objects

Opens the legacy Group Manager.

950 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Access Methods
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups
Menu: Tools ➤ Group Manager
Toolbar: Group

Summary
Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements that you need to
manipulate as a unit.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Group Displays the names of existing groups. Group names can be up to 31
characters long and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters
dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_), but not spaces. The name is
converted to uppercase characters.
When Include Unnamed Groups is selected, this list includes default names
assigned to unnamed groups (*A1, *A2, and so on).
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable,
selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked
or frozen layers are not selected.
When a group is not selectable, the light bulb icon is unavailable and selecting
a single group member selects only that object. When thePICKSTYLE system
variable is set to 0, no groups are selectable.
Description Describes the selected group. You can enter descriptions at any
time. Select the group name, and then click in the Description column.
Include Unnamed Groups Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed.
When this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed.
Create Group Creates a new group composed of objects you have selected.
When you click Create Group, the cursor moves to the Group column, and
you can enter a group name.
Ungroup Removes the selected group from the list in the Group Manager and
removes the association of objects in the group.
Add to Group Adds selected objects to the group selected under Group.
Remove from Group Removes selected objects from the group selected under
Group. To use this option, selectability must be off.

PKFSTGROUP | 951

Details Displays the Group Manager—Details dialog box. This dialog box lists
any group names you have created under Group. Select a name to display the
number of objects in the group and the group description.
Select Group Selects all objects in the specified group. To select objects in a
group, select the group name under Group and click Select Group.
NOTE When the PICKADD system variable is set to 1, you can add and remove
objects from the current group selection set. When PICKADD is set to 0, the current
selection set is replaced with a new selection set.
Deselect Group Removes a specified group from a selection set. If multiple
groups are selected, you can remove a specific group from the selection set by
selecting the group name under Group.

PLAN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change to a View of the XY Plane

Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate
system.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Plan View ➤ World UCS

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

952 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents
fit in the current viewport of the current UCS.

UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the
display.
Enter name of UCS or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all UCSs in the drawing
If you enter ? at the prompt, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name or enter * to list all UCSs in the drawing

World Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit
on the screen of the world coordinate system.

PLAN | 953

PLINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Polylines

Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline
Menu: Draw ➤ Polyline
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar
object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination
of the two.

NOTE A temporary plus-shaped marker displays at the first point. This marker can
be useful when you create long and complicated polylines. It is removed when
you complete the polyline.
The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around
and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1
generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the
completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with
a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered
segments.

954 | Chapter 16 P Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point: Specify a point
Current line-width is 
Specify next point on page 954 or [Arc on page 955/Close on page 959/Halfwidth
on page 959/Length on page 960/Undo on page 960/Width on page 960]: Specify
a point or enter an option

Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.

Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or
[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/Second
pt/Undo/Width]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
NOTE For the Center option of the PLINE command, enter ce; for the Center
object snap, enter cen or center.

Endpoint of Arc
Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the previous segment of
the polyline. The previous prompt is repeated.

Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Specify included angle:

PLINE | 955

Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering
a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Specify center point of arc:
Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance
Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify a point or press ENTER

Center
Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Specify center point of arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]: Specify a point (3) or enter an option

Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Specify included angle:
Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment
is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment.
Specify length of chord:

956 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Close
Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.

Direction
Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3)

Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its
edges.
Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.

PLINE | 957

Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Line
Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts.

Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a

Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Angle Specifies the included angle for the arc segment.
Specify included angle:
Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify an angle or press ENTER

Second Pt
Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.
Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

Undo
Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.

Width
Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Specify starting width : Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width : Enter a value or press ENTER

958 | Chapter 16 P Commands

The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the
width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the
center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or
when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Close
Draws a line segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.

Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of
its edges.
Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.

PLINE | 959

Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line: Specify a distance

Undo
Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.

Width
Specifies the width of the next line segment.
Specify starting width : Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width : Enter a value or press ENTER

The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the
width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the
center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

960 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PLOT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot
Menu: Application menu
➤ Print ➤ Plot
Menu: File ➤ Plot
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot

Summary
The Plot dialog box is displayed. Click OK to begin plotting with the current
settings.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Plot Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing.

PLOT | 961

Summary
You can display more options by clicking the More Options button.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Page Setup
Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing. You can
base the current page setup on a named page setup saved in the drawing, or
you can create a new named page setup based on the current settings in the
Plot dialog box by clicking Add.
Name
Displays the name of the current page setup.
Add
Displays the Add Page Setup dialog box, in which you can save the current
settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup. You can modify this
page setup through the Page Setup Manager.

Printer/Plotter
Specifies a configured plotting device to use when plotting layouts.

962 | Chapter 16 P Commands

If the selected plotter doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning
is displayed and you can select the plotter's default paper size or a custom
paper size.
Name
Lists the available PC3 files or system printers from which you can select to
plot the current layout. An icon in front of the device name identifies it as a
PC3 file or a system printer.
■

PC3 file icon: Indicates a PC3 file.

■

System printer icon: Indicates a system printer.

Properties
Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor (PC3 editor), in which you can view
or modify the current plotter configuration, ports, device, and media settings.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter Configuration Editor,
the Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box is displayed.
Plotter
Displays the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup.
Where
Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup.
Description
Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently
selected page setup. You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor.
Plot to File
Plots output to a file rather than to a plotter or printer. The default location
for plot files is specified in the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab, under
Default Location for Plot-to-File Operations.

Plot Dialog Box | 963

If the Plot to File option is turned on, when you click OK in the Plot dialog
box, the Plot to File dialog box (a standard file navigation dialog box) is
displayed.
Partial Preview
Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper
size and printable area. The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area.

Paper Size
Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device.
If no plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is displayed and
available for selection.
If the selected plotter doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning
is displayed, and you can select the plotter's default paper size or a custom
paper size.
A default paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file
with the Add-a-Plotter wizard. For information about this wizard, see “Set Up
Plotters and Printers” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. The paper size that you
select in the Page Setup dialog box is saved with the layout and overrides the
PC3 file settings.
The actual printable area of the page, which is determined by the selected
plotting device and paper size, is indicated in the layout by a dashed line.
If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the
plot is specified in pixels, not in inches or millimeters.

Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies to plot. This option is not available when you
plot to file.

Plot Area
Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted. Under What to Plot, you
can select an area of the drawing to be plotted.

964 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable
area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the
layout.
When plotting from the Model tab, plots the entire drawing area that is defined
by the grid limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view, this
option has the same effect as the Extents option.
Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains
objects. All geometry in the current space is plotted. The drawing may be
regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting.
Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the selected Model tab or
the current paper space view in the layout.
View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command. You
can select a named view from the list. If there are no saved views in the
drawing, this option is unavailable.
When the View option is selected, a View list is displayed that lists the named
views that are saved in the current drawing. You can select a view from this
list to plot.
Window
Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify. When you select Window,
the Window button becomes available. Click the Window button to use the
pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter
coordinate values.
Specify first corner: Specify a point
Specify other corner: Specify a point

Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower-left corner of the
printable area or to the edge of the paper, depending on the setting made in
the Specify Plot Offset Relative To option (Options dialog box, Plot and Publish
tab). The Plot Offset area of the Plot dialog box displays the specified plot
offset option in parentheses.
The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device
and is represented by a dashed line in a layout. When you change to another
output device, the printable area may change.
You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative
value in the X and Y offset boxes. The plotter unit values are in inches or
millimeters on the paper.
Center the Plot

Plot Dialog Box | 965

Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the
paper. This option is not available when Plot Area is set to Layout.
X
Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot
Offset Definition option.
Y
Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of the Plot
Offset Definition option.

Plot Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Fit to Paper when
plotting from the Model tab.
Fit to Paper
Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom
scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes.
Scale
Defines the exact scale for the plot. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You
can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters)
equal to the number of drawing units.
NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT.
Inch(es) =/mm =/Pixel(s) =
Specifies the number of inches, millimeters, or pixels equal to the specified
number of units.
Inch/mm/pixel
Specifies inches or mm for display of units in the Plot dialog box. The default
is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected.
Pixel is available only when a raster output is selected.
Units
Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches,
millimeters, or pixels.
Scale Lineweights

966 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify
the linewidth of plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size
regardless of the plot scale.

Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted by starting the PREVIEW
command. To exit the preview and return to the Plot dialog box, press ESC,
press ENTER, or right-click and then click Exit on the shortcut menu.

Apply to Layout
Saves the current Plot dialog box settings to the current layout.

More Options
Controls display of additional options in the Plot dialog box.

■

Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)

■

Shaded Viewport Options

■

Plot Options

■

Drawing Orientation

Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)
Sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style
table.
Name (Unlabeled)
Displays the plot style table that is assigned to the current Model tab or layout
tab and provides a list of the currently available plot style tables.
If you select New, the Add Plot Style Table wizard is displayed, which you can
use to create a new plot style table. The wizard that is displayed is determined
by whether the current drawing is in color-dependent or named mode.
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, in which you can view or modify plot
styles for the currently assigned plot style table.

Plot Dialog Box | 967

Shaded Viewport Options
Specifies how shaded viewports are plotted and determines their resolution
level and dots per inch (dpi).
Shade Plot
Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting for a viewport on a
layout tab, select the viewport and then, on the Tools menu, click Properties.
From the Model tab, you can select from the following options:
■

As Displayed. Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen.

■

Legacy Wireframe. Objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are
displayed on the screen, using the legacy SHADEMODE on page 1116
command.

■

Legacy Hidden. Objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way
the objects are displayed on the screen, using the legacy SHADEMODE on
page 1116 command.

■

Wireframe. Plots objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are
displayed on the screen.

■

Hidden. Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way the
objects are displayed on the screen.

■

Shades of Gray. Plots objects with Shades of Gray visual style applied
regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen.

■

Sketchy. Plots objects with Sketchy visual style applied regardless of the
way the objects are displayed on the screen.

■

X-ray. Plots objects with x-ray visual style applied regardless of the way
the objects are displayed on the screen

■

Shaded with Edges. Plots objects with Shded with Edges visual style applied
regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen

■

Shaded. Plots objects with Shaded visual style applied regardless of the
way the objects are displayed on the screen

Quality
Specifies the resolution at which shaded viewports are plotted.
You can select from the following options:
■

Draft: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe.

968 | Chapter 16 P Commands

■

Preview: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the
current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi.

■

Normal: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the
current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi.

■

Presentation: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current
device resolution, to a maximum of 600 dpi.

■

Maximum: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device
resolution with no maximum.

■

Custom: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the resolution
setting that you specify in the DPI box, up to the current device resolution.

DPI
Specifies the dots per inch for shaded views, up to the maximum resolution
of the current plotting device. This option is available if you select Custom
in the Quality box.
NOTE Shaded viewport plotting of rendered views is not supported.

Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, plot styles, shaded plots, and
the order in which objects are plotted.
Plot in Background
Specifies that the plot is processed in the background. (BACKGROUNDPLOT
system variable)
Plot Object Lineweights
Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted. This
option is unavailable if Plot with Plot Styles is selected.
Plot Transparency
Specifies whether object transparency is plotted. This option should only be
used when plotting drawings with transparent objects.
IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default.
To plot transparent objects, check the Plot Transparency option. This setting can
be overridden by the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE on page 1617 system variable.
By default, the system variable honors the setting in the Page Setup and the Plot
dialog boxes.

Plot Dialog Box | 969

Plot with Plot Styles
Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are plotted. When
you select this option, Plot Object Lineweights is automatically selected also.
Plot Paperspace Last
Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted
before model space geometry.
Hide Paperspace Objects
Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space
viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab. The effect of this
setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
Plot Stamp On
Turns on plot stamping. Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each
drawing and/or logs it to a file.
Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp dialog box, in which you
can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp, such as
drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. To open the Plot Stamp
dialog box, select the Plot Stamp On option, and then click the Plot Stamp
Settings button that is displayed to the right of the option.
You can also open the Plot Stamp dialog box by clicking the Plot Stamp Settings
button on the Plot and Publish tab of the Options dialog box.
Plot Stamp Settings button
Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box when the Plot Stamp On option is selected
in the Plot dialog box.

Save Changes to Layout
Saves changes that you make in the Plot dialog box to the layout.

Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation. The paper icon represents the media
orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of
the drawing on the page.
Portrait

970 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents
the top of the page.
Landscape
Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents
the top of the page.
Plot Upside-Down
Orients and plots the drawing upside down.
Icon
Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the
orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper.
NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable.

Less Options
Hides the following options in the Plot dialog box:

■

Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)

■

Shaded Viewport Options

■

Plot Options

■

Drawing Orientation

Add Page Setup Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Saves the current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup.

Summary
You can modify this page setup through the Page Setup Manager.

Add Page Setup Dialog Box | 971

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Page Setup Name
Specifies a name for the new page setup. You can modify the new named page
setup later through the Page Setup Manager.

Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration
(PC3) file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Apply Changes for the Current Plot Only
Uses the changes you've made to the PC3 file in the current plot but does not
save them in the PC3 file.
Save Changes to the Following File
Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed. To preserve the
original PC3 file, specify a new file name.

Plot Job Progress Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Provides information about the status and progress of your plot job.

972 | Chapter 16 P Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Cancel Sheet Cancels the plot of the sheet currently being processed.
Cancel Job Cancels the plot job.

Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Displays the device driver name that is stored in the PC3 file.

Summary
A device can be a plotter or printer. With this dialog box, you can select a
valid plotter or printer and update the existing PC3 file; you can also save a
modified copy as a new PC3 file.
The dialog box is displayed in the PLOT or PAGESETUP command in a layout
configured for a PC3 file that contains an invalid or missing plotter or printer
name.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Device Needed
Displays the device specified in the PC3 file that is configured for the current
layout.
Printer Name
Lists the available plotters, printers, and PC3 files. Select a plotter, printer, or
PC3 file to be substituted for the missing printer specified in your PC3 file.
Select None if you don't want to make any substitution.
If you select None, the other settings for the current layout remain unchanged.
If you select a plotter or printer that uses a different driver than the one

Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box | 973

specified in the original PC3 file, the following configuration information
may change when the PC3 file is saved:
■

Plot quality

■

Color depth

■

Resolution

■

Media source

■

Media destination

■

Media finishing options (such as folding or binding)

■

Any custom settings of the previous device or driver

If the plotter or printer you select can't support the paper size specified in the
layout, the default paper size is used. A warning is displayed that allows you
to cancel this operation and return to the Plot or Page Setup dialog box with
the None device selected.
Device For each selection you make under Printer Name, the corresponding
device driver name is displayed in this column, as follows:
■

For a selected plotter or printer, this column displays the device driver
name stored in the plotter or printer's PC3 file.

■

For a selected PC3 file, this column displays the device driver name stored
in the PC3 file.

■

For a selection of None, this column displays no device name. No device
will be substituted for the missing printer specified in the PC3 file.

Status Area
Displays information about the selected plotter, printer, or PC3 file.
Update and Save PC3 File
Displays the name of the PC3 file for the current layout. If you click OK
without changing the name of the PC3 file, the existing PC3 file is updated
with the new printer name. If you change the name of the PC3 file and click
OK, a copy of the PC3 file is saved with the new printer information.

974 | Chapter 16 P Commands

-PLOT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file in the command line.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Detailed plot configuration [Yes on page 975/No on page 975] : Enter y or
n or press ENTER

No
Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot.
Enter a layout name or [?] :
Enter a page setup name < >:
Enter an output device name or [?] :
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] :
Enter file name: :
Save changes to layout [Yes/No] :
Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] :
For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes.

Yes
Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are plotting.
Enter a layout name or [?] : Specify the name of the layout tab you want
to plot
Enter an output device name or [?] : Specify the name of the output
device to which you want to plot the Model tab or layout tab you selected
If you enter a new device name without an extension, the program assumes
®
that the device is a PC3 file (Autodesk HDI plotter configuration file). If no

-PLOT | 975

PC3 file is found, the program searches for a Windows system printer with
that device name.
Enter paper size or [?] : Specify the paper size to use for the plot or enter
? to view the actual list of paper sizes defined for the plotter driver
You must specify a paper size exactly as it is defined by the plotter driver.
Enter paper units [Inches/Millimeters] :
The Enter Paper Units prompt is not displayed if you are plotting a raster
image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, because the size of the plot is assumed to
be in pixels.
Enter drawing orientation [Portrait/Landscape] :
Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper
represents the top of the page.
Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper
represents the top of the page.
Plot upside down [Yes/No] :
Orients and plots the drawing upside down.
Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] :
Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model tab or the current
view in the layout, depending on which tab you select to plot.
Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport, except objects on
frozen layers. From a layout tab, plots all the geometry in paper space. The
drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting.
Limits Plots the drawing area defined by the grid limits. Available only when
the Model tab is selected.
Layout Plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size,
with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. Available only when a layout
tab is selected.
View Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command. You can select
a named view from the list provided. If there are no saved views in the drawing,
this option is unavailable.
Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. This option prompts
you to specify the corners of the window.
Enter lower left corner of window: Specify a point
Enter upper right corner of window: Specify a point

976 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Enter plot scale (Plotted Inches = Drawing Units) or [Fit] : Specify the
scale of the plot
Plotted Inches = Drawing Units Calculates the plot scale based on the inches
or millimeters to drawing units that you specify. You can also enter a real
number as a fraction (for example, you can enter 1=2 or .5).
Fit Calculates the scale to fit the area on the sheet of paper.
The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you
modified and saved the setting. The default setting is Fit when plotting a
Model tab.
Enter plot offset (x, y) or [Center] : Specify the plot offset in either the X
or Y direction, or enter c to center the plot on the paper
Plot with plot styles [Yes/No] : Specify whether to plot using the plot
styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table
If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) : Enter a plot style
table name, ? to view plot style tables, or . (period) for none
All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the
current plot style table and can be attached to the geometry. This setting
replaces pen mapping in earlier versions of the program.
Plot with lineweights [Yes/No] :
Scale lineweights with plot scale [Yes/No] :
NOTE The Scale Lineweights with Plot Scale prompt is displayed only when you
plot from a layout tab. Settings for the shaded plotting type are available only
when you plot from the Model tab. To control shaded plotting settings of viewports
in a layout tab, use the Shadeplot option of the -vports command when you
create a viewport.
Enter shade plot setting [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden] : Enter
a shade plot option
Specifies how model space views are plotted.
As Displayed Specifies that a model space view is plotted the same way it is
displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a model space view is plotted in wireframe regardless
of display.

-PLOT | 977

Hidden Specifies that a model space view is plotted with hidden lines removed
regardless of display.
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] : Enter y if you want to write the plotted
drawing to a file, or press Enter to plot to an output device
If you specify Yes, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter file name: : Enter a file name
Save changes to page setup? Or set shade plot quality? [Yes/No/Quality] :
If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If
you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given
the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the
page setup with the added quality settings.
Enter shade plot quality
[Draft/Preview/Normal/pResentation/Maximum/Custom] : Enter c
if you want to specify a dpi, or to use a preset dpi, specify a different quality option
Enter custom dpi <150>:
Save changes to page setup [Yes/No]? :
Plot paper space first [Yes/No] :
Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. If you
enter n, the model space geometry is plotted first, and paper space geometry
is plotted last. This option is available only if you are plotting from a layout
tab.
Hide paperspace objects? [Yes/No] :
Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the paper space
viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab.
Proceed with plot [Yes/No] :

PLOTSTAMP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Options for Plotted Objects

978 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.

Summary
The Plot Stamp dialog box is displayed.
NOTE Plot stamp will always be drawn with pen number 7, or the highest
numbered available pen if the plotter does not hold seven pens. You must install
a suitable pen in that position. If you are using a non-pen (raster) device, color 7
is always used for plot stamping.
If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Plot Stamp Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Specifies the information for the plot stamp.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Plot Stamp Fields
Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The
selected fields are separated by commas and a space.
Drawing Name
Includes the drawing name and path in the plot stamp information.
Layout Name
Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp information.
Date and Time
Includes the date and time in the plot stamp information.
NOTE A plot stamp uses the current date and time format setting of the operating
system. Plot stamp specifically uses the short date style for dates.

Plot Stamp Dialog Box | 979

Login Name
Includes the user login name in the plot stamp information.
Device Name
Includes the current plotting device name in the plot stamp information.
Paper Size
Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot
stamp information.
Plot Scale
Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information.

Preview
Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and
rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box. You
cannot preview the plot stamp any other way. This is not a preview of the
plot stamp contents.

User Defined Fields
Provides text that can optionally be plotted, logged, or both plotted and logged
at plot time. The selected value in each user-defined list will be plotted.
For example, you might populate one list with media types or prices and the
other with job names. If the user-defined value is set to , then no
user-defined information is plotted
Add/Edit
Displays the User Defined Fields dialog box, where you can add, edit, or delete
user-defined fields.

Plot Stamp Parameter File
Stores plot stamp information in a file with a .pss extension. Multiple users
can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard
settings.
Two PSS files are provided, Mm.pss and Inches.pss, which are located in the
Support folder. The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is determined
by the regional settings of the operating system when the program is installed.
Path
Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file.
Load

980 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) in which you can specify the location of the parameter
file you want to use.
Save As
Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file.

Advanced
Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, in which you can set the location,
text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can also create a log file, and
set its location.

User Defined Fields Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Create and mange user-defined fields.

Summary
User-defined fields are created and edited using the User Defined Fields dialog
box, which is displayed when you choose the Add/Edit button in the Plot
Stamp dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Name
Lists the available user-defined fields.
Add
Adds an editable user-defined field.
Edit
Allows editing of the selected user-defined field.
Delete

User Defined Fields Dialog Box | 981

Deletes the selected user-defined field.

Advanced Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Determines the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp.

Access Methods
Command entry: plotstamp

Summary
You can also create a log file and set its location. The dialog box is displayed
when you choose the Advanced button in the Plot Stamp dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Location and Offset
Determines the plot stamp location, the orientation of the plot stamp, and
the offset you want to apply relative to either the printable area or the paper
border.
Location
Indicates the area where you want to place the plot stamp. Selections include
Top Left, Bottom Left (default), Bottom Right, and Top Right. The location is
relative to the image orientation of the drawing on the page.
Orientation
Indicates the rotation of the plot stamp in relation to the specified page. The
options are Horizontal and Vertical for each of the locations (for example,
Top Left Horizontal and Top Left Vertical).
Stamp Upside Down
Rotates the plot stamp upside down.

982 | Chapter 16 P Commands

X Offset
Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the
paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you
specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is
calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper
size. If the offset value positions the plot stamp information beyond the
printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off.
Y Offset
Determines the Y offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the
paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you
specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is
calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the paper size.
Offset Relative to Printable Area
Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the printable
area of the paper (not the corner of the paper).
Offset Relative to Paper Border
Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the paper (not
the corner of the printable area of the paper).

Text Properties
Determines the font, height, and number of lines you want to apply to the
plot stamp text.
Font
Specifies the TrueType font you want to apply to the text used for the plot
stamp information.
Height
Specifies the text height you want to apply to the plot stamp information.
Single Line Plot Stamp
Places the plot stamp information in a single line of text. The plot stamp
information can consist of up to two lines of text, but the placement and
offset values you specify must accommodate text wrapping and text height.
If this option is cleared, plot stamp text is wrapped after the third field.

Plot Stamp Units
Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You can
define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels.

Advanced Options Dialog Box | 983

Two sets of values for the plot stamp size and location are saved in the PSS
file: one for the dimensionless file formats and the other for dimensional file
formats. If the units you select in the dialog box are dimensional, then the
dimensional values are displayed and modified. To access the dimensionless
values, you need to select pixels as the unit of measurement. Regardless of the
units selected in the dialog box, the correct set of values is applied at plot
time. In other words, changing the unit of measurement does not cause the
values to be recalculated.

Log File Location
Writes the plot stamp information to a log file instead of, or in addition to,
stamping the current plot. If plot stamping is turned off, the log file can still
be created.
Create a Log File
Writes the plot stamp information to a log file. The default log file is plot.log,
and it is located in the main application folder.
You can specify a different file name and path. After the initial plot.log file is
created, the plot stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing is
added to this file. Each drawing's plot stamp information is a single line of
text. The plot stamp log file can be placed on a network drive and shared by
multiple users. Plot stamp information from each user is appended to the
plot.log file.
Log File Name
Specifies the file name for the log file you are creating. Enter a new file name
if you do not want to use the default file name, plot.log.
Browse
Lists the currently saved plot stamp log files. You can choose to overwrite an
existing plot stamp log file with the currently specified plot stamp information,
and then to save this file.

-PLOTSTAMP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Set Options for Plotted Objects

984 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.
If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt.
You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp
information for a drawing.

LIst of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [On/OFF/Fields/User fields/Log file/LOCation/Text
properties/UNits]:
On Turns on the plot stamp for the current drawing.
OFF Turns off the plot stamp for the current drawing.
Fields Specifies the plot stamp field information you want to apply to the
current plot stamp.
Stamp drawing name? [Yes/No] :
Stamp layout name? [Yes/No] :
Stamp date and time? [Yes/No] :
Stamp login name? [Yes/No] :
Stamp plot device name? [Yes/No] :
Stamp paper size? [Yes/No] :
Stamp plot scale? [Yes/No] :
User Fields Specifies the user-defined fields you want to apply to the current
plot stamp.
Enter User field 1 <>: Enter any user-defined field
Enter User field 2 <>: Enter any user-defined field
Log File Specifies writing the current plot stamp information to a log file
rather than applying this information to the current plotted drawing. The
default log file is plot.log, unless you specify another file path.
Write plot stamp to log file? [Yes/No] :
Enter log file path :
Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page based on
offset, orientation, and relationship to either the printable area or the border
of the paper.
Location selections include and are relative to the printable area or the border
of the paper, depending on what you specify at the prompt.

-PLOTSTAMP | 985

Enter stamp location [TL/TR/BL/BR] :
■

TL: Top Left

■

TR: Top Right

■

BL: Bottom Left

■

BR: Bottom Right

Text orientation indicates the rotation angle of the plot stamp in relation to
the page.
Enter text orientation [Horizontal/Vertical] :
■

Horizontal: Plot stamp will be horizontal relative to the page.

■

Vertical: Plot stamp will be vertical relative to the page.

Stamp upside-down [Yes/No] :
Specify plot stamp offset <0.1000,0.1000>:
Specifying an offset relative to the paper border calculates the offset values
that you specify from the corner of the paper. Specifying an offset relative to
the printable area calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner
of the printable area.
Specify offset relative to [paper Border/printable Area] :
Text Properties Determines the font name and text height for the current
plot stamp text. You can also specify to place the text on one line or to wrap
the text to two lines. The placement and offset values you specify for this plot
stamp must accommodate the text wrapping and the text height.
Enter font name <>: Enter a font name
Enter text height <0.1500>: Enter a value
Place plot stamp on single line? [Yes/No] :
Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You
can define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels.
Enter measurement units [Inches/Millimeters/Pixels] :

986 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PLOTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and
can be assigned to objects.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu
Menu: Format ➤ Plot Style

➤ Print ➤ Edit Plot Style Tables

Summary
To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use
named plot styles.
■

If a drawing is in Color-Dependent mode, you can convert it to use named
plot styles using the CONVERTPSTYLES command.

■

To configure a new drawing to use named plot styles, set PSTYLEPOLICY
to 0 before creating the new drawing.

If no selection set exists, the Current Plot Style dialog box is displayed. If a
selection set exists, the Select Plot Style dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page
990.

PLOTSTYLE | 987

Current Plot Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Specifies the plot style for new objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Current Plot Style
Displays the current plot style.
Plot Style List
Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to an object, including
the default plot style, NORMAL. A plot style is a collection of overrides for
color, dithering, gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype, lineweight,
end styles, join styles, and fill styles.
Active Plot Style Table
Sets the plot style table attached to the current layout. A plot style table is a
collection of plot style definitions.
Editor

988 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, in which you modify the plot styles in
the plot style table.
Attached To
Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached
to.

Select Plot Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Specifies the plot style to be assigned.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Plot Styles
Displays the available plot styles, including the default plot style, NORMAL.
A plot style is a collection of property settings used in plotting.

Select Plot Style Dialog Box | 989

Original
Displays the originally assigned plot style.
New
Displays the new plot style to be assigned.
Active Plot Style Table
Sets the plot style table attached to the current drawing. A plot style table
defines plot styles.
Editor
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor.
Attached To
Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached
to.

-PLOTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Lists all available plotstyles in the current drawing and to set a plotstyle current.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current plot style is "current"
Enter an option [?/Current]:
?—List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table.
Current Specifies the plot style to use for new objects.

990 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PLOTTERMANAGER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Manage Plotters
Menu: Application menu
➤ Print ➤ Manage Plotters
Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager

Summary
In the folder, you can start the Add-a-Plotter wizard, or double-click a PC3 file
to open the Plotter Configuration Editor.
■

Double-click the Add-a-Plotter wizard to add and configure plotters and
printers.

■

Double-click a plotter configuration (PC3 file) to start the Plotter
Configuration Editor.

Add-a-Plotter Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

PLOTTERMANAGER | 991

Adds new plotters and printers. The wizard produces a PC3 file that you can
edit in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Your configurations are stored in the
Plotters folder.

Plotter Configuration Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Modifies a PC3 file's plotter port connections and output settings, including
media, graphics, physical pen configuration, custom properties, initialization
strings, calibration, and user-defined paper sizes. You can drag these
configuration options from one PC3 file to another.

Summary
You can start the Plotter Configuration Editor with any of the following
methods:
■

®

®

Double-click a PC3 file in Microsoft Windows Explorer or right-click the
PC3 file and click Open. (By default, PC3 files are stored in the Plotters
folder. To find the location of your plotter files, on the Tools menu, click
Options. In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click the plus sign to the left
of Printer Support File Path. Click the plus sign to the left of the Printer

992 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Configuration Search Path file. Under Printer Configuration Search Path,
click the path name to view the location of your plotter files.)
■

Choose Edit Plotter Configuration from within the Add-a-Plotter wizard.

■

Choose Properties in the Page Setup dialog box.

■

Choose Properties in the Plot dialog box.

Depending on your configured plotting device, additional options may be
available on the Device and Document Settings tab. For example, when you
configure a nonsystem plotter, you can modify the pen characteristics.
■

General

■

Ports on page 995

■

Device and Document Settings on page 996

General Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Contains basic information about the plotter configuration (PC3) file. You
can add or modify the information in the Description area. The remainder of
the tab is read-only.

Plotter Configuration Editor | 993

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Plotter Configuration File Name Displays the file name you assigned in the
Add-a-Plotter wizard.
Description
Displays information you want to include about the plotter.
Driver Information Displays the following information:
■

Plotter driver type (system or nonsystem), name, model, and location

■

HDI driver file version number (AutoCAD LT specialized driver files)

■

UNC name of the network server (if the plotter is connected to a network
server)

■

I/O port (if the plotter is connected locally)

■

Name of the system printer (if the configured plotter is the system printer)

■

PMP (Plot Model Parameters) file name and location (if a PMP file is
attached to the PC3 file)

994 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Ports Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Changes communication settings between the configured plotter and your
computer or network system. You can specify whether you want to plot
through a port, plot to a file, or use AutoSpool. See “Use AutoSpool” in the
Driver and Peripheral Guide.
If you plot through a parallel port, you can specify the timeout value. If you
plot through a serial port, you can change the baud rate, protocol, flow control,
and input and output timeout values.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Plot to the Following Port
Sends the drawing to the plotter through the selected port.

Plotter Configuration Editor | 995

Plot to File
Sends the drawing to the file specified in the Plot dialog box.
AutoSpool
Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing. AutoSpool is specified on the
Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Port List
Displays a list and description of available ports, both local and network. If
the port is a network port, the name of the network printer is also displayed.
Show All Ports
Shows all available ports on the computer regardless of the ports available on
the plotter.
Browse Network
Displays the network choices so you can connect to another instance of a
nonsystem plotter.
Configure Port
Displays either the Configure LPT Port dialog box or the Settings for COM
Port dialog box.

Device and Document Settings Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Controls many of the settings in the PC3 file. Click the icon for any of the
nodes to view and change the specific settings. When you change a setting,
your changes appear in angle brackets (< >) next to the setting name. A check
mark is also displayed over the icon of the node with a changed value.

996 | Chapter 16 P Commands

NOTE Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the
tree view. In addition, you might not be able to edit some settings if the device
handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesn't support the capability.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Media Node
Specifies a paper source, size, type, and destination. Available settings depend
on the supported features of your configured plotter. For Windows system
printers, you must configure the media settings using the Custom Properties
node.
Source and Size
Specifies the paper source and size.
■

Source: Specifies the paper source; for example, sheet-fed or roll-fed. If you
specify a tray, you can select the type of tray.

■

Width: Specifies the width of the paper roll for a roll-fed source.

■

Automatic: Enables the printer to specify the appropriate paper source.

■

Size: Displays a list of available paper sources and both standard and custom
paper sizes.

Plotter Configuration Editor | 997

■

Printable Bounds: Displays the print boundaries.

Media Type
Displays a list of the media types supported by the plotter configuration.
Duplex Printing
Determines double-sided printing and binding margin. Binding margin options
are available only for plotters that support duplex printing.
■

None: Indicates no double-sided printing.

■

Short Side: Places the binding margin on the short side of the paper.

■

Long Side: Places the binding margin on the long side of the paper.

Media Destination
Displays a list of available media destinations for the configured plotter, such
as collating, cutting, and stapling. These options are available only for plotters
that support this function.

Physical Pen Configuration Node (for Pen Plotters Only)
Controls the specific pens in the pen plotter. The lower pane of the Device
and Document Settings tab displays a table used to describe the color, width,
and speed of each pen in the plotter.
NOTE The physical pen information cannot be detected automatically; you must
provide this information for your pen plotter under Physical Pen Characteristics.
Pen Configuration Specifies settings for pen plotters.
■

Prompt for Pen Swapping: Use more than one pen while plotting on a
single-pen plotter. Under Physical Pen Characteristics, you can specify
settings for as many pens as you want. You are prompted when you need
to change pens.

■

Area Fill Correction: Enables the program to compensate for pen widths when
plotting filled areas and wide polylines. Each polygon is shrunk by half of
the width of the pen used to draw it. This option prevents the plotter from
oversizing the filled area when using a wide pen and ensures precision.
Use this option if the plot must be accurate to half the pen width, such as
in printed circuit artwork.

■

Pen Optimization Level: Reduces plot time and increases the efficiency of the
pens by optimizing the pen motion. For example, you can prevent pens
from retracing duplicate lines. If your drawing uses many colors or widths,

998 | Chapter 16 P Commands

you can reduce the time needed to change pens by selecting Adds Pen
Sorting. Every object that uses a particular pen will be plotted before
switching to another pen. Each method in the list includes the optimization
methods preceding it in the list (except for No Optimization).
Physical Pen Characteristics To plot your drawing correctly on a pen plotter,
you need to provide information about the pens in your plotter. For each pen
in your plotter, specify a color and width. To optimize pen performance, you
can specify a speed.
NOTE This information is required; the physical pen information cannot be
detected automatically.
■

Color: Specifies the colors of the pens in your plotter. The pen color that
closely matches the object's color is selected. You can assign colors to your
pens that correspond to each object's color. Use the Color list to select one
of the following settings: No Pen, Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Magenta,
Black, or Other. If you choose Other, the Select Color dialog box is
displayed, providing access to the full color palette. Use No Pen to indicate
that there is no pen in a particular position.

■

Speed: Adjusts pen speed on a pen-by-pen basis. This feature is useful, for
example, for slowing down pens that are skipping. Each pen manufacturer
recommends a pen speed for each type of media. For best results, use those
values. You can specify a pen speed in millimeters or inches per second.

■

Width: Specifies the width of your pens so the program can determine if
multiple pen strokes are needed to draw wide lines. You can specify the
pen width in inches or millimeters. Be sure to select the pen width to
match the actual width of the pen. The list provides a set of common pen
widths.

Specifying pen characteristics here doesn't replace the pen tables you might
have imported from PCP, PC2, or CFG files from AutoCAD Release 14,
®
AutoCAD LT 98, or earlier releases. For more information about importing
these settings, see “Change Plot Style Settings” in the User's Guide.

Graphics Node
Specifies settings for printing vector graphics, raster graphics, and TrueType
text. Depending on the capabilities of the plotter, you can modify color depth,
resolution, and dithering. You can select either color or monochrome output
for vector drawings. When printing raster images on a plotter with limited
memory, you can improve performance by making some changes to the quality
of the printed output. If you use a nonsystem plotter that supports varying

Plotter Configuration Editor | 999

amounts of installed RAM, you can provide that information to improve
performance.
Installed Memory
Provides the program with the amount of total memory (RAM) installed on
a nonsystem plotter. This option is only available for nonWindows system
printers that accept optional memory. If your plotter has extra memory, specify
the total amount of memory.
■

Total Installed Memory: Specifies the total installed memory in megabytes.
The plotter driver uses the memory information to determine whether
banding or image quality degradation is required to prevent the system
from running out of memory.

Vector Graphics
Provides options for specifying the color depth, resolution, and dithering of
vector output. Some of the Vector Graphics options are closely interrelated;
changing an option can affect other available options.
■

Color Depth: Displays a list for choosing color depth for the configured
plotter. The color depth options change as you change the resolution and
dithering values. More color depth uses more memory and takes longer to
plot. You can specify either color or monochrome output.

■

Resolution: Adjusts the DPI (dots per inch) resolution of the configured
plotter. Changing the DPI resolution changes the options available in the
Dithering list. A higher resolution setting uses more memory and takes
longer to plot than a lower resolution setting.

■

Dithering: Specifies a dithering choice for non-pen-based plotters. Some
dithering choices cause slower plotting.

Raster Graphics (Non-Pen Plotters Only)
Specifies trade-offs between plotting speed and output quality when plotting
raster objects on raster devices. If you reduce the image quality, you increase
output speed. If your system resources are limited, reducing image quality can
reduce the chance of running out of memory while plotting.
■

Raster and Shaded/Rendered Viewports: Specifies a position on the slider that
balances output quality with memory and plotting speed when plotting
raster images and shaded viewports. (Rendered viewport plotting is not
supported in AutoCAD LT Position the slider at None to disable raster
image printing. Degrading the image quality lets you plot in less time.

1000 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory
and plotting speed.
■

OLE: Specifies a position on the slider that balances output quality with
memory use and plotting speed when plotting OLE objects. Position the
slider at None to disable OLE object printing. Degrading the image quality
lets you plot in less time. Position the slider at Best for the best output at
the expense of memory and plotting speed.

■

Trade-off: Specifies where to compromise quality if you can't output at the
highest quality. Move the slider to diminish resolution and color.

TrueType Text
On Windows system printers, specifies whether to plot TrueType text as a
graphic image or as text.
Plotting as a graphic guarantees that the text is printed as displayed, at the
expense of slowing down the plotter and using more memory. Plotting as
TrueType text prints faster and uses less memory; the plotter may use a different
font for printing.
■

TrueType as Text: Plots TrueType text as text.

■

TrueType as Graphics: Plots TrueType text as graphics.

Merge Control
On raster plotters, controls the appearance of lines that cross. Merge control
is not effective if your plotter is configured to plot everything as black or if
you are using PostScript language.
■

Lines Overwrite: Uses the last plotted line to obscure the lines under it. Only
the topmost line is visible at the intersection.

■

Lines Merge: Merges the colors of crossing lines.

NOTE Merge control may appear as an option for system printers that do not
actually support the feature. Please check your printer's documentation to
determine if merge control is supported.

Custom Properties Node
Modifies the device-specific properties for the plotter configuration. The
settings for each plotter vary. If the plotter manufacturer has not included a
Custom Properties dialog box for the device driver, the Custom Properties
option is not available.

Plotter Configuration Editor | 1001

For some drivers, such as ePlot, this is the only tree view option that is
displayed. For Windows system printers, most of the device-specific settings
are made in this dialog box. For more information about the custom properties
settings for your device, choose Help in the Custom Properties dialog box.

Initialization Strings Node (for Non-System Plotters Only)
Sets pre-initialization, post-initialization, and termination ASCII text plotter
strings, which send commands to a plotting device before and after the
program initializes the device and after plotting is complete.
If you are plotting to an unsupported plotter in emulation mode, you can
specify ASCII text initialization strings that prepare the plotter for printing,
set device-specific options, and restore the plotter to its original state. You can
also use initialization strings to turn on or off a plotting device feature that
is not supported by the program.
The text string is sent literally, except for a back slash (\). Use a back slash
followed by a three-digit number (taken from the ASCII table), for example,
\027, to specify binary (unprintable) characters such as the escape character.
\027 is interpreted and sent as a single character whose value is 27. The number
27 is the escape character. For example, \27%-12345X PJL ENTER LANGUAGE
= PostScript\10 sends an HP PJL command to a dual-language laser printer
before it's initialized and switches the printer into PostScript mode. The \027
sends an escape character and the \010 sends a line feed character. The
remainder of the text string is sent literally. It is best to use three decimal
digits for binary characters, so you'll need to add leading zeros as necessary.
Initialization strings should be used by advanced users only.
Pre-Initialization
Forces a plotter to emulate another plotter by sending a pre-initialization
ASCII text string to the plotter before it is initialized.
Use a back slash followed by a three-digit number (taken from the ASCII table),
for example, \027, to specify binary (unprintable) characters such as the escape
character.
Post-Initialization
Sets a device-specific option that is not supported elsewhere in the program.
Specify a post-initialization ASCII text string that is sent to the plotter after it
is initialized.
Use a back slash followed by a three-digit number (taken from the ASCII table),
for example, \027, to specify binary (unprintable) characters such as the escape
character.

1002 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Termination
Restores the printer to its original state after plotting. Specify a termination
ASCII text string that is sent to the plotter after plotting is complete.
Use a back slash followed by a three-digit number (taken from the ASCII table),
for example, \027, to specify binary (unprintable) characters such as the escape
character.

User-Defined Paper Sizes & Calibration Node
Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file, calibrates the plotter, and adds, deletes,
revises, or filters custom paper sizes. You can also modify standard paper sizes.
This node accesses the Plotter Calibration and Custom Paper Size wizards. If
the plotter you are using has been calibrated, a Plotter Model Parameter (PMP)
file contains that calibration information. If the PMP file is not already attached
to the PC3 file you are editing, you must create that association so you can
use the PMP file. If the plotter was calibrated from within the Add-a-Plotter
wizard while creating the current PC3 file, the PMP file is already attached.
Use the PMP File Name option under User-defined Paper Sizes & Calibration
to attach a PMP file to, or detach the PMP file from, the PC3 file you are
editing.
Custom Paper Sizes (Nonsystem Printers Only)
Creates a customized paper size or changes the printable area of a standard or
nonstandard paper size.
With the Custom Paper Size wizard you can create a new paper size, or select
from a list of available paper sizes (from a PMP file) if the plotter is not a
Windows system printer. If the plotter is a Windows system printer, use
Custom Properties.
Each plotter has a maximum printable area determined by where it grips the
paper and how far the pen shuttle can reach. If you are creating a paper size
that is larger than the paper sizes offered in the Plotter Configuration Editor,
verify that the plotter is capable of plotting the new dimensions.
■

Add: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard. When you add a paper size, you
can either create a new paper size from scratch or create a new one based
on the listing of available paper sizes for the selected configured plotter.
The new paper size is a user-defined size, not a standard size.

■

Delete: Deletes the selected custom paper size from the list.

■

Edit: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard, where you can modify the selected
paper size. You can change any of the custom paper size settings.

Plotter Configuration Editor | 1003

NOTE For Windows system printers, you can change the paper size settings and
create custom paper sizes only in the Custom Properties dialog box.
Modify Standard Paper Sizes
Adjusts the printable area for standard paper sizes to match the printer's
capabilities. (You can't create custom paper sizes for Windows system printers
using the Plotter Configuration Editor.)
■

List of Standard Paper Sizes: Displays the available set of standard paper sizes.

■

Modify: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard. You can modify Printable Area
and File Name. The new paper size is a user-defined size, not a standard
size.

Filter Paper Sizes
Filters the list of paper sizes displayed for the plotting device selected in the
Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes. The list of paper sizes is displayed on the
Plot Settings tab in the Plot dialog box and on the Layout Settings tab in the
Page Setup dialog box.
Select the paper sizes you want to display for this device.
■

Check All: Hides all the paper sizes for the device.

■

Uncheck All: Displays all the paper sizes for the device.

Plotter Calibration
Starts the Plotter Calibration wizard. If you need to correct scaling
discrepancies, you can adjust the plotter calibration using the Plotter
Calibration wizard. See “Calibrate Plotters and Work with Custom Paper Sizes”
in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
NOTE You should perform a plotter calibration only if your drawings must be
exactly to scale and your plotter or printer produces inaccurate plots. Plotter
Calibration causes the program to rescale all plots sent to your plotter. If your
plotter provides a calibration utility, it is recommended that you use it instead of
the utility supplied with this program.
PMP File Attaches a PMP file to or detaches a PMP file from the PC3 file you
are editing. Use the Detach button to break the association between the PMP
file and the PC3 file.
■

Attach: Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file. You can reuse calibration and
custom paper size data stored in the PMP file.

1004 | Chapter 16 P Commands

■

Save PMP: Saves a PMP file to a new file in the AutoCAD LT 2012\drv folder.

■

Detach: Detaches the PMP file associated with the PC3 file you are editing.

Import
Imports file information from earlier versions of the program. If you have a
PCP or PC2 file from an earlier version, you can import some of the
information in those files into a PC3 file. PC3 files store plotter name, port
information, pen optimization level, paper size, and resolution.

Save As
Saves a PC3 File to a new file name.

Defaults
Restores the settings on the Device and Document Settings tab back to the
default settings.

Configure LPT Port Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Specifies the time that the program waits for the plotter buffer to empty before
sending more data.

Summary
You specify how much time you want to elapse before you are prompted to
cancel the plot. If your drawings are complex or your pen speed is very slow,
set the timeout value higher than the default (30 seconds). If you begin to
receive numerous timeout prompts, your timeout setting is probably too low.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Timeout
Specifies an amount of time to wait before retrying.

Configure LPT Port Dialog Box | 1005

Transmission Retry
Specifies the timeout value in milliseconds.

Settings for COM Port Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Specifies the baud rate, protocol, flow control, and hardware handshaking for
serial ports on plotters that support these settings.
NOTE The settings on your plotter must match the settings in the program or
you cannot plot.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Baud Rate
Specifies the baud rate. Use the fastest available baud rate.
Protocol
Displays the protocol settings available for your plotter. Use the protocol
recommended by your device manufacturer. For more information see the
documentation for your device.
Flow Control
Sets the flow control for your plotter. The default flow control setting is
XON/XOFF (software handshaking) for compatibility with previous versions
of the program.
If you select Hardware handshaking, you can specify additional settings in
the Advanced Settings for COM Port dialog box that correspond to different
pins on the RS232 connector.

1006 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Plotting

Specifies additional hardware handshaking settings for serial ports.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

CTS
Enables Clear To Send handshaking. This monitors pin 5 of a 25-pin serial
port or pin 8 of a 9-pin serial port. CTS is an input bit, monitored for an output
from the plotter or printer.

DSR
Enables Data Set Ready handshaking. This monitors pin 6 of a 25-pin serial
port, or pin 6 of a 9-pin serial port. DSR is an input bit, monitored for an
output from the printer or plotter.

RLSD
Enables Received Line Signal Detector handshaking. This is sometimes called
DCD or Data Carrier Detect. It is an input pin that can be monitored for an
output from the plotter. It is on pin 8 of a 25-pin serial port and on pin 1 of
a 9-pin serial port.

RTS
Controls the Request To Send output bit. This sends a signal to the printer or
plotter on pin 4 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 7 of a 9-pin serial port.
Disabled
Disables the RTS line when the device is opened.
Enabled
Enables the RTS line when the device is opened.
Handshake

Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box | 1007

Enables RTS handshaking. The driver raises the RTS line when the input buffer
is less than one-half full and lowers the RTS line when the buffer is more than
three-quarters full.
Toggle
Specifies that the RTS line is high if bytes are available for transmission. After
all buffered bytes have been sent, the RTS line is low.

DTR
Controls the Data Terminal Ready output pin. This sends a signal to the printer
or plotter on pin 20 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9-pin serial port.
Disabled
Disables the DTR line when the device is opened.
Enabled
Enables the DTR line when the device is opened.
Handshake
Enables DTR handshaking.

PNGOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and
viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter

1008 | Chapter 16 P Commands

A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select.
The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed
in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the
lights is set to No.
NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
at the Command prompt.

POINT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Reference Points

Creates a point object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Multiple Points
Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Single
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full
three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if
you omit the Z coordinate value.
The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point
objects. PDMODE values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the
point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed.

POINT | 1009

Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point,
in addition to the figure drawn through it:

PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0
and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area
height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures.
A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size.
After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points
changes the next time the drawing is regenerated.
You can use MEASURE and DIVIDE to create points along an object. Use
DDPTYPE to specify point size and styles easily.

List of Prompts
Specify a point: Specify a point in the drawing

1010 | Chapter 16 P Commands

POLYGON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Rectangles and Polygons

Creates an equilateral closed polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon
Menu: Draw ➤ Polygon
Toolbar: Draw

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter number of sides : Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press Enter
Specify center of polygon on page 1011 or [Edge on page 1012]: Specify a point (1)
or enter e

Center of Polygon
Defines the center of the polygon.
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] : Enter
i or c or press Enter

POLYGON | 1011

Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the
polygon lie.
Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value

Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and
size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge
of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle.
Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the
polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
Specify radius of circle: Specify a distance

Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and
size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge
of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle.

Edge
Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point (2)

1012 | Chapter 16 P Commands

You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number
of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is
shown.

PREVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Preview a Plot

Displays the drawing as it will be plotted.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Preview
Menu: Application menu
Menu: File ➤ Plot Preview
Toolbar: Standard

➤ Print ➤ Plot Preview

PREVIEW | 1013

Summary
The preview is based on the current plot configuration, as defined by the
settings in the Page Setup or Plot dialog box. It shows exactly how the drawing
will look when plotted, including lineweights, fill patterns, and other plot
style options.
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs.
Dragging the cursor toward the top of the screen while holding down the pick
button enlarges the preview image. Dragging toward the bottom of the screen
reduces the preview image.

PROPERTIES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Controls properties of existing objects.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties
Menu: Modify ➤ Properties
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or
modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.

Summary
The Properties palette is displayed and lists the properties of the selected
objects.

1014 | Chapter 16 P Commands

When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all
selected objects are displayed.
When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties
are displayed.
There are several general properties common to all objects. All other object
properties are specific to the type of object.

Properties Palette
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows

Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects.

Summary
When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all
selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current
settings of general properties are displayed.
You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed.
Click the value and use one of the following methods:
■

Enter a new value.

■

Click the down arrow a the right and select a value from the list.

■

Click the Pick Point button to use the pointing device to change a
coordinate value.

■

Click the QuickCalc calculator button to calculate a new value.

■

Click the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the value.

■

Click the [ ] button and change the property value in a dialog box.

NOTE When you view properties of AutoCAD objects, some properties may be
unavailable.

Properties Palette | 1015

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Object Type Displays the type of object that is selected.
Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar Turns the PICKADD system variable on
(1) and off (0). When PICKADD is on, each object selected, either individually
or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. When PICKADD is off,
selected objects replace the current selection set.
Select Objects Selects desired objects using any selection method. The
properties common to the selected objects are displayed in the Properties
palette. You can then modify the properties of the selected objects in the
Properties palette, or you can make other changes to the selected objects by
entering an editing command.
Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box . Use Quick Select to create
selection sets based on filtering criteria.

Shortcut Menu
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the
title bar.
Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the
palette. The palette does not dock.
Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or
a corner to make the palette smaller or larger.
Close Closes the Properties palette.
Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor palette windows. If this
option is selected, a window can be docked when you drag it over a docking
area at the side of a drawing. A docked window adheres to the side of the
application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting this
option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available.
Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the Properties palette to an anchor tab
base at the right or left side of the drawing area. The palette rolls open and
closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored palette is open, its
content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored palette cannot be set to stay
open.
Auto-hide Causes a floating palette to roll open and closed as the cursor
moves across it. When this option is cleared, the palette stays open.
Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box on page 888.

1016 | Chapter 16 P Commands

General Properties of Objects
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Each graphical object in a drawing shares a common set of properties known
as the general properties.

Summary
The following general properties are common to most graphical objects.
NOTE Layers or objects that are assigned property overrides in viewports display
a ByLayer (VP) value and a background color for applicable properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Color Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in the color list
displays the Select Color dialog box (see COLOR).
Layer Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows all layers in the
current drawing (see LAYER).
Linetype Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list shows all
linetypes in the current drawing (see LINETYPE).

Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see LTSCALE).
Plot Style Lists NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot styles contained
in the current plot style table (see PLOTSTYLE).
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available
lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT).
Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink to a graphical object. If a description has been
assigned to the hyperlink, the description is displayed. If no description has
been assigned, the URL is displayed (see HYPERLINK).

General Properties of Objects | 1017

Transparency Specifies the transparency of the object (see TRANSPARENCY).
Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness. This property does not apply to all
objects (see CHPROP).

Cell Border Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Sets the properties of the borders of table cells.

Access Methods
Pointing device: With a table cell selected and the Properties palette open,
click in the value cell for Border Lineweight or Border Color, and click the [...]
button.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Border Properties
Controls the properties of the borders of the selected table cells.
Lineweight
Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed. If you use a heavy
lineweight, you may have to change the cell margins.
Linetype
Sets the linetype to be used for borders that are displayed.
Color
Sets the color to be used for borders that are displayed.
Double Line

1018 | Chapter 16 P Commands

When checked, a double line border will be added to the selected cells.
Spacing
Determines the spacing of double-line borders. The default value is .1800.

Preview
Displays a preview of how the borders of the selected table will look.
NOTE Linetypes will not display in the preview.
All Borders
Applies the border properties settings to all borders of the selected table cells.
Outside Borders
Applies the border properties settings to the outside borders of the selected
table cells.
Inside Borders
Applies the border properties settings to the inside borders of the selected
table cells.
No Borders
Applies the border properties settings to none of the borders of the selected
table cells.
Top Border Applies the border properties setting to the top borders of the
selected table cells.
Inside Horizontal Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside
horizontal borders of the selected table cells.
Bottom Border Applies the border properties setting to the bottom borders
of the selected table cells.
Left Border Applies the border properties setting to the left borders of the
selected table cells.
Inside Vertical Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside
vertical border of the selected table cells.
Right Border Applies the border properties setting to the right border of the
selected table cells.

Cell Border Properties Dialog Box | 1019

Add Distance or Angle Value Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Adds distance or angle values to a parameter's value set in a dynamic block
definition.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Distances or Angle to Add
Specifies values (separated by commas) to add to the value set.
Distances or Angles List (Unlabeled)
Lists the distances or angles defined for the value set.
Add
Adds the values specified in the Distances or Angle to Add box.
Delete
Deletes the selected value.

PROPERTIESCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Closes the Properties palette.

Summary
The Properties palette closes.

1020 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PSETUPIN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout.

Summary
The Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box) is displayed in which you can select the drawing (.dwg), template (.dwt),
or drawing interchange format (.dxf) file whose page setups you want to import.
If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt,
PSETUPIN displays command prompts.
When you select the drawing file that you want to use, the Import Page Setups
dialog box is displayed.

-PSETUPIN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify Page Setup Settings

If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Enter file name: Enter the name of the drawing file that contains the pagesetup to
import
Enter user defined page setup to import or [?]: Enter the name of the page setup
to import

PSETUPIN | 1021

PSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work in Model Space

In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space.

Summary
The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working
on a named (paper space) layout.

On the named layout, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing
for printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports,
which are windows containing different views of the model. By switching
from paper space to model space (see MSPACE), you can edit the model and
views within the current layout viewport.
You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it. You can switch
to paper space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not
within a viewport.
When in paper space, you can also switch to model space by clicking Model
on the status bar. If you are in model space, you can switch to the last paper
space b clicking Paper on the status bar.
You can also switch between layout and model tabs at the bottom of the
drawing area.
NOTE The layout and Model tabs are only displayed if you have selected the
Display Layout and Model Tabs in the Display Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page
847.

1022 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PUBLISH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish Drawings

Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot
Menu: File ➤ Publish
Toolbar: Standard

Summary
You can assemble a collection of drawings and create an electronic drawing
set. Electronic drawing sets are saved as DWF and DWFx files that can be
viewed or plotted using Autodesk Design Review. PDF files can be viewed with
a PDF viewer

Select an Exising Drawing Set Description
If you enter +publish at the Command prompt, you can select an existing
Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file from the Select List of Sheets dialog box
(a standard file selection dialog box on page 826). The Publish dialog box opens
and displays the drawing set saved in the DSD file under Sheets to Publish.
With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0, if you enter +publish at the
Command prompt, PUBLISH displays Command prompts.

PUBLISH | 1023

Publish Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Specifies drawing sheets that you can assemble, reorder, rename, copy, and
save for publishing as a multi-sheet drawing set. You can publish the drawing
set to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file or send it to the plotter named in the page
setup for hardcopy output or as a plot file. You can save this list of drawing
sheets as a DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) file. Saved drawing sets can replace
or be appended to the current list for republishing.
Specifies drawing sheets that you can assemble, reorder, rename, copy, and
save for publishing as a multisheet drawing set. You can publish the drawing
set to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file or sent it to the plotter named in the page
setup for hardcopy output or as a plot file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Sheet List
Displays the current drawing set (DSD) or batch plot (BP3) file.
Load Sheet List Button
Displays the Load Sheet List dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box
on page 826), in which you can select a DSD file to load. Displays the Replace
or Append dialog box if a list of drawing sheets is present in the Publish
Drawing Sheets dialog box. You can either replace the existing list of drawing
sheets with the new sheets or append the new sheets to the current list.
Save Sheet List Button
Displays the Save List As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on
page 826), in which you can save the current list of drawings as a DSD file. DSD
files are used to describe lists of drawing files and selected lists of layouts
within those drawing files.

1024 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Publish To:
Defines how to publish the list of sheets. You can publish to either a
multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file (an electronic drawing set) or to the
plotter specified in the page setup (a paper drawing set or a set of plot files).
Plotter Named in Page Setup
Indicates that the output devices given for each drawing sheet in the page
setup will be used.
DWF, DWFx, and PDF
Selects the output file format: DWF, DWFx, or PDF.

Automatically Load All Open Drawings
When selected, the contents of all open documents (layouts and/or model
space) are automatically loaded in the publish list. When not selected, only
the current document’s contents are loaded in the publish list.

List of Sheets Buttons
Add Sheets Button
Displays the Select Drawings dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box
on page 826), in which you can select drawings to add to the list of drawing
sheets. The layout names from those files are extracted, and one sheet is added
to the list of drawing sheets for each layout and model.
The initial drawing sheet names are constructed from the base drawing name
and the layout name or the word Model separated by a dash (-).
Remove Sheets Button
Deletes the selected drawing sheets from the list of sheets.
Move Sheet Up Button
Moves the selected drawing sheets up one position in the list.
Move Sheet Down Button
Moves the selected drawing sheets down one position in the list.
Preview Button
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by executing
the PREVIEW command. To exit the print preview and return to the Publish
dialog box, press ESC, press ENTER, or right-click and then click Exit on the
shortcut menu.

Publish Dialog Box | 1025

Sheets to Publish
Contains the list of drawing sheets to be included for publishing. Click the
page setup column to change the sheet’s settings. Use the shortcut menu to
add sheets or make other changes to the list.
Sheet Name Combines the drawing name and the layout name with a dash
(-). Includes the Model tab only if the Include Model When Adding Sheets
option is selected. You can copy sheets by clicking Copy Selected Sheets on
the shortcut menu. You can change the name shown in Sheet Name by clicking
Rename Sheet on the shortcut menu. Drawing sheet names must be unique
within a single DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. The shortcut menu also provides an
option for removing all the sheets from the list.
NOTE The drawing sheets that populate the Sheets to Publish list are controlled
by the PUBLISHALLSHEETS system variable.
Page Setup Displays the named page setup for the sheet. You can change the
page setup by clicking the page setup name and selecting another page setup
from the list. Only Model tab page setups can be applied to Model tab sheets,
and only paper space page setups can be applied to paper space layouts. Select
Import to import page setups from another DWG file through the Import Page
Setups for Publishing dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Status Displays the status of the sheet when it is loaded to the list of sheets.

Show Details
Displays and hides the Selected Sheet Information and Selected Page Setup
Information areas.

Selected Sheet Details
Displays the following information about the selected page setup: plot device,
plot size, plot scale, and details.

Publish Options Information
Publish Options
Opens the Publish Options dialog box, in which you can specify options for
publishing.

Publish Output
Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies to publish. If the Publish to DWF, DWFx, or
PDF option is selected, the Number of Copies setting defaults to 1 and cannot
be changed. If a sheet's page setup specifies to plot to file, then the number
set in this option is ignored and a single plot file is created.

1026 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Precision Optimizes the dpi of DWF, DWFx, and PDF files for your field:
manufacturing, architecture or civil engineering. Or you can configure a
custom precision preset in the Precision Presets Manager on page 489.
This setting overrides the dpi setting in the .PC3 driver. This option is grayed
out if no file type is selected in the Publish to: drop-down list.
NOTE The precision override is applied to all sheets in the list.
Include Plot Stamp
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.
The plot stamp data is specified in the Plot Stamp Dialog BoxPlot Stamp
Settings Dialog Box on page 979.
Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Dialog BoxPlot Stamp Settings
Dialog Box on page 979, in which you can specify the information, such as
drawing name and plot scale, that you want applied to the plot stamp
Publish in Background
Toggles background publishing for the selected sheet/s.
You can also set the background publishing in the Plot and Publish tab (Tools
menu ➤ Options). Select the Publishing checkbox in the Background
processing options group.
Send the Sheets to the Plotter in Reverse Order When selected, sends sheets
to the plotter in reverse of default order. This option is available only if the
Plotter Named in Page Setup option is selected.
Open in Viewer when Done When publishing completes, the DWF, DWFx
or PDF file will open in a viewer application.

Publish
Starts the publishing operation. Creates one or more single-sheet DWF, DWFx,
or PDF files or a single multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file, depending on
the contents in the list of drawing sheets and the settings in the Publish
Options dialog box.
To display information about the published drawing set, including any errors
or warnings, click the Plotting Details Report Available icon in the status tray
on the right side of the status bar. Clicking this icon displays the Plot and
Publish Details dialog box, which provides information about your completed
plot and publish jobs. This information is also saved to the Plot and Publish
log file. The shortcut menu for this icon also provides an option to view the
most recently published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.

Publish Dialog Box | 1027

Publish Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Specifies options for publishing.

Summary
Specifies general options for the published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file such as
the file name, the save location, and layer information.

List of Options
Default Output Location (Plot to File)
Specifies the output folder location where DWF, DWFx, PDF, and plot files
are saved when you publish drawing sheets.

General DFW/PDF Options
Specifies options for creating a single-sheet DWF or DWFx file.
Type Specifies that a single-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file or a single
multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file is generated for all the sheets listed in
the Publish Dialog Box on page 1024.
Naming
■

Prompt for Name - Indicates that you will be prompted for a name and
location to publish the multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF files.

■

Specify Name - Prompts you for a name and location to publish the
multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF files.

Name Enables you to specify the data that you can optionally include in the
DWF, DWFx or PDF file.
Layer Information Specifies whether layer information is included in the
published DWF, DWFx or PDF file.
Merge Control Specifies whether overlapping lines merge (the colors of the
lines blend together into a third color) or overwrite (the last plotted line
obscures the line beneath it).

1028 | Chapter 16 P Commands

DWF Data Options
Lists and enables you to specify the data that you can optionally include in
the DWF or DWFx file.
Password Protection Specifies the following options for protecting DWF or
DWFx files with passwords:
■

DisabledSpecifies that no password is required.

■

Prompt for Password - Displays the DWF Password Dialog Box on page
1032 when you click Publish.

■

Specify Password - Specifies that the password in the password box is
applied to the DWF or DWFx file. When you select this option, the
Password box becomes available, and you must enter a password.
NOTE If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be recovered. Keep a list
of passwords and their corresponding DWF or DWFx file names in a safe place.

Password Specifies that published DWF or DWFx files have a password applied
to them. A recipient of a DWF or DWFx file that has a password applied to it
must have the password to open the DWF or DWFx file.
Block Information Specifies whether block property and attribute information
is included in the published DWF or DWFx files.
NOTE You must set block information to Include in order for block template file
information to be available.
Block Template File Provides options for creating a new block template (DXE)
file, editing an existing block template file, or using the settings of a previously
created block template file.
Create opens the Publish Block Template dialog box on page 1030, in which
you can create a new block template.
Edit opens the Select Block Template dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box on page 826), in which you can select an existing block template
to modify.

Publish Options Dialog Box | 1029

Publish Block Template Dialog Box (Publish)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Specifies which blocks and their properties and attributes to include in the
published DWF or DWFx file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Template
Displays the name of the current block template.

Block Source Drawings
Displays all block source drawings that have been loaded into the Publish
Block Template dialog box.

Add
Adds drawings to the list of block source drawings.

Remove
Removes selected drawings from the list of block source drawings.

Scan for Blocks
Scans block source drawings for unique definitions of blocks and their
properties and attributes.

Block Data to Publish
Displays block data to publish.
Unique Blocks from Source Drawings
Displays unique blocks found in block source drawings.
Check Blocks to Publish
Displays all scanned blocks found in block source drawings.

1030 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Exclude Blocks Without Attributes
Excludes blocks without attributes defined.
Properties of Selected Blocks
Displays properties of selected blocks found in block source drawings.
Check Properties to Publish
Displays the union of properties of the current selection of blocks.
Exclude General Block Properties
Excludes all general block properties from the list display.

Options
Opens the Block Template Options dialog box where you can specify additional
settings.

Save
Saves the block template file.

Block Template Options Dialog Box (Publish)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Specifies optional settings to include blocks within blocks and to include
blocks within xrefs in the published DWF or DWFx file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Include Nested Blocks Includes blocks within blocks in the published DWF
or DWFx file.
Include Blocks in Xrefs Includes blocks within xrefs in the published DWF
or DWFx file.

Block Template Options Dialog Box (Publish) | 1031

DWF Password Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Specifies the password to apply to the DWF or DWFx file. DWF or DWFx
passwords are case sensitive. The password or phrase can be made up of letters,
numbers, punctuation, or non-ASCII characters.
WARNING If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be recovered. Keep a list
of passwords and their corresponding DWF or DWFx file names in a safe place.
When you enter a password and click OK, the Confirm DWF Password dialog
box is displayed.

Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the DWF
Password dialog box. If the two passwords do not match, you must click
Publish again to reenter the correct password.

1032 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Publish Job Progress Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Summary
Displays information about the status and progress of your publish job if
background publishing is turned off in the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish
tab.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Cancel Sheet Cancels publishing of the sheet currently being processed.
Cancel Job Cancels the publish job.

-PUBLISH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Publishing

Access Method
Command entry: +publish

Summary
The Command prompt version of PUBLISH provides an interface for publishing
drawing sheets that can be controlled by a script. It also provides a simplified
method for regenerating DWF or DWFx files or plotted output from existing
DSD files.

Publish Job Progress Dialog Box | 1033

With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0, enter +publish at the Command
prompt. The following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter name of sheet list : Press ENTER for the current drawing
or enter the sheet list name
NOTE The bracketed text  contains the name of the DSD file
used when this command was last run. The bracketed text area is blank if no
previous name exists. If you enter a tilde (~) for the file name, the standard file
selection dialog box is displayed regardless of the FILEDEA setting.
The file name is validated and the list of sheets is loaded.
When -PLOT, PLOT, +PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are used in a script (SCR file),
the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored, and -PLOT, PLOT,
+PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground.
Once the publish job starts, each drawing sheet name is listed along with an
appropriate message. Drawing sheets not found or not initialized are indicated
with an error message.
When the publish job is complete, the details can be viewed in the Plot and
Publish Details dialog box.
A log file is written during the publish operation. The log file contains the
drawing sheet name, layout name, full drawing name, path name, and status.
The log file name is derived from the name of the sheet list file with CSV
replacing the DSD file extension.
NOTE Any existing log file is overwritten by a new log file without any warning
message being displayed.

PUBLISHTOWEB
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages

1034 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Creates HTML pages that include images of selected drawings.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: File ➤ Publish to Web

Summary
The Publish to Web wizard is displayed.
This wizard provides a simplified interface for creating formatted web pages
that include DWF, DWFx, JPEG, or PNG images of drawings. After creating a
web page, you can post it to an Internet or intranet location.

Publish to Web Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages

Creates a formatted HTML page.

Summary
You can choose from a number of different formatting options that control
the layout of your completed HTML page. After creating an HTML page, you
can use the wizard to publish the page to an Internet or intranet location.
You can also use the wizard to modify existing HTML pages that were created
using the PUBLISHTOWEB command.
You can customize the template you use for your web page. For information
about customizing templates, see “Customize a Publish to Web Template” in
the Customization Guide.

Publish to Web Wizard | 1035

PURGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu
➤ Drawing Utilites ➤ Purge
Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge

Summary
The Purge dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Unused named objects can be removed from the current drawing. These
include include block definitions, dimension styles, groups, layers, linetypes,
and text styles. Zero-length geometry and empty text objects can also be
removed.
NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length
geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers.

Purge Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

1036 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.

Summary
Displays items that can be purged.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Named Objects
View Items You Can Purge
Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current
drawing that you can purge.
Items Not Used in Drawing
Lists the named objects that are not used in the current drawing and that can
be purged.
You can list the items for any object type by clicking the plus sign or by
double-clicking the object type. You purge items by selecting the item to purge.

Purge Dialog Box | 1037

Purge Nested Items removes items only when you select one of the following
options:
■

All Items or Blocks in the tree view

■

The Purge All button

View Items You Cannot Purge
Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current
drawing that you can't purge.
Items Currently Used in Drawing
Lists named objects that cannot be removed from the drawing.
Most of these objects are currently used in the drawing or are default items
that cannot be removed.
When you select individual named objects, information about why you can't
purge the item is displayed below the tree view.
Confirm Each Item to Be Purged
Displays the Confirm Purge dialog box when you purge an item.
Purge Nested Items
Removes all unused named objects from the drawing even if they are contained
within or referenced by other unused named objects.
The Confirm Purge dialog box is displayed, and you can cancel or confirm
the items to be purged.
Tip
Displays information detailing why you can't purge the selected item.

Unnamed Objects
Purge zero-length geometry and empty text objects
Deletes geometry of zero length (lines, arcs, polylines and so on) in non-block
objects. Also deletes mtext and text that contains only spaces (no text) in
non-block objects.
NOTE The PURGE command will not remove zero-length geometry or empty text
and mtext objects from blocks or locked layers.

Purge
Purges the selected items.

1038 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Purge All
Purges all unused items.

-PURGE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Removes unused named objects, such as block definitions and layers, from
the drawing at the Command prompt.

Summary
Allows you to remove unused named objects from a drawing at the Command
prompt. You can only remove one level of reference at a time. Repeat the
command until there are no unreferenced, named objects.
NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length
geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Type of Unused Objects to Purge
Deletes unused applications from blocks, dimension styles, groups, layers,
linetypes, materials, multileader styles, plot styles, shapes, text styles, multiline
styles, table styles, visual styles, regapps, zero-length geometry, empty text
objects, or all.
Enter Name (s) to Purge Enter an object name of * to list the objects.
Verify Each Name to Be Purged? Enter y to verify each name.

-PURGE | 1039

1040

Q Commands

17

QCCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of QuickCalc

Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

Summary
Closes the QuickCalc calculator.

QDIM
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Dimensioning

Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

1041

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Quick Dimension
Menu: Dimension ➤ Quick Dimension
Toolbar: Dimension

Summary
This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or
continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select geometry to dimension: Select the objects you want to dimension or the
dimensions you want to edit and press Enter
Specify dimension line position, or
[Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/Radius/Diameter/datumPoint/Edit/seTtings]
: Enter an option or press Enter
Continuous Creates a series of continued dimensions.
Staggered Creates a series of staggered dimensions.
Baseline Creates a series of baseline dimensions.
Ordinate Creates a series of ordinate dimensions.
Radius Creates a series of radial dimensions.
Diameter Creates a series of diameter dimensions.
Datum Point Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate dimensions.
Edit Edits a series of dimensions. You are prompted to add or remove points
from existing dimensions.
Settings Sets the default object snap for specifying extension line origins.

1042 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

QKUNGROUP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Group Objects

■

UNGROUP on page 1286

Removes a group definition from a drawing.

Access Methods
Command entry: qkungroup

Summary
The group definition is deleted; the group is split into its component objects.

QLEADER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Leaders

■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Creates a leader and leader annotation.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER
on page 742 command to create leader objects.
You can use QLEADER to
■

Specify leader annotation and annotation format

■

Set the location where leaders attach to multiline text annotation

QKUNGROUP | 1043

■

Limit the number of leader points

■

Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments

You can use the Leader Settings dialog box to customize the command so that
it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type suited
to your drawing needs.
If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the leader start
point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object is relocated,
the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches,
but the text or feature control frame remains in place.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify “first leader point”, or [“Settings”] : Specify the first leader
point, or press Enter to specify leader settings

First Leader Point
The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader
Settings dialog box determines the number of leader points you are prompted
to specify.
Width If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text
is unlimited.
Tolerance If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box is displayed. Use the dialog box to create the tolerance
feature control frame.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks defined
in the drawing
Insertion Point For a description of the insertion options, see -INSERT on
page 624.

Settings
Displays the Leader Settings dialog box.

1044 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Leader Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Leaders

■

Modify Leaders Using Grips

Creates a leader and leader annotation.

Summary
Customizes the QLEADER command and sets properties for leaders and leader
annotations.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.

Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Annotation Type
Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER
leader annotation prompt.
MText
Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation.

Leader Settings Dialog Box | 1045

Copy an Object
Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block
reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy
is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves,
the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends
on the object copied.
Tolerance
Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to create a feature control
frame to attach to the leader.
Block Reference
Prompts you to insert a block reference. The block reference is inserted at an
offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line,
meaning that if the block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No
hook line is displayed.
None
Creates a leader with no annotation.

MText Options
The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is
selected.
Prompt for Width
Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text annotation.
Always Left Justify
Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless of leader location.
Frame Text
Places a frame around multiline text annotation.

Annotation Reuse
Sets options for reusing leader annotation.
None
Does not reuse leader annotation.
Reuse Next
Reuses the next annotation you create for all subsequent leaders.

1046 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Reuse Current
Reuses current annotation. This option is automatically selected when you
reuse annotation after selecting Reuse Next.

Leader Line & Arrow Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Leader Line
Sets the leader line format.
Straight
Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify.
Spline
Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points.

Arrowhead
Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension
lines (DIMSTYLE command). If you select User Arrow, a list of blocks in the
drawing is displayed.

Number of Points
Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before
prompting for the leader annotation. For example, if you set the points to 3,
QLEADER automatically prompts you to specify the annotation after you
specify two leader points. Set the number to one more than the number of
leader segments you want to create.
If you set the option to No Limit, QLEADER prompts for leader points until
you press Enter.

Leader Settings Dialog Box | 1047

Angle Constraints
Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines.
First Segment
Sets the angle of the first leader segment.
Second Segment
Sets the angle of the second leader segment.

Attachment Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)
Sets the attachment location for leader lines and multiline text annotation.
This tab is available only when Mtext is selected on the Annotation tab.

Top of Top Line
Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line.
Middle of Top Line
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top multiline text line.
Middle of Multiline Text
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline text.
Middle of Bottom Line
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom multiline text line.
Bottom of Bottom Line
Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom multiline text line.
Underline Bottom Line

1048 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Underlines the bottom multiline text line.

QNEW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use a Drawing Template File

Starts a new drawing from a selected drawing template file.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu
Toolbar: Standard

➤ New ➤ Drawing

Summary
QNEW creates a new drawing from the default drawing template file and
folder path specified in Default Template File Name for QNEW on the File tab
of the Options dialog box.
When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW
displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box).
The behavior of the QNEW command is determined by the STARTUP system
variable.
■

1: Displays the Create New Drawing dialog box.

■

0: Displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box) or starts the new drawing using the default drawing template file.

QNEW | 1049

If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt
is displayed. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the
Startup setting.

QSAVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Saves the current drawing using the specified default file format.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: File ➤ Save
Toolbar: Standard

Summary
If the drawing is named, the program saves the drawing and does not request
a new file name. Use the SAVEAS command if you need to save a drawing
with a different name. If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command
to save the changed file under a different name.
If the drawing is unnamed, the Save Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) is
displayed and the drawing is saved with the file name and format you specify.
NOTE The file format specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog
box is used when saving a drawing with this command.

1050 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

QSELECT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select
Menu: Tools ➤ Quick Select
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Quick Select.

Summary
The Quick Select dialog box is displayed.
QSELECT filters selection sets by object type and property. For example, you
can select all of the multiline text objects in a drawing that use a specified
text style.

Quick Select Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Specifies the filtering criteria and how you want to create the selection set
from that criteria.

QSELECT | 1051

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Apply To
Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection
set (if one exists).
If Append to Current Selection Set is selected, the filtering criteria is applied
to the entire drawing.
Select Objects
Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that you can select the
objects to which you want to apply the filter criteria.
Object Type
Specifies the type of objects to include in the filtering criteria. If the filtering
criteria are being applied to the entire drawing, the Object Type list includes
all object types, including custom. Otherwise, the list includes only the object
types of the selected objects.
®

If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature
classification to an object, you can select a classification.
If you select an object type not supported by AutoCAD LT, it is greyed out in
the Properties palette and is not available for changes.

1052 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Properties
Specifies the object property for the filter. This list includes all searchable
properties for the selected object type. The property you select determines the
options available in Operator and Value.
®

If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature
classification to an object, you can select a classification property.
Operator
Controls the range of the filter. Depending on the selected property, options
can include Equals, Not Equal To, Greater Than, Less Than, and *Wildcard
Match. *Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be edited.
Use the Select All option to ignore all properties filters.
For more information, see “Filter and Sort the List of Layers”.
Value
Specifies the property value for the filter.
How to Apply
Specifies whether you want the new selection set to include or exclude objects
that match the specified filtering criteria. Select Include in New Selection Set
to create a new selection set composed only of objects that match the filtering
criteria. Select Exclude from New Selection Set to create a new selection set
composed only of objects that do not match the filtering criteria.
Append to Current Selection Set
Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended
to the current selection set.
NOTE QSELECT supports custom objects (objects created by another application)
and their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD LT
properties, the custom object's source application must be running in order for
the properties to be available to QSELECT.

Quick Select Dialog Box | 1053

QTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text

Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.

Summary
When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed
as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces
the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain
many text objects.

QUICKCALC
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of QuickCalc

Opens the QuickCalc calculator.

Access Methods

Button

1054 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: Right-click and click QuickCalc.

Summary
The QuickCalc calculator performs a full range of mathematical, scientific,
and geometric calculations, creates and uses variables, and converts units of
measurement.
Displays the QuickCalc calculator on page 1055.

QuickCalc Calculator
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of QuickCalc

Performs a full range of mathematical, scientific, and geometric calculations,
creates and uses variables, and converts units of measurement.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Toolbar
Performs quick calculations of common functions.

Clear Clears the Input box.
Clear History Clears the history area.
Paste Value to Command Line Pastes the value in the Input box at the
Command prompt. When QuickCalc is used transparently during a command,
this button is replaced by the Apply button at the bottom of the calculator.
Get Coordinates Calculates the coordinates of a point.
Distance Between Two Points Calculates the distance between two points.
The calculated distance always displays as a unitless decimal value.

QuickCalc Calculator | 1055

Angle of Line Defined by Two Points Calculates the angle of two points.
Two Lines Defined by Four Points Calculates the intersection of four points.

History Area
Displays a running list of previously evaluated expressions. The History area
shortcut menu provides several options, including copying a selected
expression to the Clipboard.

Input Box
Provides a box where you enter and retrieve expressions.

More/Less Button
Hides or Displays all QuickCalc function areas. Right-click to select individual
function areas to hide or display.

Number Pad
Provides a standard calculator keypad where you enter numbers and symbols
for arithmetic expressions.

Scientific Area
Evaluates trigonometric, logarithmic, exponential, and other expressions
commonly associated with scientific and engineering applications.

Units Conversion Area
Converts units of measurement from one unit type to another unit type. The
units conversion area accepts only decimal values without units.
Units Type Select length, area, volume, and angular values from a list.
Convert From Lists the units of measurement from which to convert.
Convert To Lists the units of measurement to which to convert.
Value to Convert Provides a box to enter a value to convert.
Converted Value Converts the units entered and displays the converted value.
Calculator Icon Returns the converted value to the Input box.

Variables Area
Provides access to predefined constants and functions. You can use the
Variables area to define and store additional constants and functions.
Variables Tree Stores predefined shortcut functions and user-defined variables.

1056 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Shortcut functions are common expressions that combine a function with an
object snap. The following table describes the predefined shortcut functions
in the list.
Shortcut Function

Shortcut For

Description

dee

dist(end,end)

Distance between two endpoints

ille

ill(end,end,end,end)

Intersection of two lines
defined by four endpoints

mee

(end+end)/2

Midpoint between two endpoints

nee

nor(end,end)

Unit vector in the XY plane
and normal to two endpoints

rad

rad

Radius of a selected circle,
arc, or polyline arc

vee

vec(end,end)

Vector from two endpoints

vee1

vec1(end,end)

Unit vector from two endpoints

New Variable Button Opens the Variable Definition dialog box on page 1057.
Edit Variable Button Opens the Variable Definition dialog box on page 1057
so you can make changes to the selected variable.
Delete Variable Button Deletes the selected variable.
Calculator Button Returns the selected variable to the Input box.

Variable Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of QuickCalc

Variable Definition Dialog Box | 1057

Defines a variable to store in the variables tree.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Variable Type
Specifies the type of variable.
Constant
Stores the new variable as a constant.
Function
Stores the new variable as a function.

Variable Properties
Defines the properties of a new variable.
Name
Stores the name of the variable. Names of constants cannot include spaces.
Group With
Stores the named variable in the selected category. If New is selected, the
Category Definition dialog box on page 1059 opens, where you can define a
new category for the variable.
Value or Expression
Stores the value or expression for the variable.
Description
Stores a description for the variable.
OK
Closes the dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without applying the current settings.
Help
Displays Help.

1058 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Settings
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the
title bar.
Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the
dialog box. The dialog box does not dock.
Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or
a corner to make the smaller or larger.
Close Closes the Markup Set Manager.
Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor the calculator.
Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the QuickCalc calculator to an anchor
tab base at the right or left side of the drawing area.
Auto-hide Causes a floating palette to roll open and closed as the cursor
moves across it. When this option is cleared, the palette stays open.
Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box on page 888.

Category Definition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of QuickCalc

Defines a category to organize the variables in the variables tree.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Category Properties
Defines the properties of the new category.
Name
Stores the name of the category.
Description
Stores a description for the category.

Category Definition Dialog Box | 1059

OK
Closes the dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without applying the current settings.
Help
Displays Help.

QUICKCUI
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Edit Toolbars

Displays the Customize User Interface Editor in a collapsed state.

Summary
The Customize User Interface Editor on page 242 is displayed in a collapsed
state. Only the Customizations In  and Command List panes are
displayed. The Customizations In  pane is shown collapsed and the
Command List pane is shown expanded.
For more information, see User Interface Customization.

QUICKPROPERTIES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Displays quick property data for selected objects.

1060 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Summary
Displays the Quick Properties palette that displays a customizable list of object
properties for one or more selected objects.
The behavior of the Quick Propetries palette is controlled by settings on the
Quick Properties tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (DSETTINGS on page
414). The QPMODE on page 1632 system variable controls whether the palette
is displayed automatically when objects are selected.

QUIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Start a Drawing

Exits the program.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Exit

Summary
Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last
saved. If the drawing has been modified, you are prompted to save or discard
the changes before quitting.
You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made
no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications
to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under
another name.

QUIT | 1061

QVDRAWING
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch Between Open Drawings

Displays open drawings and layouts in a drawing in preview images.

Access Methods

Buton

Shortcut menu: Click on the status bar.

Summary
Displays a two-level structure of preview images at the bottom of the
application. The first level displays the images of open drawings and the second
level displays the images for model space and layouts in a drawing.

QVDRAWINGCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch Between Open Drawings

Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Shortcut menu: Click on the Quick View drawings toolbar.

1062 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Summary
Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing.

QVLAYOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing

Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing.

Access Methods

Buton

Shortcut menu: Click on the status bar.

Summary
Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing in a row at
the bottom of the application.

QVLAYOUTCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing

Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing

QVLAYOUT | 1063

Access Methods

Button

Shortcut menu: Click on the Quick View drawings toolbar.

Summary
Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawings.

1064 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

R Commands

18

RAY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)

Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray
Menu: Draw ➤ Ray

Summary
The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the
starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is
redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command.

1065

Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as
references for creating other objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point: Specify a point (1)
Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2)

RECOVER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file.

Access Methods

Button

1066 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover ➤ Recover
Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover

Summary
The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files
that can be recovered include DWG, DWT, and DWS files. Performing a recover
on a DXF file will only open the file.
In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the
drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed
in the text window.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following command
prompt.
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box.

RECOVERALL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Repairs a damaged drawing file along with all attached xrefs.

Access Methods
Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover ➤ Recover
with Xrefs
Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover Drawing and Xrefs

Summary
In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the
drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file.
The selected drawing file and all attached xrefs, including all nested xrefs, are
opened, repaired, resaved, and closed.
■

Drawing files are saved in the current drawing file format.

RECOVERALL | 1067

■

Copies of the original drawing files are saved as BAK files.

■

If the object enabler is present, custom objects are updated.

Results are displayed in the Drawing Recovery Log window. Each drawing file
checked includes a Drawing Recovery Log that can be expanded or collapsed.
The entire log can be copied to the Windows clipboard with the Copy to
Clipboard button.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVERALL displays the following command
prompt.
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box.
NOTE The RECOVERALL command recovers or audits DWG, DWT, and DWS files.

RECTANG
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Rectangles and Polygons

Creates a rectangular polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle
Menu: Draw ➤ Rectangle
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
With this command, you can specify the rectangle parameters (length, width,
rotation) and control the type of corners (fillet, chamfer, or square).

1068 | Chapter 18 R Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Rotation = 0
Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]:
Specify a point or enter an option

First Corner Point
Specifies a corner point of the rectangle.
Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally
opposite corners.

Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width. If the
Chamfer or Fillet option is active, the area includes the effect of the chamfers
or fillets on the corners of the rectangle.
Dimensions Creates a rectangle using length and width values.
Rotation Creates a rectangle at a specified rotation angle.

Chamfer
Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.

Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.

Fillet
Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.

Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.

Width
Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.

RECTANG | 1069

REDO
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Edit ➤ Redo
Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click
in the drawing area and click Redo.
Command entry: Ctrl+Y

Summary
REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must
immediately follow the U or UNDO command.

REDRAW
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Erase Objects

Refreshes the display in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Redraw
Command entry: 'redraw for transparent use

1070 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary
Removes temporary graphics left by VSLIDE and some operations from the
current viewport. To remove stray pixels, use the REGEN command.

REFCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference,
either an xref or a block definition.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-Place Editing ➤ Save Reference Edits
Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-Place Editing ➤ Close Reference
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected during in-place reference editing,
right-click in the drawing area and choose Close Refedit Session.

Summary
If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO
command to return to the reference editing session. If you have made
unwanted changes to an xref and already saved back the changes, use UNDO
to undo the unwanted changes; then use REFCLOSE to save back changes and
restore the xref to its original state.
NOTE When you edit and save xrefs in place in a drawing, the preview image for
the original reference drawing is no longer available unless you open and save the
drawing again.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter option [Save/Discard reference changes] :

REFCLOSE | 1071

Save
Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block definition
in the current drawing all changes made to objects in the working set. If you
remove an object from the working set and save changes, the object is deleted
from the reference and added to the current drawing. The Save Back Changes
to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing
changes.
NOTE If the file format of the xref source drawing is AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier,
the file is saved in AutoCAD 2010 file format. The file format is not changed for
xref source drawings in AutoCAD 2000 and 2004 format.

Discard Reference Changes
Discards the working set; the source
drawing or block definition is returned to its original state. Any changes you
make to objects in the current drawing (not in the xref or block) are not
discarded. If you delete any object that is not in the working set, the object
is not restored even if you choose to discard changes. The Discard Changes
to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically discards reference
editing changes without using REFCLOSE.

REFEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Edit Reference
Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-place Editing ➤ Edit Reference In-Place

1072 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Toolbar: Refedit

Summary
The objects that you select from the selected xref or block are temporarily
extracted and made available for editing in the current drawing. The set of
extracted objects is called the working set, which can be modified and then
saved back to update the xref or block definition.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select reference: Select an xref or a block in the current drawing
If you edit an xref when the ribbon is active, the Edit Reference ribbon
contextual tab displays.
If you enter -refedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Edit Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Manages the working set of objects that are edited in a reference.

Reference Editing Panel
Save or Discard Changes (REFCLOSE on page 1071) Saves back or discards
changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block
definition.
Add to or Remove From Working Set (REFSET on page 1077) Adds or removes
objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference, either an
xref or a block definition.

Edit Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab | 1073

Reference Edit Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Specifies the reference to edit.

Summary
To select a reference to edit, select an object in the reference. If you select an
object that is part of one or more nested references, the nested references are
displayed in the dialog box.

List of Tabs
■

Identify Reference on page 1074

■

Settings on page 1075

Identify Reference Tab (Reference Edit Dialog Box)
Provides visual aids for identifying the reference to edit and controls how the
reference is selected.

Reference Name

1074 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested
within the selected reference.
Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested
reference. If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block
to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at a time.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference.
The preview image displays the reference as it was last saved in the drawing.
The reference preview image is not updated when changes are saved back to
the reference.
Path
Displays the file location of the selected reference. If the selected reference is
a block, no path is displayed.
Automatically Select All Nested Objects
Controls whether nested objects are included automatically in the reference
editing session.
Prompt to Select Nested Objects
Controls whether nested objects must be selected individually in the reference
editing session.
If this option is checked, after you close the Reference Edit dialog box and
enter the reference edit state, you are prompted to select the specific objects
in the reference that you want to edit.
Select nested objects: Select objects within the reference that you want to edit

Settings Tab (Reference Edit Dialog Box)
Provides options for editing references.
Create Unique Layer, Style, and Block Names
Controls whether layers and other named objects extracted from the reference
are uniquely altered.
If selected, named objects in xrefs are altered (names are prefixed with $#$),
similar to the way they are altered when you bind xrefs. If cleared, the names
of layers and other named objects remain the same as in the reference drawing.
Named objects that are not altered to make them unique assume the properties
of those in the current host drawing that share the same name.
Display Attribute Definitions for Editing

Reference Edit Dialog Box | 1075

Controls whether all variable attribute definitions in block references are
extracted and displayed during reference editing.
If Display Attribute Definitions for Editing is selected, the attributes (except
constant attributes) are made invisible, and the attribute definitions are
available for editing along with the selected reference geometry. When changes
are saved back to the block reference, the attributes of the original reference
remain unchanged. The new or altered attribute definitions affect only
subsequent insertions of the block; the attributes in existing block instances
are not affected. Xrefs and block references without definitions are not affected
by this option.
Lock Objects Not in Working Set
Locks all objects not in the working set. This prevents you from accidentally
selecting and editing objects in the host drawing while in a reference editing
state.
The behavior of locked objects is similar to objects on a locked layer. If you
try to edit locked objects, they are filtered from the selection set.

-REFEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select reference: Select an xref or block in the current drawing
Select nesting level [OK/Next] : Enter an option or press Enter

OK
Accepts the currently highlighted reference for in-place reference editing.
If you are editing a block reference with attributes, you can enter y to display
the attribute definitions and make them available for editing. The attributes
are made invisible, and the attribute definitions are available for editing along
with the selected reference geometry. When changes are saved back to the

1076 | Chapter 18 R Commands

block reference, the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged.
The new or altered attribute definitions affect only subsequent insertions of
the block; the attributes in existing block instances are not affected.
All Objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the
reference editing session.
Nested After you close the Reference Edit dialog box and enter the reference
edit state, you are prompted to select the specific objects in the reference that
you want to edit.

Next
Advances through the reference and nested references available for selection.
The currently selected reference is highlighted.
A working set is formed with the objects you have selected for editing. The
working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or block
definition. When you save back changes, changes made to the objects in the
reference file are saved without actually opening the reference drawing or
recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of the
current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the
working set, appear faded. The XFADECTL system variable controls the fading
of objects while you edit a reference in place.
You can select objects in xrefs for editing even if they are on a locked layer in
the reference file. When a reference object is part of the working set, you can
unlock the object's layer and make changes to the object. Only the changes
made to the object are saved back to the reference file; the xref layer remains
locked in the reference file.
NOTE Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless the visual style is
set to 2D Wireframe during in-place reference editing.

REFSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use the Working Set to Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks

Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a
reference, either an xref or a block definition.

REFSET | 1077

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-place Editing ➤ Add to Working Set
Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-Place Editing ➤ Remove from Working
Set

Summary
Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other objects
in the current drawing. All objects in the current drawing, except objects in
the working set, appear faded.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing...
Enter an option [Add/Remove] : Enter an option or press Enter
Add Adds objects to the working set.
An object that is part of the working set is added to the reference when changes
are saved back, and the object is removed from the current drawing. The Add
to Working Set button on the Refedit toolbar prompts you to add objects to
the working set without using REFCLOSE on page 1071.

Remove Removes objects from the working set.
An object that is removed from the working set is removed from the reference
when changes are saved back; the object is also removed from the current
drawing. The Remove from Working Set button on the Refedit toolbar prompts
you to remove objects from the working set without using REFCLOSE.

1078 | Chapter 18 R Commands

REGEN
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text

Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Regen

Summary
REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates
for all objects in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database
for optimum display and object selection performance.

REGENALL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text

Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Regen All

Summary
REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen
coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing
database for optimum display and object selection performance.

REGEN | 1079

REGION
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region
Menu: Draw ➤ Region
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops.
Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include circular
arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines.
You can combine several regions into a single, complex region.

Closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the selection set are converted
to separate regions and then converts polylines, lines, and curves to form
closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region). If more than two
curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be arbitrary.

1080 | Chapter 18 R Commands

The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point
shares only two edges. All intersections and self-intersecting curves are rejected.
If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of
PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed
polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object.
REGION deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless
the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0. If the original objects were hatched,
hatch associativity is lost. To restore associativity, rehatch the region.

REINIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Digitizing Tablets

Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer input/output port, and program parameters
file.

Summary
The Re-initialization dialog box is displayed.

Re-initialization Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Digitizing Tablets

Defines the I/O port and the device file for reinitialization.

REINIT | 1081

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
I/O Port Initialization Reinitializes the I/O port for the digitizer.
Device File Initialization Reinitializes the digitizer and the acaslt.pgp file.

RENAME
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Format ➤ Rename

Summary
Named objects are categories of items such as layers, dimension styles, table
styles, text styles, and so on. It is strongly recommended that you create
standard naming conventions for them and save them in drawing template
files.
The Rename dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

1082 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Rename Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to named objects such as layers and dimension
styles.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Named Objects
Lists named objects in a drawing by category.
Items
Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects.
Old Name
Specifies the item to be renamed. You can use the wild-card characters * and
? to rename groups of items. You can't rename some standard items, such as
layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype.
Rename To
Specifies the new name you want to assign to the item.

Rename Dialog Box | 1083

-RENAME
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to named objects from the Command prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter object type to rename
[Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Material/multileadeRstyle/Plotstyle/textStyle/Tablestyle/Ucs/VIew/VPort]:
Enter a named object type to rename an object
Enter old object name: Enter the old name
Enter new object name: Enter the new name

RESETBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings

Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block
definition.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing. Right-click
in the drawing area and click Reset Block.

1084 | Chapter 18 R Commands

RESUME
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Run Slide Shows from Scripts

■

Create Command Scripts

Continues an interrupted script.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'resume for transparent use

Summary
You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing Esc or Backspace.
Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the
script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while the program is active,
you can use RESUME to continue the script.

REVCLOUD
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Revision Clouds

Creates a revision cloud using a polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud

RESUME | 1085

Menu: Draw ➤ Revision Cloud
Toolbar: Draw

Summary

NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value
is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with
drawings that have different scale factors.
You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can
convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud.
Use revision clouds to highlight parts of a drawing that are being reviewed.

The resulting object is a polyline.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000
Specify start point or [Arc length/Object/Style] : Drag to draw the
revision cloud, enter an option, or press Enter
Arc Length Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud.
The maximum arc length cannot be set to more than three times the minimum
arc length.
Object Specifies an object to be converted to a revision cloud.
Style Specifies the style of the revision cloud.

1086 | Chapter 18 R Commands

REVDATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Date and Time Stamps to Layouts

Inserts or updates a block containing user name, current time and date, and
drawing name.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Time and Date Stamp

Summary
A revdate block is inserted, or an existing revdate block is updated.
You can explode the revdate block and place its contents in another location,
such as a title block.

REVERSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Polylines

Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which
is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing
beginning and ending widths.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reverse

REVDATE | 1087

Summary
Vertices of selected objects are reversed.
For example, when a linetype with text is specified with relative rotation in
a LIN file, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Reversing
the vertices of the object changes the orientation of the text.

The REVERSE command does not change the orientation of text where rotation
is specified as upright. For more information, see Text in Custom Linetypes.

RIBBON
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Organize the Ribbon

Opens the ribbon window.

RIBBONCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Organize the Ribbon

Closes the ribbon window.

1088 | Chapter 18 R Commands

ROTATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Rotate Objects

Rotates objects around a base point.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate
Menu: Modify ➤ Rotate
Toolbar: Modify
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Rotate.

Summary
You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=current ANGBASE=current
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish
Specify base point: Specify a point
Specify rotation angle or [Copy/Reference]: Enter an angle, specify a point, enter
c, or enter r
Rotation Angle Determines how far an object rotates around the base point.

ROTATE | 1089

The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to
the Z axis of the current UCS.
Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for rotation.
Reference Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new, absolute angle.
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel
to the edges of the drawing area.

RSCRIPT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Run Slide Shows from Scripts

■

Create Command Scripts

Repeats a script file.

Summary
RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script
that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom.
If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until
interrupted by Esc.
NOTE Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the
script over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up
increasing amounts of disk space.

1090 | Chapter 18 R Commands

S Commands

19

SAVE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name.
Obsolete. The SAVE command is functionally identical to the QSAVE on page
1050 command. The Save option on the File menu, Standard toolbar, or Quick
Access toolbar is QSAVE.

Summary
If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS on page 1091 command to save changes
under a different file name.

SAVEAS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

1091

Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Save As

Summary
The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a
™
file name and type. Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance.
See Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats for a description of the
limitations that result from saving to an earlier version.
In the Save Drawing As dialog box, Tools ➤ Options displays the Saveas
Options dialog box, which controls various DWG and DXF settings.
The file is saved with the specified file name. If the drawing is already named,
the drawing is saved with the new file name. If you save the file as a drawing
template, the Template Options dialog box is displayed, where you can provide
a description for the template and set the units of measurement.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays command prompts.

Template Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Sets drawing template options.

1092 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
The Template Options dialog box displays automatically after you specify the
files of type as *.dwt, enter the template file name, and click Save.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Description
Specifies a description for the drawing template. This description is displayed
when you choose the template in the Startup dialog box or in the Create New
Drawing dialog box.
Measurement
Specifies whether the drawing template uses English (imperial) or metric units.

New Layer Notification
Save All Layers As Unreconciled
Saves the template file with its layers set as unreconciled, which means that
a layer baseline is not created.
See Reconcile New Layers for more information about unreconciled layers.
Save All Layers As Reconciled
Saves the template file with its layers set as reconciled, which results in creating
a layer baseline.
See Reconcile New Layers for more information about reconciled layers.

Template Options Dialog Box | 1093

Saveas Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Sets options for DWG files and for drawing interchange file output.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
■

DWG Options

■

DXF Options

DWG Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)
Controls the display of custom objects and specifies the default file format
for saving drawings.

Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects
If you save to an earlier format, or the drawing contains custom objects from
another application, select Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects to save images
of the custom objects in the drawing file. (PROXYGRAPHICS system variable)
If you do not choose this option, a frame is saved for each custom object in
the drawing file.
NOTE If you are saving a drawing file that contains DWF references to an earlier
drawing format, this switch has no effect on DWF underlays as they will not appear
as proxy objects or as a frame.

1094 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Save All Drawings As
Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to. You can also set
this option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.
For more information, see OPTIONS.

DXF Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)
Sets drawing interchange file output options.

Format
Specifies whether to create an ASCII or a binary DXF file. ASCII-format DXF
files can be read with a text editor and are compatible with a wider range of
applications. Binary-format DXF files are more compact. Read and write
operations with binary-format files is faster than with ASCII-format files.
Select Objects
Controls whether the DXF file consists of selected objects or the entire drawing.
When the output file includes only selected objects, the block definitions of
only the selected block references are included.
Save Thumbnail Preview Image
Specifies whether an image of the drawing is displayed in the Preview area of
the Select File dialog box (RASTERPREVIEW system variable).
Decimal Places of Accuracy
Saves the file using the specified precision. The default precision is usually
adequate; however, you might need to increase this value for certain drawings
or applications. The advantage of lower precision is decreased file size, and,
in some cases, protecting intellectual property.

Saveas Options Dialog Box | 1095

SAVEAS Command Prompts
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Save a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current file format: current
Enter file format
[R14(LT98<97)/2000(LT2000)/2004(LT2004)2007(LT2007)/2010(LT2010)/DXF/Template]
<2010>:
Enter an option or press Enter
Save drawing as : Enter a name or press Enter

SCALE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resize or Reshape Objects

Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the
same after scaling.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Scale
Menu: Modify ➤ Scale

1096 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Toolbar: Modify
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Scale.

Summary
To scale an object, specify a base point and a scale factor. The base point acts
as the center of the scaling operation and remains stationary. A scale factor
greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the
object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish
Specify base point: Specify a point
The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same
location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the
stationary base point).
NOTE When you use the SCALE command with objects, the position or location
of the object is scaled relative to the base point of the scale operation, but the size
of the object is not changed.
Specify scale factor or [Copy/Reference]: Specify a scale, enter c, or enter r
Scale Factor Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified
scale. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between
0 and 1 shrinks the objects. You can also drag the cursor to make the object
larger or smaller.
Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for scaling.
Reference Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified
new length.

SCALE | 1097

SCALELISTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and
plotting.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Scale List
Menu: Format ➤ Scale List
Command entry: 'scalelistedit for transparent use

Summary
Displays a list of predefined scales used throughout the program. This list can
be easily modified to display only the scales you need.
The Edit Scale List dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -scalelistedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and
plotting.

1098 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary
scales that are imported when xrefs are attached. If a scale name is duplicated,
but has a different value, a number is appended to the name.
Add Displays the Add Scale dialog box.
Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited.
Edit Displays the Edit Scale dialog box.
NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales.
Move Up Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list up one position.
Move Down Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list down one
position.
Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list.
NOTE You cannot delete a scale that is referenced by an object.
Reset Deletes all custom scales and unused scales and restores the default list
of scales defined in the Default Scale List dialog box on page 891.

Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box | 1099

Add Scale Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Adds a new scale to the scale list.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Scale Name
Name Appearing in Scale List Specifies the scale name to add to the scale
list.

Scale Properties
Sets the ratio of paper units to drawing units.
Paper Units When combined with the value of the drawing units, determines
the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.
Drawing Units When combined with the value of the paper units, determines
the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.

1100 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Edit Scale Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Changes the existing scales listed in the Scale List area.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Scale Name
Lists the name of the currently selected scale in the Scale List area.
NOTE You cannot change the name of a scale that is referenced by an xref.
Name Appearing in Scale List Enter a descriptive or numeric name. For
example, in an architectural drawing that uses a typical imperial scale, you
can enter either 1"=4' or 1:48.

Scale Properties
Modifies the ratio of paper units to drawing units.
NOTE You cannot change the scale properties of a scale that is referenced by an
object in the drawing.
Paper Units When combined with the value of the drawing units, determines
the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.
Drawing Units When combined with the value of the paper units, determines
the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.

Edit Scale Dialog Box | 1101

-SCALELISTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and
plotting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter option [?/Add/Delete/Reset/Exit] : Enter an option or press Enter
? Displays a list of defined scales.
Add Adds a new scale to the scale list. Enter a ratio in the format n:m, where
n is the number of paper units and m is the number of drawing units
Delete Removes a specified scale. If a scale is current or supported by an object,
it cannot be deleted.
Reset Deletes all custom scales as a result and restores the default list of scales.

SCALETEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text Scale and Justification

Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations.

Access Methods

Button

1102 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Scale
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Scale
Toolbar: Text

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press Enter when you finish
Enter a base point option for scaling
[Existing/Left/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]:
Specify a location to serve as a base point for resizing or scaling
The base point is a location relative to a text object that serves as a fixed point
for the resizing or scaling operation, which is applied individually to each
selected text object.
Specifying a base point for the operation does not change the insertion point
relative to the text.
The base point options shown above are described in the TEXT command.
The base point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline
text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equivalent to the
bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
Specify new model height or [Paper height/Match object/Scale factor]<0.5000>:
Specify a text height or enter an option
NOTE You can only specify a model height for non- objects.

Paper Height
Scales the text height depending on the annotative property.
NOTE You can only specify a paper height for annotative objects.

Match Object
Scales the text objects that you originally selected to match the size of a selected
text object.
NOTE This option only affects like objects (annotative or nonannotative).

Scale Factor
Scales the selected text objects based on a reference length and a specified
new length.
Reference Scales the selected text objects relative to a reference length and a
new length.

SCALETEXT | 1103

The selected text is scaled by a ratio of the values that you entered for the new
length and the reference length. If the new length is less than the reference
length, the selected text objects are reduced in size.

SCRIPT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Command Scripts

Executes a sequence of commands from a script file.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run Script
Menu: Tools ➤ Run Script
Command entry: 'script for transparent use

Summary
A script is a text file with an .scr file extension. Each line of the script file
contains a command that can be completed at the Command prompt,
including alternative versions of commands that normally display dialog
boxes.
The Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name of a script to run that script.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following command
prompt.

1104 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SECURITYOPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Protect and Sign Drawings

Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file.

Summary
The Security Options dialog box is displayed. You can add security settings
that are applied when you save the drawing.

Security Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Protect and Sign Drawings

Specifies security settings to be used when your drawing is saved.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Digital Signature Tab (Security Options Dialog Box)
Adds a digital signature to a drawing when the drawing is saved.
Attach Digital Signatures After Saving Drawing Attaches a digital signature
to a drawing when the drawing is saved.
Select a Digital ID (Certificate) Displays a list of digital IDs that you can use
to sign files. Includes information about the organization or individual to
whom the digital ID was issued, the digital ID vendor who issued the digital
ID, and when the digital ID expires.
Signature Information Provides a list of time services you can use to add a
time stamp to your digital signature, the status of the time server connection,

SECURITYOPTIONS | 1105

and a Comments area (to include information relevant to the digital signature
or to the files you are signing).
Get Time Stamp From Provides a list of time servers you can use to time
stamp your digital signature.
NOTE The timesrvr.txt file contains the time servers that you can choose from.
Time Service Status Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted
Time Server or Could Not Contact Time Server) of the time service.
Comment Provides a place for comments about the digital signature or the
files you are signing.

SEEK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings

Opens a web browser and displays the Autodesk Seek home page.

Access Methods
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Autodesk Seek search box (enter
keywords)
Shortcut menu: Right-click on the Tool Palettes window, or a block, and
click Seek Design Content.
You can also access Autodesk Seek from DesignCenter (ADCENTER on page
10) and from Content Explorer (CONTENTEXPLORER on page 229).

Summary
Product design information that is available on Autodesk Seek depends on
what content providers, both corporate partners and individual contributors,
publish to Autodesk Seek.
This service is an online source for product information that is directly
accessible from your Autodesk software. From the Autodesk Seek search box,
you can access 3D models, 2D drawings, and product specifications from
product manufacturers, suppliers, and aggregators.

1106 | Chapter 19 S Commands

NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available in US English only.

SELECT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects Individually

Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.

Summary
A small box, called the object selection target or pickbox, replaces the crosshairs
on the graphics cursor.

At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous
option to retrieve the previous selection set.
To view all options, enter ? at the Command prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Expects a point or
Window/Last/Crossing/BOX/ALL/Fence/WPolygon/CPolygon/Group/Add/Remove/Multiple/Previous/Undo/AUto/SIngle
Select objects: Specify a point or enter an option
Window Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two
points. Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection.
(Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection.)

SELECT | 1107

Last Selects the most recently created visible object. The object must be in
the current space, that is, model space or paper space, and its layer must not
be set to frozen or off.
Crossing Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points.
A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to
differentiate it from window selection.

Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points.
If the rectangle's points are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to
Crossing. Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window.
All Selects all objects in either model space or the current layout, except those
objects on frozen or on locked layers.

Fence Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar
to CPolygon except that that the fence is not closed, and a fence can cross
itself. Fence is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.

1108 | Chapter 19 S Commands

WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The
polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment
of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not
affected by the PICKADD system variable.

CPolygon Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying
points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The
last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. CPolygon
is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.

Group Selects all objects within one or more named or unnamed groups.
When you specify an unnamed group, be sure to include the asterisk (*). For
example, enter *a3.
Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection
set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default
methods.

SELECT | 1109

Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the
current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to
Remove mode is to hold down Shift while selecting single objects or use the
Automatic option.
Multiple Selects objects individually without highlighting them during object
selection. This speeds up object selection for highly complex objects.
Previous Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous selection set is
cleared by operations that delete objects from the drawing.
NOTE The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces.
Undo Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection
set.
Auto Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object.
Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object forms the first corner of
a box defined by the Box method. Auto and Add are the default methods.
Single Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or set of objects
designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections.

SELECTSIMILAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects.

1110 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select the object that you want to use as the template object
to select similar objects. Right-click in the drawing area and click Select Similar.

Summary
Selects similar objects of the same type based on specified matching properties,
such as the color or block name.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter
The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box.

Select Similar Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Select Objects by Properties

Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be
selected.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Color Considers objects with matching colors to be similar.
Layer Considers objects on matching layers to be similar.
Linetype Considers objects with matching linetypes to be similar.
Linetype scale Considers objects with matching linetype scales to be similar.
Lineweight Considers objects with matching lineweights to be similar.
Plot style Considers objects with matching plot styles to be similar.
Object style Considers objects with matching styles (such as text styles,
dimension styles, and table styles) to be similar.

Select Similar Settings Dialog Box | 1111

Name Considers referenced objects (such as blocks, xrefs, and images) with
matching names to be similar.

SETBYLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Set to ByLayer
Menu: Modify ➤ Change to ByLayer

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current active settings: Color Linetype Lineweight Transparency Material Plot
Style
Select objects or [Settings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter when
you finish
If Settings is selected, the SetByLayer Settings dialog box is displayed, in which
you can specify which object properties are set to ByLayer.
If objects are selected, the Command prompt displays:
Change ByBlock to ByLayer? [Yes/No] :
Include blocks? [Yes/No] :
You can specify which properties are changed to ByLayer, including color,
linetype, lineweight, and materials.

1112 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes property overrides for color, linetype, lineweight, material, plot style,
and transparency to ByLayer for selected objects and inserted blocks on
unlocked layers.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Color
Changes the color of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=1)
Linetype
Changes the linetype of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=2)
Lineweight
Changes the lineweight of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=4)
Plot Style
Changes the plot style of selected objects to ByLayer. This option is available
in named plot style drawings. (SETBYLAYERMODE=16)
Transparency

SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box | 1113

Changes the transparency value of selected objects to ByLayer.
(SETBYLAYERMODE=128)

SETENV
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Sets values of specified registry variables.

Summary
Use SETENV to view the registry settings of the MaxArray and MaxHatch
registry variables.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter variable name: Specify a name
Value: Enter a new value for the variable
NOTE SETENV is case sensitive.

SETVAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Lists or changes the values of system variables.

1114 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Access Methods

Button

Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter variable name or [?] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter
Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set.
You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt
by entering the name of the variable and its new value.
?—List Variables Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current
settings.

SHADE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects

Displays a flat-shaded image of the drawing in the current viewport.

Summary
Hidden lines are removed and a shaded picture of the drawing is displayed.
The SHADE command uses the colors of the object being shaded. Shading is
calculated based on one light source from directly behind the eye. Subsequent
changes to the drawing are not reflected in the shaded object until you use
the SHADE command again.
The shaded image remains in the viewport until the viewport is regenerated.
The shaded image cannot be printed or plotted; however, you can output a
shaded image to a slide using the MSLIDE command.

SHADE | 1115

On systems that display fewer than 256 colors, SHADE produces an image
that removes hidden lines and displays the faces in their original color with
no lighting effect.

SHADEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects

Controls the display of solid object shading in the current viewport.

SHARE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Shares the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing with other users.

Access Methods

Button

1116 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Share Drawing
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Share Drawing
Toolbar: Online

Summary
The Share Drawing dialog box on page 1117 is displayed. You must save the
drawing before you can continue with this command.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

Share Drawing Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Shares the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing with other users.

Summary
Sharing online drawings allows other users to view, edit, and download the
drawings.
Invite other users to simultaneously view and edit a shared drawing, allowing
participants to collaborate in real time.

Share Drawing Dialog Box | 1117

The permissions can be changed at any time in the Share Drawing dialog box;
new permissions take effect immediately.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Invite People Specifies recipients from your AutoCAD WS contacts. Enter
multiple email addresses to share a drawing with several users at once.
Share Sends email notifications to recipients with the link to the drawing, a
message, and a preview of the drawing.
Edit Allows recipients to edit any object in the shared drawing. When this
option is cleared, users can mark up and add to the drawing, but they cannot
change existing objects.
Download Allows recipients to download a copy of the drawing.
Open in AutoCAD WS Opens the shared drawing in the AutoCAD WS Editor.

SHAREWITHSEEK
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings

Uploads a selected block or the current drawing to the Autodesk Seek website.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Autodesk Seek panel ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek
Menu: Application menu ➤ Publish ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek
Menu: File ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek
Shortcut menu: Right-click on a block and click Share with Autodesk Seek

1118 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
Publishes single blocks or entire drawings to the Autodesk Seek website. You
must be a registered user on the Autodesk Seek website to upload content.
Currently, you can only upload a single drawing file at a time.
NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available in US English only.

Share with Autodesk Seek Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings

Uploads the selected block or the current drawing file to the Autodesk Seek
website.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Share the Selected Block
Select a block to upload to the Autodesk Seek website. A DWG file is created
using the default Save as file format specified in the Options dialog.
List

Share with Autodesk Seek Dialog Box | 1119

Lists the blocks in the current drawing available for upload to the Autodesk
Seek website.
Share the Current Drawing
Selects the current drawing (not including external references) for upload to
the Autodesk Seek website. If you choose to use the last saved version of the
file, it uploads the file in its current file format.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the selected block or the current drawing (if
available).

SHEETSET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Quick Start for Sheet Sets

Opens the Sheet Set Manager.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager

Summary
Displays the Sheet Set Manager.
The Sheet Set Manager organizes, displays, and manages sheet sets, a named
collection of drawing sheets. Each sheet in a sheet set is a layout in a drawing
(DWG) file.

1120 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Sheet Set Manager
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create a Sheet Set

Displays and organizes named collections of drawing sheets

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager

Summary
The Sheet Set Manager is not fully functional if
■

The command is active;

■

No drawing is open;

■

The sheet set is locked by another user; or

■

A lock icon displayed in front of the sheet set name in the Sheet Set
Manager indicates that the sheet set is locked. Hold your cursor over the
lock icon to view a tooltip that shows who has the sheet set locked.

List of Tabs
■

Sheet List

■

Sheet Views

■

Model Views

Sheet Set Manager | 1121

Sheet List Control
The Sheet List control displays the name of the current sheet set, or, if no
sheet sets are open, the Open option. The Sheet List control provides the
following options for all tabs:
Names of Open Sheet Sets Lists all open sheet sets, if any. A check is displayed
next to the current sheet set.
Recent Displays a list of recently opened sheet sets.
New Sheet Set Starts the Create Sheet Set wizard.
Open Displays the Open Sheet Set standard file selection dialog box.

Sheet List Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager

Summary
The Sheet List tab displays an ordered list of sheets. You can organize these
sheets under headings, called subsets, that you create.

List of Options
This tab has the following buttons:

1122 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Publish to DWF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWF
file.
Publish to DWFx Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx
file.
Publish to PDF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx
file.
Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default
plotter or printer.
Publish Using Page Setup Override Automatically publishes the selected
sheets using the selected page setup override rather than the page setup
specified in each drawing. The page setup overrides are stored in a drawing
template (DWT) file designated to be the source of the page setup override
information.
Publish Displays a list of Publish options. The description for each option is
listed in alphabetical order under Shortcut Menu Options below.
Sheet Selections Displays a menu where you can save, manage, and restore
sheet selections by name. This makes it easy to specify a group of sheets for a
publish, transmit, or archive operation. The description for each option is
listed in alphabetical order under Shortcut Menu Options below.
Details (at bottom of window) Displays basic information about the currently
selected sheet or subset.
Preview (bottom of window) Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently
selected sheet.

Shortcut Menu Options
The following options are displayed on shortcut menus for the Sheet List tab.
For easier access, they are listed in alphabetical order. The options displayed
in each shortcut menu depend on context: in the tree view, if you right-click
the name of the sheet set, a different shortcut menu will display than if you
right-click the name of a subset or the name of a sheet.
Archive Displays the Archive a Sheet Set dialog box.
Close Sheet Set Closes the current sheet set, removing the sheet set
information displayed in the Sheet Set Manager window.
eTransmit Displays the Create Transmittal dialog box.
Edit Subset and Sheet Publish Settings Displays thePublish Sheets dialog
box.

Sheet Set Manager | 1123

Import Layout as Sheet Displays the Import Layouts as Sheets dialog box.
Include Plot Stamp Turns the plot stamp on or off for the selected sheet set,
subset, or sheet.
Include for Publish Includes the sheet for publishing.
Insert Sheet List Table Displays the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box.
Manage Page Setups Displays the Page Setup Manager dialog box.
New Sheet Displays the New Sheet dialog box.
New Subset Displays the Subset Properties dialog box, where you can create
a new sheet subset for organizing the sheets in a sheet set.
Open Opens the drawing file of the selected sheet and displays the layout.
Open Read-Only Opens the drawing file of the selected sheet in read-only
mode and displays the layout. You cannot save changes to the file using the
original file name.
Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box, in which you can
specify the information, such as drawing name and plot scale, that you want
applied to the plot stamp.
Properties (Sheet Set) When the sheet set node is selected, displays the Sheet
Set Properties dialog box.
Properties (Subset) When a subset node is selected, displays the Subset
Properties dialog box. See New Subset.
Properties (Sheet) When a sheet node is selected, displays the Sheet Properties
dialog box.
Publish Displays the Publish dialog box.
Publish in Reverse Order When checked, sends sheets to the plotter in reverse
of default order.
Publish Sheets in Subset Publishes the sheets in the subset.
When Do Not Publish Sheets is checked, all sheets in the subset is not
published.
Suspends all sheets in the subset from being published.
Publish Using Page Setup Override Automatically publishes the selected
sheets using the selected page setup override rather than the page setup
specified in each drawing. The page setup overrides are stored in a drawing

1124 | Chapter 19 S Commands

template (DWT) file designated to be the source of the page setup override
information.
Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box.
Publish to DWF Publishes the selected sheets or the sheet set to a specified
DWF file.
Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default
plotter or printer.
Remove Subset Removes the currently selected subset from the organization
of the sheet set.
Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box.
Resave All Sheets Updates the sheet set information saved with each drawing
in the current sheet set. Each drawing file in the current sheet set is opened
and resaved. Any changes that were made are updated in the sheet set data
(DST) file.
Drawing files saved in a previous DWG file format are resaved without
changing format.
NOTE In a network environment, make sure that all drawing files in the current
sheet set that are opened by other users are closed before performing this
operation.
Remove Sheet Removes the currently selected sheet from the sheet set.
Save Sheet Selection Displays the New Sheet Selection dialog box.
Sheet Set Publish Options Displays the Sheet Set Publish Options dialog box.
This is the same as the Publish Options dialog, but is specific to the current
sheet set.
Transmittal Setups Displays the Transmittal Setups dialog box.

Sheet Views Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Sheet Set Manager | 1125

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager

Summary
The Sheet Views tab displays an ordered list of views used in the current sheet
set. You can organize these views under headings, called categories, that you
create.
NOTE Only sheet views created in AutoCAD 2005 or later are listed on the Sheet
Views tab.

List of Options
This tab has the following buttons:
New View Category Button Displays the View Category dialog box.
View by Category Displays the views in the current sheet set organized by
their categories.
View by Sheet Displays a list of views in the current sheet set organized by
the sheet on which they are located.

Shortcut Menu Options
The following options are displayed on shortcut menus for the Sheet Views
tab.
Display Displays the selected view in the sheet in which it was created. Opens
the drawing file containing the sheet, if the drawing file is not already open.
New View Category Displays the View Category dialog box, in which you
can create a new view category to organize the views in a sheet set.
Place Callout Block Specifies and places a callout block onto a sheet.
Place View Label Specifies and places a view label block onto a sheet.
Properties (Sheet Set) Displays the Sheet Set Properties dialog box.

1126 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Properties (View Category) Displays the View Category dialog box.
Rename Renames the selected sheet view category.
Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename and Renumber View dialog box
where you can renumber and retitle the selected sheet view.
Set Category Reassigns the selected sheet view to a category that you specify.

Model Views Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager
Toolbar: Standard
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager

Summary
The Model Views tab displays a list of folders, drawing files, and model space
views available for the current sheet set. You can add and remove folder
locations to control which drawing files are associated with the current sheet
set.
NOTE After creating a named model space view, you must save the drawing to
add the view to the Model Views tab.

List of Options
Refresh Updates the list of drawing files listed in the tree view. The Refresh
button updates all information stored in the sheet set data (DST) file, checks
all folders in every resource location for new or removed drawing files, and

Sheet Set Manager | 1127

checks all drawing files that are expanded for new or removed model space
views.
Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection
dialog box, in which you can add a folder location to the sheet set.

Shortcut Menu Options
Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection
dialog box where you can add a folder location to the sheet set.
eTransmit Displays the Create Transmittal dialog box.
Open File Opens the selected drawing (DWG) file.
Place on Sheet Initiates a series of automated steps that creates and places a
view of the selected model onto the current layout of the current drawing.
These steps are
■

You are prompted to place the view on the layout. Right-click to change
the scale of the view before placement

■

The selected model is attached as an xref in the current drawing

■

A layout viewport is created on the current layout

■

A sheet view is created that corresponds with the newly created layout
viewport

Remove Location Removes the currently selected folder location from the
sheet set.
See Model Space Views Expands a list of named model space views.

Subset Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize a Sheet Set

Creates a new sheet subset in a sheet set.

1128 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
You can organize sheets by dragging them to different subsets.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Subset Name
Specifies the name of this subset and the name of the sheet storage folder for
this subset if Create Folders Relative to Parent Subset Storage Location is
selected.
Publish Sheets in Subset
Conforms to the current settings for sheet set publishing.
New Sheet Location
Specifies the folder location for all new drawing (DWG) files containing sheets
that are associated with this subset.
Sheet Creation Template
Specifies the drawing template (DWT) file and layout name that is used to
create new drawing files for this subset.

Subset Properties Dialog Box | 1129

The syntax for this property is
layoutname [folderpath\]filename.dwt
Prompt for Template
When Yes is selected, prompts you to specify a drawing template file rather
than use the default drawing template file for creating new sheets.

Publish Sheets Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

Specifies the sheets to be included for publishing.

Summary
When a sheet is selected, it is included for publishing.

1130 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Specifies the folder path, drawing template (DWT) file, and layout name to
be used for creating new sheets.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Drawing Template File Name
Specifies the drawing template file path and name to be used for creating new
sheets.
Select a Layout to Create New Sheets
Lists and specifies the name of the layout in the drawing template file to be
used for new sheets.

Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box | 1131

New Sheet Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Creates a new sheet in the current sheet set by creating a new drawing (DWG)
file that includes a layout tab with the same name as the drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Number
Specifies the sheet number. It is recommended that you do not fill in the sheet
number when you first create a sheet. By default the drawing name and layout
name of the new sheet will be the sheet number together with sheet title.
You can remove the sheet number from the file name when you create the
new sheet, but the sheet number will still be in the layout name.
Sheet Title
Specifies the sheet title, which corresponds to an identically named layout
tab in the new drawing.
File Name
Specifies the name of the new drawing file containing the sheet. By default,
the name of the drawing file is the sheet number combined with the sheet
title. You can also change the drawing file name in this box.
Folder Path

1132 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Displays the default folder for the new drawing file.
The default folder for a subset is specified in the Subset Properties dialog box;
and the default folder for a sheet set is specified in the Sheet Set Properties
dialog box.
Sheet Template
Displays the default sheet template file used for creating the new drawing file.
The default template file used for creating new drawings in a subset is specified
in the Subset Properties dialog box; the default template file for creating new
drawings in a sheet set is specified in the Sheet Set Properties dialog box.
Open in Drawing Editor
When checked, allows you to open the drawing after creation and edit directly
within the file.

Rename & Renumber Sheet Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Specifies a sheet number, sheet title, and other properties for a sheet in a sheet
set.

Rename & Renumber Sheet Dialog Box | 1133

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Number
Specifies the sheet number of the selected sheet.
Sheet Title
Specifies the sheet title of the selected sheet.
Layout Name
Specifies the name of the layout associated with the selected sheet.
File Name
Specifies the name of the drawing file associated with the selected sheet.
Folder Path
Displays the folder path for the drawing file.
Rename Layout to match Sheet Title
When checked, changes the layout name to match the sheet title.
Prefix with Sheet Number
When checked, changes the layout name to a new name formed by adding
the sheet number to the beginning of the sheet title.
Rename Drawing File to match Sheet Title
When checked, changes the drawing file name to match the sheet title.
Prefix with Sheet Number
When checked, changes the drawing file name to a new name formed by
adding the sheet number to the beginning of the sheet title.
Next
Loads the next sheet into this dialog box. This provides a convenient method
for renumbering or retitling a series of sheets.
Previous
Loads the previous sheet into this dialog box.

1134 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Specifies a sheet number and view title for a view in a sheet set.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Number
Specifies the sheet number of the selected view.
View Title
Specifies the view title of the selected view.
Previous
Loads the previous view into this dialog box.
Next
Loads the next view into this dialog box.

Import Layouts as Sheets Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box | 1135

Provides a method for quickly importing layouts into a sheet set, and specifying
which layout tab is to be used as the sheet.

Summary
If a layout already belongs to a sheet set, you must create a copy of the drawing
containing the layout to import it.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Browse for Drawings
Displays the Select Drawing standard file selection dialog box.
List of Layouts in Selected Drawing
Lists all available layouts in the specified drawing file. Click a check box to
select a layout.
Prefix Sheet Titles with File Name
When checked, automatically adds the drawing file name to the beginning
of the sheet title.
Import Checked Imports a layout from the list only if it displays a check
mark.

1136 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Creates a table listing the sheets in the sheet set.

Summary
This table can be added to any sheet in the current sheet set, but it is typically
added to the title sheet.
NOTE Insert Sheet List Table on the sheet set shortcut menu is not available if the
Model tab is active, or if the current layout is not a sheet in the current sheet set.

List of Tabs
This dialog box contains the following tabs.
■

Table Data Tab

■

Subsets and Sheets Tab

Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box | 1137

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Table Style Name
Specifies the table style to be used for the table.
Table Style Preview
Displays a preview of the currently selected table style.
Include Subsets as Headers in Output
When checked, displays the names of the subsets, dividing the sheet list table
into sections.
Table Style Settings Displays options for the table style.

Table Data Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Displays options for the table data.

1138 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Title Text
Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table.
Column Settings Area
Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table. Each line in
the list represents a column. The top-to-bottom order of the list represents
how the columns will be displayed in the table (left to right).
Data Type Column Selecting a column definition and then clicking on an
entry in the Data Type column displays a list. From this list, you can change
the type of information that is going to be displayed in the columns of the
sheet list table.
Heading Text Column Allows you to change the title text for each column
in the sheet list table.
Add
Adds a sheet number column to the sheet list table.
Remove
Removes the selected column from the sheet list table. If you accidentally
remove a column, you can add a Number column and then change its data
type from the data type list.
Move Up
Moves the selected column up in the column list and to the left in the sheet
list table.
Move Down
Moves the selected column down in the column list and to the right in the
sheet list table.

Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box | 1139

Subsets and Sheets Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Displays options to control the sheet selection represented by the current
sheet list table

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Populate From Sheet Selection Drop-Down Menu Sets the check state of
the items in the view based on a previous saved sheet selection.
Sheet Set Tree View Displays the sheet set subsets that are to be updated
automatically.

1140 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Allows you to edit a sheet list table that exists in the current drawing.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select any cell in Sheet List Table ➤ Right-click to open
the shortcut menu ➤ Edit Sheet List Table Settings

Summary
The Edit Sheet List Table Settings dialog box gives you access to all the settings
found on the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Table Style Settings
Displays options for the table style.
Table Style Name

Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box | 1141

Specifies the table style to be used for the table. The Browse button displays
the Table Style dialog box.
Table Style Sample Area
Displays a sample of the currently selected table style.
Show Subheader
When checked, displays the names of the subsets, dividing the sheet list table
into sections.

Table Data Settings
Displays options for the table data.
Title Text
Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table.
Column Settings Area
Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table. Each line in
the list represents a column. The top-to-bottom order of the list represents
how the columns will be displayed in the table (left to right).
Data Type Column Selecting a column definition and then clicking on an
entry in the Data Type column displays a list. From the list, you can change
the type of information that is going to be displayed in the columns of the
sheet list table.
Heading Text Column Allows you to change the title text for each column
in the sheet list table.
Add
Adds a sheet number column to the sheet list table.
Remove
Removes the selected column from the sheet list table. If you accidentally
remove a column, you can add a new Sheet Number column and then change
its data type from the data type list.
Move Up
Moves the selected column up in the column list and to the left in the sheet
list table.
Move Down
Moves the selected column down in the column list and to the right in the
sheet list table.

1142 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet set.

Summary
You can click on each field to display a description at the bottom of the dialog
box.
This includes information such as the path and file name of the sheet set data
(DST) file, the paths of the folders that contain the drawing files associated
with the sheet set, and any custom properties associated with the sheet set

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Name Displays the name of the sheet set.

Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box | 1143

Sheet Set Data File Displays the path and file name of the sheet set data (DST)
file.
Description Displays a description of the sheet set.
Model View Displays the paths and names of folders that contain drawings
used by the sheet set.
Label Block for Views Displays the path and file name of the DWT or DWG
file that contains the label blocks for the sheet set.
Callout Blocks Displays the path and file name of the DWT or DWG file that
contains the callout blocks for the sheet set.
Page Setup Overrides File Displays the path and file name for the drawing
template (DWT) file containing the page setup overrides for the sheet set.
Project Control Displays several fields commonly used in projects including
Project Number, Project Name, Project Phase, and Project Milestone.
Sheet Custom Properties Displays the user-defined custom properties
associated with each sheet in the sheet set.
Sheet Storage Location Displays the path and name of the folder where new
sheets are created.
Sheet Creation Template Displays the path and name of the DWG or DWT
file to be used when creating new sheets for the sheet set.
Prompt for Template Controls whether you will be prompted for a sheet
creation template every time you create a new sheet in a sheet set.
Sheet Set Custom Properties Displays the user-defined custom properties
associated with the sheet set.
Edit Custom Properties
Displays the Sheet Set Custom Properties dialog box.

Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets

1144 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Lists the custom properties associated with the current sheet set.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Add
Displays the Add Custom Property dialog box.
Delete
Removes the selected custom property from the sheet set.

Add Custom Property Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets

Creates a custom property to be associated with the current sheet set or with
each sheet.

Add Custom Property Dialog Box | 1145

Summary
Custom properties can be used to store information such as a contract number,
the name of the designer, and the release date.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Name
Specifies the name of a new custom property.
Default Value
Specifies a value for the custom property.
Owner
Specifies whether the custom property belongs to the sheet set or to a sheet.

Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize a Sheet Set

Displays a list of folders that are available for the current sheet set.

Summary
You can add and remove folder locations to control which drawing files are
available for the current sheet set.

1146 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Add
Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box, in which
you can add a folder location to the list.
Delete
Removes the selected folder from the list.

Sheet Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet, such as the sheet
title, sheet number, and whether it will be included in publishing operations.
Also displays custom properties, if any.

Sheet Properties Dialog Box | 1147

Summary
You can enter a new value to modify any available sheet property.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Sheet and Sheet Custom Properties Displays the properties of the selected
sheet. Also displays custom properties, if any. You can enter a new value to
modify any sheet property. The Expected Layout is the path and file name of
the drawing where the sheet was saved. The Found Layout is the path and file
name of the drawing where the sheet was found. If the paths are different,
you can modify the path and file name in Expected Layout. This operation
reassociates the sheet with the sheet set.
Rename Options Displays the options for renaming the selected sheet. These
settings are the same as those in Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box on
page 1133.

New Sheet Selection Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

Saves a named selection of sheets for future operations.

Summary
After you select several sheets and then save the selection, you can restore the
sheet selection by name. This makes it easy to specify a set of sheets for a
publish, transmit, or archive operation.

1148 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enter the Sheet Selection Name
Specifies a name for the sheet selection.

Sheet Selections Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets

Renames or deletes saved sheet selections.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Sheet Selections
Specifies the sheet selection that you want to rename or delete.
Rename
Renames the selected sheet selection.
Delete
Deletes the selected sheet selection.

Sheet Selections Dialog Box | 1149

View Category Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize a Sheet Set

Creates a new view category in a sheet set.

Summary
You can organize views by dragging them under different view categories.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Category Name
Specifies the name of a new view category.
Select the Callout Blocks to be Used in this Category
Provides a method for listing the callout blocks appropriate to the current
view category.
Add Blocks
Displays the List of Blocks dialog box.

List of Blocks Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Lists, adds, or deletes callout blocks for use in the current sheet set.

1150 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Add Blocks button in the View
Category dialog box, or by clicking the [...] button next to Callout blocks in
the Sheet Set Properties dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
List of Blocks
Displays the list of blocks available for use with the current sheet set.
Add
Displays the Select Block dialog box.
Delete
Removes the selected block from the list of callout blocks.
Preview area Displays a preview image when a single block is selected.

Select Block Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Sheets

Adds a new label block or callout blocks for use in the current sheet set.

Select Block Dialog Box | 1151

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enter the Drawing File Name
Specifies the path and name of a drawing (DWG) file or the name and path
of a drawing template (DWT) file to be used as the source of a block definition.
Select the Drawing File as a Block
Uses the entire specified drawing file or drawing template file as the block
definition.
Choose Blocks in the Drawing File
Uses a selected block definition from the specified drawing file or drawing
template file.
Preview
Displays a preview image when a single block is selected.

SHEETSETHIDE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create a Sheet Set

Closes the Sheet Set Manager.

1152 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SHOWPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows

Restores the display of hidden palettes.

Access Methods
Command entry: Ctrl+Shift+H

Summary
Restores the state of the display and position of palettes hidden by
HIDEPALETTES.
Press Ctrl+Shift+H to switch between HIDEPALETTES and SHOWPALETTES.
NOTE If a palette was manually turned back on, it is not affected by
SHOWPALETTES (even if it was manually closed again)

SIGVALIDATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

View Digital Signature Details

Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file.

Summary
The Validate Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed. Review the information
displayed in the dialog box, and click Close to view the signed file.

SHOWPALETTES | 1153

Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

View Digital Signature Details

Displays information about a digital signature.

Summary
You can determine if a digital signature is valid and if the signed file has been
modified since it was signed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being
viewed.

Digital Signature Status
Displays a Valid Signature icon if a digital signature is valid, and an Invalid
Signature icon if the digital signature is not valid.

File Status
Displays the status of the signed file.

View Base Signature
Displays the Digital Signature Contents dialog box. This option is available
only if the digital signature is valid and the file has not been modified since
it was signed.

Xref Drawings
Contains detailed information about any xrefs in the signed file.
View Xref Drawings
Displays the xref drawings contained in a file's base drawing.
View Xref List

1154 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Contains a list of the xref drawings in a signed file. This list is available only
if the current file contains xrefs and View Xref Drawings is selected.
View Xref Signature
Displays the Digital Signatures Contents dialog box for the selected xref. This
button is enabled only if the xref has a valid digital signature attached.

Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

View Digital Signature Details

Displays information about a digital signature.

Summary
You can determine if a digital signature is valid and if the signed file has been
modified since it was signed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being
viewed.

Digital Signature Status
Displays the status of the digital signature.

File Status
Displays the status of the signed file.

Signed By
Displays the name of the organization or individual who attached a digital
signature to the current file.

Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box | 1155

Other Fields
Displays the subject, issuer, valid from date, valid to date, or serial number in
the Values box.
Subject Displays information about the organization or individual who owns
the digital ID and attached the digital signature.
Issuer Displays the name of the certificate authority that originally issued the
digital ID.
Valid From Displays the day, month, year, and exact time from which the
digital ID can be first used and is considered valid.
Valid To Displays the day, month, year, and exact time at which the digital
ID ceases to be valid.
Serial Number Displays the serial number assigned to the digital ID.

Values
Displays information about a digital signature based on the item you select
in the Other Fields list.

Comment
Displays any comments about the digital signature that is attached to the
current file.

Signature Date and Time
Displays the date and time that the digital signature was attached to the current
file. The date and time are based on the time service used when the signature
was attached.

Time Service Used
Displays the time service used to add the time stamp to the current file.

Skip Xref Warnings
Determines if the Digital Signature Contents dialog box is displayed for signed
xrefs. This check box is displayed only in the Digital Signature Contents dialog
box when a signed drawing is opened.

1156 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SKETCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Freehand Sketches

Creates a series of freehand line segments.

Summary
Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a
digitizer. Specify the object type (line, polyline, or spline), increment, and
tolerance before sketching.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Sketch on page 1157 or [Type on page 1157/Increment on page 1158/toLerance on
page 1158]:
Sketch Creates a sketch.
Type Specifies the object type for the sketch line. (SKPOLY on page 1659 system
variable)
■

Line on page 702

■

Polyline on page 954

■

Spline on page 1169

SKETCH | 1157

Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move
the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate
a line. (SKETCHINC on page 1659 system variable)
Tolerance For Splines, specifies how closely the spline’s curve fits to the
freehand sketch. (SKTOLERANCE on page 1660 system variable)

SNAP
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Snap
Command entry: snap or ‘snap for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify snap spacing on page 1158 or [ON on page 1158/OFF on page 1159/Aspect
on page 1159/Style on page 1159/Type on page 1159] : Specify a distance,
enter an option, or press Enter

Snap Spacing
Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.

On
Activates Snap mode using the current settings of the snap grid.

1158 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Off
Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.

Aspect
Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions.

Style
Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.

Standard
Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
X and Y spacing may differ.
Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid.
Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.

Isometric
Sets an isometric snap grid, in which the snap locations are initially at
30-degree and 150-degree angles. Isometric snap cannot have different Aspect
values. The lined grid does not follow the isometric snap grid.

ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane
(30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or
the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles).

Type
Specifies the snap type, polar or rectangular. This setting is also controlled by
the SNAPTYPE system variable.
Polar Sets the polar angle increment.
(POLARANG system variable)

SNAP | 1159

Grid Sets the snap to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along
vertical or horizontal grid points.

SOLID
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Hatch Properties

Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals.

Summary
2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on (1) and
the viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid.
Second point Sets the first edge of the 2D solid.
Third point Sets the corner that is opposite the second point.
Fourth point or  The fourth point is diagonally opposite the first point.
Pressing Enter at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying
a fifth point creates a quadrilateral area.

Specifying successive third and fourth points creates further connected triangles
and four-sided polygons in a single solid object.

1160 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SPACETRANS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text Scale and Justification

Calculates equivalent model space and paper space lengths in a layout.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Text

List of Prompts
In a layout, when in model space, the prompt is displayed as follows:
Specify paper space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in paper space to convert to
the equivalent length in model space
In a layout, when in paper space, the prompt is displayed as follows:
Select a viewport: Pick a layout viewport object (this prompt is displayed when more
than one viewport object is available in the layout)
Specify model space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in model space to convert
to the equivalent length in paper space
SPACETRANS converts lengths, typically text heights, from either model space
or paper space to its equivalent length in the other space. It is intended to be
invoked transparently at a prompt for text height or other length value. When

SPACETRANS | 1161

used at the Command prompt, SPACETRANS displays the computed length
equivalent at the Command prompt.
NOTE This command is not available from the Model tab or in a perspective view.

SPELL
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Check Spelling

Checks spelling in a drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling
Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling
Toolbar: Text
Command entry: 'spell for transparent use

Summary
When you enter spell at the Command prompt, the Check Spelling dialog
box is displayed. Select the Start button to begin the spelling check.
If Check Spelling is set to Entire Drawing, spelling is checked on the Model
layout, then on named (paper space) layouts. If a flagged word is identified,
the drawing area highlights and zooms to that word.
NOTE Invisible text such as text on hidden layers, and hidden block attributes is
not checked. Non-uniformly scaled blocks and objects not on the supported
annotation scale are also not checked.

1162 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Check Spelling Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Check Spelling

Displays the spelling checker dialog box that picks and displays the wrongly
spelt words and suggests alternate words.

Summary
Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text
within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions.
In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked. The spelling in text
objects within block references and nested block references is checked, but
spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block
reference has been selected.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Where to Check
Displays the areas you want checked for spelling.

Check Spelling Dialog Box | 1163

Select Text Objects
Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text,
dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within
xrefs.

Not in Dictionary
Displays the word identified as misspelled.

Suggestions
Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary.
You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a
replacement word in the top Suggestions text area.

Main Dictionary
Lists the main dictionary options. The default dictionary will depend on the
language setting.

Start
Starts checking text for spelling errors.

Ignore
Skips the current word.

Ignore All
Skips all remaining words that match the current word.

Add to Dictionary
Adds the current word to the current custom dictionary. The maximum word
length is 63 characters.

Change
Replaces the current word with the word in the Suggestions box.

Change All
Replaces the current word in all selected text objects in the spell check area.

Dictionaries
Displays the Dictionaries dialog box.

Settings
Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box.

1164 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Undo
Reverses the previous check spelling action or series of actions, including
Ignore, Ignore All, Change, Change All, and Add to Dictionary.

Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Check Spelling

Provides options to change the way the default behavior of the spelling checker
dialog box.

Summary
Specifies specific text options that will be checked in your drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Include
Dimension Text
Searches dimension text.
Block Attributes

Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box | 1165

Searches block attributes text for spelling errors.
External References
Specifies to search external references for spelling errors.

Options
Ignore Capitalized Words
Specifies to ignore capitalized words.
Ignore Words with Mix Cases
Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters.
Ignore Words in Uppercase
Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase.
Ignore Words with Numbers
Specifies to ignore words that include numbers.
Ignore Words Containing Punctuation
Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation.

Dictionaries Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Check Spelling

Displays the installed dictionaries and allows you to edit the custom dictionary.

1166 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
Manages dictionaries. During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are
matched to the words in the current main and current custom dictionaries.
Any spelling exceptions that you identify with the Add option are stored in
the custom dictionary you are currently using.
If you want to check spelling in another language, you can change to a
different main dictionary. You can also create any number of custom
dictionaries and switch between them as needed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Main Dictionary
Displays a list of language-specific dictionaries from which you can choose a
different main dictionary. This dictionary is used in conjunction with the
custom dictionary.

Custom Dictionary
Displays the name of the current custom dictionary. The .cus extension is used
for an AutoCAD custom dictionary.
Current Custom Dictionary
Displays a list from which you can select a custom dictionary file. The selected
dictionary file is used until another file is selected.
The list also includes a Manage custom dictionaries selection which brings up
the Manage Custom Dictionaries dialog box.

Dictionaries Dialog Box | 1167

Content
Displays a list of the words that currently exist in the specified custom
dictionary.
You can add words to or delete words from the list below.
Add
Adds the word that you enter in the box to the current custom dictionary.
The maximum length is 63 characters.
Delete
Deletes a word from current custom dictionary content.
Import
Imports words from another dictionary or word list into your current custom
dictionary.

Manage Custom Dictionaries Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Check Spelling

Manages your custom dictionaries allowing you to add or remove a dictionary.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

1168 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Custom Dictionaries List
Displays the custom dictionaries list. Only one dictionary can be selected at
a time.
New
Allows you to create a custom dictionary. The new dictionary is highlighted
as the current one.
NOTE The filename for a custom dictionary cannot use any non-current code
page characters in its name. If you are sharing a custom dictionary between
different locals or languages do not use non-ASCII characters.
Add
Allows you to add an existing custom dictionary from your file lists.
Remove
Allows you to delete a custom dictionary file from your list.

SPLINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Draw Splines

Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that
is defined by the vertices in a control frame.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline
Menu: Draw ➤ Spline ➤ Fit Points
Menu: Draw ➤ Spline ➤ Control Vertices
Toolbar: Draw

SPLINE | 1169

Summary
SPLINE creates curves called nonuniform rational B-splines (NURBS), referred to
as splines for simplicity.
Splines are defined either with fit points, or with control vertices. By default,
fit points coincide with the spline, while control vertices define a control frame.
Control frames provide a convenient method to shape the spline. Each method
has its advantages.

For splines created with control vertices, you can display the control frame
by selecting the spline.

List of Prompts
The prompts that display depend on whether you create a spline with fit
points or with control vertices.
For splines created with the fit point method:
Specify first point or [Method on page 1170/Degree on page 1173/Object on page
1171]:
For splines created with the control vertices method:
Specify first point or [Method on page 1170/Knots on page 1171/Object on page
1171]:

First Point
Specifies the first point of the spline, either the first fit point or the first control
vertex, depending on the current method.

Method
Controls whether the spline is created with fit points or with control vertices.
(SPLMETHOD on page 1667 system variable)
Fit Creates a degree 3 (cubic) B-spline by specifying fit points that the spline
must pass through. When the tolerance value is greater than 0, the spline
must be within the specified tolerance distance from each point.
Changing the Method updates the SPLMETHOD on page 1667 system variable.

1170 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Control Vertices Creates a spline by specifying control vertices. Use this
method to create splines of degree 1 (linear), degree 2 (quadratic), degree 3
(cubic), and so on up to degree 10. Adjusting the shape of a spline by moving
control vertices often provides better results than moving fit points.

Object
Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines.
The original polyline is retained or discarded depending on the setting of the
DELOBJ system variable.

Next Point
Creates additional spline segments until you press Enter.

Undo
Removes the last specified point.

Close
Closes the spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first. By
default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature continuity (C2)
along the entire loop.

Options for Splines with Fit Points
The following options are specific to the fit point method.
Knots Specifies the knot parameterization, one of several computational methods
that determines how the component curves between successive fit points
within a spline are blended. (SPLKNOTS on page 1666 system variable)

SPLINE | 1171

■

Chord (or Chord-Length method). Spaces the knots connecting each
component curve to be proportional to the distances between each
associated pair of fit points. An example is the green curve in the
illustration.

■

Square Root (or Centripetal method). Spaces the knots connecting each
component curve to be proportional to the square root of the distance
between each associated pair of fit points. This method usually produces
“gentler” curves. An example is the blue curve in the illustration.

■

Uniform (or Equidistant method). Spaces the knots of each component
curve to be equal, regardless of the spacing of the fit points. This method
often produces curves that overshoot the fit points. An example is the
magenta curve in the illustration.

Start Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the starting point of the
spline.

End Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the ending point of the spline.

1172 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Tolerance Specifies the distance by which the spline is allowed to deviate
from the specified fit points. A tolerance value of 0 requires the resulting spline
to pass directly through the fit points. The tolerance value applies to all fit
points except the starting and ending fit points, which always have a tolerance
of 0.

Options for Splines with Control Vertices
The following option is specific to the control vertices (CV) method.
(SPLMETHOD on page 1667 system variable)
Degree Sets the polynomial degree of the resulting spline. Use this option to
create splines of degree 1 (linear), degree 2 (quadratic), degree 3 (cubic), and
so on up to degree 10.

SPLINEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Splines

Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Spline
Toolbar: Modify II
Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and
click Spline.

SPLINEDIT | 1173

Summary
Modifies the data that defines a spline, such as the number and weight of
control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the starting and ending tangents.
NOTE SPLINEDIT automatically converts spline-fit polylines to splines even if you
immediately exit SPLINEDIT after selecting the spline-fit polyline.
The data that defines a spline is represented in one of two formats: as a control
frame or as fit points. The format can change depending on how the spline
was orginally created, the options selected from the grip menus, or the options
used in SPLINEDIT.
You can change any of following data:
■

Control frame data consists of control vertices, the polynomial degree of
the spline, and the weights assigned to each control vertex.

■

Fit data consists of fit points, knot parameterization, the fit tolerance, and
the tangents at the endpoints of the spline.

NOTE Switching from displaying control vertices to fit points automatically changes
the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree
equations will likely change shape as a result. In addition, if the spline was created
using a positive tolerance value, the fit points will be relocated to the knots on the
spline, and the tolerance value is reset to 0.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select spline:
Enter an option [Close on page 1174/Join on page 1175/Fit data on page 1175/Edit
Vertex on page 1176/convert to Polyline on page 1177/Reverse on page 1178/Undo
on page 1178] :

Close/Open
One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected
spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed
spline forms a loop.
Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with
the first. By default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature
continuity (C2) along the entire curve.
Open Opens a closed spline by removing the final curve segment between
the first and last points specified when the spline was originally created.

1174 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Join
Combines a selected spline with other splines, lines, polylines, and arcs at
coincident endpoints to form a larger spline. Objects are joined with kinks at
the points where they are joined (C0 continuity).

Fit Data
Edits fit point data using the following options:
Enter a fit data option [Add on page 1175/Close on page 1175Delete on page
1175/Kink on page 1176/Move on page 1176/Purge on page 1176/Tangents on page
1176/toLerance on page 1176/eXit on page 1176] :

Add
Adds fit points to the spline.
After selecting a fit point, specify a new fit point to be added to the spline in
the direction of the next fit point, which is automatically highlighted.
If you select the last fit point on an open spline, the new fit point is added to
the end of the spline.
If you select the first fit point on an open spline, you have the option of
specifying whether the new fit point is added before or after the first point.

Close/Open
One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected
spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed
spline forms a loop.
Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with
the first. By default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature
continuity (C2) along the entire curve.
Open Opens a closed spline by removing the final curve segment between
the first and last points specified when the spline was originally created.

Delete
Removes selected fit points from a spline.

SPLINEDIT | 1175

Kink
Adds a knot and fit point at the specified location on the spline, which does
not maintain tangent or curvature continuity at that point.

Move
Moves fit points to new locations.
New Location Moves the selected fit point to the specified location.

Next Selects the next fit point.
Previous Selects the previous fit point.
Select Point Select any fit point on the spline.

Purge
Replaces the fit data from the spline with control vertices.

Tangents
Changes the starting and ending tangents of a spline. Specify a point to
establish a tangent direction. You can use object snaps such as Perpendicular
or Parallel.
If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System
Default].

The System Default option calculates the default end tangents.

Tolerance
Refits the spline to the existing fit points using the new tolerance value.

Exit
Returns to the previous prompt.

Edit Vertex
Edits control frame data using the following options:

1176 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Enter a vertex editing option [Add on page 1177/Delete on page 1177/Elevate order
on page 1177/Move on page 1177/Weight on page 1177/eXit on page 1177] :

Add
Adds a new control vertex at the point you specify that is located between
two existing control vertices.

Delete
Removes a selected control vertex.

Elevate Order
Increases the polynomial order (degree plus one) of the spline. This results in
increasing the number of control vertices across the spline.
The maximum value is 26.

Move
Relocates a selected control vertex.
■

New Location on page 1176

■

Next on page 1176

■

Previous on page 1176

■

Select Point on page 1176

Weight
Changes the weight of a specified control vertex.
New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value for the
specified control vertex. A larger value pulls the spline closer to the control
vertex.
■

Next on page 1176

■

Previous on page 1176

■

Select Point on page 1176

Exit
Returns to the previous prompt.

Convert to Polyline
Converts the spline to a polyline.
The precision value determines how closely the resulting polyline matches
the spline. Valid values are any integer between 0 and 99.

SPLINEDIT | 1177

NOTE A high precision value will decrease performance.
The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the polylines
are created with linear or arc segments.
The DELOBJ system variable determines whether the original spline is retained.

Reverse
Reverses the direction of the spline. This option is intended primarily for
third-party applications.

Undo
Cancels the last action.

Exit
Returns to the Command prompt.

STRETCH
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Resize or Reshape Objects

Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch
Menu: Modify ➤ Stretch
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. Objects
that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected
individually, are moved rather than stretched. Several objects such as circles,
ellipses, and blocks, cannot be stretched.

1178 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon...
Select objects: Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method, and
press Enter. Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by
the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched.

STRETCH moves only the vertices and endpoints that lie inside the crossing
selection, leaving those outside unchanged. STRETCH does not modify 3D
solids, polyline width, tangent, or curve-fitting information.

Base Point
Specify base point or [Displacement] : Specify a base point or
enter displacement coordinates
Specify second point or : Specify a second point,
or press Enter to use the previous coordinates as a displacement

Displacement
Specify displacement : Enter displacement values for X,Y (and optionally
Z)

STRETCH | 1179

If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from
the base point to the second point. If you press Enter at the Specify Second
Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is treated as an X,Y,Z
displacement.

STYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style
Menu: Format ➤ Text Style
Toolbar: Text
Command entry: 'style for transparent use

Summary
The Text Style dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -style at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

1180 | Chapter 19 S Commands

You can specify the current text style to determine the appearance of all new
text. A text style includes the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and
other text characteristics.

Text Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Summary
Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Text Style
Lists the current text style.

Text Style Dialog Box | 1181

Styles

Displays the list of styles in the drawing. A
indicates that the style is .

icon before the style name

Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters,
numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen
(-).

Style List Filter
The drop-down list specifies whether all styles or only the styles in use are
displayed in the styles list.

Preview
Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify
the effects.

Font
Changes the style's font.
NOTE If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text
objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated.
Font Name
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled
shape (SHX) fonts in the Fonts folder.
When you select a name from the list, the program reads the file for the
specified font. The file's character definitions are loaded automatically unless
the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles
that use the same font. For more information, see “Assign Text Fonts”.
Font Style
Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When Use
Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select
a Big Font file name.
Use Big Font
Specifies an Asian-language Big Font file. Only SHX files are valid file types
for creating Big Fonts.
For more information, see “Use Text Fonts for International Work”.

1182 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Size
Changes the size of the text.
Annotative
Specifies that the text is . Click the information icon to learn more about the
annotative objects.
Match Text Orientation to Layout
Specifies that the orientation of the text in paper space viewports matches the
orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the option is cleared.
Height or Paper Text Height
Sets the text height based on the value you enter. Entering a height greater
than 0.0 sets the text height for this style automatically. If you enter 0.0, the
text height defaults to the last text height used, or the value stored in the
drawing template file.
TrueType fonts might be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with
the same height setting.
If the annotative option is selected, the value entered sets the text height in
paper space.
See “Set Text Height” for more information.

Effects
Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and
obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or
vertically aligned.
Upside Down
Displays the characters upside down.
Backwards
Displays the characters backwards.
Vertical
Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the
selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available
for TrueType fonts.
Width Factor
Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.
Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.

Text Style Dialog Box | 1183

Oblique Angle
Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value between -85 and 85
italicizes the text.
NOTE TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear
bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts
are plotted as specified by applied character formatting.

Set Current
Sets the style selected under Styles to current.

New
Displays the New Text Style dialog box and automatically supplies the name
“ stylen” (where n is the number of the supplied style) for the current settings.
You can accept the default or enter a name and choose OK to apply the current
style settings to the new style name.

Delete
Deletes unused text styles.

Apply
Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the current style and to the
text of the current style in the drawing.

-STYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter name of text style or [?] : Enter a style name, enter ?, or press Enter

1184 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big
Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas. Commas are
used to separate SHX files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file.
Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file name. If you do not
enter a file name extension, this program searches for an SHX file. If the file
is not located, Windows substitutes the first located registered TrueType font.
All long file names except those containing commas are accepted at the
prompt. The comma is reserved for the Big Font naming convention: an SHX
file followed by a comma (,), followed by the Big Font file name. A space is
interpreted as part of the font name, not as a carriage return.
If you enter annotative, you are prompted to create an text style.
Tilde (~) Displays the Select Font File dialog box.
In the Select Font File dialog box, valid types include SHX and TTF. The
character definitions of the selected font file are loaded automatically unless
the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles
that use the same font file.
Match Text Orientation to Layout If you enter yes the current text style
orientation in paper space viewports matches the layout.
Height of Text If you enter a height of 0.0, you are prompted for the text
height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than
0.0 sets the Text Height (Non annotative), entering a height greater than 0.0
sets the Paper Text Height (Annotative), for this style.
Width Factor Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a
value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Obliquing Angle Entering a value between -85 and 85 obliques the text.
Vertical Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation.
?—List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing.
At the Enter Text Style(s) to List prompt, entering the name of a style displays
the name, font file, height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation of
the style and exits the command. Entering an asterisk (*) or pressing Enter
displays the height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation (whether
text is drawn backwards, upside-down, vertically, or normally) of each style,
and then exits the command.

-STYLE | 1185

STYLESMANAGER
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Manage Plot Style Tables

Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Manage Plot Styles
Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager

Summary
In the folder, you can start the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, or double-click
an STB or CTB file to open the Plot Style Table Editor.
■

Double-click the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard to add plot style tables.

■

Double-click a plot style table (STB or CTB file) to start the Plot Style Table
Editor.

Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Choose a Type of Plot Style Table

Adds new plot style tables.

1186 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
Plot style tables contain and define plot styles, which can be assigned to
objects. When complete, the wizard produces an STB or CTB file depending
on the type of table you are creating. You can edit these files in the Plot Style
Table Editor. To use your new plot style table, the selected options on the Plot
and Publish tab of the Options dialog box must be appropriate for the type
of plot style table (named or color-dependent) you created.
You can create a plot style table from scratch, use an existing plot style table
as a starting point, or use settings from a PCP, PC2, or CFG file.
You can create either a named plot style table or a color-dependent plot style
table. With a named plot style table, you can add and define plot styles as you
like; the file name has the extension .stb. A color-dependent plot style table
creates 255 plot styles based on color; the file name has the extension .ctb.
You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new drawings
or for pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawings when they are saved in a later format.

Plot Style Table Editor
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Manage Plot Style Tables

Modifies the plot styles in a plot style table.

Summary
If the plot style table is attached to a layout or the Model tab, and you change
a plot style, any objects that use that plot style are affected. If the plot style
table is color-dependent, the file extension is CTB. If the plot style table is
named, the file extension is STB. For information, see “Use Plot Styles to
Control Plotted Objects”.
Open the Plot Style Table Editor with any of the following methods:
■

Double-click a CTB or STB file in the Plot Style Manager.

■

Right-click a CTB or STB file in the Plot Style Manager, and then choose
Open from the shortcut menu.

Plot Style Table Editor | 1187

■

Choose Plot Style Table Editor from the Finish screen in the Add Plot Style
Table wizard.

■

In the Page Setup dialog box under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments),
select a plot style and click the Edit button.

■

In the Current Plot Style and Select Plot Style dialog boxes, choose Editor.

■

General

■

Table View and Form View

General Tab (Plot Style Table Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Lists the plot style table file name, description, version number, location (path
name), and table type.

1188 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Plot Style Table File Name Displays the name of the plot style table file you
are editing.
Description
Provides a description area for a plot style table.
File Information
Displays information about the plot style table you are editing: number of
plot styles, path, and version number of the Plot Style Table Editor.
Apply Global Scale Factor to Non-ISO Linetypes
Scales all the non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns in the plot styles of objects
controlled by this plot style table.
Scale Factor
Specifies the amount to scale non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns.

Table View and Form View Tabs (Plot Style Table Editor)
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Plot Style Table Editor | 1189

Summary
Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings.
Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. In general, the Table
View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles. If you have
a large number of plot styles, the Form view is more convenient because the
plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the selected style
are displayed to the right. The first plot style in a named plot style table is
NORMAL and represents an object's default properties (no plot style applied).
You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Name Displays the names of plot styles in named plot style tables. Plot styles
in named plot style tables can be changed. Plot style names in color-dependent
plot style tables are tied to object color and cannot be changed. The program
accepts up to 255 characters for style names.
Description
Provides a description for each plot style.
Properties

1190 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Specifies the settings for the new plot style you are adding to the current plot
style table.
Color
Specifies the plotted color for an object. The default setting for plot style color
is Use Object Color. If you assign a plot style color, the color overrides the
object's color at plot time.
You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box and select
one of the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. The color you specify is
displayed in the plot style color list as Custom Color. If the plot device does
not support the color you specify, it plots the nearest available color or, in
the case of monochrome devices, black.
Enable Dithering
Enables dithering. A plotter uses dithering to approximate colors with dot
patterns, giving the impression of plotting more colors than available in the
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI). If the plotter does not support dithering, the
dithering setting is ignored.
Dithering is usually turned off in order to avoid false line typing that results
from dithering of thin vectors. Turning off dithering also makes dim colors
more visible. When you turn off dithering, the program maps colors to the
nearest color, resulting in a smaller range of colors when plotting.
Convert to Grayscale
Converts the object's colors to grayscale if the plotter supports grayscale. If
you clear Convert to Grayscale, the RGB values are used for object colors.
Dithering is available whether you use the object's color or assign a plot style
color.
Use Assigned Pen Number (Pen Plotters Only)
Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this plot style. Available
pens range from 1 to 32. If plot style color is set to Use Object Color, or you
are editing a plot style in a color-dependent plot style table, the value is set
to Automatic.
If you specify 0, the field updates to read Automatic. The program determines
the pen of the closest color to the object you are plotting using the information
you provided under Physical Pen Characteristics in the Plotter Configuration
Editor.
Virtual Pen Number

Plot Style Table Editor | 1191

Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255. Many non-pen plotters
can simulate pen plotters using virtual pens. For many devices, you can
program the pen's width, fill pattern, end style, join style, and color/screening
from the front panel on the plotter.
Enter 0 or Automatic to specify that the program should make the virtual pen
assignment from the AutoCAD Color Index.
The virtual pen setting in a plot style is used only by non-pen plotters and
only if they are configured for virtual pens. If this is the case, all the other
style settings are ignored and only the virtual pen is used. If a non-pen plotter
is not configured for virtual pens, then the virtual and physical pen
information in the plot style is ignored and all the other settings are used.
You can configure your non-pen plotter for virtual pens under Vector Graphics
on the Device and Document Settings tab in the PC3 Editor. Under Color
Depth, select 255 Virtual Pens.
Screening
Specifies a color intensity setting that determines the amount of ink placed
on the paper while plotting. Selecting 0 reduces the color to white. Selecting
100 displays the color at its full intensity. The Enable Dithering option must
be selected for screening.
Linetype
Displays a list with a sample and a description of each linetype. If you assign
a plot style linetype, the linetype overrides the object's linetype at plot time.
Adaptive Adjustment
Adjusts the scale of the linetype to complete the linetype pattern.
If you do not select Adaptive Adjustment, the line might end in the middle
of a pattern. Turn off Adaptive Adjustment if linetype scale is important. Turn
on Adaptive Adjustment if complete linetype patterns are more important
than correct linetype scaling.
Lineweight
Displays a sample of the lineweight as well as its numeric value. You can
specify the numeric value of each lineweight in millimeters.
If you assign a plot style lineweight, the lineweight overrides the object's
lineweight when it is plotted.
Line End Style
If you assign a line end style, the line end style overrides the object's line end
style at plot time.

1192 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Line Join Style
If you assign a line join style, the line join style overrides the object's line join
style at plot time.
Fill Style
If you assign a fill style, the fill style overrides the object's fill style at plot
time.
Add Style
Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table.
The plot style is based on Normal, which uses an object's properties and doesn't
apply any overrides by default. You must specify the overrides you want to
apply after you create the new plot style. You cannot add a new plot style to
a color-dependent plot style table; a color-dependent plot style table has 255
plot styles mapped to color. You also cannot add a plot style to a named plot
style table that has a translation table.
Delete Style
Deletes the selected style from the plot style table.
Objects assigned this plot style retain the plot style assignment but plot as
Normal because the plot style is no longer defined in the plot style table. You
cannot delete a plot style from a named plot style table that has a translation
table, or from a color-dependent plot style table.
Edit Lineweights
Modifies the widths values of existing lineweights.
Displays the Edit Lineweights dialog box.
There are 28 lineweights available to apply to plot styles in plot style tables.
If the lineweight you need does not exist in the list of lineweights stored in
the plot style table, you can edit an existing lineweight. You cannot add or
delete lineweights from the list in the plot style table.
Save As
Displays the Save As dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name.

Plot Style Table Editor | 1193

Edit Lineweights Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Modifies the width values of existing lineweights.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Lineweights
Lists the lineweights in the plot style table. You can modify existing
lineweights, but you can't add or delete them. If you change a lineweight
value, other plot styles that use the lineweight also change.
When you edit a lineweight value, it is rounded and displayed with a precision
of four places past the decimal point. Lineweight values must be zero or a
positive number. If you create a lineweight with a zero width, the line is plotted
as thin as the plotter can create it. The maximum possible lineweight value
is 100 millimeters (approximately four inches).
Units for Listing
Specifies the units in which to display the list of lineweights.
Edit Lineweight
Makes the selected lineweight available for editing.
Sort Lineweights
Sorts the list of lineweights by value. If you change lineweight values, choose
Sort Lineweights to resort the list.

1194 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SUBTRACT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Combines selected regions by subtraction.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Region ➤ Subtract

Summary
With SUBTRACT, you can create a 2D region object by subtracting one set of
existing region objects from another, overlapping set. You can select only
regions for use with this command.
Select the objects that you want to keep, press Enter, then select the objects
that you want to subtract.

SUBTRACT | 1195

Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first
selection set. A single new region is created.

You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane.
However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets
of regions on different planes. The program then produces separate subtracted
regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar
regions are rejected.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects (to subtract from) Specifies the regions to be modified by
subtraction.
Select objects (to subtract) Specifies the regions to subtract.

1196 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SYSWINDOWS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Switch Between Open Drawings

Arranges windows and icons when the application window is shared with
external applications.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Window panel ➤ Tile Horizontally
Menu: Window ➤ Cascade
Menu: Window ➤ Tile Horizontally
Menu: Window ➤ Tile Vertically
Menu: Window ➤ Arrange Icons

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Cascade on page 1197/tile Horizontal on page 1197/tile Vertical
on page 1197/Arrange icons on page 1198]: Enter an option
Cascade
Organizes a large number of windows by overlapping them for easier access.
Tile Horizontal Arranges open drawings in horizontal, nonoverlapping
windows.
When several drawings are open, you can view them in rows. Additional
columns are added only when there's not enough space.
Tile Vertical Arranges windows in vertical, nonoverlapping tiles.
When several drawings are open, you can view them in columns. Additional
rows are added only when there's not enough space.

SYSWINDOWS | 1197

Arrange Icons Arranges the window icons.
Arranges multiple open drawings, when minimized, in a line at the bottom
of the workspace.

1198 | Chapter 19 S Commands

T Commands

20

TABLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

Creates an empty table object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Insert Table
Menu: Draw ➤ Table
Toolbar: Draw

Summary
A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can
be created from an empty table or a table style. A table can also be linked to
data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

1199

The Insert Table dialog box is displayed.
If you select a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual
tab displays.
If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Insert Table Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

Creates an empty table object.

1200 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Summary
Inserts an empty table in the drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Table Style
Choose a table style from within the current drawing from which to create a
table. You can create a new table style by clicking the button next to the
drop-down list.

Insert Options
Specifies the method for inserting your table.
Start from Empty Table
Creates an empty table that can be filled in with data manually.
Start from Data Link
Creates a table from data in an external spreadsheet.

Insert Table Dialog Box | 1201

Preview
Controls whether a preview displays. If you start from an empty table, the
preview displays an example of the table style. If you create a table link, the
preview displays the resulting table. Clear this option to improve performance
when working with large tables.

Insertion Behavior
Specifies the location of the table.
Specify Insertion Point
Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. You can use the
pointing device or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt. If the
table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the
insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table.
Specify Window
Specifies a size and a location for the table. You can use the pointing device
or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt. When this option is
selected, the number of columns and rows and the column width and row
height depend on the size of the window and the column and row settings.

Column & Row Settings
Set the number and size of columns and rows.
Columns Icon
Indicates columns.
Rows Icon
Indicates rows.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns. When the Specify Window option is selected
and you specify a column width, the Auto option is selected, and the number
of columns is controlled by the width of the table. If a table style containing
a starting table has been specified, then you can choose the number of
additional columns you would like added to that starting table.
Column Width
Specifies the width of the columns. When the Specify Window option is
selected and you specify the number of columns, the Auto option is selected,
and the column width is controlled by the width of the table. The minimum
column width is one character.

1202 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Data Rows
Specifies the number of rows. When the Specify Window option is selected
and you specify a row height, the Auto option is selected, and the number of
rows is controlled by the height of the table. A table style with a title row and
a header row has a minimum of three rows. The minimum row height is one
line. If a table style containing a starting table has been specified, then you
can choose the number of additional data rows you would like added to that
starting table.
Row Height
Specifies the height of the rows in number of lines. The height of a line is
based on the text height and the cell margin, which are both set in the table
style. When the Specify Window option is selected and you specify the number
of rows, the Auto option is selected, and the row height is controlled by the
height of the table.

Set Cell Styles
For table styles that do not contain a starting table, specifies a cell style for
rows in the new table.
First Row Cell Style
Specifies a cell style for the first row in the table. The Title cell style is used by
default.
Second Row Cell Style
Specifies a cell style for the second row in the table. The Header cell style is
used by default.
All Other Row Cell Styles
Specifies a cell style for all other rows in the table. The Data cell style is used
by default.

Table Options
For table styles that contain a starting table, specifies the table elements from
the starting table that are retained upon insertion.
Label Cell Text
Retains text from the Header or Title rows in the starting table in the
newly-inserted table.
Data Cell Text
Retains text from the Data rows in the starting table in the newly-inserted
table.

Insert Table Dialog Box | 1203

Blocks
Retains blocks from the starting table in the newly-inserted table.
Retain Cell Style Overrides
Retains cell style overrides from the starting table in the newly-inserted table.
Data Links
Retains data links from the starting table in the newly-inserted table.

Table Ribbon Contextual Tab
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Rows/Columns Panel
Insert Row Above Inserts a row above the currently selected cell or row.
Insert Row Below Inserts a row below the currently selected cell or row
Delete Row(s) Deletes the currently selected row(s).
Insert Column Left Inserts a column to the left of the currently selected cell
or row.
Insert Column Right Inserts a column to the right of the currently selected
cell or row.
Delete Column(s) Deletes the currently selected column(s).

Merge Panel
Merge Cells Merges the selected cells into one large cell.
Unmerge Cells Unmerges cells that were previously merged.

Cell Styles Panel
Match Cell Applies the properties of a selected cell to other cells.

1204 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Cell Styles Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The
cell styles Title, Header, and Data are always contained within any table style,
and cannot be deleted or renamed.
Cell Borders Sets the properties of the borders of the selected table cells.
Alignment Specifies alignment for the content within cells. Content is middle-,
top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the
cell. Content is center-, left-, or right-aligned with respect to the left and right
borders of the cell.
Background Fill Specifies the fill color. Select None or a background color,
or click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box.

Cell Format Panel
Cell Locking Locks or unlocks cell content and/or formatting from editing.
Data Format Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and
so on) that you can format for table rows.
Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list.
Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant
format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such
as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed.
Precision For Angle, Decimal Number and Points data types only, sets the
precision for applicable formats. For example, if you select Angle as the data
type and Radians as the format type, options such as Current Precision, 0.0r,
0.00r, 0.000r, and so on are displayed.
List Separator For a Point data type only, displays a list of options (comma,
semicolon, or colon) that you can use to separate list items.
Symbol For Currency data types only, displays a list of currency symbols that
you can use.
Append Symbol In Currency data types, places the currency symbol after the
number. In the Percentage data types, places the percent symbol after the
number.
Negative Numbers For Currency data types only, lists options for displaying
negative numbers.
X, Y, and Z For a Point data type only, filters X, Y, or Z coordinates.
Additional Format For Angle, Decimal Number, Point and Whole Number
data types only, opens the Additional Format dialog box, where you set
additional formatting options for table cells.

Table Ribbon Contextual Tab | 1205

Examples For the Date data type only, displays a list of date display options
for the date option you selected in the Format field. Click a date in the Format
field to see an example.

Insert Panel
Block The Insert dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a block into
the currently selected table cell.
Field The Field dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a field into the
currently selected table cell.
Formula Inserts a formula into the currently selected table cell. A formula
must start with an equal sign (=). The formulas for sum, average, and count
ignore empty cells and cells that do not resolve to a numeric value. Other
formulas display an error (#) if any cell in the arithmetic expression is empty
or contains nonnumeric data.
Manage Cell Contents Displays the content of the selected cell. You can
change the order of cell content as well as change the direction in which cell
content will appear.

Data Panel
Link Cell The New and Modify Excel Link dialog box is displayed, where you
can link data from a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel to a table within
your drawing.
Download from Source Updates data in the table cell that is referenced by
changed data in an established data link.

Manage Cell Content Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

Displays the content of the selected cell.

1206 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Access Methods
Toolbar: Table
Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing any single cell, and click Manage
Cell Content.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Cell Content List Box
Lists all text and/or blocks in the selected cell in order of appearance. Text is
indicated with the label Table Cell Text. Blocks are indicated with Block
preceding the name of the block.

Content Order Buttons
Move Up
Moves the selected list box content up in the display order.
Move Down
Moves the selected list box content down in the display order.
Delete
Removes the selected list box content from the table cell.

Manage Cell Content Dialog Box | 1207

Layout Mode Options
Changes the direction in which cell content will appear.
Flow
Places cell content based on the width of the cell.
Stacked Horizontal
Places cell content horizontally, regardless of cell width.
Stacked Vertical
Places cell content vertically, regardless of cell height.
Content Spacing
Determines the spacing between text and/or blocks within the cell.

-TABLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

Creates an empty table object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current table style: "Standard" Cell width: 2.5000 Cell height: 1 line(s)
Enter number of columns on page 1208 or [Auto/from Style/data Link] <5>:

Number of Columns
Specifies the number of columns.

Number of Rows
Specifies the number of rows.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If
the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the
insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table.
Width Specifies a width for the table columns.

1208 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Height Specifies a height for the table rows.
Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain
a starting table.
For more information, see Work with Table Styles.
Auto Specifies a size and a location for the table. When this option is selected,
you can set the number of columns or the column width, but not both. The
number of rows and the row height depend on the size of the window you
specify.
First Corner Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If the
table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the
insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table.
Height Specifies a height for the table rows.

Auto
Specifies a size and a location for the table.
Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows.

From Style
Specifies a table style for creating the table. You can use the pointing device
or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt. The specified table style
must contain a starting table.
For more information about starting tables, see Work with Table Styles.
Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If
the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the
insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table.
Style Specifies a table style for the table.
Entering [?] displays a list of table styles available in your drawing.
Rows Specifies the number of rows you want to add to the table stored in the
specified table style. The rows are added to the rows already in the specified
table.
Columns Specifies the number of columns you want to add to the table stored
in the specified table style. The columns are added to the columns already in
the specified table.

Options
Specifies special formatting options that can be inserted in the table.
Label Text Retains rows with a cell type of Label found in the table style’s
starting table.

-TABLE | 1209

The cell type is set in the Properties palette. The Header and Title cell styles
use the Label cell type by default.
Data Text Retains rows with a cell type of Data found in the table style’s
starting table.
The cell type is set in the Properties palette. The Data cell style uses the Data
cell type property by default.
Data Links Retains data links found in the specified table style’s starting table.
For more information, see Link a Table to External Data.
Blocks Retains blocks found in the specified table style’s starting table.
Cell Style Overrides Retains cell style overrides found in the specified table
style’s starting table.
For more information, see Work with Table Styles.

Data Link
Specifies a data link from which a table is created.
Entering [?] displays a list of data links available in your drawing.

TABLEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Edits text in a table cell.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: With a table cell selected, right-click and click Edit Cell
Text.
Pointing device: Double-click inside a table cell.
Pick a table cell: Click inside a table cell, and enter text or use the Text Formatting
toolbar or the Options shortcut menu to make changes

1210 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TABLEEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Modify Tables

Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: With a table selected, right-click and click Export.

Summary
A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Table data is exported in the
comma-separated (CSV) file format. All formatting of the table and its text is
lost.

TABLESTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤
Menu: Format ➤ Table Style
Toolbar: Styles

➤ Table Style

TABLEEXPORT | 1211

Summary
The Table Style dialog box is displayed.
You can specify the current table style to determine the appearance of all new
tables. A table style includes settings for background colors, margins, borders,
text, and other table characteristics.

Table Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Sets the current table style and creates, modifies, and deletes table styles.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Current Table Style
Displays the name of the table style that is applied to tables you create.
Styles
Displays a list of table styles. The current style is highlighted.

1212 | Chapter 20 T Commands

List
Controls the contents of the Styles list.
Preview Of
Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list.
Set Current
Sets the table style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new tables
are created using this table style.
New
Displays the Create New Table Style dialog box, in which you can define new
table styles.
Modify
Displays the Modify Table Style dialog box, in which you can modify table
styles.
Delete
Deletes the table style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in
the drawing cannot be deleted.

Create New Table Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Specifies a name for the new table style and specifies the existing table style
on which the new table style will be based.

Create New Table Style Dialog Box | 1213

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Style Name
Names the new table style.
Start With
Specifies an existing table style whose settings are the default for the new table
style.
Continue Displays the New Table Style dialog box, in which you define the
new table style.

New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Defines a new table style or modifies an existing table style.

1214 | Chapter 20 T Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Starting Table
Allows you to specify a table in your drawing to use as an example for
formatting this table style. Once you select a table, you can specify the structure
and contents you want copied from that table to the table style.
With the Remove Table icon, you can remove a table from the current specified
table style.

General
Table Direction
Sets the direction of a table. Down creates a table that reads from top to
bottom. Up creates a table that reads from bottom to top.
■

Down: The title row and the column heads row are at the top of the table.
When you click Insert Rows and click Below, the new row is inserted below
the current row.

■

Up: The title row and the column heads row are at the bottom of the table.
When you click Insert Rows and click Below, the new row is inserted above
the current row.

Preview
Displays an example of the effect of the current table style settings.

Cell Styles
Defines a new cell style or modifies an existing cell style. You can create any
number of cell styles.
Cell Style Menu
Displays cell styles already found within the table.
Create Cell Styles Button
Launches the Create New Cell Style dialog box.
Manage Cell Styles Button
Launches the Manage Cell Styles dialog box.

Cell Style Tabs
Set the appearance of the data cells, the cell text, and the cell borders.

New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes | 1215

General Tab

Properties
Fill Color
Specifies the background color of the cell. The default is None.
You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box.
Alignment
Sets justification and alignment for the text in the table cell. Text is middle-,
top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the
cell. Text is center-justified, left-justified, or right-justified with respect to the
left and right borders of the cell.
See “Justify Multiline Text” in the User's Guide for an illustration of the nine
options.
Format
Sets data type and formatting for the Data, Column Heading, or Title rows in
a table. Clicking this button displays the Table Cell Format dialog box, where
you can further define formatting options.
Type
Specifies the cell style as either a label or data.

Margins
Controls the spacing between the border of the cell and the cell content. The
cell margin settings apply to all cells in the table. The default setting is 0.06
(imperial) and 1.5 (metric).
Horizontal
Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the left and right
cell borders.

1216 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Vertical
Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the top and bottom
cell borders.
Merge cells on row/column creation
Merges any new row or column created with the current cell style into one
cell. You can use this option to create a title row at the top of your table.

Text Tab

Text Style
Lists the available text styles.
Text Style Button
Displays the Text Style Dialog Box where you can create or modify text styles.
(DIMTXSTY system variable)
Text Height
Sets the text height. The default text height for data and column head cells
is 0.1800. The default text height for the table title is 0.25.
Text Color
Specifies the color of the text. Choose Select Color at the bottom of the list
to display the Select Color dialog box.
Text Angle
Sets the text angle. The default text angle is 0 degrees. You can enter any angle
between -359 and +359 degrees.

New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes | 1217

Borders Tab

Lineweight
Sets the lineweight to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border
button. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to increase the cell
margins.
Linetype
Sets the linetype to be applied to the borders you specify. Choose Other to
load a custom linetype.
Color
Sets the color to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border
button. Choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box.
Double Line
Displays table borders as double lines.
Spacing
Determines the spacing for double line borders. The default spacing is 0.1800.

Border Buttons
Controls the appearance of the borders of the cells. The border properties are
lineweight and color of the gridlines.
All Borders
Applies the border properties settings to all borders.
Outside Border
Applies the border properties settings to the outside border.
Inside Border

1218 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Applies the border properties settings to the inside border.
Bottom Border
Applies the border properties settings to the bottom borders.
Left Border
Applies the border properties settings to the left borders.
Top Border
Applies the border properties settings to the top borders.
Right Border
Applies the border properties settings to the right borders.
No Border
Hides borders.

Cell Style Preview
Displays an example of the effect of the current table style settings.

Create New Cell Style Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Specifies a name for the new cell style and specifies the existing cell style on
which the new cell style will be based.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Create New Cell Style Dialog Box | 1219

New Style Name
Names the new cell style.
Start With
Specifies an existing cell style whose settings are the default for the new cell
style.
Continue Returns you to the New Table Style dialog box, in which you define
the new cell style.

Manage Cell Styles Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Displays all cell styles within the current table style and allows you to create
or delete a cell style.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Cell Styles

1220 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The cell styles Title,
Header, and Data are always contained within any table style.
New
Displays the Create New Cell Style dialog box. From here, you can create a
new cell style to be contained within the current table style.
Rename
Allows you to give a new name to the selected cell style. The Title, Header,
and Data cell styles cannot be renamed.
Delete
Allows you to delete the selected cell style.
Cell Style Preview
Displays an example of the effect of the current cell style settings.

Table Cell Format Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

The options displayed here change based on the selected data type and format
you select.

Table Cell Format Dialog Box | 1221

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Data Type Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and
so on) that you can format for table rows.
Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list.
Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant
format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such
as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed.
Precision For Angle, Decimal Number, and Points data types only, sets the
precision for applicable formats. For example, if you select Angle as the data
type and Radians as the format type, options such as Current Precision, 0.0r,
0.00r, 0.000r, and so on are displayed.
List Separator For a Point data type only, displays a list of options (comma,
semicolon, or colon) that you can use to separate list items.
Symbol For Currency data types only, displays a list of currency symbols that
you can use.
Append Symbol In Currency data types, places the currency symbol after the
number. In the Percentage data types, places the percent symbol after the
number.
Negative Numbers For Currency data types only, lists options for displaying
negative numbers.

1222 | Chapter 20 T Commands

X, Y, and Z Coordinates For a Point data type only, filters X, Y, or Z
coordinates.
Additional Format For Angle, Decimal Number, Point, and Whole Number
data types only, opens the Additional Format dialog box, where you set
additional formatting options for table cells.
Examples For the Date data type only, displays a list of date display options
for the date option you selected in the Format field. Click a date in the Format
field to see an example.

Additional Format Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Work with Table Styles

Provides additional formatting options for table cells.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Value
Displays the value in base drawing units.

Preview
Displays updates to the format as you change the conversion factor and other
settings.

Conversion Factor
Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value. The default is 1
for no conversion.

Additional Text
Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the value.

Number Separators
Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000.
Decimal Specifies the separator for decimal values. Select a period, a comma,
or a space.
Thousands Inserts a comma to group thousands in a field value.

Additional Format Dialog Box | 1223

Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero.
Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.5000
becomes .5000.
Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal values. For example, 12.5000
becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches value when the distance
is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches value when the
distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

TABLET
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Digitizing Tablets

Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Tablet

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enter an option [ON on page 1224/OFF on page 1224/CAL on page 1225/CFG on
page 1227]:

On
Turns on Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 1 also turns
on Tablet mode. Pressing Ctrl+T on some systems turns Tablet mode on and
off.

Off
Turns off Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 0 also turns
off Tablet mode. Pressing Ctrl+T on some systems turns Tablet mode on and
off.

1224 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Cal
Calibrates the digitizer with a paper drawing or photograph, creating the tablet
transformation, which is the mapping of points from the tablet to the
coordinate drawing system. Calibration is digitizing points on the drawing
and mapping them to their real coordinates.
Calibration can be performed in model space or paper space. The Cal option
turns on Tablet mode in the space in which the tablet is calibrated. When the
space is changed, the Cal option turns off Tablet mode.
The paper should be flat (with no bumps or wrinkles) and securely fastened
to the digitizing tablet. The paper can be oriented at any angle.
The points you enter cannot be duplicates. The points need not be the origin
on either axis, and you can enter as many points as you like. The more points
you enter, the more accurate the drawing will be.
If you enter only two points, the program automatically computes an
orthogonal transformation.
If you enter three or more points, the program computes the transformation
in each of the three transformation types (Orthogonal, Affine, and Projective)
to determine which best fits the calibration points. If you enter more than
four points, computing the best-fitting projective transformation can take a
long time. You can cancel the process by pressing Esc.
When the computations are complete, the program displays a table with the
number of calibration points and a column for each transformation type.
If there have been no failures of projection transformation, the program
prompts you to choose a transformation type.
Only transformation types for which the outcome was Success, Exact, or
Canceled are included in this prompt. A projective transformation can be
specified even if it was canceled. The program uses the result computed at the
time you canceled.
Orthogonal Specifies translation, uniform scaling, and rotation with two
calibration points.
Use Orthogonal for dimensionally accurate paper drawings and paper drawings
in which the portion to be digitized is long and narrow, with most points
confined to single lines.
NOTE You must specify the lower-left point location before specifying the
upper-right point location.

TABLET | 1225

Affine Specifies arbitrary linear transformation in two dimensions consisting
of translation, independent X- and Y-scaling, rotation, and skewing with three
calibration points.
Use Affine when horizontal dimensions in a paper drawing are stretched with
respect to vertical dimensions, and lines that are supposed to be parallel
actually are parallel.
The RMS (root mean square) error reported after calibration measures how
close the program has come to making a perfect fit. Affine should be used if
the RMS is small.
Projective Specifies a transformation equivalent to a perspective projection
of one plane in space onto another plane with four calibration points. A
projective transformation provides a limited form of what cartographers call
rubber sheeting, in which different portions of the tablet surface are stretched
by varying amounts. Straight lines map into straight lines. Parallel lines do
not necessarily stay parallel.
Projective transformation corrects parallel lines that appear to converge.
Repeat Table Redisplays the computed table, which rates the transformation
types.

Transformation Table
Reports the number of calibration points and provides information about
each transformation type.

Outcome of Fit
Reports the outcome of fit for each of the transformation types. If the outcome
of fit is not Success or Exact for any of the transformation types, the program
reports failure of the entire calibration process and ends the command. The
remaining entries in each column are blank unless Outcome of Fit is Success.
Exact Indicates the correct number of points for a valid transformation.
Success Indicates more than enough points. The program succeeded in fitting
a transformation to the data.
Impossible Indicates not enough points.
Failure Indicates enough points, but the program was unable to fit a
transformation to the points, usually because some points were colinear or
coincident.
Canceled Indicates that the fit process was canceled. This outcome occurs
only with the projective transformation.

1226 | Chapter 20 T Commands

RMS Error
Reports the RMS (root mean square) error, which measures how close the
program has come to finding a perfect fit. The goal is the smallest RMS error.

Standard Deviation
Reports the standard deviation of the residuals. If it is near zero, the residual
at each calibration point is about the same.

Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is least accurate. The residual is the
distance between where the point was mapped during transformation and
where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given in the
current linear units.

Second-Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is second-least accurate. The residual
is the distance between where the point was mapped during transformation
and where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given in
the current linear units.

Cfg
Designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or designates a small portion of
a large tablet as a screen pointing area.
If tablet menus are in use and the same number of menus is selected, the
following prompts are displayed:
Do you want to realign tablet menus? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter
Digitize upper-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (1)
Digitize lower-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (2)
Digitize lower-right corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (3)

In the prompt, n is the menu number (1-4).
The printed menu form must be affixed to the tablet surface, and the requested
points must be digitized. The set of three points must form a 90-degree angle.
Tablet menu areas can be skewed at any angle.

TABLET | 1227

After all interaction concerning tablet menus is complete, the following prompt
is displayed:
Do you want to respecify the screen pointing area? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n
or press Enter
If you enter y, the following prompts are displayed:
Digitize lower-left corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
A small portion of the tablet's surface is designated as the fixed screen pointing
area.
Do you want to specify the Floating Screen Pointing area? [Yes/No] : Enter
y or n or press Enter
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:
Do you want the Floating Screen Area to be the same size as the Fixed Screen
Pointing Area? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter
If you responded n to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompts:
Digitize lower-left corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Respond to the following prompt:
Would you also like to specify a button to toggle the Floating Screen Area?
[Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:
Press any non-pick button on the digitizer puck that you wish to designate as
the toggle for the Floating Screen Area

TASKBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Transfer Information between Open Drawings

1228 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Controls whether multiple open drawings are displayed separately or grouped
on the Windows taskbar.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter new value for Taskbar :
■

On Windows 7 systems, the default value is 1.

■

For all other Windows operating systems, the default value is 0.

When TASKBAR is set to 1, drawings are displayed separately on the Windows
taskbar. With Windows 7, preview images of each open drawing are displayed
when the cursor is over the AutoCAD taskbar button.
When TASKBAR is set to 0, only the name of the current drawing is displayed
on the Windows taskbar buttons.

TEXT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Single-Line Text

Creates a single-line text object.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text
Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Single Line Text
Toolbar: Text

TEXT | 1229

Summary
You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each
text line is an independent object that you can move, format, or otherwise
modify. Right-click in the text box to select options on the shortcut menu.
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing Enter at the Specify Start
Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for paper height and rotation angle.
The text that you enter in the text box is placed directly beneath the previous
line of text. The point that you specified at the prompt is also stored as the
insertion point of the text.
If the TEXTED system variable is set to 1, text created using TEXT displays the
Edit Text dialog box. If TEXTED is set to 2, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed.
When creating text, you can click anywhere in a drawing to create a new text
block. You can also use the keyboard to move among text blocks (for example:
for new text created using the TEXT command, you can navigate through text
groups by pressing Tab or Shift+Tab, or edit a group of text lines by pressing
Alt and clicking each text object.)
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large,
or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you
can easily read and edit it.
You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings
and control codes.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current text style:  Current text height:  Annotative: 
Specify start point on page 1230 of text or [Justify on page 1231/Style on page 1233]:
Specify a point or enter an option

Start Point
Specifies a start point for the text object. Enter text in the In-Place Text Editor
for single-line text.
The SpecifyHeight prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not and
does not have a fixed height.
The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text
style is annotative.

1230 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Justify
Controls justification of the text.
You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text
prompt.
Align Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the
endpoints of the baseline.
The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer
the text string, the shorter the characters.

Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with
two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend
from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start
point and a point you specify. The longer the text string, the narrower the
characters. The height of the characters remains constant.
Center Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you
specify with a point.
The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect
to the center point. You can designate the angle by specifying a point. The
text baseline runs from the start point toward the specified point. If you specify
a point to the left of the center point, the text is drawn upside down.

TEXT | 1231

Middle Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical
center of the height you specify. Middle-aligned text does not rest on the
baseline.
The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of
all text, including descenders. The MC option uses the midpoint of the height
of uppercase letters.

Right Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point.

TL (Top Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.

TC (Top Center) Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.

TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.

ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the
text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

MC (Middle Center) Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the
middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
The MC option differs from the Middle option in that it uses the midpoint of
the height of uppercase letters. The Middle option uses the midpoint of all
text, including descenders.

1232 | Chapter 20 T Commands

MR (Middle Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of
the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

BL (Bottom Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.

BC (Bottom Center) Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available
for horizontally oriented text only.

BR (Bottom Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.

Style
Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters.
Text you create uses the current text style.
Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other
parameters.

TEXT | 1233

Text Shortcut Menu
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Single-Line Text

Displays options available for creating and modifying single-line text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Opaque Background When checked, makes the background of the editor
opaque.
Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box.
Select All Selects all the text in the single-line text object.
Change Case Changes the case of selected text.

Special Unicode Characters
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Single-Line Text

When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree
symbol, plus/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering
the following Unicode character strings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
\U+00B0 Degrees symbol (°)
\U+00B1 Tolerance symbol ( )

1234 | Chapter 20 T Commands

\U+2205 Diameter symbol (

)

Control Codes and Special Characters
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create Single-Line Text

Summary
In addition to using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you
can also overscore text, underscore text, or insert a special character by
including control information in the text string. Use a pair of percent signs
to introduce each control sequence.
You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD LT text fonts and Adobe
PostScript fonts.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
%%nnn Draws character number nnn.
You can use these control codes with standard AutoCAD LT text fonts only:
%%o Toggles overscoring on and off.

%%u Toggles underscoring on and off.

%%d Draws degrees symbol (°).

%%p Draws plus/minus tolerance symbol ( ).

Control Codes and Special Characters | 1235

%%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (ý).

%%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command
only.

Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off
automatically at the end of the text string.

You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using
the PostScript fonts.
A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is
provided in the sample folder.

The Euro Symbol
You can use the euro symbol with SHX fonts and their TrueType equivalent
fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. If your keyboard does
not contain a euro symbol, hold down the Alt key and enter 0128 on the
numeric keypad.

TEXTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Text

Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension
object.

Summary
Displays the in-place text editor, and accepts your changes to the selected
multiline text, single-line text, or dimension object.

1236 | Chapter 20 T Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select an annotation object: Select a text, mtext, or dimension object

TEXTSCR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window

Opens the text window.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Views tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤
Text Window
Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Text Window
Command entry: 'textscr for transparent use

Summary
The Command prompt is displayed in a separate window. You can press F2
to switch between the drawing area and the text window.
When the Command prompt is hidden, you can turn it back on by entering
commandline in the text window.
This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.

TEXTSCR | 1237

TEXTTOFRONT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Brings text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.

Access Methods
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel (expanded) ➤ Draw Order
Drop-down ➤ Bring Text to Front
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel (expanded) ➤ Draw Order
Drop-down ➤ Bring Dimensions to Front
Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring Text and Dimensions to Front ➤
Text and Dimension Objects

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Bring to front: [Text/Dimensions/Both] : Enter an option or press Enter
Text Brings all text in front of all other objects in the drawing.
Dimensions Brings all dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.
Both Brings all text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.
NOTE Text and dimensions that are contained within blocks and xrefs cannot be
brought to the front apart from the containing object. Also, text in multileaders
and tables are not supported.

TIFOUT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Export Raster Files

1238 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and
viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter
A TIFF file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what
is displayed on the screen.
NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are
displayed.

TIME
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Obtain General Drawing Information

Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Time
Command entry: 'time for transparent use

TIME | 1239

Summary
List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current time: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:54:51:406 AM
Times for this drawing:
Created: Friday, December 12, 2003 1:21:36:203 AM
Last Updated: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:49:19:208 AM
Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.520
Elapsed Timer (on): 0 days 00:07:05.312
Next Automatic Save In: 0 days 01:59:15.570
Enter option [Display/On/OFF/Reset]: Enter an option or press Enter
Current Time Displays the current date and time to the nearest millisecond
using a 24-hour clock.
Created Displays the date and time that the current drawing was created.
Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current
drawing. This date and time is initially the drawing creation time. The time
is revised whenever the drawing file is saved.
Total Editing Time Displays the time spent editing the current drawing. This
timer is updated by the program and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time
is not included in the total editing time. If you quit the editing session without
saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing session is not added to
the accumulated editing time.
Elapsed Timer Runs as another timer while the program is running. You can
turn it on and off or reset it whenever you like.
Next Automatic Save In Indicates the time remaining until the next automatic
save. You can set the time interval using OPTIONS or the SAVETIME system
variable.
Display Repeats the display with updated times.
On Starts the user elapsed timer if it was off.
Off Stops the user elapsed timer.
Reset Resets the user elapsed timer to 0 days 00:00:00.000.

1240 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TIMELINE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Provides access to previous versions of the AutoCAD WS online copy of the
current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Timeline
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Timeline
Toolbar: Online

Summary
The Timeline dialog box on page 1241 is displayed. You must save the drawing
before you can continue with this command.
NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have
an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.

Timeline Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration

Provides access to previous versions of the AutoCAD WS online copy of the
current drawing.

TIMELINE | 1241

Summary
The timeline presents a visual representation of the history of any drawing
uploaded to AutoCAD WS. A unique version is added to the timeline whenever
the drawing is uploaded from AutoCAD or online edits are saved in AutoCAD
WS, including changes resulting from collaboration sessions.
Use the timeline to refer to previous versions of the drawing and track all
changes. Users with whom you have shared the drawing can view the timeline.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
View Online Opens the specified version in AutoCAD WS and displays the
timeline of the drawing.
Download Downloads the selected version as follows:
■

Open. Downloads the drawing to a default location on the local computer
and opens it in AutoCAD.

■

Save. Saves the drawing to a specified location.

1242 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TINSERT
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Inserts a block in a table cell.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: With a cell in a table selected, right-click and click Insert
Block on the shortcut menu.

Summary
The Insert a Block in a Table Cell dialog box is displayed.

Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Name Specifies the block reference to insert.
Browse Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. Select the drawing file to
insert as a block reference.
Path Displays the location of the drawing file selected in the Select Drawing
File dialog box.
Scale

TINSERT | 1243

Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select AutoFit to
scale the block to fit in the selected cell.
AutoFit Controls if the block reference should be scaled to fit in the select
table cell, or if the height and width of the table cell should be adjusted to fit
the block reference being inserted.
Rotation Angle
Specifies a rotation angle for the block.
Overall Cell Alignment
Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell. The block is middle-, top-,
or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell. The
block is center-, left-, or right-aligned with respect to the left and right borders
of the cell.

TOLERANCE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Tolerance
Menu: Dimension ➤ Tolerance
Toolbar: Dimension

Summary
The Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed.

1244 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation,
location, and runout. Feature control frames can be created with leader lines
using TOLERANCE, LEADER, or QLEADER.

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame.

Summary
After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance
dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed:
Enter tolerance location: Specify a location
The feature control frame is placed at the specified location.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box | 1245

Sym
Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol
dialog box. The dialog box is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes.

Tolerance 1
Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance
value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate
from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance
value and a material condition symbol after it.

First Box
Inserts a diameter symbol in front of the tolerance value. Click the box to
insert the diameter symbol.
Second Box
Creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box.
Third Box
Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying
symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and
the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

Tolerance 2
Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame. Specify the
second tolerance value in the same way as the first.

Datum 1
Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame. The datum
reference can consist of a value and a modifying symbol. A datum is a
theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone
for a feature.

1246 | Chapter 20 T Commands

First Box
Creates the datum reference value.
Second Box
Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying
symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference.
The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in
the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

Datum 2
Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the
same way as the primary datum reference.

Datum 3
Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same
way as the primary datum reference.

Height
Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A
projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended
portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that specified
by positional tolerances.

Projected Tolerance Zone
Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol after the projected tolerance zone
value.

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box | 1247

Datum Identifier
Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum
is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the
location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder,
or other geometry can serve as a datum.

Symbol Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form,
profile, and runout.

Summary

The symbol is inserted into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance
dialog box. The following table describes the symbols.
Geometric characteristic symbols
Symbol

Characteristic

Type

Position

Location

1248 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Geometric characteristic symbols
Symbol

Characteristic

Type

Concentricity or coaxiality

Location

Symmetry

Location

Parallelism

Orientation

Perpendicularity

Orientation

Angularity

Orientation

Cylindricility

Form

Flatness

Form

Circularity or roundness

Form

Straightness

Form

Profile of a surface

Profile

Profile of a line

Profile

Circular runout

Runout

Total runout

Runout

Symbol Dialog Box | 1249

Material Condition Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric
characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.

Summary
The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value
in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

TOOLBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Toolbars

Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars.

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Toolbars
Menu: View ➤ Toolbars
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.

1250 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Summary
The Customize User Interface dialog box (see CUI) is displayed.
If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

-TOOLBAR
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Toolbars

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter toolbar name on page 1251 or [ALL on page 1252]: Enter a name or enter all

Toolbar Name
Specifies a toolbar to display, close, or position.
Enter a valid toolbar name. If the default menu is loaded, the following names
are available:
array_edit

insert

parametric

ucs_ii

array_toolbar

layers

properties

view

dimension

layers_ii

refedit

viewports

draw

layouts

reference

web

draw_order

measurement_tools

standard

workspaces

draw_order,_annotation_to_front

modify

standard_annotation

zoom

find_text

modify_ii

styles

group

multileader

text

-TOOLBAR | 1251

inquiry

object_snap

ucs

Show Displays the specified toolbar.
Hide Closes the specified toolbar.
Left Docks the specified toolbar at the left side of the screen.
Right Docks the specified toolbar at the right side of the screen.
Top Docks the specified toolbar at the top of the screen.
Bottom Docks the specified toolbar at the bottom of the screen.
Enter New Position Sets the position of the toolbar in columns and rows
relative to a toolbar dock. The first value is horizontal. The second value is
vertical.
Float Changes the toolbar from docked to floating.
Enter Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows in the floating toolbar.

All
Displays or closes all toolbars.
Show Displays all toolbars.
Hide Closes all toolbars.

TOOLPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images

Opens the Tool Palettes window.

Button

Access Methods
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes

1252 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Tool Palettes
Toolbar: Standard

Summary
Use tool palettes to organize blocks, hatches, and custom tools in a tabbed
window. Various options and settings are accessible from shortcut menus that
display when you right-click different areas of the Tool Palettes window.
NOTE Tool palettes can be used only in the version of the product in which they
were created. For example, you cannot use a tool palette that was created in
AutoCAD LT 2012 in AutoCAD LT 2007.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Add Text Inserts a text entry box at the cursor location, where you can add
a label that helps organize palette contents.
Add Separator Adds a tool palette separator line at the location of the cursor.
All Palettes Displays all tool palette tabs in the palette window.
Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor palette windows. A
docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the
drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right and
Anchor Left available. Clear this option to undock a docked tool palette.
Anchor Left/ Anchor Right Attaches the palette to an anchor tab base at the
left or right side of the drawing area. An anchored palette rolls open and closed
as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored palette is open, its content
overlaps the drawing area. An anchored palette cannot be set to stay open.
Auto-hide A setting that causes a floating window to roll open and closed as
the cursor moves across it. When this option is cleared, the full tool palette
stays open continuously.
Close Closes the tool palette window.
Copy Copies the selected tool to the Clipboard.
Customize Commands Displays the Customize User Interface Dialog Box.
Customize Palettes Displays the Customize dialog box.
Cut Removes the selected tool from the tool palette and places it on the
Clipboard.

TOOLPALETTES | 1253

Delete Removes the selected tool from the tool palette.
Delete Palette Removes the current palette.
Dynamic Blocks Displays the palette tabs containing dynamic blocks.
Move Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow.
Move Up Moves the selected tool palette up one position.
Move Down Moves the selected tool palette down one position.
New Palette Creates a new palette. Enter a name or press Enter to use the
default name.
Paste Pastes a tool from the Clipboard to the current tab.
Properties Displays the Tool Properties dialog box, where you can change the
properties of the selected tool.
Rename Renames the selected tool.
Rename Palette Renames the current palette.
Samples Displays the Samples tool palette.
Sort By Specifies whether palette contents are sorted by name or by type.
Size Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow.
Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box.
View Options Displays the View Options dialog box, where you can control
how tools are displayed.

View Options Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Change Tool Palette Settings

Controls the display of tools in the current tool palette or in all tool palettes.

1254 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click a blank area or a tab on a tool palette and click
View Options.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Image Size
Controls the display size of the selected tool palette icon.

View Style
Controls the text displayed with a tool palette icon.
Icon Only
Displays the tool icon only.
Icon with Text
Displays the tool icon with the tool name below.
List View
Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right.

Apply To
Controls whether the view options are applied to the current tool palette or
to all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window.

Tool Properties Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Customize Tool Palettes

Controls the properties associated with the selected tool.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click a tool on a tool palette and click Properties.

Tool Properties Dialog Box | 1255

Summary
The types of properties that are displayed will vary depending on the type of
tool that is selected. In addition the following controls are displayed:

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Image
Displays the icon of the selected tool.
Name
Displays the name of the selected tool. This can be edited.
Description
Displays a description of the selected tool.

TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images

Closes the Tool Palettes window.

Access Methods
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Tool Palettes
Toolbar: Standard

1256 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TPNAVIGATE
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Organize Tool Palettes

Displays a specified tool palette or palette group.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify tool palette to display or [palette Group]: Enter a tool palette name, or
enter g
Tool Palette Name Displays the specified tool palette.
Specifying a tool palette that is not part of the current group displays the
specified palette and its palette group.
Palette Group Displays the specified tool palette group.
NOTE TPNAVIGATE opens the Tool Palettes window if closed.

TRANSPARENCY
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images

Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Transparency

TPNAVIGATE | 1257

Toolbar: Reference
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and click
Image ➤ Transparency.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select image(s):
Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] : Enter an option or press Enter
On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible.
Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible.
NOTE The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether dockable windows
can be made transparent.

TRAYSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Application Status Bar

Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray.

Access Methods

Button

Shortcut menu: Right-click the status bar and click Tray Settings.

Summary
The Tray Settings dialog box is displayed.

1258 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Tray Settings Dialog Box
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Application Status Bar

Controls the display of icons and notifications in the tray at the right end of
the status bar.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Display Icons from Services
Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from
services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed.

Display Notifications from Services
Displays notifications from services.
Display Time
Sets the time in seconds that a notification is displayed.
Display Until Closed
Displays a notification until you click the Close button.

TRIM
Quick Reference
See also:
■

Trim or Extend Objects

Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects.

Tray Settings Dialog Box | 1259

Access Methods

Button

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim
Menu: Modify ➤ Trim
Toolbar: Modify

Summary
To trim objects, select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects
that you want to trim. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first
Select Objects prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current
Select cutting edges...
Select objects or